Eis Fo Stagno Mining Corporation

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT STATEMENT
MPSA 022-94-X Amended I

STAGNO LIBJO MINING PROJECT
Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands
STAGNO MINING CORPORATION

Unit 1202B KeppWealth Center, Samar Loop Center, Cardinal Rosales Avenue,
Cebu City Business Park Center, Cebu City, Philippines
Cell No. +63 917 321 1984: Email Address: stagnominingcorp@gmail.com
Stagno Mining Corporation Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Tenement History .............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Project Location................................................................................................................. 1
1.2.1 Project Accessibility ......................................................................................................... 7
1.2.2 Impact Areas.................................................................................................................... 7
1.3 Rationale ........................................................................................................................ 10
1.4 Project Alternative .......................................................................................................... 11
1.4.1 Project Location and Process .......................................................................................... 11
1.4.2 Environmental Impact .................................................................................................... 11
1.4.3 Consequences of not Proceeding with Project................................................................. 11
1.5 Project Components ........................................................................................................ 12
1.5.1 Mining ........................................................................................................................... 13
1.5.2 Stockyard Area and Overburden ..................................................................................... 13
1.5.3 Settling Pond ................................................................................................................. 14
1.5.4 Access and Mine roads ................................................................................................... 15
1.5.5 Causeway ...................................................................................................................... 15
1.5.6 Fuel Storage Facility ....................................................................................................... 15
1.5.7 Other Facilities............................................................................................................... 16
1.5.8 Support Facilities ........................................................................................................... 16
1.5.9 Pollution Control Devices ............................................................................................... 16
1.6 Process Technology Options ............................................................................................. 19
1.6.1 Stripping or Overburden Removal .................................................................................. 19
1.6.2 Mine Planning and Survey .............................................................................................. 19
1.6.3 Mining/Ore Extraction and Hauling ................................................................................ 20
1.6.4 Sampling........................................................................................................................ 21
1.6.5 Assay Laboratory ........................................................................................................... 21
1.6.6 Ore Stockpile ................................................................................................................. 22
1.7 Project Size...................................................................................................................... 25
1.7.1 Mineral Reserves Based on Exploration Data .................................................................. 25
1.7.2 Production Capacity ....................................................................................................... 26
i|Page
1.7.3 Project Size .................................................................................................................... 26

1.8 Development Plan, Description of Project Phases and Corresponding Timeframes ............. 26
1.8.1 Pre-construction Phase .................................................................................................. 27
1.8.2 Construction Phase ........................................................................................................ 27
1.8.3 Operation Phase ............................................................................................................ 28
1.8.4 Abandonment Phase ...................................................................................................... 28
1.9 Manpower Requirement .................................................................................................. 29
1.10 Indicative Project Investment Cost ................................................................................... 31
2.0 ASSESSMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS................................................................... 32
2.1 Land................................................................................................................................ 32
2.1.1 Land Use and Classification ............................................................................................ 32
2.1.2 Geology/Geomorphology ............................................................................................... 40
2.1.3 Pedology ....................................................................................................................... 61
2.1.4 Terrestrial ...................................................................................................................... 93
2.2 Water ........................................................................................................................... 158
2.2.1 Hydrology .................................................................................................................... 158
2.2.2 Hydrogeology .............................................................................................................. 162
2.2.3 Water Source and Water Use ....................................................................................... 165
2.2.4 Impacts and Mitigation Measures – Hydrology & Hydrogeology .................................... 166
2.2.5 Oceanography ............................................................................................................. 173
2.2.6 Water Quality .............................................................................................................. 174
2.2.7 Freshwater Ecology ...................................................................................................... 183
2.2.8 Marine Ecology ............................................................................................................ 195
2.3 Air................................................................................................................................. 230
2.3.1 Meteorology ................................................................................................................ 230
2.3.2 Air Quality ................................................................................................................... 257
2.3.3 Noise ........................................................................................................................... 273
2.4 People ........................................................................................................................... 280
2.4.1 Demographic Baseline Information of Impact Areas ...................................................... 281
2.4.2 Perception Survey ........................................................................................................ 303
2.4.3 Focus Group Discussion ................................................................................................ 341
2.4.4 Potential Socio-Economic Impacts of the Project........................................................... 345
3.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ........................................................................ 347
3.1 Land Resources.............................................................................................................. 347
ii | P a g e
3.2 Water Resource ............................................................................................................. 347

3.3 Air Quality..................................................................................................................... 347
3.4 People ........................................................................................................................... 348
4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL RISK ASSESSMENT (ERA) AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE POLICY AND
GUIDELINES ............................................................................................................................. 361
4.1 Objective ....................................................................................................................... 361
4.1.1 Scope and Limitations of the ERA ................................................................................. 361
4.1.2 ERA Framework ........................................................................................................... 361
4.1.3 Hazard Identification.................................................................................................... 362
4.1.4 Consequence Analysis .................................................................................................. 363
4.1.5 Frequency Analysis ...................................................................................................... 363
4.1.6 Risk Characterization ................................................................................................... 363
4.2 Hazard Identification ..................................................................................................... 363
4.2.1 Nickel-Chromite Mining ............................................................................................... 363
4.2.2 Hazard Analysis Matrix................................................................................................. 364
4.2.3 Risk Screening of Hazardous Substances at the Facility .................................................. 369
4.2.4 Hazardous Characteristics of Diesel .............................................................................. 369
4.2.5 Mass Movement of Rocks and Soil from Overburden and Waste Dump Sites ................. 372
4.2.6 Flooding and Mass Release of Sediments from Settling Ponds ....................................... 372
4.2.7 Occupational Safety Hazards ........................................................................................ 373
4.2.8 Exposure to Toxic Heavy Metals and Minerals .............................................................. 373
4.2.9 Natural Hazards Due to Extreme Climate Events ........................................................... 376
4.3 Risk Management ......................................................................................................... 377
4.3.1 Summary and Recommendations ................................................................................. 377
5.0 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE MONITORING .............................................................. 383
5.1 Self-Monitoring Plan...................................................................................................... 383
5.2 Multi-sectoral Monitoring Framework ........................................................................... 405
5.3 Contingent Liability and Rehabilitation .......................................................................... 406
5.3.1 Mine Rehabilitation Fund (MRF) ................................................................................... 406
5.3.2 Rehabilitation Cash Fund (RCF) ..................................................................................... 406
5.4 Environmental Trust Fund (ETF) ..................................................................................... 407
6.0 SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT AND MANAGEMENT PLAN/FRAMEWORK (SDMP) AND IEC
FRAMEWORK........................................................................................................................... 408
6.1 Indicative Social Development and Management Plan ................................................... 408
iii | P a g e
6.2 Information and Education Campaign ............................................................................ 413

7.0 DECOMMISSIONING / ABANDONMENT / REHABILITATION POLICY ................................ 417
7.1 Final Mine Rehabilitation Plan ....................................................................................... 417
7.1.1 Rehabilitation Strategy ................................................................................................ 418
7.2 Decommissioning Plan ................................................................................................... 419
7.2.1 List of Facility that requires decommissioning ............................................................... 419
8.0 INSTITUTIONAL PLAN FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION ........................................................ 420
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 – Coordinates of MPSA No. 022-94-x (SMR) Amended I ..................................................... 2

Table 2 – Summary of Impacts to the Impact Area ......................................................................... 8
Table 3 - Pollution Control Devices and Corresponding Facilities Being Served ............................ 16
Table 4 - Summary of SMC’s Indicated Mineral Resource Estimates ............................................. 25
Table 5 - Summary of SMC’s Inferred Mineral Resource Estimates ............................................... 25
Table 6 – Projected Mining Production .......................................................................................... 26
Table 7 - Manpower Requirement ................................................................................................. 29
Table 8 – Project Investment Costs ................................................................................................ 31
Table 9 - Existing Land Use in Libjo, 1998 ...................................................................................... 32
Table 10 - Evaluation of ECA .......................................................................................................... 36
Table 11 - Recurrence of Earthquake by Magnitude ..................................................................... 54
Table 12 - Soil Sampling Locations and Coordinates of the and their Present Land Use. .............. 64
Table 13 - Requested Soil Chemical and Physical Analysis Parameters ......................................... 65
Table 14 - Location of terrestrial sampling and observation sites ................................................. 95
Table 15 - Summary of species composition ................................................................................ 109
Table 16 - Lists of tree species recorded in the project area ........................................................ 109
Table 17 - List of other plants (herbs, ferns, epiphytes, shrubs, grasses, palms, vines) recorded in
the project site. ............................................................................................................................ 113
Table 18 - List of the recorded tree species with highest Importance Value (IV)......................... 125
Table 19 - Diversity indices and number of species for transect lines/quadrats 1-10 ................. 126
Table 20 - List of endemic species recorded in the study area ..................................................... 127
Table 21 - List of identified threatened plants found in the project area .................................... 128
Table 22 - Locations and descriptiosn of each sampling stations in five sampling areas. ......... 139
Table 23 - Overall diversity distribution of captured volant and non-volant mammals in five
sampling stations by using mist nets and live traps..................................................................... 144
iv | P a g e
Table 24 - Species richness and Diversity of volant mammals recorded sampling stations within
the MPSA of Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat
Islands, Philippines. ...................................................................................................................... 144
Table 25 - Species richness and Diversity of avifaunal species recorded within the MPSA of Stagno
Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Island, Philippines .... 147
Table 26 - Overall diversity distribution of captured, seen, and heard avifaunal species in five
sampling stations within the MPSA of Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo,
Province of Dinagat Islands, Philippines. ..................................................................................... 148
Table 27 - Overall diversity distribution of captured herpetofauna species in five sampling
stations within the study area...................................................................................................... 152
Table 28 - Species richness and Diversity of avifaunal species recorded within the study site. ... 153
Table 32 – Main Source of Water Supply for Drinking, Cooking, and Laundry/Bathing of
Households: Libjo, Dinagat Islands, 2010 .................................................................................... 166
Table 33 – List of relevant water quality parameters tested in the collected water samples ..... 175
Table 34 - Description of Baseline Water Quality Sampling Stations .......................................... 176
Table 35 - Results of surface water quality baseline study .......................................................... 181
Table 36 - Ichthyofaunal assemblage from all sampling Stations of Stagno Mining Corporation
...................................................................................................................................................... 188
Table 37 - Phytoplankton abundance (cells/mL) in the three River Systems ............................... 189
Table 38 - Diversity indices of Phytoplankton species in the three River Systems ....................... 190
Table 39 - Checklist of macroinvertebrates in the river systems around Stagno Mining
Corporation .................................................................................................................................. 191
Table 40 - Diversity indices of freshwater macroinvertebrate species across all stations ........... 192
Table 41 - Geographical Location of the Sampling Stations. ....................................................... 197
Table 42 - Scope and Methodology.............................................................................................. 199
Table 43 - Fieldwork Schedule ...................................................................................................... 202
Table 44 - Percentage Cover of Major Benthic Categories per Station ....................................... 203
Table 45 - List of Coral Species ..................................................................................................... 207
Table 46 - List of Reef Fishes and their Categories. ..................................................................... 213
Table 47 - Fish Composition and Category per station. ............................................................... 216
Table 29 - Geographical Location of Transect Lines .................................................................... 219
Table 30 - List of Mangrove Species ............................................................................................. 226
Table 31- Ecological Measurements of the mangrove species in the study area ........................ 228
Table 48 - Categories of Tropical Cyclones (Source: PAGASA) ..................................................... 238
Table 49 - Projected extremes of rainfall as referred from the baseline years ............................ 244
Table 50 - Projected extremes of air temperature as referred from the baseline years.............. 251
Table 51 - Type and number of equipment and the estimated annual fuel consumption during
operations phase .......................................................................................................................... 255
v|Page
Table 52 - Annual CO2e emissions during operations phase ........................................................ 256

Table 53 - Locations and coordinates of air sampling stations.................................................... 264
Table 54 - Methods of Ambient Air Sampling and Analysis ......................................................... 264
Table 55 - Measured concentrations of TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2, and metals in ambient air ........ 267
Table 56 - Observations during air sampling on January 12-20, 2022 ........................................ 269
Table 57 - Results of ambient noise monitoring .......................................................................... 276
Table 58 - Attenuated noise levels at 50 ft (15.24 m) from selected heavy equipment and vehicles
...................................................................................................................................................... 279
Table 59 - Noise level increases and corresponding impact categories (Source: Wilson, 1986) . 279
Table 60 - Population and Growth Rate of Impact Area, 2015 and 2020 .................................... 282
Table 61 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay Bayanihan, 2015............................. 282
Table 62 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay San Jose, 2015 ................................ 283
Table 63 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay Garcia, 2015 ................................... 284
Table 64 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay San Antonio, 2015 .......................... 285
Table 65 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay General Aguinaldo: 2015 ................ 285
Table 66 - Household Population by Age Group and Sex, and Age Composition and Sex Ratio:
Municipality of Libjo, 2015 ........................................................................................................... 286
Table 67 - Dependency Ratio Barangay Bayanihan, Barangay San Jose and Municipality of Libjo
...................................................................................................................................................... 288
Table 68 - Dependency Ratio Barangay Garcia, San Antonio and General Aguinaldo ................ 289
Table 69 - Population Density of Impact Barangays and Municipality of Libjo, 2020 ................. 290
Table 70 - Number of Households and Average Household Size of Municipality of Libjo, 2015 . 290
Table 71 - Ethnicity in Dinagat Island, 2010 ................................................................................ 291
Table 72 - Household Population 10 Years Old and Over by Marital Status and Sex: Municipality
of Libjo, 2015 ................................................................................................................................ 291
Table 73 - Household Population 5 Years Old and Over by Highest Educational Attainment and
Sex: Municipality of Libjo, 2015 ................................................................................................... 292
Table 74 - Number of Households by Tenure Status of the Lot: Municipality of Libjo, 2010 ....... 293
Table 75 - Occupied Housing Units by Construction Materials of the Roof and Outer Walls:
Table 76 - Population 5 years and over by place of residence in 2005 by province of resident in
2010 ............................................................................................................................................. 295
Table 77 - Overseas Workers 15 Years Old and Over by Age Group and Sex: Province of Dinagat
Islands, 2015 ................................................................................................................................ 295
Table 78 - Ten Leading Causes of Morbidity, 2021 ...................................................................... 296
Table 79 - Leading Causes of Mortality, 2021.............................................................................. 297
Table 80 - Household Population 5 to 24 Years Old Who Were Currently Attending School by Age
Group and Sex: Municipality of Libjo, 2015 ................................................................................. 298
vi | P a g e
Table 81 - Number of Registered Vehicles by Region, 2015 ........................................................ 299

Table 82 - Total Length of road by Type of Pavement, Dinagat Islands; 2021 ............................ 300
Table 83 - Total Length and Number of National bridges by Type of Pavement, Dinagat Islands
2021 ............................................................................................................................................. 300
Table 84 - Bridges by Type of Administration, Municipality of Libjo; 2008 ................................. 300
Table 85 - Gainful Workers 15 Years Old and Above by Major Occupation Group and Sex:
Table 86 - Annual Monthly Per Capita Poverty Threshold, Province of Dinagat Islands ............. 302
Table 87 - Poverty Incidence, 2015 and 2018 .............................................................................. 303
Table 88 - Gender of the Survey Respondents ............................................................................. 304
Table 89 - Birthplace of Survey Respondents .............................................................................. 305
Table 90 - Age of Survey Respondents ......................................................................................... 306
Table 91 - Civil Status of Survey Respondents .............................................................................. 307
Table 92 - Religion of Survey Respondents .................................................................................. 308
Table 93 - Educational Attainment of Survey Respondents ......................................................... 309
Table 94- Income Source of Survey Respondents ......................................................................... 310
Table 95 - Estimated Monthly Income of Survey Respondents .................................................... 312
Table 96 - Organization of Survey Respondents .......................................................................... 313
Table 97 - Identified Organizations .............................................................................................. 313
Table 98 - Household Size of Survey Respondents ...................................................................... 315
Table 99 - Household Member of the Survey Respondents who Experienced Illness ................ 316
Table 100 - Common Diseases of the Respondents in the Community ...................................... 317
Table 101 - Health Facilities and Providers accessed by the Survey Respondents ....................... 318
Table 102 - Waste Disposal of Survey Respondents .................................................................... 319
Table 103 - Sources of Drinking Water of Survey Respondents ................................................... 320
Table 104 - Sanitation and Toilet of the Survey Respondents ..................................................... 321
Table 105 - House Ownership of Survey Respondents ................................................................. 322
Table 106 - Land Ownership of Survey Respondents ................................................................... 323
Table 107 - Roof Material of the Respondent's Houses ............................................................... 324
Table 108 - Outer Wall Material of the Respondent's Houses ..................................................... 325
Table 109 - Common Community Problem and Concerns of the Respondents............................ 326
Table 110 - Proposed Solution from the Identified Concerns/Problems ...................................... 330
Table 111 - Awareness of the Respondents on the Proposed Project .......................................... 333
Table 112 - Sources of Information about the Proposed Project of Stagno Mining Corporation 334
Table 113 - Perceived Positive and Negative Effects of the Proposed Project ............................. 337
Table 114 - Proposed Solutions to the Negative Impact .............................................................. 339
Table 115 - Acceptability of the Survey Respondents on the Proposed Project of Stagno Mining
Corporation .................................................................................................................................. 340
vii | P a g e
Table 116 - Reasons for Positive and Negative Responses .......................................................... 341
Table 117 - Highlights of the Focus Group Discussion ................................................................. 341
Table 118 - Matrix of Major Impacts, Mitigation/Enhancement Measures and Environmental
Management Plan........................................................................................................................ 349
Table 119 - Hazard Analysis Matrix ............................................................................................. 364
Table 120 - Physico-chemical and toxicological properties of diesel. .......................................... 370
Table 121 - Effects of radiation from fire. .................................................................................... 370
Table 122 - Heavy metals and other hazardous substances in nickel mining. ............................. 373
Table 123 - Identified hazards and corresponding mitigating measures .................................... 378
Table 124 - Environmental Monitoring Plan ................................................................................ 384
Table 125 - Indicative Social Development Framework ............................................................... 409
Table 126 - Information and Education Campaigns .................................................................... 414
Table 127 - Remaining Areas for Final Mine Rehabilitation ........................................................ 417
Table 128 - List of Facilities to Decommissioned ......................................................................... 419
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 - Location Map ................................................................................................................... 3
Figure 2 - Tenement Map ................................................................................................................. 4
Figure 3 - Parcel 1 Drone Shot .......................................................................................................... 5
Figure 4 - Parcel 2 Drone Shot .......................................................................................................... 6
Figure 5 – Impact Area Map ............................................................................................................ 9
Figure 6 - Settling Pond Design ...................................................................................................... 15
Figure 7 – Site Development Map .................................................................................................. 18
Figure 8 - Flowsheet of Mining Method ......................................................................................... 20
Figure 9 - Mining Schedule ............................................................................................................. 23
Figure 10 – Final Rehabilitation Plan ............................................................................................. 24
Figure 11 - Project Schedule ........................................................................................................... 26
Figure 12 - Existing Land Use Map (1998) ..................................................................................... 33
Figure 13 – General Land Use Map of Dinagat .............................................................................. 34
Figure 14 - Land Classification Map (source: DENR CARAGA) ....................................................... 35
Figure 15 - Typhoon Incidence Map ............................................................................................... 38
Figure 16 - Slope Map .................................................................................................................... 39
Figure 17 - Geologic Map of Dinagat Islands (after JICA-MMAJ Project, 1987; UNRFNRE, 1993) 43
Figure 18 - Regional Geologic Map of CARAGA Region and Dinagat Islands. .............................. 44
Figure 19 - Major Ophiolite Belt in the Philippines ........................................................................ 45
Figure 20 - Comparative Stratigraphy of the Dinagat Ophiolite Complex (DOC) and that of the
Palawan Ophiolite Complex (POC, after Santos, 1997) ................................................................. 46
viii | P a g e
Figure 21 - Stratigraphy of Dinagat Islands ................................................................................... 49

Figure 22 - Typical Laterite Profile ................................................................................................. 53
Figure 23 - Seismic Map and Distribution of Shallow Focus Earthquake ....................................... 56
Figure 24 - Earthquake Hazard and Risk Map ............................................................................... 57
Figure 25 - Peak Horizontal Ground Acceleration .......................................................................... 58
Figure 26 - Tsunami Hazard and Risk Map .................................................................................... 59
Figure 27 - Liquefaction Susceptibility Map ................................................................................... 60
Figure 28 - Soil Sampling Stations .................................................................................................. 63
Figure 29 -Surface Soil Organic Matter Content ............................................................................ 69
Figure 30 - Surface Soil Total Nitrogen Content ............................................................................. 69
Figure 31 - Surface Soil Total Phosphorus Content ........................................................................ 71
Figure 32 - Surface Soil Potassium Content ................................................................................... 72
Figure 33 - Surface Soil Calcium Content ....................................................................................... 74
Figure 34 - Surface Soil Magnesium Content ................................................................................. 75
Figure 35 - Surface Soil Manganese Content ................................................................................. 77
Figure 36 - Surface Soil Zinc Content .............................................................................................. 78
Figure 37 - Surface Soil Iron Content .............................................................................................. 79
Figure 38 - Surface Soil Sodium Content ........................................................................................ 81
Figure 39 - Surface Soil Electrical Conductivity .............................................................................. 82
Figure 40 - Soil Surface Cadmium Content of the Soil Sampling Stations ...................................... 83
Figure 41 - Soil Surface Copper Content of the Sampling Stations ................................................ 85
Figure 42 - Soil Surface Lead Content of the Sampling Stations .................................................... 86
Figure 43 - Soil Surface Lead Content of the Sampling Stations .................................................... 87
Figure 44 - Soil Surface Chromium+3 Content of the Sampling Stations ....................................... 88
Figure 45 - Slake Test for the Surface Soil of SS1, Parcel 1 ............................................................ 91
Figure 48 -Terrestrial Flora Sampling Map ................................................................................... 96
Figure 49 - Terrestrial fuana assessment sampling stations within Stagno Mining Corporation
located in Barangay Bayanihan, San Jose, and Garcia, Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat
Islands .......................................................................................................................................... 138
Figure 50 - (A)Individual counts of volant species (B) Multivariate analysis clustered in each
Province of Dinagat Islands, Philippines. ..................................................................................... 145
. Figure 51 - (A) Endemicity and (B) Conservation status of volant mammals captured within the
MPSA of Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Island,
Philippines. ................................................................................................................................... 146
ix | P a g e
Figure 52 - (A)Individual counts of avifaunal species (B) Multivariate analysis clustered in each
sampling stations within the MPSA of Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of
Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands, Philippines. ............................................................................ 150
Figure 53 - Endemicity status of avifaunal species by using camera within the MPSA of Stagno
Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands, Philippines. . 151
Figure 54 - (A)Individual counts of herpetofauna species (B) Multivariate analysis clustered in
each sampling stations within Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo,
Province of Dinagat Island, Philippines. ....................................................................................... 154
Figure 55 - Endemicity status of herpetofauna species by using camera within the MPSA of
Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Island, Philippine
...................................................................................................................................................... 155
Figure 60 - Watershed map showing the location of the Project relative to the existing drainage
system of Gaas Inlet ..................................................................................................................... 160
Figure 61 - Flooding and Landslide Susceptibility Map ................................................................ 161
Figure 62 - Hydrogeologic Map of Surigao del Norte .................................................................. 163
Figure 63 – Regional Groundwater Availability Map ................................................................... 164
Figure 64 – Graph of seasonal Temperature Increases (in °C) in 2020 and 2050 under medium -
range scenario, Surigao del Norte Province ................................................................................. 170
Figure 65 – Graph of seasonal Rainfall Change (in %) in 2020 and 2050 under medium-range
scenario, Surigao del Norte Province ........................................................................................... 171
Figure 66 – Graph of frequency of extreme events in 2020 and 2050 under medium-range
scenario, Surigao del Norte Province ........................................................................................... 172
Figure 67 - 24-hour Tidal Variation in Surigao City ...................................................................... 173
Figure 68 - Map of Stagno baseline water quality sampling stations ......................................... 178
Figure 69 - Map of the established water stations along the different rivers that are within the
project sites of Stagno Mining Corporation ................................................................................. 184
Figure 70 - Suba sa Birhen River System. a. Upstream b. Midstream.......................................... 187
Figure 71 - Anas River System. a. Upstream b. Midstream ......................................................... 187
Figure 72 - Ichthyofaunal assemblage in Stagno Mining Corporation. a. Poecilia reticulata b.
Periopthalmus sp.......................................................................................................................... 188
Figure 73 - Phytoplankton species under Bacillariophyta. Left to right (top): Achnanthidium sp.,
Diatoma sp., Gomphonema sp., Melosira virans, Left to right (bottom): Navicula sp., Nitzschia
sp., Pinnularia sp., and Suriella sp. ............................................................................................... 190
Figure 74 - Phytoplankton species under Chlorophyta Left to right: Ankistrodesmus sp.,
Closterium sp., and Euglena sp. ................................................................................................... 191
Figure 75 - Cryptomonas sp. under Cryptophyta ........................................................................ 191
Figure 76 - Macroinvertebrate assemblage in the established stations along the river systems of
Stagno Mining Corporation. a. Limnogonus sp. b. Tenagogonus sp. c. Rhagovelia sp. d. Penaeus
x|Page
sp. e. unidentified water spider f. Anisopteran nymph g. Varuna sp. h. Nerita sp. i. Littoraria sp. j.
Zygopteran nymph ....................................................................................................................... 193
Figure 77 -Sampling Map of the assessment station ................................................................... 198
Figure 78 - Beds of Sargassum Algae dominated the Benthic Component.................................. 203
Figure 79 - Mean estimated percent cover of Corals (C), Dead Corals (DC), Octocorals (OCT),
Other Corals (OC), Invertebrates (INV), Algae (AL), and Abiotic (AB) .......................................... 204
Figure 80 - Massive corals under family Poritidae ....................................................................... 205
Figure 81 - Graphical presentation of mean percentage coverage per coral sub-categories per
station. ......................................................................................................................................... 206
Figure 82 - Dead corals covered with Algae................................................................................. 208
Figure 83 - Graphical presentation of dead corals percentage coverage per station. ................ 208
Figure 84 - Coral rubbles prominent in all stations ...................................................................... 209
Figure 85 - Zoanthds are widely distributed in the shallow station. ............................................ 209
Figure 86 - Graphical presentation of percentage coverage of invertebrates’ components. ...... 210
Figure 87 - Algal assemblage found among coral rubbles and massive corals.......................... 210
Figure 88 - Graphical presentation of percentage coverage of algae components. ................... 211
Figure 89 - sandy substrate is the major abiotic component. ...................................................... 212
Figure 90 - Graphical presentation of percentage coverage of abiotic components. ................. 212
Figure 91 - Damsel fishes are among the most abundant fishes that inhabits coral reefs ......... 214
Figure 92 - Number of species per station ................................................................................... 215
Figure 93 - Species richness and the number of individuals......................................................... 217
Figure 94 - Fish Biomass per station ............................................................................................ 218
Figure 95 - Fish Biomass per classification of fish species. .......................................................... 219
Figure 56-Coastal Sampling Assessment Map ............................................................................. 221
Figure 57 - Stand Basal Area of identified Mangrove Species ..................................................... 226
Figure 58 - Tree Density of identified Mangrove Species ............................................................. 227
Figure 59 -Species Importance Value of the identified Mangrove Species .................................. 229
Figure 96 - Distance of the proposed project site to the nearest synoptic station of the PAGASA
namely Surigao PAGASA Station .................................................................................................. 232
Figure 97 - The proposed project site as indicate in the Climate map of Philippines (1951 to 2010)
...................................................................................................................................................... 234
Figure 98 - Monthly average rainfall and number of rainy days for Surigao PAGASA Station .... 235
Figure 99 - Highest recorded rainfall (daily) in each month at the Surigao PAGASA Station ...... 236
Figure 100 - Minimum, maximum and mean monthly air temperatures * ................................. 237
Figure 101 - Lowest and highest recorded air temperatures at the Surigao PAGASA Station .... 237
Figure 102 - Tracks of tropical cyclone which crossed the Province of Dinagat Islands from 1948
to 2020 ......................................................................................................................................... 240
xi | P a g e
Figure 103 - Intensities of tropical cyclone which crossed the Province of Dinagat Islands from
1948 to 2020 (Source: PAGASA) ................................................................................................... 241
Figure 104 - Monthly distribution of tropical cyclone which crossed the Province of Dinagat
Islands from 1948 to 2020 (Source: PAGASA) ............................................................................ 241
Figure 105 - Projected change of rainfall under moderate (top) and high emission scenario
(bottom) for the Province of Dinagat Islands (Data source: DOST-PAGASA 2018)...................... 242
Figure 106 - Projected total wet day rainfall (PRCPTOT) under moderate emission (top) and high
emission scenarios (bottom) ........................................................................................................ 246
Figure 107 - Projected average daily rainfall intensity (SDII), maximum 1-day rainfall total
(Rx1day), and maximum 5-day rainfall total (Rx5day) under moderate emission (top) and high
Figure 108 - Projected rainfall on very wet days (P95) and rainfall on extremely wet days (P99)
under moderate emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom) ...................................... 247
Figure 109 - Projected total rainfall from very wet days (R95p) and total rainfall from extremely
wet days (R99p) under moderate emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom) ........... 247
Figure 110 - Projected number of very wet days (P95d) and number of extremely wet days (P99d)
under moderate emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom) ...................................... 248
Figure 111 - Projected longest wet spell (CWD) and longest dry spell (CDD) under moderate
emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom) ................................................................. 248
Figure 112 - Projected change of air temperature under moderate (top) and high emission
scenario for the Province of Dinagat Islands(bottom) (Data source: DOST-PAGASA 2018) ........ 249
Figure 113 - Projected coldest night time temperature (TNm), average night time temperature
(TNm) and warmest night time temperature (TNx) under moderate emission (top) and high
Figure 114 - Projected coldest day time (TXn), average day time (TXm), and warmest day time
(TXx) temperature under moderate emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom) ........ 253
Figure 115 - Projected daily temperature range (DTR) under moderate emission (top) and high
Figure 116 - Projected fraction of cold nights (TN10p), fraction of warm nights (TN90p), fraction
of cool days (TX10p), and fraction of hot days (TX90p) under moderate emission (top) and high
Figure 117 - Screenshot of the annual emissions of CO2, CH4 and N20 ....................................... 255
Figure 118 - Locations of air sampling stations ........................................................................... 259
Figure 119 - Photographs of the equipment during sampling at Station A1 (above) and Station A2
(below) ......................................................................................................................................... 260
(below) ......................................................................................................................................... 261
xii | P a g e
Figure 121 -Photographs of the equipment during sampling at Station A5 (above) and Station A6
(below) ......................................................................................................................................... 262
(below) ......................................................................................................................................... 263
Figure 123 - Locations of noise sampling stations ....................................................................... 275
Figure 124 - Statistics of noise levels ........................................................................................... 278
Figure 125 - Population Pyramid of Municipality of Libjo ........................................................... 287
Figure 126 - Distribution of Respondents based on Gender ........................................................ 304
Figure 127 - Distribution of Respondents based on Place of Birth ............................................... 305
Figure 128 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Age .............................................................. 306
Figure 129 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Civil Status .................................................. 307
Figure 130 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Religion ....................................................... 308
Figure 131 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Educational Attainment .............................. 310
Figure 132 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Source of Income ........................................ 311
Figure 133 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Monthly Income .......................................... 312
Figure 134 - Distribution of Respondents based on Organization............................................... 313
Figure 135 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Household Size ............................................ 315
Figure 136. Number of Household Members of the Respondents that got sick ......................... 316
Figure 137 - Distribution of Respondents based on Experienced Illness ...................................... 317
Figure 138 - Distribution of Respondents based on the Health Facilities and Providers ............. 318
Figure 139 - Distribution of Respondents based on Waste Disposal........................................... 319
Figure 140 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Sources of Drinking Water .......................... 320
Figure 141 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Type of Toilets ............................................. 322
Figure 142 - Distribution of Respondents Based on House Ownership ........................................ 323
Figure 143 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Land Ownership .......................................... 324
Figure 144 - Distribution of Respondents based on Roofing Material of their Houses ................ 325
Figure 145 - Distribution of Respondents based on Outer Wall Material of their Houses........... 326
Figure 146 - Distribution of Respondents on their Common Community Problems and Concerns
...................................................................................................................................................... 328
Figure 147 - Distribution of Respondents based on the Proposed Solution from the Identified
Community Problems ................................................................................................................... 332
Figure 148 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Awareness on the Proposed Project ........... 333
Figure 149 - Distribution of Respondents based on Sources of Information about the Proposed
Project .......................................................................................................................................... 335
Figure 150 - Acceptability of the Proposed Project ...................................................................... 340
Figure 151 - The Risk Assessment Procedure ............................................................................... 362
Figure 152 - Stagno Mining Corporation Table of Organization ........................................ 421
xiii | P a g e
LIST OF ANNEXES
Annex A - Mineral Production Sharing Agreement (MPSA)

Annex B – Final Exploration Report
Annex C – Security and Exchange Commission Registration
Annex D – IEC Documentation
Annex E – Initial Perception Survey Result
Annex F – IEC Brochure
Annex G - NCIP Certification
Annex H – PEMAPS
Annex I – Accountability Statement
Annex J- Laboratory Result
xiv | P a g e
Stagno Mining Corporation Executive Summary
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
I. PROJECT FACT SHEET
Project Information
Project Name Stagno Libjo Mining Project

Location Barangays San Antonio, San Jose, Garcia, General Aguinaldo, and
Bayanihan, Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands
Project Type Resource Extractive Industry
MPSA Area No. MPSA 022-94-X (SMR) Amended I
Mining Method Contour mining Method
Project Area 1,149.8301 hectares (MPSA Area)

Covered 36.63 hectares (Components outside the MPSA area)
Production Capacity 1,000,000 WMT pet year
Commodity Chromite and other associated minerals
Mine Life 7 years
Available Resource 8 million WMT with weighted average Fe grade of 38.10% and Ni
grade of 0.73%
Proponent Profile
Project Proponent STAGNO MINING CORPORATION

Main Office Address Unit 1202B KeppWealth Center, Samar Loop Center, Cardinal
Rosales Avenue, Cebu City Business Park Center, Cebu City
Contact Person YI HUNG LAM

stagnominingcorp@gmail.com
xv | P a g e
Preparer Profile
Axceltechs, Inc.
Office Address: Unit 10C, Lansbergh Place
170 Tomas Morato, Quezon City
Authorized Representative/ ENGR. PAULO NONI T. TIDALGO
Contact Person (s): Managing Director
Contact Number (02) 376-0043
II. PROCESS DOCUMENTATION
Pursuant to DENR Administrative Order No. 2003 – 30, Re: Implementing Rules and Regulations
of Presidential Decree No. 1586 “Establishing the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement
System,” an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) was prepared for this type of project
(Environmentally Critical Project). The EIS is divided into the following chapters:
• Project Description;
• Assessment of Environmental Impacts;
• Environmental Risk Assessment;
• Environmental Management Plan;
• Social Management Plan and IEC Implementation;
• Environmental Compliance Monitoring;
• Abandonment/Decommissioning/Rehabilitation and Generic Guidelines; and
• Institutional Plan for EMP Implementation.
EIA Team
The EIA Team is comprised of multi-disciplinary specialists/experts who have extensive training
and experience on their respective fields and in the conduct of EIA for various industry sectors.
EIS Team Member Field of Expertise/Module Registration

Paulo Noni T. Tidalgo, EM, RN Environment, ERA, Mining and IPCO - 103
Geology
Bernardo V. Valmonte, Jr. EM Mining and Geology IPCO - 072
xvi | P a g e
EIS Team Member Field of Expertise/Module Registration

Dr. Wilfredo Sanidad Soil Quality IPCO - 139
Catherine L. Addawe, AgE Water Quality and Hydrology IPCO - 055
Ronald Pahunang Meteorology, Air and Noise IPCO-173
Quality
Raul Bunao Terrestrial Flora and Fauna IPCO-192
John Duane L. Hitalia MS ERM Marine IP-R12-2019-0006
Dr. Ana P. Ocenar Freshwater
Thomas V. Tanedo Socio Economic IPCO-112
Czarina May M. Olores, SE Project Manager IPCO – 075
/Environmental Impact
Assessment
EIA Study Schedule and Area
The EIA study schedule is presented below:
Activities Date
IEC Activity and Initial Perception Survey October 16 – 17, 2021
Public Scoping November 29 – 30, 2021
Technical Scoping December 20, 2021
Baseline Data Gathering October 2021 – January 2022
The EIA study covers the whole MPSA area, the direct and indirect impact areas of the proposed
project are based on the result of the baseline data assessment. The identification of direct impact
area was based on DAO 2017 – 15. The table below presented the summary of Direct Impact
Areas based on the proposed project operation:
Aspect Direct Impact Area

Water - Receiving water bodies of the project (Tributaries of
San Jose River & Gaas Inlet)
- Underlying aquifer
Air - Area near the periphery of the mining area
Noise - Area within the periphery of the mining area
Terrestrial - Vegetated portion within the project area coverage
People - Barangays San Antonio, San Jose, Garcia, General
Aguinaldo, and Bayanihan, Municipality of Libjo, Province
of Dinagat Islands
xvii | P a g e
EIA Methodology
Primary and secondary data were utilized for the assessment of the project impacts. Primary data
were obtained from the conducted on-site investigation and field sampling/surveys while
secondary data were acquired from the proponent and government agencies/institutions.
Relevant and previously conducted studies were also considered. The following are the
sampling/assessment methodologies employed by the EIS team for the study:
Module Methodology
Land Land Use Gathering and review of
secondary data
Natural Hazards Gathering and review of
secondary data
Pedology Grab sampling and laboratory
analysis
Terrestrial Transect walk, quadrat
sampling, and trapping
Water Hydrology and Hydrogeology Gathering and review of
secondary data
Water Quality In-situ measurements; grab
sampling and laboratory
analysis
Freshwater Ecology - Collection of samples
- Gathering and review of
secondary data
- Interview
Air and Noise Meteorology Gathering and review of
secondary data
Air and Noise Quality High volume samplers,
Personal Sampler and sound
level meter for noise and
review of monitoring data
People Socio-economic Profile - Gathering and review of
secondary data
- Key informant interviews
- Perception survey
- Focus group discussions
xviii | P a g e
Public Participation
Conduct of Public Scoping
The Public Scoping activity was attended by five (5) barangays namely: Barangay Bayanihan, San
Jose, Garcia, General Aguinaldo and San Antonio. A total of one hundred seventy-six (176)
participants attended the Public Scoping activity. The participants were from different sectors of
the community. Representatives from Mines and Geosciences Bureau of Dinagat Office, Provincial
Environmental and Natural Resources Office of Dinagat Islands (PENRO), and from the Provincial
Government Office of Dinagat Islands.
The said activity was conducted on November 29 and 30, respectively. It also follows the safety
protocol and guidelines in view of the Covid-19 virus.
The residents of the five (5) Barangays were represented as follows:

• Sangguniang Barangay
• Barangay Offical and Functionaries
• Secretary
• Treasurer
• Auditor
• Barangay Health Workers (BHW)
• Barangay Tanod
• Sitio President
Sectoral Community Organizations Representatives

• Women
• Youth
• Senior Citizens
• Religious Group
• Farmers
• Homeowners Association
• Cooperatives
• School Head
• Fishermen
The relevant offices of the Municipality of Libjo, from the Municipal Planning and Development
Office and Municipal Health Office are also present in the scoping activity.
xix | P a g e
Below are the major issues raised during the activity:
Issues/Concerns How the issue is address in the EIS/Public

Scoping
What will be the effect of the project to Discussed on the following sections:
Barangay San Jose Watershed/GAAS Inlet, it is Section 2.2.4
expected that the project will generate dust Section 2.2.6
especially during dry season. Section 2.3.2.1.4
What will happen to the trees within the MPSA Response of Francis Mansalay Jr. (DENR-
area? We are aware that those trees will be PENRO OFFICE):
disposed by the company. Will it be possible
that the trees subjected to cutting will be Prior to operation, the company is required to
donated to the community? apply for a Tree Cutting permit. A team from
our Office will conduct a tree inventory in
which all trees to be cut will be accounted. The
trees subjected for cutting shall be paid by the
company. The cost per tree will be based on
its size, species etc. The Tree Cutting Permit
contains the set of conditions that the
company needs to comply. All cut trees will be
deposited to our office and will be audited
based on the result of the tree inventory.
Public facilities like schools can request for cut
tree donation which they can use for
construction and repair purposes.
A TESDA training shall be conducted to A TESDA training will be conducted upon
ensure that the community will be prioritized project operation. However, the company
during hiring process. will ensure that skilled workers from the
direct impact Barangays will be prioritize
during the hiring process.
Conduct of IEC
Two form of IEC was conducted during the site visit. IEC meetings were held at the sitios of
primary impact communities. Prior to the IEC meeting brochures were distributed to households
and some copies were posted at strategic places like barangay hall and covered court. All the IECs
xx | P a g e
conducted was followed by FGD which is supposed to be composed of a small group. However,
most of the IEC attendees opted to stay during the conduct of FGD.
Conduct of FGD
The first focus group discussion was held on 16 October 2021 at 9:00 in the morning in Sitio
Catmonan while in the afternoon the same activity was conducted in Sitio Maytubig covered
court. On October 17, 2021, the third FGD was held in Barangay Bayanihan proper at 9:00 in the
morning. In all of the FGDs conducted, the Hon. Barangay Captain and selected council members
attended and participated in the discussion.
III. BASELINE CHARACTERIZATION
Module Summary of Baseline Condition

Pedology The whole province boasts of metallic and nonmetallic deposits, mostly
chromite and gold with other byproducts in appreciable amounts
(Provincial Development Council, 1993). Dinagat Island has a soil pH that
ranges from neutral to acidic (pH 4.8 to 6.9); average organic matter (OM)
was 2.25%; phosphorus 1 to 37 ppm, textural grade dominated by Dinagat
clay loam (70%), 20% classified as Cabatohan loam, and the remaining 10%
classified as Bolinao clay (Haribon 2004). This type of soil was frequently
noted with pH higher in the subsoil than in the topsoil. This soil was often
associated with subsoils high in aluminum, low in calcium, and pH very near
or below the zero point of charge; such subsoil will adsorb only trace
amounts of calcium, magnesium, or potassium because of low negative
charge density (Mekaru and Ueliara 1972).
Terrestrial Generally, the vegetative cover of the project area varies from grassland to
open canopy forest and some portions of beach and mangrove ecosystem
in the downstream area. The open-canopy forest were second-growth and
residual forest dominated with Myrtaceae, Moraceae, Fabaceae, and
Euphorbiacea family tree species. The forest floor of the open-canopy
forest has poor undergrowth due to the thick forest litter (e.g. leaves,
twigs, branches etc.) The open forest is relatively young with the highest
recorded diameter at breast height (dbh) at only 38 cm; while majority of
the individual species have dbh that falls between the ranges of 3 cm to 18
cm. The open portions are brushland which is dominated by agsam, cogon,
ferns, herbs such as hagonoy, some shrubs and small trees.
xxi | P a g e
Hydrology Gaas Inlet drainage area is approximately 139 km2 (13,900 ha)
encompassing the municipalities of Libjo, Basilisa and Cagdianao. Its
headwaters originates from the west, generally flowing northeast towards
the Gaas Bay located at the eastern side of the Dinagat Island. The island
is characterized by dendritic to trellis drainage pattern signifying structural
control while radial drainage occurs along peaks such as by Mount Pelhi
(770 m) and Mount Tristan (625 m) along the watershed divide of Gaas
Inlet.
The Gaas inlet drainage area was further subdivided into subwatersheds
taking into account the tributaries draining the project areas (Figure 56).
Subwatershed 1 (drainage area (DA) = 1,111 ha), 2 (DA = 268 ha) and 3 (DA
= 474 ha) contains portions of Parcel 2 (mining operations area) and the
support facilities. Subwatershed 4 (DA = 3,140 ha at reference point: 10°
9'18.51"N, 125°34'13.08"E) consist of several tributaries of San Jose River
branching out within Parcel 1 (mining exploration area).
Water Quality Results show water quality of samples collected were within the DAO
2016-08 and DAO 2021-10 guideline values except for parameters
temperature (SW5), Fecal Coliform (SW6, SW7 & GW1), dissolved oxygen
(SW6) and oil and grease (GW1). Water temperature at SW5, a station
located at the boundary of Parcel 2 slightly went above the upper limit of
Class SC at 31.6 °C. High levels of Fecal Coliform were observed at stations
SW6 and SW7 within Parcel 1 with values 16,000 MPN/100ml and 24,000
MPN/100ml, respectively, exceeding the 200 MPN/100ml Class C guideline
value for freshwaters. Low dissolved oxygen concentration was also
observed in Station SW6 at 3.18 mg/l which is below the minimum DO level
for Class C.
Parameters tested at GW1 were found to be within Class A WQG except

for the Fecal Coliform which was found to be at 8.0 MPN/100ml. Oil and
grease concentration found in the water sample from GW1 was 1.6 mg/l
exceeding the Class A WQG of 1 mg/l.
xxii | P a g e

The rest of the parameters tested were within their respective WQG in all
stations. Biochemical oxygen demand levels in recorded freshwater
samples were < 1 mg/l for SW4 & SW6 and 1 mg/l for SW7. Chloride
concentrations in freshwater samples ranged from 4.5 mg/l to 5.9 mg/l
way below the 350 mg/l Class C and 250 mg/l Class A WQG. Water samples
collected from Stations SW6 and SW7 exhibited 15 TCU while the rest of
the stations had Color ranging from 3 TCU to 5 TCU. High DO levels were
observed in all stations except in SW6. DO levels ranged from 6.27 mg/l
(SW5) to 8.84 mg/l (SW4). Fecal Coliform levels observed in stations
draining Parcel 2 (SW1 – SW5) ranged from 21 MPN/100ml to 170
MPN/100ml all within the 200 MPN/100ml Class SC and Class C WQG.
Values of pH observed ranged from 7.14 to 8.29. Nitrate levels in stations
SW2, SW3 and SW5 were below method detection limit (MDL) while the
rest of the water samples had nitrate levels ranging from 0.02 to 1.3 mg/l.
Traces of phosphate were found in SW7 (0.04 mg/l) but still below the 0.5
mg/l WQG limit. The remaining water samples had phosphate levels below
MDL (< 0.0064 mg/l). Total suspended solids in surface water samples
ranged from 5 mg/l (SW6) to 22 mg/l (SW3) while TSS in GW1 was below
MDL.
Marine Ecology On Coral Condition. The overall assessment of the project site based on
the percentage cover of coral reef is in POOR CONDITION with 13.30%
cover.
On Benthic Component. Averaging the data from the four stations

surveyed, the live hard coral cover was at 7% - 16%. Reefs were generally
dominated by massive and encrusting corals. The cover of dead corals was
at 16% – 27%. Dead corals (except for a few recently dead corals) were
covered with short filamentous algae. Sargassum, Halimeda, and indistinct
algal assemblages collectively covered an average of 48% – 60 % of all
stations. Benthic organisms such as invertebrates covered an average of
0.10% - 3%. Abiotic components, such as rock non-coral and sand, made
up 8.38% cover.
On Reef Fish Component. A total of eighteen (18) species of reef fish was
identified under 15 genera and 10 families. The families Labridae,
Pomacentridae, and Chaetodontidae had the highest number of species
with 4, 3 and 2, respectively. Furthermore, only two (2) fish species were
xxiii | P a g e

categorized as coral health indicators and consisted mostly of species
under the Chaetodontidae family. Majority of the fish composition (18
species) were under the non-target category.
On Fish Biomass. In terms of fish abundance, a total of 130 fishes was

counted in all stations covering an estimated area of about 10,000 sq. m.
In terms of biomass, a total of 4.41 MT/Km2 was recorded. This is the least
noted fish biomass for the past years.
Freshwater Fishes collected during the survey were only from the Anas River Systems,
Ecology species. There were two species of fish collected: Poecilia reticulata
(guppy), a species native to South America that has been widely introduced
throughout temperate and tropical regions for mosquito control, and
Periopthalmus sp., a species of mudskipper.
For phytoplankton, a report of thirteen species from three water stations.

Among the stations, Anas had the highest taxa (13), and also had the
highest plankton density (802 cells/ml) of the three stations. Shannon
Diversity Index was used to determine the diversity of the area. Based on
the results, station Anas had 2.216, Birhen had 1.332, and 0 in station San
Jose, which implies that the three stations had low species diversity
(H’=<2.5), although the species were evenly distributed in the area
(J’=>0.70).
For macroinvertebrates, there were ten species from 7 identified families

in this report. Among these, five were insects, one was an unidentified
water spider, while the two were crustaceans (crab & shrimp), and two
were gastropods (sea snails). Three stations had low species diversity
(H’=<2.5), however, station Anas had the highest among the others (2.12),
Birhen had 2.11, and 0.67 in station San Jose; species were evenly
distributed in the area (J’=>0.70).
Socio - Economic The total number of employed or gainful workers in the municipality in
2015 is 6,614 individuals. Out of all the occupations, skilled agricultural
forestry and fishery workers and elementary occupations have the most
number of employed workers, 4,206 or 64% of all employed workers 15
years old and above. The remaining 36% performs tasks or employed in
different areas such as managers, professionals, technicians and
xxiv | P a g e

associate professionals, clerical support workers, service and sales
workers, craft and related trades workers, plant and machine operators
and assemblers, armed forces occupation and others.
The data also shows that males have more opportunities than females. In
2015, 4,947 males are employed in comparison to 1,667 females. 75% of
all major occupations go to the males.
IV. EIA SUMMARY
A. Project Alternatives
The project is located in a government declared mineral reservation. It will solely cover contour
mining method, the depth of the pit and its location will depend on the exploration activities
conducted by the company, thus no other site alternative considered in terms of mining area.
Further, considering the type and location of mineral to be extracted, the only feasible mining
method for the project is contour mining method, thus, there were no other alternative method
considered for the project.
B. Risk and Uncertainties
The following are the risk and uncertainties identified during the preparation of the EIA study.
Module Risk and Uncertainties Mitigating Measures

Land Slope Stability Strict implementation of
mining plan and regular
monitoring of benches and
other steep areas.
People Safety during the transport Strict adherence to Safety and
ore from mine site to port Health Policy.
xxv | P a g e
C. Summary of Key Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Plan
Activity Impact Enhancement/ Mitigating Measure Efficiency of Measures

CONSTRUCTION PHASE
Construction of haul road, Loss of vegetation due to site clearing • Establishment of nursery to propagate important species; 100% compliance to
new access road and to be used for future rehabilitation. Tree Cutting Permit
• Enhance Agro-forestry technologies that is suitable for the
ancillary facilities and Buffer Zone
area.
Generation of dust from site/access road • Routine monitoring of terrestrial flora and fauna regulations pursuant to
preparation PD 705, as amended"
• Regular water sprinkling at least twice a day or as the
need arises.
100% compliance to
DAO No. 2018-19
Generation of domestic waste • Provision of septic vaults for the workers 100% compliance to
• Hauling of wastewater from septic tanks by DENR- DENR standard (RA
accredited 3rd party collector
9275)
Generation of solid waste • Proper management of solid waste 100% compliance to
• Strict implementation of solid waste management system DENR standard (RA
9003)
Construction of port • Siltation of water bodies • Installation of sediment traps along the drainage canals to 100% compliance to
• Disturbance of the fish habitat break the surface water run-off that measures 1.5 to 3 m x DENR standard (RA
1.5 to 3m.
• Loss of possible fish landing areas for fishers • Construction and maintenance of siltation ponds
9275)
• Maintenance of drainage canals within the project area
• Limit the area of disturbance during port construction.
• Continuous water quality monitoring
Site preparation (clearing, Removal of economically and ecologically • Prioritizing ecologically and economically important 100% compliance to
grubbing, stripping of important species species in conservation Tree Cutting Permit
• Tree plantation development using the indigenous species
and Buffer Zone
and assisted natural regeneration (ANR) techniques
• Progressive rehabilitation of disturbed areas
xxvi | P a g e

topsoil and overburden Removal of wildlife habitat and displacement of • Avoid unnecessary clearing of vegetation regulations pursuant to
removal) wildlife • Strictly prohibit poaching of wildlife PD 705, as amended"
• Schedule of activities should be carefully considered and
implemented.
Improved accessibility of the area may attract • Use of existing roads for accessibility 100% compliance to
illegal hunters and poachers • Confine activities to designated areas DAO No. 2018-19
• Include flora and fauna protection programs in SDMP
(wildlife protection and conservation campaign
• Regular replacement and/or maintenance of equipment
particularly mufflers of vehicles to minimize noise.
• Establishment of buffer zones along creeks
Enhanced soil erosion which will contribute to • Excavated topsoil shall be spread out in the surrounding No incidence of
soil nutrient loss necessary for plant growth. areas; install erosion control facilities landslide
• Seeding of topsoil to maintain/improve soil quality
Top soil removal will be unavoidable to make • Ground preparation and grubbing will be conducted 100% compliance to
way for the development of pier infrastructures progressively to minimize the total area of soil cover at DAO No. 2018-19
any one time.
and ancillary facilities
Improper disposal of domestic wastes may • All domestic wastes generated will be sold to recyclers. 100% compliance to
contaminate the soil Residual waste will be disposed to a designated sanitary DENR standard (RA
land fill
9003)
Loss of top soil due to ground/site preparation • Rehabilitation/revegetation planning will be conducted in 100% compliance to RA
activities accordance with the approved EPEP. 7942
• Bulk of the total project area will be reverted to its pre-
mining land use by strict adherence to the approved
FMR/DP 100% compliance to
• The perimeter of the mining area shall be progressively DAO No. 2018-19
rehabilitated and re-graded to match the surrounding
landforms
• Soils that will be removed will be conserved and
stockpiled in a predetermined area and later used in
rehabilitation and backfilling activities
xxvii | P a g e

• The stockpile shall be graded to a stable relief
• Establishment of safe working slopes and installation of
land slide control structures
Increase in surface erosion and down slope • Progressive ground clearing/ preparation will be employed
sedimentation brought about by mine to minimize the area disturbed at any one time
development activities.
Erosion and subsequent siltation of water

bodies
Earthworks, mine facility construction activities, • Progressive rehabilitation will be conducted in disturbed
and movement of heavy equipment will highly or cleared areas that will not be used for further
development over the course of the project.
disturb the soil surface (i.e. compaction/soil
• Erosion/ sedimentation controls will be installed to
shearing) and induce accelerated erosion mitigate surface erosion and the consequent down slope
susceptibility of the soil or downstream
Top soil removal will be unavoidable to make • Top soil removed during the clearing, re-grading and
way for the development of mining area and ground preparation activities during construction will be
utilized as backfill to low lying areas and service roads.
new access roads
Soil and water Contamination due to accidental • Contaminated soils from accidental hydrocarbon spills will 100% compliance to
fuel and lubricant spills from vehicles and be removed and disposed off site. DENR standard (RA
• Contaminated soil will be disposed of through DENR
equipment may occur. 9275 and RA 6969)
registered TSD facility
• Provision of Refuse storage facility with oil and water
separator to contain any oil and grease accidental spill.
Generation of unwanted materials (solid • Materials recovered from vegetation removal can be used 100% compliance to
waste/biomass/debris) as: DENR standard (RA
Trash lines on steep slopes to mitigate soil erosion
9003)
Compost material/surface mulch for immediate soil cover
and for improving SOM content of soils
• Chipping of cut trees and using the chipped material as a
growing medium for rehabilitation
xxviii | P a g e

Hydrocarbon leaks and spills from vehicles and • Monitoring and safety systems will be implemented to 100% compliance to
heavy equipment may contaminate the ground address any leakage related hazards that may occur. DENR standard (RA
water and nearby body of water. 6969)
Ground water inflow and rainwater that will • A sediment and erosion control plan will be implemented No incidence of
percolate into the mine working area will for the project landslide
• Access roads will be provided with drains to contain and
produce contact water from the freshly mined
limit sedimentation downstream of the mining area.
area. This may contain soluble minerals and • Site water management will be implemented to mitigate
metals and other mining related pollutants. any change in water quality
Noise disturbance • Strictly implement covering of hauling trucks and water No exceedance to
Fugitive dust generation spraying; allowable threshold
• Enclosure of equipment emitting high level of noise (when
levels
applicable)
• Provision of dust and noise PPEs to employees
Vehicle/equipment emissions • Strictly implement covering of hauling trucks and water 100% compliance to
spraying; DENR Standards (RA
• Preventive maintenance of vehicles and equipment
8749)
• Imposition of speed limits (30 kph)
• Provision of dust and noise PPEs to employees
Creation of employment opportunities • Implementation of skills development program to ensure 100% implementation
support to local population in obtaining employment of SDMP
opportunities
Increase in business opportunities • Coordination with Barangay and Municipal LGUs to ensure 100% implementation
proper zoning of business area, peace and order, of IEC and SDMP
sanitation and solid waste management
• Explore possibilities to include training opportunities for
developing business / livelihood opportunities that cater
to needs of the population
• Provide assistance in establishing livelihood projects
xxix | P a g e

Generation of additional revenue for the Local • Ensure suppliers and service providers payment of 100% payment of
Government required payment of taxes and fees applicable taxes and
• Ensure prompt and timely payment of local taxes and fees
fees
In-Migration, which may result in o overuse of • Implement policy on preferential hiring of locals from the Prioritize hiring of
the public utilities/services and competition on impact barangay skilled local residents
the use of resources. • Prioritization of hiring of qualified personnel from the host
barangay.
• Provide assistance to the Local Government to meet 100% implementation
Proliferation of informal settlements
housing backlogs for informal settlement. of SDMP
• Provide assistance to the barangay to ensure efficient and
Disturbance to peace and order effective delivery of social services
• Proper induction of construction workers to prevent
occurrence of peace and order problems or security
breaches.
• Coordination with the Barangay Councils, Barangay Peace
and Security Officers (BPSO) as well as with the Local
Police
• Provide assistance to the Barangay on maintenance of
peace and order.
• Implementation of EMP
Increase in traffic hazards • Implement Traffic Management Plan with the Barangay / 100% implementation
Municipal LGUs including installation of traffic signs and of Traffic Management
additional traffic aids to avoid road accidents
Plan
• Proper scheduling of deliver of construction materials to
avoid peak hours/traffic congestion and minimize the
occurrence of accidents
• Proper orientation on haulers must always be conducted.
Violators must be reprimanded.
OPERATION PHASE
Extraction and hauling of Loss of soil due to erosion would reduce • Retain existing vegetation in areas of low mineral content 100% compliance to RA
mined material going to the survivability of plants having no substrate to • Establishment of 20m buffer zone 7942
pier anchor themselves to and obtain nutrients
xxx | P a g e

• Rehabilitation of open areas and enrichment planting and 100% compliance to
Loss of habitat to birds and small animals such reforestation in buffer zones and mined out areas DAO No. 2018-19
as lizards & amphibians • Fire protection by setting up of fire lines
• Establishing check dams in gullies
• Conduct ‘progressive rehabilitation’ of mined out parcels
• Earth-balling of rare, endemic, threatened species
diversity in the project site
• Routine flora and fauna assessment
Land Slides and mass washings maybe induced • Establishment of safe working slopes and installation of
by and operation activities on high angle slopes. land slide control structures. No incidence of
• Installation of warning signages in the active mining areas.
landslide
Erosion and subsequent siltation of water
bodies
100% compliance to RA
Inducement of subsidence/collapse • Implement a suitable and appropriate slope / ground
7942
failure monitoring plan to detect instability at an early and
non-critical stage so that safety measures could be
Generation of open areas with greater potential initiated to prevent or minimize impacts
for runoff, erosion and landslides • Familiarize / orient / train mining personnel, staff and
workers on recognition of the various slope / ground
failure modes, hazard warning signs and standard
operating procedures to be observed in the case of
ground failure events or impending event.
• Identification, early recognition and monitoring of warning
signs of potential and impending slope stability problems.
• Implement appropriate and safe engineering and
geotechnical design.
• Formulation and implementation of subsidence control
measures including subsidence prediction.
Soil and water contamination due to accidental • To included proper handling and storage of used 100% compliance to
fuel and lubricant spills from vehicles and oil/lubricants in the work instruction of maintenance of DENR standard (RA
vehicles/equipment
equipment may occur 9275 and RA 6969)
xxxi | P a g e

• All used oils, lubricants oil filters oil contaminated rugs will
be sold to recyclers. Residual waste will be disposed to a
designated sanitary land fill.
• Provision of oil spill kits. Residual contaminated soil will be
removed and disposed of through DENR registered TSD
facility
• Provision of Refuse storage facility with oil and water
separator to contain any accidental spill.
• Hydrocarbon leaks and spills from vehicles • Monitoring and safety systems will be implemented to 100% compliance to
and heavy equipment may contaminate the address any leakage related hazards that may occur DENR standard (RA
ground water and nearby body of water • Used oil will be sold to EMB accredited recyclers
6969)
• Local increase in TSP and noise levels • Proper and regular maintenance of equipment No exceedance to
• Air pollution due to mining operation • Water spraying at least two times a day allowable threshold
(hauling, ore extraction and ore loading in • Mining activities to be confined during daytime as much
levels
barges) as possible
• IEC on proper scheduling of hauler trucks to avoid busy 100% compliance to
and late hours DENR Standards (RA
8749)
Health and Safety of workers and nearby • Implement Safety and Health Programs for the workers 100% implementation
community affected by noise and dust and impact communities to reduce or avoid health and of Safety and Health
generation due to operations safety risks
Program
• Strict compliance on the proper wearing of Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE) for workers
• Provide assistance to the Barangays on the delivery of
efficient and effective healthcare and protective services
• Regular water spraying at least two times a day
• Employment Opportunities • Priority hiring of locals Prioritize hiring of
• Coordinate with the Barangay Councils to identify local skilled local residents
labor po
xxxii | P a g e

Increase in business opportunities (creation of • Coordination with Barangay and Municipal LGUs to ensure 100% implementation
new enterprise opportunities) proper zoning of business area, peace and order, of IEC and SDMP
sanitation, and solid waste management
• Explore possibilities to include training opportunities for
developing business / livelihood opportunities
• Provide assistance in establishing livelihood projects
Increase in traffic hazards (hauling/delivery • Ensure proper parking area for hauling and delivery trucks 100% implementation
trucks) and ensure compliance. Proper orientation on haulers of Traffic Management
must always be conducted. Violators must be
Plan
reprimanded.
• Implement Traffic Management Plan with the Barangay/
Municipal LGUs including installation of traffic signs to
avoid road accidents; provision of assistance to ensure
effectiveness of traffic enforcement
• Long-Term Traffic management plan, in coordination with
concerned LGUs and DPWH, will be prepared and
implemented to prevent road accidents, which include
speed limits, vehicle load limits, vehicle maintenance
requirement and limiting driving hours
• Generation of Additional Revenue for the • Ensure supplies and service providers payment of required 100% payment of taxes
Local Government payment of taxes and fees and other applicable
• Ensure prompt and timely payment of local taxes and fees
fees
xxxiii | P a g e
Stagno Mining Corporation Project Description
1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Tenement History
The mining property is being held by Stagno Mining Corporation (SMC) a corporation duly
organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the Philippines. MPSA No. 022-94-X
(Annex A). was originally granted to E.L. Enterprises, Inc. (ELEI) last August 10, 1993 covering a
contract area of 729 hectares (Parcel I) situated in the Municipality of Libjo, Dinagat Islands. The
said MPSA was assigned to SMC and approved by the DENR last September 14, 2015.
On December 03, 2015, ELEI filed with the MGB an Exploration Permit Application denominated
as ExPA No. 000233-XIII. On January 11, 2016, ELEI executed a Deed of Assignment (DOA) of the
ExPA to SMC. MGB Regional Office No. XIII approved the DOA last March 10, 2016.
Considering that both the MPSA and the ExPA belongs to SMC, the company applied for an
expansion. After undergoing area clearance with DENR, a total of 420.8301 hectares (Parcel II)
was approved to be expanded to SMC tenement last June of 2016. Project Location
1.2 Project Location
The permitted area of MPSA No. 022-94-X (SMR) Amended I is located in Barangays San Antonio,
San Jose, Garcia, General Aguinaldo, and Bayanihan, Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat
Islands (Figure 1). The tenement area approximately has a total area of 1,149.8301, consisting of
two parcel, Parcel 1 is 729 hectares and Parcel 2 is 420.8301 hectares. Parcel 2 is located within
the drainage area of Gaas Inlet (Figure 56) which is listed as one of the Principal Rivers of Northern
Mindanao Water Resources Region by the National Water Resources Board (NWRB)1. The
proposed project is not situated within a protected area, refer to Annex G for the NCIP
certification.
Parcel 1, is situated west of the project area which is only about 4 to 5 km aerial distance from
Parcel 2 tenement, is also within the jurisdiction of the Municipality of Libjo. Dinagat islands is
one of the smallest island provinces in the country with a total land area of 1,036 sq. km (400.1
1
Previously National Water Resources Council (NWRC)
1|Page
sq mile). The province is composed of seven (7) municipalities namely: San Jose (Capital), Basilisa
(Rizal), Dinagat, Cagdianao, Loreto, Tobajon and Libjo.
Table 1 – Coordinates of MPSA No. 022-94-x (SMR) Amended I
Parcel 1 Technical Description

CORNER LATITUDE LONGITUDE
1 10 12’ 00” 125 33’ 00”
2 10 10’ 00” 125 33’ 00”
3 10 10’ 00” 125 35’ 00”
4 10 12’ 00” 125 33’ 30”
Parcel 2 Technical Description

CORNER LATITUDE LONGITUDE
1 10 10’ 00” 125 36’ 30”
2 10 10’ 30” 125 36 30”
3 10 10” 30” 125 36’ 00”
4 10 11’ 00” 125 36’ 00”
5 10 11’ 00” 125 36’ 30”
6 10 11’ 30” 125 36’ 30”
7 10 11’ 30” 125 37’ 30 “
8 10 11’ 00” 125 37’ 30”
9 10 11’ 00” 125 37’ 00”
10 10 10’ 00” 125 37’ 00”
2|Page
Figure 1 - Location Map
3|Page
Figure 2 - Tenement Map Stagno Mining Corporation
4|Page
Figure 3 - Parcel 1 Drone Shot
5|Page
PARCEL 2
Figure 4 - Parcel 2 Drone Shot
6|Page
1.2.1 Project Accessibility
The permitted area is located over the highly prospective Dinagat Ophiolite of the Surigao Mineral
Reservation and within the Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands. The island is situated
immediately northeast of Surigao City that can be reached passing either through Surigao Strait
or Dinagat Sound.
The shorter sea travel route to the Project, is through the port of the Municipality of San Jose
which is only about 1 hour sea-travel. From the San Jose Port, it will take another 1 ½ to 2 hours
of land travel by private vehicle or by motorcycle, popularly called locally as habal-habal going the
town proper of the Municipality of Libjo. From there, it will take a 15-20 minute ride to Parcel 1
which is accessible going to Barangay San Jose. To reach Parcel 2, there is a docking station in
Barangay San Jose along the Gaas River. It will take another 30 minutes via mechanized banca
passing through about 9-km Gaas inlet river to reach Sitio Catmonan of Barangay Bayanihan,
wherein the Parcel 2 of the Project area is situated.
The longer sea travel is thru the Municipality of Libjo Port which will take 2 ½ to 3 hours sea travel
but will disembark at the town proper.
Parcel 1, is situated west of the project area which is only about 4 to 5 km aerial distance from
Parcel 2 tenement, is also within the jurisdiction of the Municipality of Libjo. Dinagat islands is
one of the smallest island provinces in the country with a total land area of 1,036 sq. km (400.1
sq mile). The Province is composed of seven (7) municipalities namely: San Jose (Capital), Basilisa
(Rizal), Dinagat, Cagdianao, Loreto, Tobajon and Libjo.
1.2.2 Impact Areas
The identification of direct impact area was based on DAO 2017 – 15. The table below presented
the summary of Direct Impact Areas based on the proposed project operation:
7|Page
Table 2 – Summary of Impacts to the Impact Area

Aspect Direct Impact Area
Water - Receiving water bodies of the project (Tributaries of
San Jose River & Gaas Inlet)
- Underlying aquifer
Air - Area near the periphery of the mining area
Noise - Area within the periphery of the mining area
Terrestrial - Vegetated portion within the project area coverage
People - Barangays San Antonio, San Jose, Garcia, General
Aguinaldo, and Bayanihan, Municipality of Libjo,
Province of Dinagat Islands
8|Page
Direct
Direct
Impact
Impact
Areas
Areas
Secondary Impact Areas

(1km from MPSA Boundary)
Figure 5 – Impact Area Map Stagno Mining Corporation
9|Page
1.3 Rationale
The significant increase in the world demand for stainless steel has catapulted Philippines as one
of the major players in exporting the chromite, nickel and iron to China and Japan. Higher prices
of chromite, nickel and iron in the market have prompted the company to take advantage of the
opportunity to operate its MPSA.
The project is expected to generate PHP3,672,615,528 or US$73,452,311 in gross sales as FOREX

influx to the country. PhP1,917,427,495 will be circulated to the local and national economy as
the costs of the Project including the salaries and wages. PhP142,981,705 will be spent for
environmental protection, safety and health, social development and for the final mine
rehabilitation. PhP668,102,261 will be due to the government as excise tax, mineral reservation
royalty, business tax, soil depletion tax of the province, occupational fees and as income tax.
With the impact of the pandemic to the national economy and the record-breaking foreign loans
made by the government to survive the pandemic, the mining industry can be a source of
financing for the cash strap government.
Further, the realization of the Stagno Libjo Mining Project will boost the following major aspects:
• Community Development – increase in revenue and operating expenses of the company

will also significantly increase the Social Development Management Program (SDMP);
• Taxation – increased collection of taxes and fees due to both the National and Local
Government Units;
• Employment – employment opportunities for the local communities within the Island of
Dinagat and within the province. It is estimated that more than 00 workers will be hired
for the project. Provision of employment in rural areas will help ease the pressure of major
cities due to influx of migrating workers; and
• Socio-Economic Benefits – downstream business will thrive with increasing economic
activities. Local communities will be the recipients of livelihood programs and skills
development that can be used for economic gains, both technological and technical skills.
10 | P a g e
1.4 Project Alternative
1.4.1 Project Location and Process
The project is located in a government declared mineral reservation. It will solely cover contour
mining operation, the depth of the pit and its location will depend on the exploration activities
conducted by the company, thus no other site alternative considered in terms of mining area.
Further, considering the type and location of mineral to be extracted, the only feasible mining
method for the project is contour mining method, thus, there were no other alternative method
considered for the project.
1.4.2 Environmental Impact
The major environmental impact that will be brought about by the project operation considering
all the alternatives and the nature of project are temporary land clearing, possible siltation of
Gaas River, dust emission, implementation of community development programs through Social
Development Plan and generation of revenues from taxes, permits and LGU share in the mining
activities.
There will be temporary surface clearing while the development and operations are ongoing. This
will be mitigated by progressive rehabilitation based on the multi-sectoral approved
Environmental Protection and Enhancement Program (EPEP). After closure of the Project, the
disturbed areas will be continuously monitored for ten (10) years to ensure the success of the
rehabilitation thru the Final Mine Rehabilitation and/or Decommissioning Plan (FMR/DP).
Siltation will be addressed by minimizing disturbed areas at any given time and providing drainage
system and siltation ponds.
Dust generation is foreseen to arise during construction and operation phase; however,
environmental management plan such as water sprinkling and provision of buffer area thru
planting of trees will be undertaken to alleviate its probable occurrence.
The implementation of SDMP will enhance the socio-economic welfare of the community.
Further, the company will ensure the prompt payment of taxes and fees to the government.
1.4.3 Consequences of not Proceeding with Project
In terms of physical environment, the MPSA area will remain unchanged and undisturbed. As
regards with socio economic, opportunity for employment that will be provided by the company
11 | P a g e
will not be probable. Additional revenues from taxes, with no “project option” and the
opportunity for SDMP assistance and tax revenue will not be possible.
1.5 Project Components
Project Component Description

Project Area The entire tenement has a total area of 1,149.8301 ha covering
two parcels, Parcel 1 is 729 hectares and Parcel 2 is 420.8301
hectares.
The SLUP for the Waste Dump, Ore Stockyard and support
facilities at 34.23 hectares.
Foreshore Lease Agreement (FLA) area for the causeway
covering 2.4 ha.
Mining Areas The direct mining area is estimated to be at 220 ha in Parcel 2
Exploration Area Parcel 1 – 729 ha and Parcel 2 – 200.0301 ha
Waste Dump or Generated overburden waste is estimated using the average
Over Burden overburden thickness of 0.10 meter and the total area exposed
by developmental works.
The waste dump areas will have a total of 10 ha located in the

SLUP Area.
Ore Stockyard The mined ore would be brought to designated ore
stockpile/stockyard. The ore stockyard will have a total area of 15
ha located in the SLUP Area.
Haul Roads /Access Haul roads and access roads will be constructed within the project
Roads area having a cumulative length of 8 to 10 km.
Causeway A causeway will be constructed near the ore stackyard to
support the direct shipment operation of the project. The
causeway will be under the FLA with an area of 2.4 ha.
Field Office, Field Office, Employees Quarter, Motor Pool,
Employees Quarter, Laboratory and Sample Storage, Nursery Area and Power House
Motor Pool, Area will be constructed within the 9.23 ha under the SLUP.
Laboratory and
Sample Storage,
Nursery Area and
Power House
Fuel Storage Facility Fuel storage facility will be constructed within
the 9.23 ha under the SLUP.
12 | P a g e
Project Component Description

Settling Ponds Settling ponds will be constructed within the project area along
strategic locations considering various factors such as amount of
water runoff, terrain of the area and concentration of mining
ores.
1.5.1 Mining
The mining method to be employed will be contour mining with vertical extraction sequence
adopting a 3-meter bench height and 5-meter berm width from top to lowest elevation. The
extraction operation of this type of ore utilizes small to medium size heavy equipment – typically
a backhoe and truck combination with backup of auxiliary equipment. A backhoe excavator
extracts the ore and load it in dump trucks and transport the ore to mine stock yard or pier
stockyard before loading to barges for shipment.
Preparatory activities to be undertaken prior to extraction includes clearing and grubbing,

stripping of overburden, bench sampling, mine planning and survey, production mining and
stockpiling or direct loading to LCT. After exhausting all the mineral, identification of area for
rehabilitation will take place and the actual rehabilitation will commence.
Rigid grade control procedures will be strictly implemented all throughout the mining cycle from
mine development to ore extraction at the mine to the stockpiling procedure up to the ore
shipment in order to ensure the quality of the ore to be shipped-out will comply with the agreed
client specifications.
1.5.2 Stockyard Area and Overburden
The company will maintain an ore stockpile area, topsoil area and wastedump. Topsoil stockpiles
will be located in mined-out areas to minimize creating additional disturbed areas. Stockpile slope
will be kept at a low angle and height to minimize slumping. The proposed height of the stockpile
will depend on the angle-of-repose of the material. This is to ensure that the maximum volume
of materials will be stockpiled without sacrificing safety. Angle of repose is the maximum angle of
descent or dip of the stockpile slope relative to the horizontal plane.
13 | P a g e
Stockpiling of the topsoil for prolonged periods may also deteriorate the biological components
in the soil deteriorating its quality. Stripping of soil at unsuitable moisture content (i.e. when wet
or saturated) may also lead to compaction and loss of soil structure.
Generated overburden waste is estimated using the average overburden thickness of 0.10 meter
and the total area exposed by developmental works. The waste dump areas will total 10 ha
located in the SLUP Area.
1.5.3 Settling Pond
Settling ponds will be constructed in series. These ponds shall be appropriately designed to
effectively arrest the silt coming from the mining area to meet the required water quality of the
recycled water and DAO 2016-18 & 2021-19 in case of water discharge. Sediments shall be
impounded from the first to the third pond in succession. While, the second pond is utilized, the
first pond shall be drained and allowed to dry and desilted. Recovered silt materials will be used
to backfill mined out areas. The third pond shall act a buffer for the first two ponds and shall be
the source of recycled water for road sprinkling.
To minimize the silt load, from the mining areas, siltation traps along the drainage system will be
built inside the active areas. Settling ponds will be desilted as the need arises.
14 | P a g e
Figure 6 - Settling Pond Design
1.5.4 Access and Mine roads
Mine haul road will be constructed following the topographic surface contour. This shall be
ballasted with crushed bedrocks extracted from mining areas. Maximum adverse road gradient
is 8.0%. The establishment of such facility will entail clearing and grabbing activities that may
possibly cause soil erosion and water contamination.
1.5.5 Causeway
Fuel storage facility will be constructed within the 9.23 ha under the SLUP to support the fuel
requirement of the proposed operation.
1.5.6 Fuel Storage Facility
Fuel storage facility will be constructed within the 9.23 ha under the SLUP to support the fuel
requirement of the proposed operation.
15 | P a g e
1.5.7 Other Facilities
The following facilities will be constructed to support the project operation:
• Field Office
• Employees Quarter
• Motor Pool,
• Laboratory and Sample Storage
• Nursery Area; and
• Power House
1.5.8 Support Facilities
1.5.8.1 Power Supply
The municipality of Libjo is being serve by Dinagat Power Cooperative. A standby generator shall
be installed by the company in case of power out rages. The standby generators shall be properly
maintained and permitted before utilization.
1.5.8.2 Water Supply
Common sources of water supply in this area is spring water.
1.5.9 Pollution Control Devices
Table 3 - Pollution Control Devices and Corresponding Facilities Being Served

Pollution Control Devices Description Location
Settling and Siltation • Settling ponds will be To be constructed within the
Ponds strategically located within the project site along strategic
area of processing.
locations considering various
• Siltation ponds will be built
within the mining areas to factors such as amount of
properly address surface run- water runoff, terrain of the
offs and siltation during area and concentration of
construction and operation of
the project activities. mining ores.
16 | P a g e
Pollution Control Devices Description Location

Nursery • Nursery will be established in Nursery will be established to
the project site complete with cater to the needs of the
potting sheds and planting
progressive rehabilitation
plots for wildlings.
• Endemic species will be program. This will be located
primarily raised in the nursery. within the SLUP area.
Seeds and wildlings will be
.
collected and raised as
planting materials.
Solid Waste Management • Establishment of Ecological Compost will be used in the
Center, composed of materials nursery for rehabilitation
recovery facility and
program. Segregation of
composting facility.
biodegradable and non-
biodegradable waste will be
practiced. Hazardous wastes
will be managed based on
provisions of RA 6969.
17 | P a g e
SLUP
Figure 7 – Site Development Map
18 | P a g e
1.6 Process Technology Options
1.6.1 Stripping or Overburden Removal
Stripping or overburden removal involves the removal of the waste on top of the ore deposit. It
includes stripping of the waste, clearing and grubbing of all growth, stumps, roots and all organic
matters and subsequent stockpiling in the designated overburden stockpiles to be used in the
rehabilitation activities under the Environmental Protection and Enhancement Program (EPEP)
and the Final Mine Rehabilitation and/or Decommissioning Plan (FMR/DP). Clearing of Vegetation
particularly trees shall be supported with Tree Cutting Permit issued by DENR
Stripping will commence ahead of mining to expose the ore deposit. This work will be undertaken
with the use of bulldozers, loaders and trucks.
1.6.2 Mine Planning and Survey
Mine plans shall then be generated after positively establishing the volume and grade of the
lateritic nickel ore. The plans will include excavation limits, hauls roads and ramps, drainage
system, equipment requirement/selection and production schedule.
An important component of mine planning is surveying. This includes on a daily basis, production
mapping and routinely survey work of mine advance, elevations and extracted volume.
19 | P a g e
Figure 8 - Flowsheet of Mining Method
WASTE DUMP AREA MINE DEVELOPMENT TOP SOIL STOCKPILE AREA
ORE EXTRACTION
SAMPLING
PIERYARD STOCKPILE AREA LABORATORY MINEYARD STOCKPILE AREA
BARGE/LCT
MOTHER VESSEL
1.6.3 Mining/Ore Extraction and Hauling
Mining and production area will be confined in Parcel 2 of the MPSA.
There will be 240 mine production days per year, during the dry season; at two 10-hours shifts a
day. The same number of days shall be provided as non-production days for maintenance at one
10-hour shift, during the wet season. Most of the shipping season shall occur on March to October
with significant loading/shipment activity in the rest of year whenever good weather prevails.
The ore will be loaded into 20-tonner mining trucks. The twin steer, rigid frame trucks will have
an 8x4 configuration with four-wheel rear drive. The trucks will operate one un-sheeted bench
roads and sheeted permanent mine haul roads with gradient up to 1:12. The trucks will haul the
ore to the stockyard.
Benches of 3 meters high and final berm with of 5 meters was designed to eliminate the risk of
slope failure and control erosion/siltation. The benches are sloped towards the toe line and
20 | P a g e
corresponding drainage canals are designed to capture run-off. These drainages are directed
towards siltation ponds to contain silt incidental to the operation. To address the dust problem
especially during the active hauling operation, regular grading, compaction and water spraying on
all major roads will be actively undertaken.
A total of 22 hydraulic excavators (backhoe), 36 dump trucks, one (1) bulldozer shall be use for
production, overburden stripping, and marketing/shipment operation. This will likewise be
supported with auxiliary equipment of one (1) unit of road grader and one (1) compactor for
efficient and environmentally sound hauling operation.
To support the environmental programs of the Company, a dedicated equipment consisting of

one (1) unit long boom backhoe and two (2) water truck will be utilized during the entire life of
its operation.
A buffer zone of 20 meter will be established within the periphery of the permit area as mandated
under its ECC. This area is the target multi-purpose location for watershed protection,
reforestation, nursery and farming modules for livelihood projects.
Rehabilitation work on a mined-out area commences immediately on the following year or earlier
depending on the exhaustion of the deposit. This will be initiated by backfilling the area with the
overburden extracted from the active panel. The backfill materials will be stabilized and
contoured. Cover crops such as grasses and vines will be used as an initial rehabilitation medium
before the introduction of trees (fruit-bearing and/or endemic). Full rehabilitation is expected on
the sixth year.
1.6.4 Sampling
A bench bulk sampling of materials will be undertaken in order to have an advance ore grade
information of production benches. A trench 5 meter apart, 1 meter wide and 5-meter
perpendicular into the production benches will be excavated for bench sampling. This is just a
confirmatory sampling procedure in order to have an assurance on the materials to be excavated.
1.6.5 Assay Laboratory
The company shall employ XRF method of assaying. The XRF method is favored to support the
mining production operation due to its ability to process multiple samples at any given time.
Collected samples will undergo sample preparation in the sample preparation area.
21 | P a g e
1.6.6 Ore Stockpile
After undergoing sampling procedure, the ores will now be stockpile either in Mine yard area or
Pier yard area. The two stockpile areas are temporary holding of ore mined before reclaiming
when needed. Mine yard and pier stockpiles are maximized to about 40 truckloads per pile with
marking indicating the grade and elevation where the materials are excavated. Canvass and
tarpaulin might be needed to cover and preserve moisture of the stockpiled ores. Stockpile height
must be maintained to maximum of 3 meters to avoid slumping. A buffer stockpile of 1 boat load
(50,000 WMT) must always be maintain to ensure delivery of committed materials to clients. Also,
the stockpile areas will have run off drainage to avoid water from accumulating and create
ponding.
1.6.6.1 Ore Shipment
1.6.6.1.1 Barge/LCT
If grade and moisture content is within allowable range, excavated ore will be directly loaded to
waiting LCT in causeway. Barges/LCT are either directly loaded by trucks from mine area and/or
by wheel loaders from pier-yard. Direct dumping of run-of-mine ore provides substantial savings
on handling cost while minimizing spillages during handling.
During the loading of the barges/LCTs, the wheel loader will regularly pile, trim and crown the
ores in order to accommodate the next incoming dump truck for subsequent efficient unloading.
The loaded barge/LCT will navigate to the main cargo vessel anchored offshore (about several
hundred- meter distance from the shoreline). Barges/LCT’s will ship-side for unloading operation
to the cargo vessel.
All effort should be done so as not to expose the ore to rain while cargo vessel loading operation
is ongoing. Necessary canvas sheet to cover the ore inside the LCT should be available in case of
inclement weather. During heavy down pour, cargo vessel loading operation shall be suspended.
1.6.6.1.2 Mother Vessel
Filled Barges or LCT’s will shipside and deliver its cargo to anchored waiting Panamax mother
vessel. The vessel usually takes eight (8) to nine (9) days, weather permitting to be filled. One
shipment may contain 50,000 WMT and above.
22 | P a g e
Figure 9 - Mining Schedule
23 | P a g e
Figure 10 – Final Rehabilitation Plan
24 | P a g e
1.7 Project Size
1.7.1 Mineral Reserves Based on Exploration Data
Based on the accepted exploration QA/QC protocols and in accordance with the guidelines set in
the PMRC code, Stagno Mining Corp. conducted a successful drilling exploration program at their
tenement property covered by Mineral Production Sharing Agreement denominated as MPSA No.
022-92-XIII Amended I.
Manipulation of 107 drillholes, 22 test pits and 1,063 drillhole sample intervals used in the
resource estimation, block and grade modelling were conducted through "GEMS Surpac Version
6.3.” software using Ordinary Kriging (OK) Method. After verification and evaluation, the
undersigned estimated a Grand Total Nickel Laterite Resource of 8 Million WMT with weighted
average grade of 0.73%Ni and 38.10%Fe classified as Indicated resource comprised of limonite
material of 6.7 Million WMT with weighted average grade of 42.03% Fe and 0.68% Ni and
saprolite material of 939,000WMT with weighted average grade of 12.45% Fe and 1.02% Ni (Table
4). There is also an additional inferred mineral resource of approximately 7,831,250 WMT (Table
5).
Table 4 - Summary of SMC’s Indicated Mineral Resource Estimates

VOLUME DENSITY TONNAGE GRADE
ORE CLASS CATEGORY 3
(cu.m) t/m (WMT) %Fe %Ni
Limonite
>=40% Fe, 6,128,125.00 1.1 6,740,937.50 42.03 0.68
>=0.8% Ni
Indicated
Saprolite
>25% Fe, 939,375.00 1.35 1,295,156.00 12.45 1.02
>=0.8% Ni
Table 5 - Summary of SMC’s Inferred Mineral Resource Estimates

VOLUME DENSITY TONNAGE GRADE
ORE CLASS CATEGORY
(cu.m) t/m3 (WMT) %Fe %Ni
Limonite Inferred 7,068,750.00 1.10 7,775,625.00 42.89 0.68
Saprolite 762,500.00 1.35 1,029,375.00 15.49 0.98
Saprolite 7,831,250 1.35 1,029,375.00 15.49 0.98
25 | P a g e
1.7.2 Production Capacity
The proposed annual extraction rate will max out at 1,000,000 WMT per year.
Table 6 – Projected Mining Production

Year Production per year (WMT)
1 500,000
2 750,000
3 1,000,000
4 1,000,000
5 1,000,000
6 1,000,000
7 1,000,000
6,250,000
1.7.3 Project Size
The project is composed of two (2) parcels, consisting of Parcel 1 which is about 729 hectares and
Parcel 2 with 420.8301 hectares. Moreover, additional 34.23 hectares will be utilized for the
stockyard, support facilities causeway operation thru SLUP. Additional 2.4 ha will be applied for
thru Foreshore Lease Agreement (FLA) for the LCT/Barge loading area.
1.8 Development Plan, Description of Project Phases and Corresponding Timeframes
The Project aims to complete all the requirement and start development and commercial
production this year of 2022.
Figure 11 - Project Schedule
26 | P a g e
1.8.1 Pre-construction Phase
Pre-construction phase involves the acquisition of permits and clearances from concerned
government agencies, entering into a Project Financing Statement, negotiations and actual land
acquisition and crop damage compensation, detailed follow up survey, mapping and design for
road routes, mining areas and other work sites; procurement and construction tendering, bidding
of, and awarding to contractors. There will be no major land disturbances in this phase of the
project except from the trampling of vegetation in the conduct of detailed surveys and mapping
of access road and other work areas.
Major activities include: Project Planning; Environmental Impact Assessment and preparation of
required documentation; Community Information and Consultation; Environmental and
Community Management Systems Preparation; Feasibility Study, Work Programs, EPEP, SDMP,
SHP and FMR/DP Preparations; Submission of DMPF, EPEP, SDMP and FMR/DP; Submission of
Required Environmental Impact Assessment Report; Review by DENR-EMB and MGB; Issuance of
ECC and Approval of DMPF; and Detailed Engineering and Permitting.
1.8.2 Construction Phase
The Construction Phase would involve the following:
• Establishment and improvement of the existing access road, as necessary;

• Additional haul and access road construction within the proposed project areas;
• Land preparation for, and construction or installation of mine facilities (stockyards,
causeway improvement, maintenance shop, administration office improvement, assay
laboratory, and additional staff houses);
• Land preparation and construction of the environmental facilities (settling ponds/dams,
overburden and waste rock dumpsites, drainage facilities, and Nursery) and;
• Initial overburden stripping
The construction phase will require haul roads and environmental facilities. Land preparation will
generally involve clearing and grubbing, excavation/leveling, hauling of soils and drainage
installation. The design of the drainage system will be dependent on the topography (terrain,
contour) and existing gullies in the area. Mine haul roads will be developed in mining areas initially
on natural topographic surface. These roads will be constructed with appropriate road base to
allow safe and efficient traffic management. Setting of all facilities will consider the occurrence of
natural hazards, minimization of surface and groundwater hydrological alterations, control of
27 | P a g e
siltation to within allowable standard, minimization of major terrestrial ecological impacts, and
avoidance as much as possible of socio-economic dislocations such as right of way or crop
damages. These criteria will be applied to Technical/Engineering options and economic objectives
of the Project. Construction will involve the implementation of the procurement and construction
execution plans and detailed engineering designs. It is expected to last for 6 months.
1.8.3 Operation Phase
The company will use contour mining method. This will involve development of mining blocks,
ore preparation, and shipment of ore as well as the progressive rehabilitation of mined-out areas.
Operation phase activities are as follows:
• Stripping/Overburden Removal
• Ore Mining/Extraction
• Ore Loading/Hauling
• Stockpiling
• Hauling to Barge/LCT
• Barge/LCT Loading
• Transport to Mother Vessel
1.8.4 Abandonment Phase
This phase includes rehabilitation of mined out areas and remaining disturbed areas after the life
of mine. This is in accordance to the provisions stipulated in the Philippine Mining Act of 1995 and
its Implementing Rules and Regulations and amendments thereof. As required by a law, a Final
Mine Rehabilitation and/or Decommissioning Plan (FMRDP) will be prepared during the operating
life of the mine covering period of up to 10 years after project closure.
The FMR/DP will cover the following:
• Rehabilitation of the last mining parcel;

• Removal of industrial buildings, equipment and wastes from the project site;
• Cleaning, stabilization and re-vegetation of working areas; and
• Donation of usable structure with community value to the local government.
Final mine rehabilitation shall adapt progressive rehabilitation scheme. Areas to be rehabilitated
are the disturbed areas of operation such as clearings, mine-out areas, benches, slopes and other
28 | P a g e
areas with direct physical impacts. Progressive rehabilitation shall cover re-vegetation, slope
stabilization, reinforcements, re-forestation, landscaping and other environment enhancement
measures.
Re-vegetation shall involve: initially, stabilizing crops that will enhance growth of endemic species
and initiate faunal adaptation to the rehabilitated area.
1.9 Manpower Requirement
The Project will require a multi-disciplinary workforce that will handle its management, further
exploration, development, operations and rehabilitation components. All the manpower that will
be hired for this project will consist of Filipino citizens since all the skills required for the projects
are available locally due to the existence of mining projects in the Philippines. The service
providers will be required to hire from the host and neighbouring Barangays. This project aims to
employ as many qualified personnel from the host Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat
Islands
SMC will be employing around 101 employees plus an additional manpower complement of up
to 500 seasonal contractual laborers and contractors. Tabulated below are the classification of
workers and its corresponding number.
Table 7 - Manpower Requirement

Position Nationality Pax
I. Project Management
1. Project Manager Filipino 1
2. Radio Operator Filipino 2
3. Office Staff Filipino 1
4. Security Guards Filipino 8
II. Mining Department
1. Mine Manager Filipino 1
2. Mine Planning Engineer Filipino 1
3. Surveyor Filipino 2
4. Draftsman Filipino 1
5. Mine Superintendent Filipino 3
6. CADD Operator Filipino 1
7. Geologist Filipino 2
8. Driller Filipino 6
29 | P a g e

9. Mechanical engineer Filipino 1
10. Electrical Engineer Filipino 1
11. Tireman, welder, electrician, power tender Filipino 4
12. Company owned HE and vehicle driver Filipino 3

13. Laborer (trapal, sweeper, etc.) Filipino 20
III. SHES Group
1. EHS and Comrel Manager Filipino 1
2. Env'tal Officer/PCO Filipino 1
3. CRO Filipino 1
4. Safety Engineer Filipino 2
5. Nurse Filipino 1
6. Forester/Agriculturist Filipino 1
7. Nursery Staff/CRO Asst Filipino 4
8. Water Truck driver Filipino 1
IV. Assay laboratory
1. Chief Chemist Filipino 1
2. Chemist Filipino 1
3. Sample Prep. Leadman Filipino 2
4. Sample Prep. Crew Filipino 2
5. Lab. Aide Filipino 8
V. Admin and Finance Department
1. Administration Manager Filipino 1
2. Accountant Filipino 1
3. Admin/Accounting Staff Filipino 2
4. Costs Clerk Filipino 1
5. Cashier/Bookkeeper Filipino 2
6. Receiving/Issuing Clerk Filipino 2
7. OIC Surigao Office Filipino 1
8. Surigao Office Clerk Filipino 1
9. Cook Filipino 1
10. Warehouse Supervisor Filipino 1
11. Property Custodian Filipino 1
12. Kitchen Staff/Janitor/Launderer Filipino 2
13. Service Vehicle driver Filipino 1
VII. Contractor/Service Provider Filipinos 500
30 | P a g e

Total 601
1.10 Indicative Project Investment Cost
The estimated project investment cost is PhP 435,000,000.
Table 8 – Project Investment Costs

Details PhP
A. CAPEX
1. Permitting; fees, taxes, tenement maintenance and 75,000,000
acquisition
2. Exploration and Final Exploration Report 50,000,000
3. Development, mobilization and surface rights acquisition 225,000,000
CAPEX Sub-total 350,000,000
B. Initial Environmental Expenses 35,000,000
C. Initial OPEX 50,000,000
Grand Total 435,000,000
31 | P a g e
Stagno Mining Corporation Assessment of Environmental Impacts
2.0 ASSESSMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
2.1 Land
2.1.1 Land Use and Classification
2.1.1.1 Impact in terms of compatibility with existing land use
In the 2008, Comprehensive Land Use Plan of the Municipality, as shown in Table 9 - Existing Land
Use in Libjo, 1998, it has a total hectare of 20,750 has or 207.5 square kilometers. Majority of the
area covered by the project is located within grassland (Figure 12). Further, based on the Genral
Land Use Mapz of Dinagat Island, the project falls under Mining Area (Figure 13).
Moreover, as per the Land Classification Map published by DENR CARAGA (Figure 14), the
proposed project is located within Mineral and Agricultural Land.
Table 9 - Existing Land Use in Libjo, 1998
Existing General Land Use Hectares (ha.)

Built-up (Urban/Rural) 73.5440
Agricultural 12,509.6377
Forest 4,365
Mining/Mineing 746
Grassland/Pasture 77.2541
Agro-industrial 0.2500
Tourism 0.5000
Other uses
Watershed 2,975.6942
Sanitary Landfill 0.1200
Reclamation 2.0000
Total 20,750.0000
Source: MPDO, Compact Socio-Economic Profile
32 | P a g e
Figure 12 - Existing Land Use Map (1998)
33 | P a g e
Figure 13 – General Land Use Map of Dinagat
34 | P a g e
Figure 14 - Land Classification Map (source: DENR CARAGA)
35 | P a g e
2.1.1.2 Impact on compatibility with classification as an Environmentally Critical Area (ECA)
Table 10 - Evaluation of ECA

ECA Category Findings Evaluation
1. Areas declared by law as There are no protected areas, under the Not an
national parks, watershed National Integrated Protected Areas System ECA
reserves, and sanctuaries (NIPAS).
2. Areas set aside as aesthetic, There are no known tourist spots in Libjo, Not an
potential tourist spots Dinagat, Island. ECA
3. Areas which constitute the There are no key biodiversity areas and Not an
habitat for any endangered or local conservation areas in Libjo and ECA
threatened species of adjoining areas.
indigenous Philippine wildlife
(flora and fauna)
4. Areas of unique historic, Libjo and the adjacent areas have not been Not an
archeological, geological, or declared as a site, unique historic ECA
scientific interests. archeological, geological and scientific
interest.
5. Areas which are traditionally There are no indigenous cultural Not an
occupied by cultural communities or tribes in Libjo. ECA
communities or tribes
6. Areas frequently visited or Based on the Typhoon Incidence Map Not an

hard hit by natural calamities (Figure 15), Dinagat Island falls under low ECA
(geologic hazard areas, flood typhoon hits category.
prone areas, areas frequently
visited or hard hit by typhoons,
areas prone to volcanic
activities or earthquakes)
7. Areas with critical slope (Figure 16) is the slope map of the areas An ECA
based on the National Mapping and
Resources Information Authority
(NAMRIA). The Project site falls on level to
undulating, undulating to rolling, and rolling
to hilly topography. The hilly to
36 | P a g e
ECA Category Findings Evaluation

mountainous and above 50% are within
Parcel 2.
8. Areas classified as prime The location of the mining area is not Not an
agricultural land suitable for agricultural activities. ECA
9. Water bodies The Project also covers 34.23 ha under An ECA

Special Land Use Permit (SLUP) for the
waste dump, ore stockyard and support
facilities, and 2.4 ha under the Foreshore
Lease Agreement (FLA) for the causeway.
All these areas are located within the
drainage area of Gaas Inlet which is listed as
one of the Principal Rivers of Northern
Mindanao Water Resources Region by the
National Water Resources Board (NWRB)2.
10. Mangrove Areas Mangroves are present within GAAS inlet. An ECA
2
37 | P a g e
PROJECT AREA
Figure 15 - Typhoon Incidence Map
38 | P a g e
Figure 16 - Slope Map

39 | P a g e
2.1.1.3 Impact in existing land tenure issue/s
There are no known CARP areas/CARP-related issues within the project area.
2.1.1.4 Impairment of visual aesthetics
The mining activities will have permanent and irreversible impact on the slopes and natural
topography of the MPSA area. It will require the removal of vegetation from the active mining
area and the eventual excavation of mineral ore thereat. These changes will be confined within
the MPSA area which is far from residential areas.
The progressive rehabilitation program of the project ensures the re-greening of the area
according to its final landform design. Careful planning and timely execution of environmental
plans shall be observed by the company to safeguard not only the interests of stakeholders, but
also the environment. Good housekeeping will be done along with the implementation of the
reforestation program. This will contribute to the maintenance of a tidy and a well-preserved
working environment.
2.1.1.5 Devaluation of land value as a result of improper solid waste management and other
related impacts
The expected increase in population due to possible migration of mine workers would result to
increased of solid waste generation in the area. Solid wastes that may be generated by the
employees and laborers of the project include plastics, paper, tin cans, bottles, etc.
Solid wastes generated will be managed through the implementation of ecological solid waste
management system. Garbage bins will be provided within and outside of the plant complex and
will be located in strategic location to alleviate the possible contamination to land resources.
2.1.2 Geology/Geomorphology
2.1.2.1 Regional Geology
The major fraction of the island is underlain by ultramafic rocks mainly of harzburgite and to a
lesser extent of the dunite variety. These rock types are mainly distributed in the eastern flank of
the island and in a general north-south distribution. The area is characterized by high relief and
high elevation (e.g., Mt. Palhi and Mt. Redondo). These rock types are by affinity repository for
chromite mineralization and to some occurrences of platinum-group elements (PGE) as in the
40 | P a g e
case of Zambales and Palawan Ophiolite Complexes (Bacuta, 1988, 1990; Villones et al., 1988;
Nakagawa and Franco, 1996; Santos, 1997). Weathering of these rock types may lead to
formation of nickeliferous laterite (Figure 17 to Figure 19). These ultramafic rock suites are
interpreted to represent the upper mantle section of the earth. The ophiolite complex could be
at least Eocene (Tan and Santos, unpublished data, 1995) in age but are generally considered as
Cretaceous by most of the previous workers. A K-Ar age of 84.4 m.y. for the Dinagat ophiolite was
given by Sunga and Palaganas (1986) which corresponds to the middle Cretaceous period. It is
widely believed to have been emplaced from late Cretaceous to Paleocene.
The ultramafic suite of the ophiolite was subdivided by Louca (1994) into three: the tectonite unit,
the transition zone and the dunite unit. The tectonite unit is composed of serpentinized
harzburgites with lenses of dunites, which are both cut by clinopyroxenite and diabase intrusives
(David et al., 1994). The boundary between the tectonite unit and the transition zone is not always
clear, especially in cases where the lower harzburgite units of the transition zone become
massive. This zone is calculated by Louca (1994) to be 700 meters thick. It consists of a cyclic
succession of harzburgite and dunite interlayers with chromitites.
2.1.2.2 Structural Geology
Sunga and Palaganas (1986) enumerated in detail the varied lithologic and tectonic features of
Dinagat Island. They recognized the almost parallel orientation of schistosities of the
metamorphic rocks with the trace of the thrust fault while dip directions are toward the overriding
ophiolite. Dip reversals and deviations in the general trend of the strike were ascribed to local
folding and block faulting. David et al. (1994) and Louca (1994) inferred two northwest trending
transcurrent fault zones in Dinagat which divided the ophiolite into three blocks (Figure 20). The
Tubajon-Malinao Fault Zone of Louca (1994) was interpreted by David et al. (1994) as a dextral
fault while the Velore Fault Zone was interpreted as a sinistral one. Louca (1994) claims that field
evidence exists to show that the latter fault was active since the emplacement of the ophiolite
and continued to displace rocks belonging to the clastic sediments. Northeast trending lineaments
are also prominent and these were recognized by both Louca (1994) and Sunga and Palaganas
(1986). The authors, however, made no reference as to the cause of these faults or lineaments.
The initiation of the Philippine Fault and the Philippine Trench were inferred by Sunga and
Palaganas (1986) as middle Miocene and their movement still continues at present. It was not
clear however, whether these two major tectonic structures, inspite of their proximity to Dinagat,
have had any influence on the activity, magnitude and nature of the fault lines of the island. The
whole of the island is transected by high-angle faults mainly paralleling the trend of the Philippine
Fault at WNW direction and to minor occurrences its splays at NNW trend. Numerous drainage
systems are affected by such structures. The central segment of the Malinao Inlet, for one,
41 | P a g e
follows such a trend. Another structural fabric almost normal to the Philippine Fault trend, NNE
trend, is manifested mainly in the northern and in the middle segment covering the areas from
Malinao Inlet to Desolacion Point and from Mt. Palhi down south to Pensacales Point along the
eastern coast of the island.
42 | P a g e
Figure 17 - Geologic Map of Dinagat Islands (after JICA-MMAJ Project, 1987; UNRFNRE, 1993)
The dominant green shaded portions represent the Dinagat Ophiolite Complex.
43 | P a g e
Figure 18 - Regional Geologic Map of CARAGA Region and Dinagat Islands.
44 | P a g e
Figure 19 - Major Ophiolite Belt in the Philippines
45 | P a g e
Figure 20 - Comparative Stratigraphy of the Dinagat Ophiolite Complex (DOC) and that of the
Palawan Ophiolite Complex (POC, after Santos, 1997)
Shaded segment denotes section where chromite layers and lenses are most likely to occur.
46 | P a g e
2.1.2.3 Geomorphology
A study of geomorphological and structural features of the island in relationship with the
geology/petrochemistry led to the reconstruction of the tectonic events which affected the island.
Though isotopic dating (Re-Os isotope systematics; Santos et al., 1999) of the harzburgite fraction
of DOC gave an age of 250Ma, its emplacement/obduction is quite young and is inferred to be
between the Cretaceous and Eocene. Reworked Eocene carbonates are found as fragments in
younger calcareous sedimentary clastics dated as Late Miocene (Loreto Formation). Post-
emplacement tilting of the ophiolite towards the west perhaps until the Eocene led to the
exposure of the basal harzburgite. After this event, oscillatory uplift occurred wherein the
southern section of the island was first exposed to extreme erosion thus exposing the
metamorphic sole (Nueva Estrella Schist) of the ophiolite (DOC). The latter events marked the
uplift of the northern section which is the presently observable morphology – high relief, high
elevation in the north and eastern section of the island; rolling moderate elevation in the west;
and fragmented and partial submergence of the southern section of the island.
2.1.2.4 Stratigraphy
Based on the Geology and Mineral Resources of the Philippines (GMRP) Volume 1, 2004 of the
Mines and Geosciences Bureau, the study area and vicinity is underlain by the following
formations in order of decreasing geologic age (Figure 21):
Nueva Estrella Schist (Cretaceous)
The Nueva Estrella Schist forms the metamorphic basement of the ophiolite complex in the
region. It consists mainly of garnet-amphibolite, amphibolite schist and biotite-quartz schist. It
forms an irregular window within the ophiolite. The amphibolite schists are typically dark,
distinctly foliated rocks made up predominantly of hornblende or tremolite and mixed with coarse
granoblastic aggregates of epidote. Attitudes of schistosity in the amphibolite schists are variable
but locally parallel to the thrust zone. The chlorite schist exhibits well-developed cleavage and
contains magnetite metacrysts. Petrographic studies reveal the amphibolite schsists to contain
85% hornblende crystals, 75 plagioclase aggregates, 6% quartz, and 2% crystalline calcite and
epidote plates. Accessory minerals include traces of titanite and pyrite. The low concentration of
47 | P a g e
silica indicates that the protoliths of the amphibolite schists may be basaltic rocks or tuffs. This
formation is well distributed in the areas of Melgar Bay, San Jose, Cagdianao, Nonoc and Awasan
Islands.
Ophiolite Complex (Upper Cretaceous)
Overthrusting the Nueva Estrella Schist is an assemblage of ophiolite complex of ultramafic and
mafic rocks consist of residual peridotite, cumulate peridotite, massive and layered gabbro,
sheeted dike complex and pillow basalts. These are extensively exposed in Desolation Point at the
northern tip southward to Mt. Gaboc.
The bulk of ultramafic rocks in Dinagat Island consists principally of 80% harzburgite and encloses
irregular lenticular masses of dunite which form approximately 10% of the remaining area. Two
large massive dunite bodies occur in the northern and southern part of the Dinagat Island. The
400 m thick dunite body in the northern part along 12 x 13 km belt through Mt. Kanbunlio and
the western side of Dessolation Point. The southern part occupies an 18 km stretch in the Albor-
Veloro tectonic zone, with widths that vary from 1-3 km.
The transition zone between the dunite unit and harzburgite tectonite consists of 700 m thick
cyclic succession of harzburgite and dunite interlayers containing massive and disseminated
chromite. Harzburgite layers vary in thickness from 1 m to a few tens of meters, while dunite
layers and tabular lenses range from a few millimeters to 30 m thick, although they are usually
0.5 – 1 m thick. Loreto Formation (Lower Miocene)
The Loreto Formation formerly designated as Loreto Clastics (Wright et al 1958), consists of
polymictic conglomerates at the base and overlain by a succession of sandstones, shales and
mudstones with subordinate amount of tuffites. The formation is present in western coast of
Dinagat Island; Nonoc, Buenavista and Bayagnon Islands. The beds generally strike NW to NE and
dip 20- 35 to the west. The formation overlies the ophiolite complex and overlain by the
Timamana Limestone.
48 | P a g e
Figure 21 - Stratigraphy of Dinagat Islands
49 | P a g e
Timamana Limestone (Mid- Miocene-Pliocene)
The Timamana Limestone consists of massive reef limestone and conformably overlies the Loreto
Formation. The stratotype of this formation is found on the Surigao mainland. The limestone
bodies occur as a series of wide but discontinuous outcrops along the western coast of Dinagat
Island where it forms prominent cliffs and escarpments. It occupies the Tubajon Peninsula in the
north, and in the south from Osmena to Kambagio Point in Melgar Bay. The maximum exposed
thickness inferred from contours of the limestone scarps is 200 m. The limestone is usually tough,
compact, and hard semi-crystalline rock with a splintery sub-conchoidal or granular fractures, and
is generally creamy white in color. It is frequently composed of masses of broken corals, shells
and casts of small gastropods.
Recent Deposits (Quaternary)
Recent deposits consist mainly of latosols and alluvium and local occurrences of shallow marine
sediments and loosely unconsolidated talus. Laterites represent residual products of chemical
weathering of ultramafic and associated rocks. They are characteristically reddish to yellow-
brown latosols composed mainly of iron and aluminum oxides and hydroxides. Nickel-bearing
ferruginous and chromite-bearing laterites are associated with these latosols. The former is
characterized by relatively high porosity, high iron content (40 – 50%) and progressive contents
of Ni and Co contents with depth. The latter are mainly represented by clayey latosols of much
lower porosity and iron content (30 – 70%).
2.1.2.5 Local Geology
Exploration in the MPSA was focus in the immediate delineation of the laterite mineralization
through test pitting and initial drilling program. A very quick ocular inspection on the area have
noted occurrences of some outcropping serpentinized ultramafics consisting of Peridotite
(Harzburgite) and Dunite.
50 | P a g e
2.1.2.6 Deposit Type and Mineralization
The mining claim is mineralized with nickel, chromite, cobalt and iron as determined by previous
studies prominent of which the UNRFNRE (1986) report is. Only nickel and iron are however the
main interests of the company. These minerals concentrate in considerable amount that may
permit economic development. The process of concentration is called laterization which is the
conversion of a rock into soil by chemical weathering and the subsequent leaching out of nickel
into the deeper section of the laterite profile. Ultramafics are the parent materials from where
nickel laterites are normally produced. Under a tropical climate, at least three (3) layers of laterite
are formed namely ferricrete, limonite, and saprolite.
Typical Philippine laterites, such as those in Palawan and Surigao (Northeastern Mindanao), are
characteristically reddish to yellowish brown soils composed chiefly or iron and aluminum oxides,
and hydroxides. The laterite column can be divided into four (4) zones, with the fifth zone as the
underlying undecomposed parent bedrock. The top three (3) layers represent nickeliferous
laterite ore while the fourth layer is serpentinite-saprolite ore zone. The chromite-bearing layer
is the lowest laterite zone - Zone 3. During laterization, about 70 % of NiO, 52 % of the Cr 2O3, 15
% of combined Fe-oxides and 10 % of the MnO compounds, are lost from the original parent
materials. Zoning of the laterite profile is as follows (BMG, 1984):
Zone 1
Consists of surface and reddish-brown zone with iron concretions. It is dusky red to moderate
brown, with low porosity and plasticity. The thickness ranges from 1.8 to 3.6 meters.
Moisture content by weight is 29.3 % and apparent specific gravity of 1.29. Average chemical
contents are 0.73 % Ni, 0.05 % Co and 30 % Fe.
Zone 2
Consists of a zone of plastic laterite, with average thickness of 1.46 meters. It is light brown
with coarsely to fine granular texture, high porosity and contains more moisture than the
overlying Zone 1. Moisture content is about 39.5 % by weight with apparent specific gravity
of 1.29 (dry). Average chemical contents are 1.02 % Ni, 0.107 % Co and 50 % Fe.
51 | P a g e
Zone 3
Consists of a zone of variegated laterite and magnetite concentration, with average thickness
of about 2.8 meters. It is yellowish brown to yellowish orange, with high porosity moisture
content (46.71 %) and apparent specific gravity of 0.96 - 1.09 (dry). Average chemical contents
are 1.02 % Ni, 0.107 % Co and 50 % Fe.
Zone 4
Consists of a zone of decomposed serpentinite or clastic derivatives. It is greenish yellow to

olive gray, soft on top but hard towards fresher bedrock. It is less porous and contains relict
structures of the original rocks prior to laterization. Veins of garnierite and chrysotile are
present. The thickness varies from 1 to 8 meters, with moisture content of 30.40 %) and
apparent specific gravity of 1.20. Average chemical contents are 1.7 to 2.0 % Ni, 0.043 % Co
and 1 to 20 % Fe.
In summary, Zone 1 of nickel laterite SMC area can be physically correlated with the “Red
Limonite” layer of the tropical laterite model; Zone 2 with the “Yellow Limonite” (brown) layer,
Zone 3 with the “Transition” layer, and Zone 4 with the “Saprolite-Garnierite-Serpentine” layer.
Zone 5 and the “Fresh Rock” layer both represent the least decomposed to unweathered
underlying ultramafic bedrock.
52 | P a g e
Figure 22 - Typical Laterite Profile
2.1.2.7 Inducement of Subsidence, Liquefaction, Landslide
2.1.2.7.1 Erosion Susceptibility
Libjo has about 58% of its total land area which are susceptible to severe erosion. These
areas are mostly found in slope with above 18% or above due to its soil profile.
53 | P a g e
2.1.2.7.2 Earthquake
The Philippines is situated along the circum –Pacific seismic Belt where more than 80% of the world’s
earthquakes occur. Phillippine seismicity is mainly related to crustal underthrusting along several
subduction systems and partly to strike-slip movement along transcurrent faults. This is clearly shown
in the Figure 23 showing the seismic map and the distribution of shallow focus earthquake epicentres.
Near Dinagat Island and mainland Surigao, there are several epicenters located east and a few
kilometers offshore. The interval of recurrence of earthquake along the project area is summarized in
Table 11. It can be noted that earthquake with magnitude between 5.2 and <5.8 recurs every 2 years
while stronger earthquake (magnitude between 7.3 and <8.2) happens every 51 years.
Earthquake hazard and risk map is shown in Figure 24. The province of Dinagat Islands is located
in a seismically active region (it is near the Philippine Trench which is considered as the most
seismically active generator in the Philippines) wherein risk to earthquakes is high.
Table 11 - Recurrence of Earthquake by Magnitude

Annual Rate (Frequency/year
Magnitude (Ms) Interval (year)
5.2 to < 5.8 0.52997 2
5.8 to < 6.4 0.19863 5
6.4 to < 7.0 0.07444 13
7.0 to < 7.3 0.02791 36
7.3 to < 8.2 0.01946 51
Source: Thenhaus et al. 1994 as cited by OSMC
2.1.2.7.3 Ground Motion or Ground Shaking
Ground motion or ground shaking is one of the seismic hazards that can cause damage to
structures due directly by vibration. The intensity of ground shaking is dependent on magnitude
(decreasing with distance from the source) and ground condition. The maximum acceleration or
peak ground acceleration and duration of strong shaking are frequently employed in estimating
ground shaking which a structure can sustain. Probabilistic estimates of ground motion was
adopted by Thenhaus, et al, (1994), which provides estimates of peak ground acceleration values
with 90 % probability of non-exceedance in 50 years. Considering that the site is underlain by
older and competent rocks, the expected acceleration due to earthquake can be considered as
that of hard rock. Estimated peak horizontal ground acceleration for the site is 0.25g (Figure 25).
54 | P a g e
2.1.2.7.4 Tsunami
Tsunamis can be generated along faults extending into the sea, provided that the earthquake
originated at the shallow depths, and its magnitude is sufficiently high (e.g., magnitude 7.0). In
the Manila Observatory project, Mapping Philippine Vulnerability to Environmental Disaster
Project (1994), the Dinagat Island was classified to be at medium risk to tsunamis with potential
local and foreign generators (Figure 26).
2.1.2.7.5 Mass Wasting and Landslides
The project site occupies a topography having slopes greater than than 18%. The generally steep
slopes of the project site indicate that it is prone to mass wasting in the form of erosions, slumps,
slides and rock falls. Contributory to these mass wasting are the occurrence of heavy rainfall, strong
earthquake and man –made activities.
The Dinagat Province is located in a region that is highly susceptible to landslides. The occurrence
of earthquakes in steep landslide-prone areas greatly increases the likelihood that landslides will
occur, due to ground shaking alone or shaking- caused dilation of soil materials, which allows
rapid infiltration of water.
2.1.2.7.6 Liquefaction
Liquefaction occurs when vibrations or water pressure within a mass of soil cause the soil particles to
lose contact with one another. As a result, the soil behaves like a liquid, has an inability to support
weight and can flow down very gentle slopes. This condition is usually temporary and is most often
caused by an earthquake vibrating water-saturated fill or unconsolidated soil. Based on Figure 27, the
project area is not susceptible to liquefaction. However, given that the soils in the area can be
considered loose (sandy loam, sandy clay loam) and that the area is seismically active, the occurrence
of liquefaction in some areas may still be possible if the conditions causing liquefaction are met.
55 | P a g e
Figure 23 - Seismic Map and Distribution of Shallow Focus Earthquake
56 | P a g e
Figure 24 - Earthquake Hazard and Risk Map
57 | P a g e
Figure 25 - Peak Horizontal Ground Acceleration
58 | P a g e
Figure 26 - Tsunami Hazard and Risk Map
59 | P a g e
Figure 27 - Liquefaction Susceptibility Map
60 | P a g e
2.1.3 Pedology
2.1.3.1 Introduction
The Province of the Dinagat Islands is one of the provinces in the Philippines that has no Detailed
soil classification and surveys. Because of this, there are faucity of soil related information about
the Dinagat island soils. Additionally, because of the government declaration that it belongs to
the highly prospective Dinagat Ophiolite of the Surigao Mineral Reservation, within the
Municipality of Libjo province of Dinagat Islands limits the government efforts to include the
province under soil surveys and classification.
For this matter, a soil assessment or a special soil investigation study has to be undertaken. The
data gathered in this soil assessment study will serve as basis for the formulation of field and soil
environmental management practices suitable for the particular mine site. Furthermore, the post
mining land use rehabilitation/revegetation potential of the area can be properly evaluated aside
from other benefits that can be obtained from this assessment study.
The only known soil characteristics available in the literature was the Soil Health Assessment-
National Soil Sampling and Testing Project Phase II led by the Bureau of Soils and Water
Management in partnership with the DARegional Field Offices (RFOs) and Local Government Units
(LGUs).
Soils assessments study of STAGNO Mining Corporation Project in the Municipality of Libjo,
Province of Dinagat Islands was conducted by the Axceltechs Inc. EIA soil assessment team on
October 14 – 16, 2021 to have an initial baseline soil quality characteristics of MPSA No. 022-94-
x (SMR) Amended I consisting of two tenement parcels having an area of 1,149.8301hectares. The
proposed project tenement area consisting of two parcels (Parcel 1 is 729 hectares and Parcel 2
is 420.8301 hectares). This report deals mainly on the soils quality of MPSA No. 022-94-x (SMR)
Amended I.
The data gathered in this soil assessment study will serve as basis for the formulation of field and
soil management practices suitable for the particular mine site during its construction and
operations phases. Furthermore, the post mining land use rehabilitation/revegetation potential
of the area can be properly evaluated aside from other benefits that can be obtained from this
assessment study.
61 | P a g e
2.1.3.2 Materials and Methods
2.1.3.2.1 Reconnaissance and Ocular Surveys
The Initial field activity for the soil pedology investigations is a soil reconnaissance and an ocular
survey/inspection by the Axceltechs EIA soil pedology study team on October 15, 2021. Another
separate field work activities that involved the field assessments of the present land use;
establishment of soil sampling sites and; the soil sampling activities on the two parcels were made
on October 16 - 17, 2021.
2.1.3.2.1.1 Brief General Description of The Province of Dinagat Islands
Dinagat Island is a northern extension of the mountains of Mindanao, forming an island separate
from the remainder of Mindanao during the Pliocene epoch (Dicserson 1928; Taylor 1934, Heaney
1986), when the Eurasian Plate and Indian-Australian Plate collided with the Philippine Sea Plate
(Hamilton 1973). Dinagat Island is thought to have formed as a part of a land bridge between
Northern Mindanao and Eastern Visayas (Leyte, Samar, and Bohol) in the late Pleistocene epoch
(Leviton 1963; Heany 1986), facilitating the migration of species from Mindanao to Eastern
Visayas and vice versa. The island is considered one of the areas in the Philippines characterized
as ultramafic outcrops together with Palawan, Samar, Zambales, Zamboanga, Mindoro, and Sulu
(Baker et al 1992; Balce et al 1976). The Dinagat Island is rich in chromitite deposits similar to
Zambales and Palawan (Yumul 1992; Yumul et. al., 2000; Zhou et al 2000). Alluvial platinum-group
minerals have been panned also in Dinagat Island together with Samar (Franco et al 1993;
Nakagawa and Franco 1995).
Geologically, the island was composed of recent alluvium derived from MioceneePalaeogene
rock. The Island lies between the Philippine Fault and the Philippine Trench, and hosts the largest
layered chromite deposits in Leyte-Samar-Dinagat region (MGB et. al., 1990).
The whole province boasts of metallic and nonmetallic deposits, mostly chromite and gold with
other byproducts in appreciable amounts (Provincial Development Council, 1993). Dinagat Island
has a soil pH that ranges from neutral to acidic (pH 4.8 to 6.9); average organic matter (OM) was
2.25%; phosphorus 1 to 37 ppm, textural grade dominated by Dinagat clay loam (70%), 20%
classified as Cabatohan loam, and the remaining 10% classified as Bolinao clay (Haribon 2004).
This type of soil was frequently noted with pH higher in the subsoil than in the topsoil. This soil
was often associated with subsoils high in aluminum, low in calcium, and pH very near or below
the zero point of charge; such subsoil will adsorb only trace amounts of calcium, magnesium, or
potassium because of low negative charge density (Mekaru and Ueliara 1972).
62 | P a g e
2.1.3.2.2 Soil Sampling
A. Disturbed Sampling
The soil Investigations covered the four (4) soil sampling stations within the MPSA No. 022-94-x
(SMR) Amended I. Two (2) of the soil sampling stations were made in Parcel 1 that belongs to
Brgy. San Jose and, two (2) in Parcel 2 within the jurisdiction of Brgy. Bayanihan (Figure 28).
Figure 28 - Soil Sampling Stations
The site selection criteria of the four soil sampling stations namely Soil sampling station 1 (SS1),
Soil sampling station 2 (SS2), Soil sampling station 3 (SS3), Soil sampling station 4 (SS4) within the
proposed project site coverage were made in accordance with the present land use, and slope.
Their corresponding locations, geographic coordinates and photographs are presented in Table
12.
From each soil sampling location, disturbed composite soil samples were collected within the 0 –
30 cm. depth using an ordinary mini trowel. The representative soil samples were randomly
collected in a zigzag pattern within the selected sampling stations. There are at least 10 - 15
random soil sampling points for one composite sample. Avoidance of any physical ground
disturbance during the sample collection activity was strictly observed like trampling, the
presence of organic debris, stone fragments and other unwanted litters were carefully removed
from the collected composite samples on site.
63 | P a g e
Using plastic sacks/sheets, each of the four (4) composite samples were manually mixed
thoroughly to homogenous the sample and then, quartered twice, rejecting the two (2) quarter
portions of the sample. From the remaining 2 quarter approximately two (2) kilograms of the
samples were finally collected per location and kept in a 12” X 16” polyethylene plastic bag and
labeled accordingly.
All of the laboratory chemical analyses were done at the CRL Environmental corporation
laboratory, Bldg. 2, Berthaphil Compound 1, Berthaphil Inc. Industrial Park, Jose Abad Santos Ave.,
CFZ Pampanga, submitted on October 19, 2021 for the soil chemical characteristics. Soil physical
property (i.e. Particle size distribution analysis) was made in Geotechnics Philippines Inc., Soils
and Testing laboratory Sauyo Road Novaliches, Q.C.
Table 12 - Soil Sampling Locations and Coordinates of the and their Present Land Use.
Location and Location and Location and Location and
Coordinates Coordinates Coordinates Coordinates
SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4
Parcel 1, Brgy. San Jose, Parcel 1, Brgy. San Jose, Parcel 2, Brgy. Parcel 2, Brgy.
Libjo, Dinagat Islands Libjo, Dinagat Islands Bayanihan, Libjo, Dinagat Bayanihan, Libjo, Dinagat
Islands Islands
N 10° 11’ 20.08” N 10° 10’ 23.18” N 10° 11’ 30.21” N 10° 10’ 36.11”
E 125° 37’ 09.99” E 125° 37’ 01.80” E 125°33’29.22” E 125° 33’ 37.42”
Present Land Use
64 | P a g e
Open Shrubland/grassland Cropland with dense Idle Cropland,

Grassland/Shrubland Interplanted with shrub grass understory, interplanted with Shrub
Interplanted with shrub Forest trees, interplanted with trees species
Forest trees coconut and shrub trees
species
The parameters requested for the chemical and physical analyses are presented in Table 13.
Laboratory results of analyses were reported on November 23, 2021.
Table 13 - Requested Soil Chemical and Physical Analysis Parameters

CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Organic Matter (OM, %)
Electrical Conductivity, (EC, µS cm-1)
Macronutrients
Nitrogen, (N %)
Phosphorus (Olsen P, ppm)
Calcium (Ca, ppm)
Sodium (Na, ppm)
Potassium, K (ppm)
Metallic Micronutrients
Zinc (Zn, ppm)
Iron (Fe, ppm)
Manganese (Mn, ppm)
Magnesium, (Mg, ppm)
Physical Properties
Soil Separates (Texture % Sand, % Silt, % Clay)
Heavy Metals
Arsenic (As, ppm)
Copper (Cu, ppm)
65 | P a g e
Cadmium (Cd, ppm)

Mercury (Hg, ppm)
Lead, (pb, ppm)
Nickel (Ni, ppm)
B. Undisturbed Sampling
The undisturbed sampling was used to sample the soil within the vicinity of the two parcels (Parcel
1 and Parcel 2). The sampling technique implies that the soil is to be sampled in its natural state
as much as possible. Because of stony and the sandy texture of the surface soil 0 – 10 cm depth)
in the area, core sampling intended for surface soil Bulk density determinations was scrapped.
Instead only the Slake test samplings were made and was immediately analyzed in situ.
The soils in the province is basically clay and sandy loam types. The soils in the mainland area is
generally classified as loam soil characterized as permeable, moderately drained and highly
suitable for agricultural development. The Dinagat island soils, is dominated by Dinagat clay loam
which comprised 70%, 20% of Cabatohan loam, and 10% of Bolinao clay steep phase. It is
characterized as friable, slightly sticky and granular in nature.
B1. Slake Test
The slake test measures the stability of soil when exposed to rapid wetting. This test is qualitative
and should be measured on air-dried soil fragments or aggregates.
Healthy soil has good organic matter content and is full of microorganisms that secrete glues
which create the aggregated crumb structure we want to see.
When aggregates with a good soil structure held together by organic matter and biological glues
are submerged in water they stay together, even when shaken about.
When aggregates with a poor soil structure held together by compaction are submerged in water
they fall apart, without even being shaken at all.
The assessment should be done with dry soil samples. To measure the stability of the natural soil
fragments the slake tests was conducted in-situ.
66 | P a g e
The slake test were done in all of the four sampling locations and, is an indicator of soil
cohesiveness especially when rapid soil wetting occurs. Unstable soil may begin to erode simply
because it becomes wet.
The soil physical property will determine the soil stability in terms of erosion potentials even when
mechanical manipulation is employed (i.e. tillage, excavations). The assessment was done with
sun dried fragment of surface soil samples and is further explained below:
A soil fragment (at least 1 cm x 1 cm in size) is gently immersed in distilled or rainwater and
response to rapid wetting is observed for a period of time (i.e. from the time of immersion to 10
minutes). The response to wetting is recorded by taking a photograph within 5 seconds after
immersion and at the end of 10 minutes). The soil is therefore classified in terms of its response
to wetting and is described below:
Slake test is not applicable on sandy/stony soils (Class 0).

Class 1 = Very unstable. Soil fragment disintegrates in <5 seconds; very fine bubbles may
emerge.
Class 2 = Unstable. Soil fragment goes slumping within 5‐10 seconds.
Class 3 = Moderately Stable. Slumping of sub-crust but most of the crust is intact.
Class 4 = Very Stable. No slumping of particles is evident after several minutes of being
immersed in water; whole fragment remains intact with no swelling; large bubbles may emerge.
2.1.3.3 Results and Discussions
2.1.3.3.1 Soil Chemical Properties of the Soil Sampling Locations
2.1.3.3.1.1 Surface Soil Organic Matter Content
Soil organic matter (SOM) is the fraction of the soil that consists of plant or animal tissue in various
stages of breakdown (decomposition). Most of the Philippine productive agricultural soils have
between 3 and 6% organic matter. Soil organic matter contributes to soil productivity in many
different ways.
The presence of stable soil organic matter in soil (often referred to as humus) has the following
beneficial benefits:
67 | P a g e
Physical Benefits:
• Enhances aggregate stability,

• improving water infiltration and soil aeration,
• reducing runoff.
• Improves water holding capacity.
• Reduces the stickiness of clay soils making them easier to till.
• Reduces surface crusting, facilitating seedbed preparation.
Chemical Benefits:
• Increases the soil’s CEC or its ability to hold onto and supply over time essential nutrients
such as calcium, magnesium and potassium.
• Improves the ability of a soil to resist pH change; this is also known as buffering capacity
• Accelerates decomposition of soil minerals over time, making the nutrients in the minerals
available for plant uptake.
Biological Benefits:
• Provides food for the living organisms in the soil.

• Enhances soil microbial biodiversity and activity which can help in the suppression of
diseases and pests.
• Enhances pore space through the actions of soil microorganisms. This helps to increase
infiltration and reduce runoff.
Figure 29 summarizes the Titrimetry (Walkley and Black) laboratory procedure of determining the
surface soil organic matter content of the proposed nickel mining project (Parcels 1 and 2). The
lowest and highest SOM content was found in SS1 (Parcel 1) of 1 0.9700%; 3.6700%, for SS3
(Parcel 2), respectively. Using the BSWM set of SOM standard SS1 in Parcel 1 is rated as very low
and, SS3 in Parcel 2 is rated t high. The observed differences can be attributed to the present land
use. Parcel 1 is an open grassland with spatial shrub trees species where, deposition of SOM is
enhanced by the litter fall. SS3 in Parcel 2 on the other hand is a cropland moderately eroded
where there are areas highly disturbed brought about by farming activities. Common practice in
this areas is to incorporate any organic stables into the soil and allowed to deccompose may have
contributed to the observed high SOM content in the surface soil.
68 | P a g e
Figure 29 -Surface Soil Organic Matter Content
Figure 30 - Surface Soil Total Nitrogen Content
69 | P a g e
2.1.3.3.1.2 Surface Soil Total Nitrogen Content
Of all the essential nutrients, nitrogen (N) is required by plants in the largest quantity and is most
frequently the limiting factor in crop productivity.
• In plant tissue, the nitrogen content ranges from 1 and 6%.

• Proper management of nitrogen is important because it is often the most limiting nutrient
in crop production and easily lost from the soil system.
In the soil the forms of nitrogen available for plant uptake is in the form of:
• Ammonium
• Nitrate
The Functions of nitrogen in plants
• Nitrogen is an essential element of all amino acids. Amino acids are the building blocks of
proteins.
• Nitrogen is also a component of nucleic acids, which form the DNA of all living things and
holds the genetic code.
• Nitrogen is a component of chlorophyll, which is the site of carbohydrate formation
(photosynthesis). Chlorophyll is also the substance that gives plants their green color.
o Photosynthesis occurs at high rates when there is sufficient nitrogen.
o A plant receiving sufficient nitrogen will typically exhibit vigorous plant growth.
Leaves will also develop a dark green color.
Being the most dynamic among the essential nutrients, Nitrogen is the most unstable in soils and,
can be easily lost through various transformations described below:
Losses of Nitrogen from the Soil
• Denitrification: Conversion of nitrate to atmospheric forms of nitrogen

• Volatilization: Loss of gaseous ammonia to the atmosphere
• Run-off
• Leaching
• Consumption by plants and other organisms (Crop removal)
70 | P a g e
Shown in Figure 30 is the laboratory dertmination of the surface soil N content of the sampling
stations of parcel 1 and parcel 2. When compared to the BSWM standard for total nitrogen the
soil sampling stations ranges low to medium total Nitrogen content of 1,460.0, 3,370.0, 2,160.0,
1,810.0 ppm for SS1, SS2, SS3, and SS4, respectively. The inherent steep slope of the project site
with loose granular structure may in SS1 have lost soil total nitrogen on its immediate surface
through erosion. Other factors may involve crop removal in a lower Total N content of the
immedite soil surface of the cropped areas of Parcel 2.
2.1.3.3.1.3 Surface Soil Total Phosphorus Content
Figure 31 - Surface Soil Total Phosphorus Content
Phosphorus (P), next to nitrogen, is often the most limiting nutrient for crop production.
Phosphorus’ primary role in a plant is to store and transfer the energy produced by
photosynthesis for use in growth and reproductive processes.
Adequate P levels promote root growth, stimulate tillering in grain crops, and hasten their
maturity, increase water use efficiency and grain yield. Thus, P deficiency stunts vegetative
growth and grain yield. Soil phosphorus is relatively stable in soil, and moves very little compared
to nitrogen. This lack of mobility and low solubility reduces availability of P fertilizer as it is fixed
71 | P a g e
by soil P-compounds. Fixed P is not lost, it becomes slowly available to crops over several years
depending on soil and P compound type.
P availability can be managed by liming acid soils, using measures that increase organic matter,
and proper placement of P fertilizer affecting how efficiently P is used by crops. P losses can be
reduced by applying appropriate measures to reduce erosion and runoff.
The total P content of the soil sampling stations in Parcels 1 and 2 are shown in Figure 31. When
compared to the BSWM set of standards for Total P the results shows that the soil has a very high
amount of Total P in the immediate surface of the soil (>50 ppm). The highest amount of P in the
soil was given by SS2 in Parcel 1 of 1700.0, followed by SS1 of 1320.0, SS4 in Parcel 2 of 640.0 and
SS3 of 358.0 ppm, respectively. The area in Parcel 2 being a cropland may have been fertilized by
phosphate containing fertilizers (14-14-14, 16-20-0, 0-20-0) may have accumulated P on the
immediate soil surface and is literally fixed by the soil caused by the naturally acidic soil reaction
(pH) of lateritic soils, thus being picked up by the very recent soil testing activities.
2.1.3.3.1.4 Surface Soil Potassium Content
Figure 32 - Surface Soil Potassium Content
72 | P a g e
Potassium (K) is an essential plant nutrient and is required in large amounts for proper growth
and reproduction of plants. Potassium is considered second only to nitrogen, when it comes to
nutrients needed by plants, and is commonly considered as the “quality nutrient.”
It affects the plant shape, size, color, taste and other measurements attributed to healthy
produce. Plants absorb potassium in its ionic form, K+.
Potassium has many different roles in plants:
• In Photosynthesis, potassium regulates the opening and closing of stomata, and therefore
regulates CO2 uptake.
• Potassium triggers activation of enzymes and is essential for production of Adenosine
Triphosphate (ATP). ATP is an important energy source for many chemical processes
taking place in plant issues.
• Potassium plays a major role in the regulation of water in plants (osmo-regulation). Both
uptake of water through plant roots and its loss through the stomata are affected by
potassium.
• Known to improve drought resistance.
• Protein and starch synthesis in plants require potassium as well. Potassium is essential at
almost every step of the protein synthesis. In starch synthesis, the enzyme responsible for
the process is activated by potassium.
• Activation of enzymes – potassium has an important role in the activation of many growth
related enzymes in plants.
•
The laboratory results of the soil surface content of Potassium using the Inductively Coupled
Plasma- Optical emission Spectrocopy (ICP - OES) of four the soil sampling stations is summarized
in Figure 32.
All of the sampling stations exhibited K deficiency ranging from very low K content of 9.2, 22.0
ppm in SS1 and SS2, Parcel 1, respectively to low K content of 47.0 ppm for both SS3 and SS4 in
Parcel 2. These results is a common K nutrient status in lateritic soils. K is highly soluble in water
and is easily lost in the soil by leaching. The soil of the proposed project area being a highly leached
soil, most of the basic cations in the surface are lost by leaching, and what is remaining are the
mutltiple valent cations like iron, and aluminum and other metals.
73 | P a g e
2.1.3.3.1.5 Surface Soil Exchangeable Calcium Content
Calcium (Ca) is an essential plant nutrient. As the divalent cation (Ca2+), it is required for structural
roles in the cell wall and membranes, as a counter‐cation for inorganic and organic anions in the
vacuole, and as an intracellular messenger in the cytosol (Marschner, 1995). Calcium deficiency is
rare in nature, but excessive Ca restricts plant communities on calcareous soils. Calcium is taken
up by roots from the soil solution and delivered to the shoot via the xylem.
Calcium has two major effects in the soil. One is as a bonding agent in the aggregation of soil
particles, wherein it helps to bind organic and inorganic substances. It is important in the
development of a good soil structure to minimize soil erosion. Secondly, it acts as a nutrient filler,
to maintain balance among nutrients and occupy space which otherwise would be taken up by
acid elements.
Figure 33 - Surface Soil Calcium Content
Using the laboratory ICP- OES test method of determining the concentration of Calcium in the soil
surface of Parcel 1 and Parcel 2 is shown in Figure 33. The concentration values are compared to
the BSWM rating for Calcium. There is very low to high amount of calcium on soil sampling
locations 1, 2 and 3 of, 84.0, 192.0,180.0ppm, respectively. Calcium concentrations in SS4 of
Parcel 2 is 3,990.0 ppm, and is rated as high. Presence of calcium in Parcel 2 is one of the rare soil
characteristics of the soils of Libjo with the presence of natural vegetation (Forest floor is under
limestone).
74 | P a g e
2.1.3.3.1.6 Surface Soil Magnesium Content
Magnesium (Mg) is one of the essential element for plant growth and development. Magnesium
is the 8th most abundant mineral element on earth (Maguire, and Cowan, 2002). Magnesium in
soils originates from source rock material containing various types of silicates. In the soil the
availability of Mg to plants depends on various factors: the distribution and chemical properties
of the source rock material and its grade of weathering, site specific climatic and anthropogenic
factors and, in agricultural systems, to a high degree on the agronomic management practices
established at the specific production site including the cultivated crop species and crop rotation,
cropping intensity and organic and mineral fertilization practice (Mikkelsen 2010; Scheffer and
Schachtschabel 2002).
The role of magnesium in the soil is that Mg is the central core of the chlorophyll molecule in plant
tissue. Thus, if Mg is deficient, the shortage of chlorophyll results in poor and stunted plant
growth. Magnesium also helps to activate specific enzyme systems. Enzymes are complex
substances that build, modify, or break down compounds as part of a plant's normal metabolism.
Figure 34 - Surface Soil Magnesium Content
The levels of exchangeable Mg in the soil sampling stations are shown in Figure 34. The results
showed that the four soil sampling stations have 7,840.0, 9,600.0, 22,000.0 and 23,500.0 ppm of
Mg for Sampling Locations SS1, SS2, Parcel 2, SS3, and SS4, respectively. When compared to the
75 | P a g e
BSWM set of standards for Mg it showed that all of the soil sampling locations contains very high
Mg at the soil surface when compared to the adequacy level set by the BSWM of 840.0 ppm.
The presence of high concentration of magnesium in the soil surface is not particularly harmful.
When plants growing in soil with high levels of Mg, excessive quantities of magnesium do not
appear quickly. Too much magnesium inhibits the uptake of calcium, and the plant displays
general symptoms of an excess of salts; stunted growth, and dark-colored vegetation, and this
were all observed on the present vegetation of the proposed project site.
2.1.3.3.1.7 Surface Soil Manganese Content
Manganese (Mn) is the eleventh abundant element forming the Earth's crust. In terms of
abundance, manganese-containing compounds are after iron (Fe) in the earth's crust. Total
amount of manganese in soil is between 20.0 to 3,000.0 ppm and 600.0 ppm on average. Divalent
manganese is absorbed by clay minerals and organic material, and in terms of plant nutrition,
divalent manganese ions (Mn2+) is most important (Malakouti and Tehrani, 1999).
In soil manganese occurs as exchangeable manganese, manganese oxide, organic manganese and
component of Ferro-manganese silicate minerals, the manganese ion (Mn2+) is similar in size to
magnesium (Mg2+) and ferrous iron (Fe2+) and can substitute for these elements in silicate
minerals and iron oxides. Manganese reactions in soils are quite complex. The amount of available
manganese is influenced by soil pH, organic matter, moisture, and soil aeration (Schulte and
Kelling, 1999).
76 | P a g e
Figure 35 - Surface Soil Manganese Content
The biochemical role of Manganese In plants is listed below:
• Divalent manganese ions (Mn2+) is converted to Mn3+ or Mn4+ easily, therefore in the plant
manganese plays an important role on oxidation and reduction processes, as electron
transport in photosynthesis.
• Moreover manganese acts as an activator of many enzymes, (more than 35 different
enzymes). Manganese has important role on activates several enzymes which involve to
oxidation reactions, carboxylation, carbohydrates metabolism, phosphorus reactions and
citric acid cycle.
• Manganese has an effective role in lipids metabolism, and due to effective role of
manganese inthe nitrate reduction enzymes, nitrate will accumulation in leaves which are
facing with manganese deficiency.
Figure 35 summarizes the result of the laboratory ICP - OES analysis of the surface soil of the
four soil sampling stations. Two of the soil sampling stations have low Manganese
concentrations on the soil surface (SS3 and SS4, Parcel 2) of 147.0, 341.0 ppm Mn, respectively
when compared to the Mn upper limit given by Lindsay of 3,000.0 ppm. Mn concentrations in
Parcel 1, ranges from 3,550.0 to 3910.0 for Parcel 1 SS1 and SS2, respectively and is considered
to be high.
77 | P a g e
2.1.3.3.1.8 Surface Soil Zinc Content
Figure 36 - Surface Soil Zinc Content
Zinc (Zn) is an essential micronutrient for plant growth; it plays a critical role in the function of
enzymes and in nitrogen metabolism of plants. Although it is essential for their growth, crops take
up relatively small amounts of zinc (generally < 0.5 kg-1hectare-1crop). Zinc is a divalent cation
(Zn2+) and its radius is about the same size as iron and magnesium, which allows it to substitute
for these ions in soil minerals such as hornblende and biotite. Most soil Zn occurs in mineral
structures, but Zn also occurs as salts of varying solubility (e.g. ZnS, ZnCO3 and ZnO) and on the
exchange sites of clay minerals and organic matter. Historically, Zn deficiency was widespread on
highly weathered soils and water - logged soils. However, due to the widespread application of
Zn fertilizers over years, Zn deficiency is now much less common.
The bioavailability of Zn is determined by several factors, the most important of which is pH. The
solubility of Zn decreases with increasing pH. For instance, in the range of 5.5 to 7.0 the
concentration of Zn in the soil solution may decrease 30 to 45 times for each unit increase in soil
pH. Other factors that decrease the availability of Zn in the soil solution include: high clay content,
high phosphorus and low soil temperatures. However, the bioavailability of Zn at a given pH may
also depend on the quantity of natural chelates from organic matter, and other factors.
Zinc deficiency causes distinct symptoms such as interveinal yellowing, stunting and leaf
distortion. On lettuce zinc deficiency appears as severe stunting and yellowing along the edges of
78 | P a g e
the leaves that turn brown and “papery”. Zn sufficiency levels for annual crops range from
approximately 15 to 30 ppm in leaf tissue, with values above 200.0 rarely observed. Leaf levels
of 300.0 to 400.0 ppm can be toxic to crop plants.
The surface zinc content of the proposed nickel mining project is presented in Figure 36. When
compared to the Zinc standard of the upper limit given by Lindsay of 30 ppm, all of the Soil
sampling stations in Parcels 1 and 2 way below the upper limit of 300.0 ppm.
2.1.3.3.1.9 Surface Soil Iron Content
Figure 37 - Surface Soil Iron Content
Iron is the fourth most abundant element found in soil though it is largely present in forms
that cannot be taken up by plants. Iron, in small amounts, is essential for healthy plant growth
and is classed as a micronutrient. It is important for the development and function of
chlorophyll and a range of enzymes and proteins. It also plays a role in respiration, nitrogen
fixation, energy transfer and metabolism. As with other nutrients, plants can have too much
iron but this primarily affects the uptake of other nutrients rather than producing direct
toxicity symptoms.
According to plantprobs.net, the amount of iron and its availability in soil is influenced by the
following:
79 | P a g e
• pH ‑ high pH reduces iron availability, low pH increases it

• Organic matter ‑ organic matter provides iron and makes it more readily available
• Moisture ‑ excess water in the soil, particularly in acidic soils, increases iron availability
even to the point of toxicity
• Aeration and compaction ‑ compacted and/or poorly aerated soils have an increased
iron availability, particularly if the soil is acidic
• Phosphorus ‑ excess phosphorus inhibits the uptake of iron
• Nitrogen ‑ certain forms of nitrogen can reduce iron uptake
• Zinc ‑ zinc deficiency can increase the uptake of iron in some plants, excess zinc
decreases iron uptake
• Manganese ‑ excess manganese inhibits the uptake of iron
• Potassium ‑ potassium deficiency may increase iron uptake
• Molybdenum ‑ excess molybdenum can reduce iron uptake especially in alkaline soils
• Nickel ‑ excess nickel can reduce the uptake of iron
• Bicarbonate ‑ bicarbonate in the soil can reduce iron uptake.
Fe content of the sampled locations within the proposed project is presented in Figure 37. All of
the sampling locations are enriched with concentrations of Fe in the surface of 197,000.0,
158,000.0, 25,900.0, 57,000.0 ppm for the SS1, SS2, SS3 and SS4, respectively. When compared
to the upper limit given by Lindsay of 550,000.0 ppm, all of the sampling station have way below
the upper limit standard. This indicate an acceptable Fe content however, visible Fe deficiency, or
Fe chlorosis, is common in many plants around the proposed project site were observed during
the assessment. This visible deficiency disorder on this type of soils is not always attributable to
Fe deficiency; this condition is known as calcium-induced iron chlorosis (Lindsay, 1979).
2.1.3.3.1.10 Surface Soil Sodium Content
Though not a plant food nutrient, sodium plays a critical role in soil and vegetation health. The
primary problem posed by high sodium is not a toxicity hazard, but a rapid decline in soil structure
that can begin when sodium base saturation exceeds the critical 5% level. High sodium reduces
soil permeability, resulting in drainage and compaction problems that cause a decline in
vegetation vigor.
The exchangeable sodium (Na) in soil is very necessary for the plant in order to maintain turgidity
of the cell wall and, is also needed in large quantities by plants. However, excess level of this
essential element in the soil is detrimental as, it causes wilting as the plant loses water from their
tissues thru plasmolysis.
80 | P a g e
According to Gidigasu and Kuma (1987) a lateritic soil profile is characterized by the presence of
three major horizons include the pallid or leached zone overlying the parent rock uioxide, the
sesquioxide rich lateritic horizon and the mottled zone with evidence of enrichment of
sesquioxide. The first layer is where most of sodium can be found.
Soils high in sodium are characterized by a poor soil structure and low infiltration rate, are poorly
aerated and are difficult to cultivate. They contain clay that swells and disperses when wet;
dispersion shows up as a fine suspension of clay in the soil water.
Figure 38 shows the laboratory test results of the sodium content of the four soil sampling
stations. All of the soil sampling stations when compared to the BSWM standard for sodium have
very low sodium content in its immediate surface of 8.2, 19.0, 18.0, 19.0 ppm for SS1, SS2, SS3
and SS4, respectively. This indicate that the soils of the proposed project sites are stable and, is
not prone to erosion.
Figure 38 - Surface Soil Sodium Content
81 | P a g e
2.1.3.3.1.11 Surface Soil Electrical Conductivity
Soil electrical conductivity (EC) measures the ability of soil water to carry electrical current.
Electrical conductivity is an electrolytic process that takes place principally through water-filled
pores. Cations (Ca2+, Mg2+, K+, Na+, and NH4+) and anions (SO4 2-, Cl-, NO3 -, and HCO3 -) from salts
dissolved in soil water carry electrical charges and conduct the electrical current. Consequently,
the concentration of ions determines the EC of soils. In agriculture, EC has been used principally
as a measure of soil salinity however, in non-saline soils, EC can be an estimate of other soil
properties, such as soil moisture and soil depth.
The relationship of soil EC to the soil function is that, it does not directly affect plant growth but
has been used as an indirect indicator of the amount of nutrients available for plant uptake and
salinity levels. EC has been used as a surrogate measure of salt concentration, organic matter,
cation-exchange capacity, soil texture, soil thickness, nutrients (e.g., nitrate), water-holding
capacity, and drainage conditions.
The range of electrical conductivity value of the four soil sampling stations using the laboratory
method of conductimetry is shown in Figure 39. EC values of 8.2, 19.0, 18.0, 19.0 µS cm-1 for SS1,
SS2, SS3 and SS4, respectively. The BSWM set of standards for EC indicated that the soils of the
proposed project site is having a very low EC therefore is considered a good soil. Thus, the results
show that the soil around that area are suitable for the growth of plants in terms of EC.
Figure 39 - Surface Soil Electrical Conductivity
82 | P a g e
2.1.3.3.2 Heavy Metal Analysis of the Soil Sampling Stations
Global industrialization and human social and agricultural activities have an effect on
environmental pollution and the global ecosystem.
The most important sources of heavy metals in the environment are the anthropogenic activities
such as mining, smelting procedures, steel and iron industry, chemical industry, traffic, and
agriculture as well as domestic activities (Cosma et.al., 2008; Oliva and Espinosa, 2007). Chemical
and metallurgical industries are the most important sources of heavy metals in soil (de Vries and
Schütze, 2007).
The contamination of the soil by heavy metals can be of major environmental concern because
they do not degrade biologically, and this always result in several soil disfunctions leading to
concerns about the environmental quality. Metal contaminated soil poses risks to humans and
animals through the strong possibility of metals entering the food chain. Due to the hazards posed
by heavy metals in soil, determination of their levels in the soil is a necessary indicator showing
anthropogenic input in the environment (Manta et al., 2002; Addo et al., 2012; Guo et al., 2012).
It also assists in the development of planning tools, remediation activities and, policies to
safeguard our environment.
2.1.3.3.2.1 Soil Cadmium Content
4 4
US EPA Standard for Cadmiun (ppm)
Soil Cadmium Content (ppm)
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
USEPA (1993)
SS1
SS2
SS3
SS4
Soil Sampling Stations
Figure 40 - Soil Surface Cadmium Content of the Soil Sampling Stations
83 | P a g e
Cadmium (Cd) is a non-essential trace element in plants that is widely distributed in the
environment. Both geogenic and anthropogenic sources can elevate Cd concentrations in soils,
which are important for maintaining healthy supplies of food. Elevated Cd doses are carcinogenic
to humans. Important anthropogenic Cd sources include mining, atmospheric deposition of
combustion emissions, and the use of Cd-containing fertilizers (Kubier et. al., 2019). Because of
this Cd is the metal that attracts the most attention in soil science and plant nutrition because of
its potential poisoning for humans (Tran, et.al., 2013). Cadmium mobility in the soil is affected by
the inherent physical and chemical characteristic of the soil.
As shown in Figure 40, the cadmium content of the soil sampling locations in parcel 1 of 3.3, and
3.8 ppm for SS1 and SS2, respectively exceeded the permissible limits set by the US EPA (1993) of
0.6 ppm. In contrast, Parcel 2 Cd content was within the acceptable standard of 0.50 ppm for both
SS3 and SS4. The discrepancy in terms of Cd content of the surface soil maybe due to the present
land use. Incidental crop removal of the heavy metal Cd can be a contributing factor in having a
low Cd content.
2.1.3.3.2.2 Soil Copper Content
Copper (Cu) is one of the essential micro metallic elements needed by plants for growth and
development). Cu is essential in plants as it is the main ingredient in almost all of the enzymes to
carry out its metabolic activity. Common deficiency symptom in plants is the necrosis and
yellowing of emerging leaves, aborted fruits and gummy exudates with deformation in young
fruits.
It is very unusual for Cu to be at excessive level in the soil, however, copper may accumulate due
to application of sewage sludge, pig slurries or mine slag, or more commonly through persistent
use of copper-containing fungicides or fertilizers.
84 | P a g e
Figure 41 - Soil Surface Copper Content of the Sampling Stations
Figure 41 shows the Cu content of the four soil sampling Stations. All of the sampling stations
have exceeded the CCME (2009) standard for Cu of 6.0 ppm. The values are considered to have
reached the toxicity level and can severely affect plant growth and development. Lowest Cu
content was given by both SS2 in Parcel 1 and SS3 in Parcel 2 of 17.0 ppm. This is 183 times times
the standard limit, indicating that inherently the site is having a high level of Cu.
The highest was found in SS1 of 29.0 ppm followed by SS4 of 20.0 ppm. This level is considered to
be toxic to any form of plants.
85 | P a g e
2.1.3.3.2.3 Soil Lead Content
Figure 42 - Soil Surface Lead Content of the Sampling Stations
Lead (Pb) is a toxic non-essential heavy metal that is widely distributed and induces a wide range
of negative effects on living organisms at morphological, physiological and biochemical level since
it is highly persistent in water and soil, accumulates in the upper 20.0 cm of the ground and is
highly immobile (Zheng et al., 2007; Pourrut et al., 2011; Tangahu et al., 2011). Although it is a
naturally occurring element, anthropogenic activities like mining, fossil fuel burning, and
manufacturing, contribute to its increased concentrations in soils (Tchounwou et al., 2012).
Excessive amounts in soil results to retardation of plant growth and is brought about by decrease
root respiration, water and nutrient uptake and inhibit cell mitosis in root meristematic regions
(Gemmell 1977).
Lead contents of the sampling stations of the proposed Project is presented in Figure 42. All of
the sampled locations exhibited low Pb content when compared to the U.S. EPA standard of 10.0
ppm.
The SS1 and SS2 in parcel 1 have 3.4 and 5.3 ppm, respectively. In contrast, in parcel 2 where SS3
and SS4 gave a more lower Pb content of 2.8 and 0.60 ppm, respectively. The laboratory analysis
results showed that tese areas may have natural content of Pb. Presence of Pb in this areas may
also have become the fall-out interceptor of burned fossil fuel (Gasoline) of the past that have Pb
additives.
86 | P a g e
2.1.3.3.2.4 Soil Nickel Content
Nickel (Ni) was first isolated from the mineral niccolite by a Swedish Chemist Axel Crostedt in
1751. The name “Nickel” was derived from the term „Kupfenickel‟ which means „Old Nick‟s
Copper‟ that the German miners gave to niccolite because of its emission of toxic fumes when
heated (Kotov and Nikitina, 1996). Naturally, nickel occurs widely in the environment, being
released through both natural and anthropogenic sources, but seldom in its elemental form
(DEPA, 2005a; Cempel and Nikel, 2006).
Nickel is the 24th most abundant metal in the earth‟s crust and 5th most abundant element by
weight after iron, oxygen, magnesium and silicon, constituting about 3% of the earth composition.
It is a member of 1st row transition series and belongs to group 10 of the periodic table with other
group members that include palladium, platinum and darmstadtium. In its elemental form, nickel
is silver- white in color, hard and lustrous, but in powdery form, it is reactive in air and ignites
spontaneously (ATSDR, 2005).
Generally, nickel is not an important element for plant growth and development, but it is an
essential micronutrient required for the growth of higher plants (Brown et al., 1987).
Figure 43 - Soil Surface Lead Content of the Sampling Stations
Nickel content of the four soil sampling stations is presented in Figure 43. All of the soil sampling
stations have exceeded the average Ni content as described by Lindsay (1979) of 40.0 ppm.
Highest Ni content was observed in parcel 1, SS2 followed by SS1 of 7,110.0, 3,750.0 ppm
87 | P a g e
respectively, and SS5 of 3,590 ppm, in parcel 2 have 59.0, 232.0 ppm, for SS3 and SS4, respectively.
Again, this is much higher when compared to the standard as described by Lindsay.
The project site being a proposed nickel mine is expected to have high soil Ni content. Besides the
soil of the project site is derived from the weathering of igneous rocks reported to have the
highest concentration of Ni elsewhere in the world (Kabata- Pendias and Mukherjee, 2007).
2.1.3.3.2.5 Soil Trivalent Chromium+3 Content
Figure 44 - Soil Surface Chromium+3 Content of the Sampling Stations
Chromium (Cr) is the 17th most abundant element in the Earth’s mantle (Avudainayagam, 2003).
It occurs naturally as chromite (FeCr2O4) in ultramafic and serpentine rocks or complexed with
other metals like crocoite (PbCrO4), bentorite Ca6 (Cr,Al)2(SO4)3 and tarapacaite (K2CrO4),
vauquelinite (CuPb2CrO4PO4OH), among others (Avudainayagam). Cr is widely used in industry as
plating, alloying, tanning of animal hides, inhibition of water corrosion, textile dyes and mordants,
pigments, ceramic glazes, refractory bricks, and pressure-treated lumber (Avudainayagam, 2003).
Due to this wide anthropogenic use of Cr, the consequent environmental contamination
increased and has become an increasing concern in the last years (Zayed and Terry, 2003).
The concentration of Cr in the soils may vary considerably according to the natural composition
of rocks and sediments that compose them (Kimbrough, 1999). The levels of chromium in the soil
may increase mainly through anthropogenic deposition, as for example atmospheric deposition
(Rosas et. al., 1989), also dumping of chromium-bearing liquids and solid wastes as chromium
88 | P a g e
byproducts, ferrochromium slag, or chromium plating baths (Rosas et. al., 1989). Generally, Cr in
soil represents a combination of both Cr (III) and (VI).
The presence of Stable Cr+3 in the soil sampling stations in Parcel 1 and 2 is presented in Figure
44. Soil sampling stations in SS1, SS2 Parcel 1 exhibited elevated levels of Cr +3 of 3,420.0, 2,630.0
ppm, respectively. In contrast the soil sampling stations in Parcel 2 have a very low Cr +3 content
in its immediate surface of 81.0, 91.0 ppm for SS3 and SS4, respectively.
Since the trivalent state is predominant in soils, it is unlikely that even heavily polluted farmland
would result in chromium accumulation in the food chain via plants. No common plant used as
animal feed or food has been reported with a tendency to concentrate chromium (Naja and
Volesky, 2009).
2.1.3.3.2.6 Soil Hexavalent Chromium+6 Content
Hexavalent Chromium (Cr+6) is the form of Cr commonly found at contaminated sites. Chromium
can also occur in the +3oxidation state, depending on pH and redox conditions. Major Cr+6 species
include chromate (CrO4 2−) and dichromate (Cr2O7 2−) which precipitate readily in the presence of
metal cations (especially Ba2+, Pb2+, and Ag+). Chromate and dichromate also adsorb on soil
surfaces, especially iron and aluminum oxides. Chromium +6 is the more toxic form of chromium
and is also more mobile (Wuana and Okiemen, 2011).
The laboratory analysis of hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) revealed that it is not detectable in all of
the four soil sampling stations in parcels 1 and 2.
2.1.3.3.2.7 Soil Arsenic Content
Arsenic is widely distributed in the environment. The earth Crust contains an average of 5 µ g-1
frequently in association with other elements such as Cu, Pb and Zn (Tetratech EM Inc., 2001). It
is highly soluble in water and the most common symptom of As causes skin poisoning and exhibit
harmful effects on kidneys and the central nervous system is highly associated with Arsenic
(Adelakan et. al., 2011).
The heavy metal laboratory analysis for Arsenic revealed that All of the sampling stations have no
detectable levels of As.
89 | P a g e
2.1.3.3.2.8 Soil Mercury Content
Mercury (Hg) is a dense, silvery-white metal that melts at -38.9°C. Mercury is present in the
Earth’s crust at an average concentration of 0.08 mg kg-1; cinnabar (mercury++ sulfide, HgS) is the
most common mercury ore. Igneous, metamorphic, and sedimentary rocks contain mercury at
concentrations up to 0.25, 0.40, and 3.25 mg kg-1, respectively (Jonasson, and Boyle, 1971).
Hg in relation to the soil is not an essential element needed by plants but, can be absorbed by
plants in excessive amounts. Hg is one of the highly toxic compound that is found in nature and
exist in oxidation the form elemental Hg0 mercurious ion (Hg+) and mercuric ion (Hg++). The means
of presence in soil is characterized by absorption between the colloidal surface where this is
mainly found in the upper surface soil (0 - 5 cm). In general Hg is not translocated below the
surface layer of the soil (0 - 10 cm). Thus, Hg not adsorbed in the soil matrix will be either absorbed
by the plants through ionic exchange in the soil solution, precipitated, volatilized under high
temperature.
The laboratory analysis of the surface soils in SS1, SS2, SS3 and SS4 does not have detectable
mercury.
2.1.3.3.3 Soil Physical Properties of Sampling Stations
2.1.3.3.3.1 Slake Test
Slaking is the breakdown of large, air-dry soil aggregates (>2-5 mm) into smaller sized micro-
aggregates (<0.25 mm) when they are suddenly immersed in water. Slaking occurs when
aggregates are not strong enough to withstand internal stresses caused by rapid water uptake.
Internal stresses result from differential swelling of clay particles, trapped and escaping air in soil
pores, rapid release of heat during wetting, and the mechanical action of moving water.
In contrast to slaking, tests for aggregate stability measure how well soil withstands external
destructive forces, such as the splashing impact of raindrops. Poor aggregate stability and slaking
resulted in a detached soil particles that settle into the soil micro-pores, and cause surface sealing,
reduced infiltration and plant available water, and increased runoff and erosion.
Why it is important: Slaking indicates the stability of soil aggregates resistance to erosion and
suggests how well soil can maintain its structure to provide water and air for plants and soil biota
when it is rapidly wetted. Limited slaking suggests that organic matter is present in soil to help
90 | P a g e
bind soil particles and micro-aggregates into larger, stable aggregates. All of the four soil sampling
stations were in-situ tested for the soil aggregate slaking property and are shown below:
2.1.3.3.3.1.1 Slake Test SS1, Parcel 1
Figure 45 - Slake Test for the Surface Soil of SS1, Parcel 1
The slake test for SS1 (Figure 45) showed that immediately after immersion to distilled water
large bubbles appear and there is slight slumping of the sub-crust. After 10 minutes of
submergence the sub crust remains the same. This rapid wetting behavior showed that the soil
of SS1 in Parcel 1 can be classified as Class 3 = Moderately Stable. Slumping of sub-crust but most
of the crust is intact and is therefore let undisturbed the soil is resistant to erosion.
Slake test for SS2 in parcel1 was not made possible because of the loose sandy granular structure
of the immediate soil surface. In this case the soil is classified as Class 0 or not applicable and is
therefore, the surface soil in SS2 is susceptible to erosion.
The slake test for SS3 in Parcel 2 is shown in Figure 46. Immediately after immersion of the soil
aggregate to the distilled water, large bubbles appear and a slight slumping was observed. After
10 minutes the soil aggregate remains intact. This rapid wetting behavior can be classified as Class
91 | P a g e
3 = Moderately Stable. Slumping of sub-crust but most of the crust is intact and is, therefore, if
not mechanically disturbed the soil in SS3 is resistant to soil erosion when rapid wetting occurs.
The slake test for SS4 in Parcel 2 is shown in Figure 47. Immediately after immersion of the soil
aggregate into the distilled water, there is a slight slumping observed, but there is no dispersion
of fine soil material (silt, clay). After 10 minutes of submergence the soil aggregate remains intact.
This rapid wetting behavior can be classified as Class 3 = Moderately Stable. There is slumping of
sub-crust but most of the crust is intact and is, therefore, under undisturbed condition is resistant
to soil erosion.
92 | P a g e
2.1.4 Terrestrial
2.1.4.1 Scope: Baseline and Impact Assessment
Terrestrial floristic and faunal investigation of the Project Site was carried out to identify the
possible impacts of the proposed nickel mining project of Stagno Mining Corporation to local
ecological conditions, assess the level of impacts, and propose measures to mitigate these
impacts. Specifically, the assessment sought to:
1. Conduct ecological measurements of the floral and faunal assemblages of the

proposed project Site and its vicinity;
2. Assess the conservation status of flora and fauna documented in the area based on
national legislation and IUCN/CITES criteria;
3. Identify, assess, and propose mitigation measures of the potential impacts of the
Project to local biodiversity and ecological conditions.
Threatened Philippine flora and fauna are covered by various national legislations, notably:
1. Wildlife Resources Conservation and Protection Act (2001);
2. DENR Memorandum Circular 2007-2 (Critical Habitats);
3. Republic Act No. 7586 – the National integrated Protected Areas System Act
4. DAO 2004-15 and DAO 2007-1 amended in DAO 2007-24 defining conservation
categories for Philippine flora and fauna as Threatened Species, Critically
Endangered Species, Endangered Species, Vulnerable Species, Other Threatened
Species and Other Wildlife Species.
5. DENR Administrative Order no, 2017-11- Updated National List of Threatened

Philippine Plants and Their Categories.
6. DENR Administrative Order no, 2019-09- Updated National List of Threatened

Philippine Fauna and Their Categories
93 | P a g e
2.1.4.2 Terrestrial Flora
2.1.4.2.1 Methodology
A combination of quadrat sampling technique and transect survey was used to assess the
terrestrial flora within the vicinity of the propose Mining project of Stagno Mining Corporation at
Brgy. San Jose, Bayanihan, Garcia, Libjo, Dinagat Islands. The team selected the five (5) quadrats
per parcel or a total of ten (10) quadrats along the established transect lines of around two (2)
kilometers during the transect walk survey. (Table 14). The quadrats were distributed in such a
way that all existing vegetation cover was represented. Generally, the area has three vegetation
types namely; open forest, brushland, and mangroves ecosystem. For trees, individual species
with diameter-at-breast height (dbh) or greater than three centimeters inside the 100m x 100m
plots were assessed. In addition, 10m x 10m subplots were established for the intermediate
growth or plants with dbh less than 3 cm (i.e. poles, saplings) and 1m x 1m subplots for the
understorey vegetation (i.e., seedlings, grasses). Information gathered in the field were tabulated
and analysed to characterize floral composition within the study area. The relative density,
relative dominance and relative frequency values for each tree species were determined to obtain
their Importance Value (IV), which is the standard measurement in forest ecology to determine
the rank relationships of species. Also, the relative frequency, relative density and relative
dominance indicate different aspect of the species importance in a community. Importance
values were determined using the following formula:
Density = number of Individuals

area sampled
Relative Density = density for a species_____ x 100

total density for all species
Frequency = number of plots in which species occur

total number of plots sampled
Relative Frequency = frequency value for a species x 100

total frequency for all species
Dominance = basal area or volume for a species

area sampled
94 | P a g e
Relative Dominance = dominance for a species x 100

total dominance for all species
Importance Value = Relative Density + Relative Frequency + Relative Dominance
The diversity indices of the different sampling areas, which include the Shannon index (H) and
Evenness index (J), were also computed. The indices were computed using the following formula:
𝑛𝑖 𝑛𝑖
𝑆ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑜𝑛 − 𝑊𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑟 𝐼𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥 (𝐻) = − ∑ ( ) ln ( )
𝑁 𝑁
where:
ni = the total number of individuals in each species
N = the total number of all individuals
𝐻1
𝑃𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑢′ 𝑠 𝐸𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥 (𝐽) =
ln 𝑆
where:
S = total number of species
Table 14 - Location of terrestrial sampling and observation sites

Site Name of Sampling Elevation Geographic Coordinates
Code Observation Sites (masl) Latitude Longitude
Q1 Catmonan, Brgy. Bayanihan, Libjo,
78 10°11'23.62"N 125°37'15.69"E
Dinagat Islands
81 10°11'12.93"N 125°37'02.21"E
Dinagat Islands
94 10°10'36.98"N 125°36'49.99"E
Dinagat Islands
192 10°10'34.43"N 125°36'30.95"E
Dinagat Islands
72 10°10'14.69"N 125°36'46.15"E
Dinagat Islands
Q6 Brgy. San Jose, Libjo, Dinagat Islands 25 10°11'04.66"N 125°33'13.74"E
Q7 Brgy. San Jose, Libjo, Dinagat Islands 9 10°11'15.57"N 125°33'47.29"E
Q8 Brgy. Garcia, Libjo, Dinagat Islands 26 10°10'20.66"N 125°33'21.04"E
Q9 Brgy. Garcia, Libjo, Dinagat Islands 5 10°10'33.49"N 125°34'01.27"E
Q 10 Brgy. Garcia, Libjo, Dinagat Islands 66 10°10'08.71"N 125°34'50.07"E
95 | P a g e
Figure 48 -Terrestrial Flora Sampling Map
96 | P a g e
Photo 1 - The pictures above were taken during the establishment of transect lines and
quadrats that will serve as the observation points during the conduct of terrestrial assessment
in the area.
97 | P a g e
Photo 2 - The photos above were taken during the measurement of Diameter at Breast Height
(DBH) of trees sighted at the proposed mining project area.
98 | P a g e
2.1.4.2.2 Results and Discussions
2.1.4.2.2.1 General Situation
The proposed project area for Stagna Mining Corporation is located at Barangays Bayanihan,
Garcia, and San Jose, Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands. The terrain of the area is from flat, rolling
to mountainous with elevation ranges from 5 to 350 meters above sea level.
Generally, the vegetative cover of the project area varies from grassland to open canopy forest
and some portions of beach and mangrove ecosystem in the downstream area. The open-canopy
forest were second-growth and residual forest dominated with Myrtaceae, Moraceae, Fabaceae,
and Euphorbiacea family tree species. The forest floor of the open-canopy forest has poor
undergrowth due to the thick forest litter (e.g. leaves, twigs, branches etc.) The open forest is
relatively young with the highest recorded diameter at breast height (dbh) at only 38 cm; while
majority of the individual species have dbh that falls between the ranges of 3 cm to 18 cm. The
open portions are brushland which is dominated by agsam, cogon, ferns, herbs such as hagonoy,
some shrubs and small trees.
The proposed mining project area will traverse a mountainous section and pass through a remote
and sparsely populated rural barangays with scattered human settlements. The vicinity and
project site were already inhabited and most portions of the land are already cultivated and
planted with agricultural crops such as coconut, corn, cassava, banana, and mangga. Vegetation
and trees sighted in the proposed project site were mostly endemic and dominated with tree
species such as Magkono, Tiga, Yakal, Payuspus, Antipolo, Bitanghol, Maribuhok, and Agoho, that
usually thrived in an ultramafic soil or mineralized land.
99 | P a g e
Q1
Photo 3 - The aerial and panoramic photos above show the open-canopy forest with patches
of brushland where quadrat 1 was established at parcel 2 at Sitio Catmonan, Brgy. Bayanihan,
Libjo, Dinagat Islands
100 | P a g e
Q2
Photo 4 -- The geotagged picture and panaramic photo above show the ultramafic forest
where the quadrat 2 is established dominated with myrtaceae and moraceae tree species
101 | P a g e
Q3
Photo 5 - The aerial and panoramic photos above show the open canopy forest with patches of
brushland where quadrat 3 was established at Sitio Catmonan, Brgy. Bayanihan, Libjo,
Dinagat Islands.
102 | P a g e
Photo 6 - The drone and panoramic photos above were taken in the quadrat 4 established
within the Parcel 2 at Sitio Catmonan, Brgy. Bayanihan, Libjo, Dinagat Islands. The area is
near the creek with open-canopy forest and portions of brushland
103 | P a g e
Q5
12/1/21
8:33 AM
Photo 7 - The aerial drone photo above shows the quadrat 5 established in Parcel 2 with an
open-canopy forest located at Sitio Catmonan, Brgy. Bayanihan, Libjo, Dinagat Islands.
104 | P a g e
Q6
Photo 8 - The aerial photo and geotagged picture above show the quadrat 6 established
within the parcel 1 with a grassland with an agro-ecosystem area at Brgy. San Jose, Libjo,
Dinagat Islands.
105 | P a g e
Photo 9 - The aerial and geotagged photos above show the quadrat 8 established in a
grassland with small patches of open-canopy forest in Parcel 1 located at Brgy. Garcia, Libjo,
Dinagat Islands.
106 | P a g e
Photo 10 - The drone picture and geotagged photo above shows the quadrat 9 established
within Parcel 1 located at Brgy. Garcia, Libjo, Dinagat Islands.
107 | P a g e
Q10
Photo 11 - The aerial and geotagged photos above show the quadrat 10 established within
parcel 1 with an open-canopy forest located along the road at Brgy. Garcia, Libjo, Dinagat
Islands
108 | P a g e
2.1.4.2.2.2 Species Composition
A total of two hundred forty-one (241) species were recognized belonging to the seed plants,
ferns and their allies from the ten (10) quadrats sampled. The Table 15 below shows the number
of families and species per plant type recorded in the project area.
Table 15 - Summary of species composition

Plant Type No. of Families No. of Species
Trees 49 148
Grass/Shrubs/Herbs/Vines 46 68
Ferns/Pterophytes 8 11
Epiphytes/Mosses 4 5
Palms 1 9
Total 108 241
The most speciose (having several species) of all one hundred eight (108) families recorded are
Moraceae with sixteen (16) species followed by Myrtaceae and Euphorbiaceae with fourteen (14)
species each. Table 16 and Table 17 present the complete list of all the species recorded in the
site.
Table 16 - Lists of tree species recorded in the project area
Local /Common Name Scientific Name Family Name
1 Mangga Mangifera indica Linn Anacardiaceae

2 Mangga-mangga Mangifera sp. Anacardiaceae
3 Ylang- Ylang Cananga Odorata Anonaceae
4 Guyabano Annona muricata Anonaceae
5 Batino Alstonia macrophylla Apocynacea
6 Lanete Wrightia laniti Apocynacea
7 Malapapaya Polyscias nodosa Araliaceae
8 Hagdan Uwak Oroxylum indicum Bignoniaceae
9 Banai-banai Raermachera pinnata Bignoniaceae
10 Kapok Ceiba pentadra Bombaceae
11 Anonang Cordia dichotoma Boraginaceae
12 Pagsahingin Canarium luzonicum Burseraceae
13 Hanagdong Trema orientalis Cannabaceae
14 Agoho Casuarina equisetifolia Casuarinaceae
15 Marihubok Gymnostoma sumatranum Casuarinaceae
16 Bitanghol Calophyllum blancoi Clusiaceae
17 Bitaog Calophyllum inophyllum Clusiaceae
18 Talisay-gubat Terminalia foetidissima Combretaceae
109 | P a g e
19 Talisay Terminalia catappa Combretaceae

20 Katmon Dillenia philippinensis Dilleniaceae
21 Bagtikan Parashorea malaanonan Dipterocarpaceae
22 Dagang Anisoptera aurea Dipterocarpaceae
23 White Lauan Shorea contorta Dipterocarpaceae
24 Red Lauan Shorea negrosensis Dipterocarpaceae
25 Mayapis Shorea palosapis Dipterocarpaceae
26 Tanguile Shorea polysperma Dipterocarpaceae
27 Yakal Shorea astylosa Dipterocarpaceae
28 Alupaye Omalanthus popluneus Euphorbiaceae
29 Balanti Homolantus concolor Euphorbiaceae
30 Binunga Macaranga tanaris Euphorbiaceae
31 Bingabing Macaranga grandifolia Euphorbiaceae
32 Bignai Antidesma bunios Euphorbiaceae
33 Lumbang Aleurites moluccana Euphorbiaceae
34 Hamindang Macaranga bicolor Euphorbiaceae
35 Tuba-tuba Jathropa cutcas Euphorbiaceae
36 Kakawate Gliricidia sepium Fabaceae
37 Narra Pterocarpus indicus Fabaceae
38 Banuyo Wallaceodendron cellibicum Fabaceae
39 Ipil-ipil Leucaena leucocephala Fabaceae
40 Bahai Ormosia calvensis Fabaceae
41 Bani Pongamia pinnata Fabaceae
42 Auri Acacia auri Fabaceae
43 Mangium Acacia mangium Fabaceae
44 Falcata Paraserianthes falcataria Fabaceae
45 Rain Tree Samanea saman Fabaceae
46 Sampaloc Tamarindus indica Fabaceae
47 Ulayan Lithocapus illanosii Fagaceae
48 Kapi-kapi Fragrae racemosa Gentianaceae
49 Bago Gnetum gnemon L. Gnetaceae
50 Paguringon Cratoxylum sumatranum Hypericaceae
51 Salingagon Cratoxylum formosum Hypericaceae
52 Bansilay Cratoxylum sp. Hypericaceae
53 Alagaw Premna odorata Lamiaceae
54 Kalingag Cinnamomum mercadoi Lauraceae
55 Avocado Persea gratissima Lauraceae
56 Bagarilao Cryptocarya ampla Merr. Lauraceae
57 Botong Barringtonia asiatica Lecythidaceae
58 Putat Barringtonia acutangula Lecythidaceae
59 Tagobinlod Geniostoma cumingianum Loganiaceae
60 Sua-sua Norissia philippinenses Loganiaceae
61 Banaba Lagerstroemia piriformis Lythraceae
62 Suyapao Commersonia bartramia Malvaceae
63 Anilau Colana serratifolia Malvaceae
110 | P a g e
64 Dungon-late Heritiera littoralis Malvaceae

65 Malubago Hibiscus tiliaceus Malvaceae
66 Cacao Theobroma cacao Malvaceae
67 Barobo Diplodiscus paniculatus Turcz Malvaceae
68 Bitan-ag Kleinhovia hospita Malvaceae
69 Malabuno Steculia oblongata Malvaceae
70 Sayapo Trichospermum eriopodum Malvaceae
71 Hagikihik Phyrnium interruptum Marantaceae
72 Malatungao Melastoma polyanthia Melastomotaceae
73 Lanzones Lansium domesticum Meliaceae
74 Gmelina Gmelina arboria Meliaceae
75 Santol Sandoricum koetjape Merr Meliaceae
76 Bagalnga Melia dubia Meliaceae
77 Colo Dysoxylum decandrum Meliaceae
78 Mahogany Swietenia macrophylla Meliaceae
79 Marang Banguhan Artocarpus odoratissima blanco Moraceae
80 Anubing Artocarpus cumingiana Moraceae
81 Kamansi/Rimas Artocarpus communis Moraceae
82 Antipolo Artocarpus blancoi Moraceae
83 Tugop Artocarpus sp. Moraceae
84 Kubi Artocarpus nitidus Moraceae
85 Himbabao Alleanthus luzonicus Moraceae
86 Nangka Artocarpus heterophylla lam. Moraceae
87 Balete Ficus balete Moraceae
88 Malatibig Ficus congresta Moraceae
89 Niyog-niyogan Ficus pseudopalma Moraceae
90 Tibig/Tubog Ficus nota Moraceae
91 Hagimit Ficus minahassae Moraceae
92 Is-is Ficus umlifolia Moraceae
93 Tangisang bayawak Ficus variegata Moraceae
94 Hawili Ficus septica Moraceae
95 Aratilis Muntingia calabura Muntingiaceae
96 Hindang Myrica javanica Myricaceae
97 Duguan Myristica philippinensis Myristicaceae
98 Bagras Eucalyptus deglupta Myrtaceae
99 Guava Psidium guajava Myrtaceae
100 Malabayabas Tristania decorticata Myrtaceae
101 Tambis Syzygium aqueum Myrtaceae
102 Kurasan Syzygium claviflorum Myrtaceae
103 Lomboy Syzygium cumini Myrtaceae
104 Jagao Syzygium sp. Myrtaceae
105 Sagimsim Syzygium brevistylum Myrtaceae
106 Paitan Syzygium costulatum Myrtaceae
107 Malatambis Syzygium Hutchinsonii Myrtaceae
108 Payuspus Rhodomyrtus surigaoensis Myrtaceae
111 | P a g e
109 Tiga Tristaniopteris littoralis Myrtaceae

110 Magkono Xanthostemon verdugonianus Myrtaceae
111 Makopa Syzygium malaccense Myrtaceae
112 Balimbing Averrhoa carambola Oxalidaceae
113 Iba Averrhoa balimbi Oxalidaceae
114 Buyo-buyo Piper aduncum Piperaceae
115 Ibor Dacrydium sp. Podocarpaceae
116 Anislag Securrinega flexousa Phyllanthaceae
117 Bonot-bonot Glochidion sp. Phyllanthaceae
118 Hambabalod Nauclea formicaria Rubiaceae
119 Bangkoro/Noni Morinda citrifolia Rubiaceae
120 Bangkal Nuclea orientalis Rubiaceae
121 Kiti-kiti Adina multifolia Rubiaceae
122 Kape Coffea Arabica Linn. Rubiaceae
123 Malakape Canthium dococcum Rubiaceae
124 Talatawa Mussaenda sp. Rubiaceae
125 Kahoi Dalaga Mussaenda philippica Rubiaceae
126 Dayap Citrus aurantifolia Rutaceae
127 Pomelo Citrus grandis Rutaceae
128 Bintoko Evodia bintoco Rutaceae
129 Wild Cherry Exocarpus latefolius Santalaceae
130 Caimito Chrysophyllum cainito Linn. Sapotaceae
131 Malak-malak Palaquium philippense Sapotaceae
132 Wakatan Pouteria velutina Sapotaceae
133 Balit Erioglossum rubiginosum Sapindaceae
134 Rambutan Nephelium lappaceum Sapindaceae
135 Loktob Duabanba moluccana Sonneratiaceae
136 Bayog Pterospermum acerifolium Stercullaceae
137 Dungon Tarrietia sylavatica Stercullaceae
138 Anilaw Calone serratifolia Tiliacea
139 Malibago Berraya cordifolia Tiliaceae
140 Anabiong Trema orientalis Ulmaceae
141 Alagasi Leucosyke capitellata Urticaceae
142 Boyon Mussaenda spp. Urticaceae
143 Rami Boehmeria nivea Urticaceae
144 Handamay Pipturus arborescens Urticaceae
145 Alagau Prema odorata blancoi Verbenaceae
146 Molave/Tugas Vitex parviflora Verbenaceae
147 Darayawan/Maymagan Callicarpa erioclana Verbenaceae
148 Amamali Leea guinensis Vitaceae
112 | P a g e
Table 17 - List of other plants (herbs, ferns, epiphytes, shrubs, grasses, palms, vines) recorded
in the project site.
No. Local /Common Name Scientific Name Family Name
A. Epiphytes
1. Broom Pork Moss Homalothecium sericeum Brachytheciaceae
2. Pocket Moss Fissidens taxifolius Fissidentaceae
3. Cord Moss Funaria hydrometrica Funariaceae
4. Mariposa Phalaenopsis aprhodite Orchidaceae
5. Wild Waling-waling Vanda sanderiana Orchidaceae
B. Pterophytes/Ferns
1. Pakong Alakdan Blechnum oriente L. Blechnaceae
2. Pako-pako Blechnum fraseli L. Blechnaceae
3. Tree Fern/Pakong Buaya Cyathea contaminans Cyatheaceae
4. Agsam Dicranopteris linearis (Burm.f.) Gleicheniaceae
5. Kilob Gleichenia linearis Burm Gleicheniaceae
6. Macho Fern Nephrolepis sp. Nephrolepidaceae
7. Pako Athyrium esculentum Polypodiaceae
8. Pak-pak Lawin Drynaria quercipolia Polypodiaceae
9. Bird's nest fern Asplenium nidus Linn. Psilotaceae
10. Bracken Fern Pteris tripartita Pteridaceae
11 Spikemoss Selaginella delicatula (Desv.) Alston Selaginellaceae
C. Palms
1 Coconut Cocos nucifera Arecaceae
2 Bunga Areaca catechu L. Arecaceae
3 Rattan (Palasan) Calamus merrillii Becc. Arecaceae
4 Pugahan Caryota cumingii Lodd. Arecaceae
5 Fish tail palm Caryota mitis Arecaceae
6 Buri Corypha utan Lamk. Arecaceae
7 Limuran/Kalape Calamus ornatus Blume Arecaceae
8 Sagisi Heterosphata alata Scheff. Arecaceae
9 Ajibi Chrysalidocarpus lutenscens H Arecaceae
D. Grasses/Shrubs/Herbs/Vines
1 Nees Hemigraphis premulaefolia Acanthaceae
2 Bonga-bonga Amarnathea Sessilis Amaranthaceae
3 Kulitis Amaranthus spinosus L. Amaranthaceae
4 Kudiapa Celosia argentea L. Amaranthaceae
5 Pandakaki Tabernaemontana pandacaqui Poir. Apocynaceae
6 Gabi-gabi Caladium bicolor Araceae
7 Palau Cryptosperma merkusii (Hassk.) Schott Araceae
8 Badyang/Elephant Ear Alocasia macrorrhiza L. Schott Araceae
9 Gabi Colocacia esculenta Araceae
10 Arrow head Syngonium podophyllum Araceae
11 Hagonoy Chromolaena odorata Asteraceae
113 | P a g e
12 Dila-dila Elephantopus scaber Asteraceae

13 Wedelia Sphagneticola trilobata Asteraceae
14 Sambong Blumea balsamifera Asteraceae
15 Pineapple Ananas comosus Bromeliaceae
16 Elepante/Erysipela plant Heliotropium indicum L. Boraginaceae
Dilang baka Nopalea cochenillifera (Linn.) Salm- Cactaceae
17 Dyck
18 Papaya Carica papaya Caricaceae
19 Kamu-kamuti Ipomea triloba L. Convolvulaceae
20 Daat Scleria scrobiculata Cyperaceae
21 Obod-obod Cyperus imbricatus Cyperaceae
22 Boto-botones/Mutha Cyperus rotundas L. Cyperaceae
23 Matang-hipon Breynia rhamnoides Euphorbiaceae
24 Cassava Manilot esculenta Euphorbiaceae
25 Tawa-tawa Euphorbia hirta L. Euphorbiaceae
26 Tangan-tangan Ricinus communis Linn. Euphorbiaceae
27 Gapas-gapas Mallotus mollissimus Euphorbiaceae
28 False bird of paradise Heliconia sp. Heliconiaceae
29 Palm grass Molineria capitulata Hypoxydaceae
30 Pansi pansi Hyptis capitata Jacq. Lamiaceae
31 Akapulko/Asunting Cassia alata Linn. Leguminosae
Donax cannaeformis (Forst. f.) K.
32 Bamban Schum. Maranthaceae
33 Gumamela Hibiscus rosasensis Linn. Malvaceae
34 Waliswalisan Sida rhombifolia Malvaceae
Hantutuknaw/ Melastoma malabathricum L. Melastomataceae
35 malatungao
36 Makahiya Mimosa pudica Linn. Mimosaseae
37 Banana Musa acuminata Musaceae
38 Saging saging Acgecarus condoniculatum Myrsinaceae
39 Upper Pitcher Plant 1 Nepenthes mindanaoensis Nepenthaceae
40 Upper Pitcher Plant 2 Nepenthes viridis Nepenthaceae
41 Lower Pitcher Plant 3 Nepenthes merrilliana Nepenthaceae
42 Ground Orchid Spathoglottis plicata Orchidaceae
43 Burambot Passiflora foetida Linn. Passifloraceae
44 Baliw Pandanus tectorius Pandaceae
45 Freycinetia Freycinetia auriculata Merr. Pandaceae
46 Cow weed Anoxophus compresus Poaceae
47 Tambu/Tiger Grass Thyanolaena latifolia (Hornem) Poaceae
48 Amorseco Andropogon acciculatas Poaceae
49 Cogon Imperata cylindrica Poaceae
50 Carabao grass Paspalum conjugatum Poaceae
51 Talahib Saccharum spontaneum Poaceae
52 Amor seco Andropogon aciculatus Retz. Poaceae
53 Bila-bila/wire grass Eleusine indica L Poaceae
114 | P a g e
54 Kawayan Tinik Bambusa spinosa Roxb. Poaceae

55 Yellow Bamboo Bambusa bulgaris Schrad. Poaceae
56 Zigzag Bamboo Dinochloa scandens Poaceae
57 Tigbi Coix lachryma-jobi L. Poaceae
58 Climbing Bamboo Arthrostylidium Longiforum Poaceae
59 Talahib/Bugang Saccharum spontaneum Linn. Psilotaceae
60 Ant Plant/Banghai Hydnophytum formicarum Rubiaceae
61 Talong talong Solanum torvum Solanaceae
62 Salago Wikstroemia sp. Tymelaeaceae
63 Handamay Pipturus arborescens Urticaceae
64 Kanding-kanding Stachytarpheta jamaicensis Linn. Verbenaceae
65 Kantutay Lantana camara L. Verbenaceae
66 Alimpuyas Curcuma zedoaria (Berg.) Rose Zingiberaceae
67 Tagbak Kolowratia elegans Zingiberaceae
68 Tambabasi Tapeinochilos ananassae Zingiberaceae
115 | P a g e
Maribuhok (Gymnostoma Magkono (Xanthostemon

verdugonianus)
Payuspos (Rhodomyrtus
Katmon (Dillenia
brevistylum)
Yakal (Shorea astylosa) Tiga (Tristania

Photo 12 - Some of the forest tree species sighted at the proposed project area
116 | P a g e
Mangga-mangga (Mangifera Bago (Gnetum
Agoho (Casuarina Bitanghol Calophyllum
Bangkal (Nuclea Darayawan (Callicarpa
117 | P a g e
Kahoi Dalaga (Mussaenda Alagasi (Leucosyke capitellata)
Ulayan (Lithocapus Guava (Psidium
Mangium (Acacia Paguringon (Cratoxylum
118 | P a g e
Noni (Morinda Hambabalod (Nauclea

almon
Iba (Averrhoa Ipil-ipil (Leucaena

bilimbi)
Mangga (Mangifera Hagdang uwak (Oroxylum

119 | P a g e
Antipolo (Artocarpus Niyog-niyogan (Ficus

)
Kamansi (Artocarpus Nangka (Artocarpus heterophylla
Marang (Artocarpus Labnog (Ficus

Photo 16 -Some of the moraceae trees sighted at the study area
120 | P a g e
Ground Orchid (Spathoglottis Climbing Bamboo (Arthrostylidium
Hantutuknaw (Melastoma malabathricum Tambabasi (Callicarpa

formosana )
Kantutay (Lantana camara Linn.) Hagonoy (Chromolaena

Photo 17 - Some species of herbs, shrubs, grasses, and vines recorded in the study site
121 | P a g e
Baliw (Pandanus tectorius)

Pandakaki (Tabernaemontana
pandacaqui )
Kawayan (Bambusa Daat (Scleria

scrobiculata)
Ant Plant (Hydnophytum Wild Waling-waling (Vanda

sanderiana)
. Photo 18 - More species of herbs, shrubs, grasses, and vines recorded in the study site
122 | P a g e
Coconut (Cocos Ajibi (Chrysalidocarpus
Tree Fern (Cyathea Kilob (Gleichenia

contaminans)
Agsam (Dicranopteris
Pakpak Lawin (Drynaria
quercifolia)
Photo 19 - Common ferns and palms encountered at the study area.
123 | P a g e
Upper Pitcher Plant 1 (Nepenthes Upper Pitcher Plant 2(Nepenthes
Upper Pitcher Plant 2 (Nepenthes
Lower Pitcher Plant 3 (Nepenthes

)
Photo 20 - Some pitcher plants sighted at the study area.
124 | P a g e
From the 10 quadrats established along transects per location, a total of 1,016 individuals
belonging to 148 species of trees were recorded to have a diameter of > 5 cm. The average density
is 0.1016 tree/sq.m, or roughly 10 trees for every 100 square meters. The most frequent tree
species is Niyog-niyogan (Ficus pseudopalma) that are found in all ten quadrats. Based on the
computed importance value (IV), the most important tree species is Xanthostemon
verdugonianus or commonly known as Magkono at 23.443 (Table 18).
The intermediate and undergrowth layers have almost the same species richness at 3.105 and
3.214 species, respectively. The most frequent species at the intermediate layer is Ficus
pseudopalma (Niyog-niyogan) which is present in all 10 quandrats. The most numerous is the
Discranopteris linearis (Agsam) which had recorded 48 individuals and followed by is Chromolaena
odorata (Hagonoy) with 41. At the understorey, the most dominant vegetation are Discranopteris
linearis (Agsam).
Table 18 - List of the recorded tree species with highest Importance Value (IV)
Importance
Rank Common Name Scientific Name Family Name
Value (IV)
1 Magkono Xanthostemon verdugonianus Myrtaceae 23.443
2 Marihubok Gymnostoma sumatranum Casuarinaceae 16.506
3 Marang Artocarpus odoratissima Moraceae 15.959
4 Tiga Tristania micrantha Myrtaceae 15.260
5 Yakal Shorea astylosa Dipterocarpaceae 15.065
6 Antipolo Artocarpus blancoi Moraceae 14.793
7 Katmon Dillenia philippinensis Dilleniaceae 14.192
8 Hambabalod Nauclea formicaria Rubiaceae 14.166
9 Ulayan Lithocapus illanosii Fagaceae 13.606
10 Mangium Acacia mangium Fabaceae 13.428
11 Payuspus Rhodomyrtus surigaoensis Myrtaceae 13.196
12 Niyong-niyongan Ficus pseudopalma Moraceae 12.180
2.1.4.2.2.3 Diversity Indices
The diversity of the sampling areas was analyzed by using the PAST software to compute the
Shannon-Weiner Index and Pielou’s Evenness Index (Table 19). The Shannon index assumes that
individuals are randomly sampled from a large population and that all species are represented in
the sample. It gives an estimate of species richness and distribution. The Evenness index is the
125 | P a g e
ratio of the observed diversity to maximum diversity. It is very noticeable that very high diversity
indices, as well as evenness indices, were recorded from the transect lines/quadrats established
in the closed-canopy with an open-canopy forest Quadrat 1 in Parcel 2 and Quadrat 8 and 7
located in Parcel 1 at Brgy. Garcia and San Jose, Libjo, Dinagat Islands while lower indices were
recorded in Quadrat 10 within the brushland near the agri-ecosystem area dominated with
grasses and shrubs in Parcel 1 at Brgy. San Jose, Libjo, Dinagat Islands.
Table 19 - Diversity indices and number of species for transect lines/quadrats 1-10
Geographical Biodiversity Indices
Sampling Location Number of
Quadrats Shannon Value Evenness Value Individuals
Latitude/Longitude
(H) Rating (J) Rating
(Q1) 10°11'23.62"N, Very High Very High
3.991 0.7733 145
125°37'15.69"E
(Q2) 10°11'12.93"N, Very High High
3.667 0.7385 113
125°37'02.21"E
3.708 0.8157 101
125°36'49.99"E
(Q4) 10°10'34.43"N, Very High High
3.743 0.7157 140
125°36'30.95"E
10°10'14.69"N, Very High Very High
(Q5) 3.748 0.8325 89
125°36'46.15"E
(Q6) 3.638 0.7922 88
125°33'13.74"E
3.892 0.8453 108
125°33'47.29"E
(Q8) 3.974 0.8581 102
125°33'21.04"E
(Q9) 3.742 0.8437 79
125°34'01.27"E
10°10'08.71"N, High Very High
(Q10) 3.487 0.8982 51
125°34'50.07"E
Note: Ordinal Classification of Species Richness and Dominance Indices (adopted from Fernando
et. Al..1998)
126 | P a g e
Relative Value Species Diversity Evenness (E)

Rating (H’)
Very High (VH) 3.50-5.00 0.75-1.00
High (H) 3.00-3.49 0.50-0.74
Moderate (M) 2.50-2.99 0.25-0.49
2.1.4.2.2.3.1 Endemism
Out of the total two hundred forty-one (241) species identified, there are Fourty-Two (42)
Philippine endemics that were found in the ten (10) sampling sites (Table 20).
Table 20 - List of endemic species recorded in the study area

1 Pugahan Caryota cumingi Arecaceae
2 Palasan Calamus merrillii Arecaceae
3 Limuran Calamus ornatus Arecaceae
4 Sagisi Heterosphata alata Scheff. Arecaceae
5 Tree fern/Anotong Cyathea contaminans (Hook.) Cyatheaceae
6 Katmon Dillenia philippinensis Dilleniaceae
7 Marihubok Gymnostoma sumatranum Casuarinaceae
8 White Lauan Shorea contorta Dipterocarpaceae
9 Red Lauan Shorea negrosensis Dipterocarpaceae
11 Bitanghol Calophyllum blancoi Clusiaceae
12 Hamindang Macaranga bicolor Euphorbiaceae
13 Narra Pterocarpus indicus Fabaceae
14 Kalingag Cinnamomum mercadoi Lauraceae
15 Barobo Diplodiscus paniculatus Turc Malvaceae
16 Malatungao Melastoma polyanthia Melastomotaceae
17 Antipolo Artocarpus blancoi Moraceae
18 Anubing Artocarpus cumingiana Moraceae
19 Kamansi/Rimas Artocarpus communis Moraceae
20 Hagimit Ficus minahassae Moraceae
21 Is-is Ficus odorata Moraceae
22 Niyog-niyogan Ficus pseudopalma Moraceae
23 Duguan Myristica philippinensis Myristicaceae
127 | P a g e

24 Payuspos Rhodomyrtus surigaoensis Myrtaceae
25 Tiga Tristania micrantha Myrtaceae
26 Magkono Xanthostemon verdugonianus Myrtaceae
28 Upper Picher Plant 1 Nepenthes viridis Nepenthaceae
29 Upper Pitchher Plant 2 Nepenthes sp. Nepenthaceae
Lower Picher Plant 3 Nepenthes merrilliana Nepenthaceae
30 Wild Waling-waling Vanda sanderiana Orchidaceae
31 Baliw Pandanus tectorius Pandaceae
32 Freycinetia Freycinetia auriculata Merr. Pandaceae
33 Ibor Dacrydium sp. Podocarpaceae
35 Hambabalod Neonauclea formicaria Rubiaceae
36 Malakape Canthium dococcum Rubiaceae
37 Kahoi Dalaga Mussaenda philippica Merr Rubiaceae
38 Dungon Tarrietia sylavatica Stercullaceae
39 Alagau Prema odorata blancoi Verbenaceae
40 Molave Verbenaceae Vitex parviflora
41 Tambabasi Callicarpa formosana Rolfe Verbenaceae
42 Tagbak Kolowratia elegans Zingiberaceae
2.1.4.2.2.4 Conservation Status
The conservation status of species is based on the DAO No. 2017-11 better known as ‘‘The National
List of Threatened Philippine Plants and their Categories’. From the 241 identified species in the
ten sampling quadrats, only sixteen (16) species are included in the National List of Threatened
Flora species or in DAO No. 2017-11 (Table 21).
Table 21 - List of identified threatened plants found in the project area

Common Conservation Status
No Scientific Name Family Name Location
Name (DAO No. 2017-11)
Category A-Critically Quadrat 1,2,
Endangered 3,4,5
Upper Picher Nepenthes sp. Nepenthaceae Category A-Critically Quadrat
2
Plant Endangered 1,2,3,4,5,6
128 | P a g e
Common Conservation Status

No Scientific Name Family Name Location
Name (DAO No. 2017-11)
Lower Picher Nepenthes sp. Nepenthaceae Category A-Critically Quadrat
3
Plant Endangered 1,2,3,4,5,6
Wild Waling- Vanda sanderiana Orchidaceae Category A- Quadrat 1,2

4
waling Endangered Species 3,5,6
Xanthostemon Category B-Critically Quadrat

5 Magkono Myrtaceae
verdugonianus Endangered Species 1,2,3,4,5,6, 9
Tree Fern/ Cyathea contaminans Category B-Critically
6 Cyatheaceae Quadrat 1,2, 4,
Anotong (Hook.) Endangered
Category B-Critically
7 Molave Vitex parviflora Verbenaceae Quadrat 8,9
Endangered
Category C-
8 Dagang Anisoptera aurea Dipterocarpaceae Quadrat 4
Vulnerable
Category C-
9 White Lauan Shorea contorta Dipterocarpaceae Quadrat 1,2
Vulnerable
Category C-
10 Red Lauan Shorea negrosensis Dipterocarpaceae Quadrat 2,4
Vulnerable
Category C-
11 Tanguile Shorea polysperma Dipterocarpaceae Quadrat 2
Vulnerable
Category C-
12 Narra Pterocarpus indicus Fabaceae Quadrat 6,8,9
Vulnerable
Category D-Other Quadrat
13 Palasan Calamus merrillii Arecaceae
Threatened Species 1,2,4,6,7,8
Category D-Other Quadrat
14 Limuran Calamus ornatus Arecaceae
Threatened Species 1,2,4,5,6,7,8
Myristica Category D-Other Quadrat 1,2,
15 Duguan Myristicaceae
philippinensis Threatened Species 4,5,6
Securrinega Category D-Other
16 Anislag Phyllanthaceae Quadrat 1,7,8,9
flexousa Threatened Species
2.1.4.2.2.5 Economic and Ecological Significance of Flora Resources
The floral resources identified during the conduct of transect walk and assessment within the
study area have significant values to the community. Their uses can be classified into two: 1.)
Economic and 2.) Ecological. Basically, all these resources have ecological roles not only in the
specific habitat where they abound but also in nature. Any of these resources which help alleviate
economic conditions have economic use. Economically important species are those used for
timber, construction, cottage industry, food, medicine, fiber, feed (forage/pasture), and fuel.
129 | P a g e
Ecologically important species are those ornamentals, landscape plants, hedgerows, and other
plant resources used for soil erosion and weed control. As a whole the flora resources that
includes all plant types such as trees, palms, ferns, shrubs, grasses, vines, herbs etc. is very vital
to mitigate the worldwide problem on climate change.
2.1.4.3 Terrestrial Fauna
2.1.4.3.1 Description of Survey Method
The terrestrial flora assessment for Stagno Mining Development Corporation was conducted last
November 30, 2021 to December 4, 2021. The study area is located in Brgy, Bayanihan, San Jose
and Garcia, Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands. The assessment was done through
opportunistic survey to determine ecological measurements of the fauna assemblages which
assess the conservation status of fauna documented based on national legislation and DAO-2019-
09 criteria and determine the changes of fauna assemblages through assessment result. Also, to
determine whether the surrounding area of the proposed road project supports valuable
terrestrial vertebrate fauna communities that will potentially be impacted by the project.
The exploration focused on forest animals’ group namely (i)birds, (ii)frogs and reptiles, (iii)bats
(or flying mammals), and (iv)non-volant mammals which belongs to a group called “vertebrates”
or animal with backbones. Interviews were also performed but were limited only to conspicuous
and easily identifiable species (e.g. birds, monitor lizard, snake, insects, etc.). Using the most
common metrics such a species richness, Shannon diversity, dominance, evenness and relative
abundance were described. National conservation status of the species was also presented.
2.1.4.3.2.1 Field Survey
A specific team is responsible for each animal group. Each team is comprised by a Biologists who
acted as a field researcher and one local researcher. The local researchers / laborers were at first
oriented to the rationale of the activity and the specific objectives of the field expedition and the
modified method for each of the four animal groups was discussed. The co-researchers were then
assigned to assists in the field monitoring for each fauna groups. Species identification was aided
using specific fauna keys such as Strange, 2000 for birds Ingle, N.R. and L.R. Heaney (1992) for
bats, Heaney et. al., 1999 for non-flying mammals Diesmos et.al., 2015 for amphibians and Brown
et.al., 2000 and Mc Leod et. al., 2011 for reptiles. Journals and materials in the worldwide web
also aided in the identification of species.
130 | P a g e
2.1.4.3.2.1.1 Birds Survey
All of the birds that were perceived visually or detected through calls within 30 m of the observer
were counted. The researchers walked at a slow and constant speed to ensure proper, non-biased
observations, DSLR cameras and photographic field guides were used to confirm the observations.
All observations were recorded on the field. Nocturnal birds or those active at night were also
noted when encountered or heard during the transect walk for nocturnal mammals. The observed
birds were identified based on their morphology, behaviour and calls according to Kennedy (2000)
and Fisher and Hicks (2006), and the ecological status, i.e., endemism, of the identified birds was
determined using the same field guides. Conservation status was determined using the DAO-
2019-09 list, and the published literature and field guides were used to determine the feeding
guilds of the identified species. Birds were listed following the four techniques discussed below:
a. Survey using mist nets. This technique employs specialized nets called “mist nets” to catch
flying bird. Each net was set along suspected or ideal flyways (across and along waterways,
forest edges and clearings, feeding trees and near forest canopy) to catch birds that happen
to pass in the area. Checking was done regularly every 30 minutes especially late afternoon
and the birds trapped are immediately removed from the nets to prevent them from getting
stressed and eventually die. Birds captured are kept in clean cloth bags and kept in a cool,
ventilated place if not processed immediately. For each bird capture, morphometric of birds
were measured by a caliper. After taking photos of a few individuals for each captured
species, birds were marked with red nail polish to avoid recounting if captured after released.
b. Line transect survey. Transect walk follows the established foot trail along riparian zone,
open and cultivated area, forest edges and interior. The transect walks were conducted in
the morning at 500 hrs and in the afternoon at 1600 hrs where bird activities are assumed to
be highest and extended up to 1900 hrs to take into account nocturnal species. A hand-held
Global Positioning System was used for the coordinates of each sampling point. All birds seen
and heard from both sides of the transect line were recorded. Information such as the mode
of observation, weather, habitat type, species, number of individuals, and the stratum where
the bird was seen were recorded. Key informant interviews of the local residents were also
made to enhance the data gathering.
c. Opportunistic listing. This technique simply means listing all birds that were seen casually
around the forests. Such random instances may be during hikes from and back to camp, when
transects were being established, during vegetation sampling, and during raptor
observations, among others.
131 | P a g e
d. “Sit and Wait’. The technique is effective in observing and identification of displaying raptors
or birds-of-prey such as eagles, harriers, hawks and kites. This is also utilized in taking
photographs of shy bird species were the researchers sit and wait while partially hidden in a
bush waiting for a good view of to be photo-captured birds. This technique is aided with a
pair of binoculars and a telephoto camera.
2.1.4.3.2.1.2 Volant Mammals (Flying Mammals)
A specialized net called “mist nets” was utilized and set along suspected or ideal flyways (across
and along waterways, forest edges and clearings, feeding trees and near forest canopy) to catch
bats. The mono filament net will appear invisible from afar. Each net measured 6 m x 12m and
will be installed either individually or in series in areas that are accessible for checking. Nets was
left open during the night and field researchers keep watch of the nets during the first two hours
of the evening to retrieve “microbat” or insect-feeding bats netted. These groups of bats have a
very sharp teeth so that if left entangled will chew the way out of the nets. Other groups of bats,
“megabats” have blunt teeth and are active the whole night feeding on fruits. These groups
including a few larger microbats will be retrieved early in the following day and hanged on
suitable, shaded areas in the forest after measurements and identification. Bats identification will
be made possible through the bat field identification guide (Ingle et al, 1992). Measurements such
as (i) forearm length, (ii) ear length, (iii) hind foot length, (iv) tail length and (v) total length were
measured using a caliper. Weight will also be measured using a Pesola spring balance. Digital
photos will be taken and compiled for each captured individual indicating the picture and species
ID number in the data sheet. Prior to the release of all captured bats, sugar solutions will be given
through a dropper to replenish the energy lost during the periods of handling. Red nail polish will
be used to mark the nails of the captured animals to avoid recounting.
132 | P a g e
Photo 21 - Picture taken during the installation of “MIST NETS” in the suspected flyways of
bats and birds.
2.1.4.3.2.1.3 Non-Volant mammals (Non-flying mammals)
This includes all other land mammals divided into (i) nocturnal, arboreal mammals, (ii) rodents
and shrews, and (iii) other large mammals. The survey methods employed for each of these sub‐
groups includes:
a. Nocturnal, arboreal mammals (Flying Lemur, Civets, and Flying squirrels). Same transect line
was used for birds. A team at least three personnel walked the 2km transect and searched
for arboreal mammals across all levels of the forests. Researcher also noted (i) the time an
animal was detected, (ii) its position in the forest, (iii) its approximate distance from the
observes, and the (iv) point at along the transect to which it was closest. Maturity of this kind
of mammals were also recognized. Transect walk was done during the first three hours of the
evening when animal activity were its peak.
b. Rats, squirrels and shrews. Live traps were used to survey forest rats, shrews and squirrels.
Traps were placed in suspected runways, along bushes, rotting logs, root tangles and burrows
baited with pieces of half roasted coconuts laced with peanut butter. Traps were visited twice
each day, once the early morning and once in the late afternoon to check for captured
animals. Captured animals were immediately retrieved for measurements of external metrics
including (i) total length (TL), (ii) body length (BL), (iii) tail length (Tail), (iv) ear length (Ear)
and (v) hind foot length. Weight were also noted using a Pesola spring. Identification of the
captured animals were aided with field identification key (Ingle and Heaney, 1992).
133 | P a g e
c. Small land mammals. Opportunistic listing for documenting other large mammals was
carried out relying on indirect evidences of its presence such as fecal droppings in palm civets,
forest tracks of wild pigs and deers and even pieces of mammal bones and skulls.
d. Amphibians and Reptiles. An opportunistic method was done in collecting samples. The
techniques involved establishing 200 m transect in the forest and finding as many as possible
on both sides of the line. This line was searched during the day, one in the morning from
9:00am ‐ 11:00am and one in the afternoon from 1:00pm to 3:00pm were the activity of
reptilians were active during this ours. At night time, frogs were surveyed during the first four
hours of the evening. Any animal that were encountered along the way including snakes were
captured and documented. With the aid of caliper and measuring tape, morphometric of
amphibians and reptiles was measured and recorded
Photo 22 - Picture taken during the installation of “snap traps” in the suspected runways of
non-volant mammals.
2.1.4.3.2.2 Analysis
The species assemblage for each animal group was described using the most common metrics: (i)
species richness, (ii) species evenness, (iii) Shannon-Weaver index of diversity and (iv) relative
abundance. The report will primarily use the DAO-2019-09 in the discussions for the conservation
status of the species however it will also describe few species that were identified by the World
Conservation Union or IUCN as globally “threatened” species.
Species richness – refers to the cumulative number of recorded species and provides information
on the commonness and rarity of species.
134 | P a g e
Shannon-Weaver Index of Diversity – a diversity index is a mathematical measure that combines

species richness and evenness as a measure of diversity. Species diversity was calculated using
Shannon information statistics referred as the Shannon-Weaver Index of Diversity (H'):
S
H’ =∑(pilnpi)
i=1
Where S is the total number of observed species, i is the species number and pi is the proportion
of individuals of the total sample belonging to the ith species. The value of Shannon-Weaver Index
of Diversity is constrained between 0 to 5. Lower diversity value normally indicates more uniform
species relative to the population.
Species evenness – it is the measure of biodiversity which quantifies how equal the community is
numerically. It is a measure of the homogeneity of abundances in a sample or a community. The
evenness of the avifauna community was calculated using the Pielou's evenness index (E):
E=H’/H’max
where H' is the value derived from Shannon diversity index and H'max is the maximum value of
H' calculated as H'max = In S. The value of Pielou's evenness index ranges between 0 to 1. higher
values of E means a less variation in communities between species.
Similarities between the vertebrate taxa across sampling points were calculated using the Bray-
Curtis Similarity Index and cluster analysis was performed to groups samples with the most
similarity. Similarity index and cluster analysis were calculated using the software PAST version
2.17. All indices are computed for rarefied samples or individuals to reduce the bias of
comparisons.
Relative abundance for the observed fauna groups were calculated after Ibañez (2010). For birds,
this was expressed as the number of birds per 100 birds and calculated by getting the ratio of the
total individuals for each species and the total individuals for all the species (N), and then
multiplied by 100 birds or:
RA = Total no. of individuals seen or heard x 100 birds

Total no. of birds seen (or netted)
Relative abundance per species was measured separately for mist net and transect line data. Not
all species were encountered by both techniques so that some species only had one abundance
value.
135 | P a g e
For bats, relative abundance estimates for each species was expressed as the number of bats per
100 net nights, calculated by getting the ratio of the total number of individuals caught per species
and the cumulative number of net nights (total number of nets used x the no. of nights nets was
opened). The ratio was then multiplied by 100 or:
RA = Total no. of individuals per species x 100 net nights

Total no. of net nights
The relative abundance for rodents and shrews was expressed as the number of rodents and
shrews caught per 100 trap nights. This was calculated by getting the ratio of the number of
individuals trapped per species and the cumulative number of trap nights (total no. of traps used
x the number of nights they were used). The ratio was then multiplied by 100 or:
RA = Total no. of individuals per species x 100 trap nights

Total no. of trap nights
Relative abundance of nocturnal arboreal mammals was expressed as the number of animals
detected per 100 hours of transect. This was calculated by getting the ratio of the number of
individuals detected for each species and the total number of hours spent for the transect survey.
The ratio was then multiplied by 100, or:
RA = Total no. of individuals detected per species x 100 transect hours

Total transect hours
Description of species with conservation priorities identified by the World Conservation or IUCN
is provided. Percentage of Philippine endemic species was also calculated. Percent endemicity
provides a broad evaluation of the importance of the area being a habitat for unique species
(Ibañez, 2010).
136 | P a g e
2.1.4.3.3 Results and Discussion
2.1.4.3.3.1 Description of each Sampling Station
Collection of samples were undertaken from five sampling stations within the vicinity of of MPSA
of Stagno Mining Corporation located in Barangay Bayanihan, San Jose, and Garcia, Municipality
of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands, Philippines. Different types of vegetation were observed in
every station which correlates to the current situation of the faunal assessment on its ecosystem.
Presence of trees such as Katmon (Dillenia philippinensis), Kamansi (Artocarpus communis),
Mango tree (Mangifera indica), Coconut (Cocos nucifera), and Banana (Musa × paradisiaca) in the
area may be a prospect roosting sites of some forms of animals. However, existence of this plants
may not also assure that the area is still abundance in terms of terrestrial ecology. Global
Positioning System (GPS) were used to locate the areas and for mapping purposes.
137 | P a g e
Figure 49 - Terrestrial fuana assessment sampling stations within Stagno Mining Corporation located in Barangay Bayanihan, San Jose, and Garcia, Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islan
138 | P a g e
Table 22 - Locations and descriptiosn of each sampling stations in five sampling areas.
Site
Site Location Elevation Coordinates Descriptions
Code
Station 1
This area was dominated with
planted trees such as Katmon
(Dillenia philippinensis), Sagimsiman
Sitio Catmonan, 10°11’15"N (Syzyguim brevistylum), Coconut
S1 28 m
Libjo 125°37’09”E (Cocos nucifera) and different types
of fruiting trees. Area was also filled
with some root crops like Kamoteng
kahoy (Manihot esculenta) and
Sweet potato (Ipomoea batatas).
Station 2 is an advanced secondary
forest type with patches of grown up
Anas, Sitio 10°11’16"N trees. Vegetated with patches of
S2 41 m
Catmonan 125°37’10”E Banana (Musa × paradisiaca),
Gmelina (Gmelina arborea) and Rice
(Oryza sativa).
Existence of fruiting trees such as
Santol (Sandoricum koetjape),
P7, Sitio 10°11’01"N Mango (Mangefera indica), Coconut
S3 34 m
Catmonan, Libjo 125°37’39”E (Cocos nucifera) and also different
types of plants that may attract
animals was observe in the areas.
Area was filled and mostly dominated
San Jose Gamay, 10°10’34"N
S4 10 m with Black wattle (Acacia mangium).
Libjo 125°34’01”E
The area has an open canopy type.
The area was vegetated with patches
of natural forest and dominated with
San Jose Gamay, 10°11’08"N coconut (Cocos nucifera). Fruiting
S5 13 m
Libjo 125°33’42”E trees such as Psidium guajava
(guava), Lansium domesticum
(lansones), Durio zebethenus
139 | P a g e
Site
Site Location Elevation Coordinates Descriptions
Code
(durian), Musa sapientum (Banana),
Artocarpus heterophyllus (Jack Fruit)
and Mangifera indica (Mango) that
can be observed and may attracts
bids, bats, and rats.
Photo 23 - Fauna sampling station 1 in Sitio Catmonan, Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat
Islands, Philippines.
140 | P a g e
Photo 24 - Fauna sampling station 2 in Anas, Sitio Catmonan, Municipality of Libjo, Province of
Dinagat Islands, Philippines.
Photo 25 - Fauna sampling station 3 in P7, Sitio Catmonan, Municipality of Libjo, Province of
Dinagat Islands, Philippines.
141 | P a g e
Photo 26 - Fauna sampling station 4 in San Jose Gamay, Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat
Photo 27 - Fauna sampling station 5 in San Jose Gamay, Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat
142 | P a g e
2.1.4.3.3.2 Volant and Non-Volant Mammals
2.1.4.3.3.2.1 Species composition, Species richness and Relative abundance of Bats
The distribution of small mammals in mountainous environments across different elevations can
provide important information on the effects of climate change on the dispersal of species. However,
few studies conducted to monitor each ecosystem to compare the distribution patterns of small
mammal diversity. Baseline information on biodiversity is important in ecosystem management
planning. According to Goodman et al., 1996 clarifying species distribution provides useful
information on ecology, habitat preference, and species replacement. Studies investigating the
relationship between species richness and diversity patterns. Monitoring of ecological distribution of
small mammals will also useful to determine disturbances in natural ecosystems due to human
activities which have increased alarmingly, jeopardizing the preservation of many species, particularly
in tropical forests where the land-use change from forest to disturbed areas and the increase of
human settlements are alarming. Habitat fragmentation affects different biological groups and is one
of the main causes of increased species extinction rates in recent decades.
A total of 83 individuals representing 6 species of small mammals were trapped after 48 trap-nights.
Abundance of species was captured in station 4 which is located in Brgy. San Jose Gamay within the
parcel 1. However, species richness and their distribution patterns differed between each station.
Ptenochirus jagori has the highest total number of individuals gathered 34 individual of bats which is
highly dominated in sampling station 4. Second is the Cynopterus brachyotis with relative abundance
of thirty (30) individual species. Station 4 was dominated with all captured bat species due to its
abundance of fruiting tress which can capable of supplying the food habit of volant and non-volant
species such as bats and rats in the area. For Non-Volant Mammals, seven individual species of Rattus
tanezumi from family Muridae were captured in 5 sampling stations including station 1, station 3,
station 4 and station 5 by using traps. These type of non-volant species was classified as least concern
and identify as resident in the area based on national legislation and DAO-2019-09 criteria. However,
additional research is required to improve our understanding of small mammal diversity in the
proposed mining area of Stagno Mining Corporation to promote limitations in extracting natural
habitats of small mammals which is highly affected by the mine operations every single day.
143 | P a g e
Table 23 - Overall diversity distribution of captured volant and non-volant mammals in five
sampling stations by using mist nets and live traps.
DAO
SCIENTIFIC S-
FAMILY ENDIMICITY 2019- S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 RA
NAME RA
09
VOLANT MAMMALS
Cynopterus
Pteropodidae R LC 1 1 1 20 7 30 36.14
brachyotis
Eonycteris
Pteropodidae E NT 0 0 3 0 0 3 3.61
robusta
Macroglossus
Pteropodidae R LC 0 0 0 2 2 4 4.81
minimus
Ptenochirus
Pteropodidae E LC 0 0 8 26 0 34 40.96
jagori
Ptenochirus
Pteropodidae E LC 0 0 0 0 5 5 6.02
minor
NON-VOLANT MAMMALS
Muridae Rattus tanezumi R LC 2 0 3 1 1 7 8.43
Total Individuals 3 1 15 49 15 83 100
Table 24 - Species richness and Diversity of volant mammals recorded sampling stations within the
MPSA of Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands,
Philippines.
0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5
Taxa_S 4 2 3 6 3
Individuals 10 2 28 40 23
Dominance_D 0.3 0.5 0.6913 0.405 0.5198
Simpson_1-D 0.7 0.5 0.3087 0.595 0.4802
Shannon_H 1.28 0.6931 0.5894 1.172 0.7771
Evenness_e^H/S 0.899 1 0.601 0.5379 0.7251
144 | P a g e
Unprecedented species extinctions during the past decades have raised concerns about the
consequences of biodiversity loss for the functioning of ecosystems and associated ecosystem
services that are fundamental for human well-being. Ample evidence shows that species richness and
diversity can enhance ecosystem functioning. Data above implies that station 1 located in sitio
catmonan, libjo area has a higher result for Shannon_H= 1.28 with Evenness_e^H/S =0.899 which is
basically higher than the other stations and shows equal distribution of species but in terms of
number of species and individual count; station 4 has higher than the others. This implies that station
4 is more capable to supply food habits of some volant and non-volant mammals in the area.
However, the result of the data analysis using Paleontological Statistic software (PAST) did not reach
the standard value of biodiversity index. Result with <2 implies that the area is in low biodiversity of
volant and non-volant mammals.
Figure 50 - (A)Individual counts of volant species (B) Multivariate analysis clustered in each
Province of Dinagat Islands, Philippines.
Station four has the highest individual count of captured bat species with a total number of forty‐nine
(49) individuals of volant mammals which was dominated with Ptenochirus jagori a fruit eating bat
gathered 26 individual bat species in overall count. Second species dominate in station four is
Cynopterus brachyotis fruit eating bat with 20 individual species. In terms of Multivariate analysis,
Station 3 and 4 clustered with 0.30 percent while station 2 and 1 clustered with 0.11% of the total
percent composition which means that station 3 and station 4 shared common species than station
145 | P a g e
5. If the similarity will reach to 1% of the composition, there is a higher chance of sharing same species
in each station. Therefore, the result of multivariate analysis implies that each station is not closely
sharing same species at a time.
2.1.4.3.3.2.2 Endemicity and Conservation Status of Volant and Non-Volant Mammals
Sixty‐percent of the captured volant mammals are endemic (Eonycteris robusta, Ptenochirus jagori
and Ptenochirus minor) and only forty percent was listed as resident (Cynopterus brachyotis and
Macroglossus minimus). Only one species of bats was classified as near threatened (Eonycteris
robusta) while other captured species were categorized as least concern. Not included in the data
below, Rattus tanezumi belong from family Muridae was identified as resident and listed as least
concern. This type of non-volant mammals are highly adaptive in any forms of disturbance in the
area. Therefore, survival rate of this species is still constant. Data gathered was classified through
based on national legislation and DAO-2019-09 criteria and the rest are categorized as least concern
. Figure 51 - (A) Endemicity and (B) Conservation status of volant mammals captured within the
MPSA of Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Island,
Philippines.
146 | P a g e
2.1.4.3.3.3 Avifauna
2.1.4.3.3.3.1 Species composition, Species richness and Relative abundance of Birds
Birds are crucial to maintaining the balance of many ecosystems by providing various ecological
services. The diversity of birds and their feeding guilds in different land-use types were investigated
in the study area to elucidate the effect of disturbance and habitat modification on bird within the
mining site. Avifauna assemblages have contributed significantly to the advancement of science in
the field of community ecology. Comparative avifaunal diversity is an excellent indicator of ecosystem
stability because bird respond quickly to changes in their environments (G.T. Miller and S.E. Spoolman
2014). Among all other species, birds play a major role in attracting human attention. Birds are of
significance as pollinators and help in seed dispersal. Furthermore, birds are relatively easy to observe
and monitor for environmental assessment. The effects of environmental changes on bird population
are more often influenced by several intermediate factors, or the population changes are caused by
numerous interacting effects. Therefore, along with some parameters, abundance and diversity of
avifaunal species serve as ecological health indicators.
Overall composition of avifauna species yielded to 678 individuals with 14 different species that
belongs to different families. Invasive Eurasian Tree Sparrow (Passer montanus) was dominated in the
area. Endemic species such as Blue‐tailed bee‐eater (Merops philippinus), White‐eared Brown Dove
(Phapitreron leucotis) and Purple‐throated sunbird (Leptocoma sperata) are also perceived in the
area. Species listed as endemic are still diverse in terms of individual count. However, all species
gathered are listed as least concern according to national legislation and DAO-2019-09 criteria.
Table 25 - Species richness and Diversity of avifaunal species recorded within the MPSA of Stagno
Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Island, Philippines
0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5
Taxa_S 12 9 13 14 12
Individuals 133 43 123 215 164
Dominance_D 0.1112 0.1455 0.107 0.08768 0.08559
Simpson_1-D 0.8888 0.8545 0.893 0.9123 0.9144
Shannon_H 2.304 2.03 2.383 2.504 2.496
Evenness_e^H/S 0.8348 0.846 0.8337 0.8737 0.9335
147 | P a g e
Table 26 - Overall diversity distribution of captured, seen, and heard avifaunal species in five sampling stations within the MPSA of
Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands, Philippines.
DAO-
SCIENTIFIC
FAMILY NAME COMMON NAME Range 2019- S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S-RA RA
NAME
09
Accipitriformes Brahminy Kite Haliastur indus R LC 0 0 2 1 0 3 0.44
White-breasted Artamus
Artamidae R LC 8 0 5 13 25 36 5.31
woodswallow leucorynchus
Caprimulgus
Caprimulgidae Philippine nightjar E LC 0 0 0 5 0 5 0.74
manillensis
White-eared Brown Phapitreron
E LC 12 2 10 15 18 57 8.41
Dove leucotis
Columbidae Zebra Dove Geopelia striata R LC 5 4 7 15 12 43 6.34
Spilopelia
Spotted dove R LC 13 9 16 20 14 72 10.62
chinensis
Lonchura
Estrildidae Chesnut munia R LC 7 0 5 19 15 46 6.78
atricapilla
Laniidae Brown Shrike Lanius cristatus R LC 15 5 11 18 14 63 9.29
Olive-backed sunbird Cinnyris jugularis R LC 17 2 10 30 13 72 10.62
Nectariniidae Purple-throated Leptocoma
E LC 2 0 6 11 3 22 3.24
sunbird sperata
Psilopogon
Megalaimidae Coppersmith barbet R LC 2 1 3 8 5 19 2.80
haemacephalus
148 | P a g e
DAO-
SCIENTIFIC
FAMILY NAME COMMON NAME Range 2019- S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S-RA RA
NAME
09
Eurasian Tree Passer
Passeridae R LC 25 5 25 22 18 95 14.01
Sparrow montanus
Yellow-vented Pycnonotus
Pycnonotidae R LC 12 8 13 15 13 61 8.99
Bulbul goiavier
Aplonis
Sturnidae Asian glossy starling R LC 15 7 10 23 14 69 10.18
panayensis
149 | P a g e
As a whole, the most commonly encountered species among the habitats were as follows: Passer
montanus, Cinnyris jugularis, Spilopelia chinensis, Aplonis panayensis and Lanius cristatus (Table
25 and Table 26). This type of species is dominated in the area as they easily survived in a highly
disturbed area. The characteristic of the vegetation and the availability of food resources may be
vital to the diversity of avifaunal species in every station as evidenced by the high species richness
of frugivorous and insectivore’s birds, respectively, where food source is largely available. Station
4 located in San Jose Gamay got the highest number of individuals with 215 while station 2 has
the lowest number of perceive avifaunal species gathered 43 individuals. Diversity and
distribution of species implies that Shannon_H value of station 4 is a little bit higher than any
other station. Station 4 has value of Shannon_H = 2.504 and value of Evenness_e^H/S = 0.8737.
The result of statistical analysis implies that the value of Shannon_H in five sampling stations is
greater than 2 (>2) and Evenness_e^H/S is not greater than 1 (>1) which means that the area is
still diverse in avifaunal species and are equally distributed in the area. Diversity and distribution
of species was analyzed through Paleontological Statistic software (PAST).
Figure 52 - (A)Individual counts of avifaunal species (B) Multivariate analysis clustered in each
sampling stations within the MPSA of Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of
Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands, Philippines.
Individual counts of avifaunal species indicate that station four has the highest count in numbers
of individual species and all 14 different species were perceive in the area. Which means that the
area is less disturbed and more abundant in terms of food availability such as insects and different
types of fruits and nectars which are primary food of avifaunal species.
In cluster analysis, station 1 and 3 has the highest percent composition clustered with 0.87% than
station 4 and station 5 clustered 0.80% while station 2 shared only 0.45% of the total composition.
150 | P a g e
However, the result of mulltivariate analysis does not satisfied the 1% normal standard in
clustering. Therefor, the diistribution of avifaunal species in five sampling stations are not equally
distributed.
2.1.4.3.3.3.2 Endemicity and Conservation Status of Avifaunal Species
Seventy nine percent (79%) of the total percent composition was categorized as resident (bird
species which can be found everywhere in the world) while only fifteen percent listed as endemic
or only 3 out of 17 species are classified as endemic with percent composition of 21%. In terms of
conservation status, all species that are listed during the observation fall in least concern category
except for. The conservation status of the bird species was assessed using the latest information
available from national legislation and DAO-2019-09 criteria.
21%
ENDEMIC
79%
RESIDENT
Figure 53 - Endemicity status of avifaunal species by using camera within the MPSA of Stagno
Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands, Philippines.
2.1.4.3.3.4 Herpetofauna Survey
2.1.4.3.3.4.1 Species composition, Species richness and Diversity
Reptiles and amphibians (herpetofauna) are among the most species-rich groups of terrestrial
vertebrates, with hundreds of new species still being discovered every year.Herpetofaunal species
are essential components of terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems, being major secondary
consumers and important prey for many tertiary and quaternary consumers. Factors affecting
herpetofaunal species therefore ultimately affect other species throughout the food chain.
151 | P a g e
Herpetofaunal species are among the most threatened vertebrates world-wide. Indeed, this
group of vertebrates have already suffered massive declines due to habitat loss and degradation,
pollution and climate change.
A total of 46 individual species with 2 different species of amphibians and 6 different species of
reptiles were recoded. Rhinella marina and Limnonectes magnus are the only amphibian species
captured in the entire fauna monitoring. Rhinella marina is classified as invasive resident species
of many areas in the world, it can grow and reproduce easily because the rate of their survival is
high. Endemic species of reptiles was also recorded such as as Hydrosaurus pustullatos, Naja
philippinensis and Tropidolaemus subannulatus.
Table 27 - Overall diversity distribution of captured herpetofauna species in five sampling

stations within the study area.
DAO
COMMON SCIENTIFIC S-
FAMILY Range 2019- S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 RA
NAME NAME RA
09
VOLANT MAMMALS
Rhinella
Bufonidae Cane Toad R LC 0 0 17 0 0 17 36.9
marina
Mindanao Limnonectes
Dicroglossidae E NT 0 0 10 0 0 10 21.7
fanged frog magnus
NON-VOLANT MAMMALS
Philippine Hydrosaurus
Agamidae E Vu 4 0 3 0 0 7 15.2
sailfin lizard pustullatos
Philippine Naja
Elapidae E NT 1 0 0 0 0 1 2.1
cobra philippinensis
Gekkonidae tokay gecko Gekko gecko R LC 0 0 3 0 0 3 6.5
Common Eutropis
Scincidae R LC 1 1 0 1 1 4 8.6
sun skink multifasciata
Monitor
Varanidae Varanus varius R LC 1 0 0 1 0 2 4.3
lizards
Bornean
keeled Tropidolaemus
Viperidae E LC 1 0 0 0 1 2 4.3
green pit subannulatus
viper
152 | P a g e
Table 28 - Species richness and Diversity of avifaunal species recorded within the study site.
0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5
Taxa_S 5 1 4 2 2
Individuals 8 1 33 2 2
Dominance_D 0.3125 1 0.3737 0.5 0.5
Simpson_1-D 0.6875 0 0.6263 0.5 0.5
Shannon_H 1.386 0 1.139 0.6931 0.6931
Evenness_e^H/S 0.8 1 0.7813 1 1
Paleontological Statistic software (PAST) was used to identify the distribution status of all
herpetofauna species in the area. Based on the data given above, there is no equal distribution of
species in all five stations. Herpetofaunal species have specific habitat and microclimate
requirements for metabolism and reproduction, and are thus sensitive to changes in the
environment. Amphibians are particularly sensitive to habitat degradation, and are often the first
vertebrates to show noticeable declines in areas experiencing environmental alterations. Because
of their habitat specificity, low mobility, high reproductive capacity and turnover rate, sensitivity
to habitat modifications and ease of sampling, amphibians and reptiles can be used as indicators
of environmental health and could be monitored to assess the ecological integrity of terrestrial
and aquatic ecosystems.
153 | P a g e
Figure 54 - (A)Individual counts of herpetofauna species (B) Multivariate analysis clustered in

each sampling stations within Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo,
Province of Dinagat Island, Philippines.
Individual counts of herpetofauna species gathered 46 individual of amphibian and reptiles but
the most diverse species is the invasive Rhinella marina that can be found in station 3 (Figure 54).
Presence of reptiles that were listed was observe in this sampling. Although number of species
count are not that significant, their presence will be somehow indications that this species are
still exist in the area and need to be protected. In cluster analysis station 3 clustered only 0.10%
to all four stations while station 2 and station 4 clustered with 0.75% of the shared species. Cluster
analysis implies that herpetofauna species in the area are not equally distributed.
2.1.4.3.3.4.2 Endemicity and Conservation Status of Herpetofauna Species
There were 50% of endemic species and 50% range. One species of amphibians listed as endemic
Limnonectes magnus and 3 species of reptiles listed as endemic Hydrosaurus pustullatos, Naja
philippinensis, and Tropidolaemus subannulatus. L. magnus fall under the “Near Threatened”
classification species while Hydrosaurus pustullatos listed as “vulnerable” and Naja philippinensis
classified as “near threatened” of DAO 2019‐09. The occurrence of this species within the
proposed mine site was highly pressured not only by the limited microhabitat but also by hunting
for food. Intensive information and education campaign were continuously recommended to aid
the protection of few endangered species like Cuora amboinensis or the Southeast Asian Box
Turtle and some near and threatened species such as Pteropus pumilus,
154 | P a g e
L. magnus and Hydrosaurus pustullatos, and Naja philippinensis within the vicinity of the the
proposed mine site. Rhinella marina, Gekko gecko, Eutropis multifasciata, Varanus varius and
Tropidolaemus subannulatus are classified as least concern and resident in the area.
0
Critically Endangered Vulnerable Near Least Concern
Endangered Threatened
Figure 55 - Endemicity status of herpetofauna species by using camera within the MPSA of
Stagno Mining Corporation located in Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Island,
Philippine
2.1.4.3.4 Ecological Implications of the Observed Flora in relation to mining development
The environmental consequences of mining are related to encroachments upon nature due to
earthworks; damming or lowering of the water level and changed water flows of drainage and/
or creeks, and building of structures (complex and facilities), roads, and other appurtenant
structures. Nickel mining, entails stripping off vegetation and its alteration. Like that of other
disturbances, the general effect of this disturbance on succession is push it back to an early stage.
If operations remove and/or replace part of the vegetation, succession will tend to replace it when
conditions become suitable, if all the vegetation is ruined, recovery may slow or never will progress
due to suppression involved in the landscaping and maintenance operations. The proposed Mining
operations of Stagno Mining Corporation and the construction appurtenant structures inside its
MPSA area have already modified the landscape. As such, as expected, the affected vegetation is
either destroyed or reduced to early stages of seral succession. As observed during the study the
floral species within the MPSA area of Stagno Mining Corporation and immediate vicinities, a high
number of representative of species of euphorbias, legumes, rubias, and some mallows suggests
a stand undergoing succession. This may reflect the increasing anthropogenic pressures on the
area. Notable species such as Malatungaw (Melastoma malabaththycum L.) and Agsam
(Dicranopteris linearis (Burm.f.) coupled with figs and meloids, the stand is in or near riparian areas
155 | P a g e
or having high moisture condition. The domination of aggressive ferns like kilob and agsam on the
ground or floor of the ultramafic forest areas reflects the increasing exposed soils. Kilob tend to
occupy newly open areas. Agsam, on the other hand, thrives in a frequently burned areas, hence
its domination reflects slash‐and‐burn areas and frequent forest fire. Other fern species in the
forest floor suggests high humus and soil moisture. As an ecological function of the flora resources
with the presence of figs, moraceae species in the area it serves as habitats for the fruitivores like
many species of birds and mammals (bats, monkeys, rats etc.) Other sources of fruits include
species from Meliaceae, Myrtaceae, Malvaceae, Sapindaceae, Rubiaceae, Musaceae,
Anacardiaceae, and Clusiaceae which is common in the area. Agricultural crops such as cassava,
corn, banana, nangka and other fruits planted by the nearby settlement areas also created patches
of agri‐ecosystem within the vicinity of the MPSA area of Stagno Mining Corporation. This
landscape and vegetation formation complement the good cycle of food‐chain since edible floras
are considered to be the primary food among the primary fauna consumers thriving in the area.
The high number of leguminous species in a forest area is a significant factor for its continued
survival, according to the recent study. This may be attributable to the type of adaptation of
legumes to poor, acerbic soil, i.e., nitrogen fixation. This is a symbiotic association of roots of plants
with nitrogen‐fixing‐bacteria like Rhizobium sp. This ecological relationship contributes to the
fertility of the forest soil which in turn assures survival of other associated species. This
adaptation, in fact may play a significant role in rehabilitation regimen of the area and preservation
of the possible buffer zones to be identified by the company but most likely near or along the rivers,
creeks, riparian zones and mangrove areas within or at the immediate vicinity of the proposed
mining area of Stagno Mining Corporation. The potential buffer zones based on the observations
during the conduct of the study are those sites that are densely vegetated along the rivers and
with a high biodiversity because obviously those areas have good ecological condition.
2.1.4.3.5 Impacts on Terrestrial Biology
Clearing of vegetation will result to the removal of ecologically and economically important
species. The destruction of wildlife habitat will result to displacement of wildlife. Stripping of
topsoil will consequently disturb the seed bank in the area through seed displacement affecting the
ecological recovery of vegetation in the project site. Accelerated soil erosion as a result of clearing
and earthworks will contribute to soil nutrient loss necessary for plant growth. The removal of
photosynthesizing plants will affect CO2 sequestration causing some degree of effect on the
microclimate. Removal of vegetation, top soil, leaf litter, rock crevices, decaying logs, tree stumps,
etc. will lead to the complete transformation of the habitat causing displacement and even direct
killing of wildlife most especially those that are less mobile (i.e., amphibians, reptiles, small non‐
volant mammals, nestlings and other young individuals).
156 | P a g e
The construction of new access roads may cause formation of internal habitat fragmentation
leading to isolation and decreased dispersal capabilities of different wildlife. Construction of the
access road may also lead to habitat loss causing population reduction, create continuous
disturbance at forest edges leading to decreased habitat quality and alteration of faunal
assemblage, intrusion of commensal and other invasive species, and mortality due to vehicular
traffic. The area will also be more accessible attracting illegal hunters and poachers of animals for
food, trading or pets.
2.1.4.3.6 Mitigating Measures
Since conservation of all species may not be possible, priority shall be given to ecologically and
economically important species identified in the area. A nursery shall be established to propagate
the seeds/propagules of these species, which will provide seedlings for future rehabilitation
requirements. The development of the tree plantation shall use the indigenous species and apply
assisted regeneration techniques. To minimize the impacts associated to clearing of vegetation,
unnecessary clearing of vegetation shall be avoided. In addition, clearing and site preparation shall
be done in stages. Poaching of wildlife shall be strictly prohibited to mitigate population reduction
and allow their safe movement.
Excavated topsoil shall be used to rehabilitate disturbed/worked areas or shall be temporarily

stockpiled in the designated topsoil areas. The topsoil shall be seeded to promote vegetative
growth and to maintain or improve the soil quality. Whenever possible, tree‐balling and
immediate transfer of trees to open areas in the barangay will be done. A tree cutting permit shall
be secured prior to any clearing.
To mitigate the impacts to wildlife, schedule of activities should be carefully considered and
implemented. Personnel, heavy equipment, other vehicles, etc. shall be confined only to pre‐
determined designated areas and shall not occupy other areas so as to avoid further disturbances
to wildlife. Regular replacement and/or maintenance of equipment particularly mufflers of
vehicles shall be done to minimize noise and avoid disturbance of wildlife in the surrounding
areas. For new roads to be opened up, heavily disturbed (e.g., grassland, scrubland, etc.) areas or
trails shall be considered and prioritized in the design of road layout. Riparian zones will be given
high priority for regeneration activities to connect separated habitat areas.
Existing wildlife in the area shall be protected through an active and continuous wildlife protection
and conservation campaign with the participation of all key stakeholders (e.g., communities, LGUs,
etc.) within and around the project site. Progressive rehabilitation of disturbed areas shall be
carried out.
157 | P a g e
2.2 Water
2.2.1 Hydrology
2.2.1.1 Drainage System
The Stagno Libjo Mining Project has a total tenement area of 1,149.8301 ha consisting of two
parcels – Parcel 1 (729 ha) and Parcel 2 (420.8301 ha). In addition to the tenement area, the
Project also covers 34.23 ha under Special Land Use Permit (SLUP) for the waste dump, ore
stockyard and support facilities, and 2.4 ha under the Foreshore Lease Agreement (FLA) for the
causeway. All these areas are located within the drainage area of Gaas Inlet which is listed as one
of the Principal Rivers of Northern Mindanao Water Resources Region by the National Water
Resources Board (NWRB)3. Gaas Inlet drainage area is approximately 139 km2 (13,900 ha)
encompassing the municipalities of Libjo, Basilisa and Cagdianao. Its headwaters originates from
the west, generally flowing northeast towards the Gaas Bay located at the eastern side of the
Dinagat Island. The island is characterized by dendritic to trellis drainage pattern signifying
structural control while radial drainage occurs along peaks such as by Mount Pelhi (770 m) and
Mount Tristan (625 m) along the watershed divide of Gaas Inlet.
The Gaas inlet drainage area was further subdivided into subwatersheds taking into account the
tributaries draining the project areas (Figure 56). Subwatershed 1 (drainage area (DA) = 1,111 ha),
2 (DA = 268 ha) and 3 (DA = 474 ha) contains portions of Parcel 2 (mining operations area) and
the support facilities. Subwatershed 4 (DA = 3,140 ha at reference point: 10° 9'18.51"N,
125°34'13.08"E) consist of several tributaries of San Jose River branching out within Parcel 1
(mining exploration area).
2.2.1.2 Flooding Hazards
Dinagat island is characterized by a rugged to moderately rugged topography with the east coast
of the island relatively more rugged and of higher relief and elevation than the west coast. The
Flooding and Landslide Susceptibility Map presented in Figure 57 generated using the Geohazard
Web Portal4 of the Mines and Geosciences Bureau (MGB) shows that a significant portion of Parcel
1 located near the west coast is moderately to highly susceptible to flooding. Parcel 1 is located
at the low-lying areas of Subwatershed 4 (San Jose River) and comprises about 23% of the total
subwatershed area particularly the mid-lower section where the confluence of the six (6)
3
4
https://lgsd.mgb.gov.ph/portal/apps/webappviewer/index.html?id=d67b4e332f624850bcfab90d0dbc06a3
158 | P a g e
tributaries of San Jose River is located. Subwatershed 4 also has a relatively large drainage area
comprising approximately 23% of the total area of Gaas Inlet watershed.
On the other hand, Parcel 2, which is the proposed mine operations area, is not susceptible to
flooding but is moderately to highly susceptible to landslides. This area is located in the
mountainous regions with rugged terrain and higher relief and elevation typically found at the
eastern coasts of Dinagat Island.
159 | P a g e
Figure 56 - Watershed map showing the location of the Project relative to the existing drainage system of Gaas Inlet
160 | P a g e
Figure 57 - Flooding and Landslide Susceptibility Map
161 | P a g e
2.2.2 Hydrogeology
2.2.2.1 Hydrogeologic Units
The rock units in the Province of Surigao del Norte are classified into three (3) main groups based
on the ages of the rock formations. These are, from the oldest to youngest, the Miocene and
Older rocks, the Pliocene to Pleistocene Rocks and the Recent Deposits. The grouping of the rocks
is related to their potential as groundwater sources. The younger rocks are considered the most
important to groundwater because of their porosity and permeability relative to the older rocks.
(Nippon Jogesuido Sekkei Co., Ltd., 1998)5
Miocene and Older rocks of Dinagat Island are mostly covered by igneous rocks consisting of
ultramafic and mafic rocks of Cretaceous age. The oldest basement complex rocks consist of schist
and quartzite and are distributed in places of the rim of the western and southern part of the
island. Pliocene to Pleistocene sediments are composed of marine and terrestrial formations,
associated with reef limestone. The formation has low groundwater development potential and
is appropriate for groundwater development by means of deep wells. In terms of recent deposits,
Dinagat Island almost has none except for the seashore line and in the inland central and north
western areas. Figure 58 presents the Hydrogeologic Map of Surigao del Norte showing that the
Project area is underlain by Miocene and older rock units.
2.2.2.2 Groundwater Availability in Dinagat Island
The regional groundwater availability map of the NWRB shown in Figure 59 indicates that Dinagat
Islands falls under “difficult areas”. Difficult areas are categorized as zones that largely consist of
rock formations older than Miocene in age and are generally not suitable for well development.
Groundwater availability in the aforementioned rocks is very low and is usually released in the
opened rock fractures. Common sources of water supply in these areas are springs. Difficult areas
generally have alluvial sediments with small scale in the narrow areas along the streams issuing
from the mountains. In such areas, groundwater development by means of shallow and deep
wells is often possible though the development potential is very limited. Groundwater
replenishment in difficult areas is usually only through rock fissures cracks and crevices which
predominantly exist in sites where there are faults and other geologic discontinuities.
Groundwater development on Dinagat Island can mostly be undertaken by shallow wells. (Nippon
Jogesuido Sekkei Co., Ltd., 1998)
5
Nippon Jogesuido Sekkei Co., Ltd. (1998). Provincial Water Supply, Sewerage and Sanitation Sector Plan for
the Province of Surigao del Norte.
162 | P a g e
Figure 58 - Hydrogeologic Map of Surigao del Norte
163 | P a g e
Figure 59 – Regional Groundwater Availability Map
164 | P a g e
2.2.3 Water Source and Water Use
2.2.3.1 Domestic Use
According to the 2010 Census Report of the National Statistics Office (National Statistics Office,
2014)6, the popular source of water for drinking, cooking, and laundry in Libjo was community
water system.
The main source of water for drinking in the municipality was community water sytem as reported
by 80.7% of the total households. These were mostly households using a shared faucet connected
to a community water system comprising 56.0% of the total households. About 24.7% use their
own faucet which is connected to a community water system comprised. The rest of the
households reported their main source of water for drinking as follows: shared, tubed/piped deep
well (6.6%); protected spring (6.1%); tubed/piped shallow well (2.5%); own use, tubed/piped deep
well (2.1%); unprotected spring (1.0%); dug well (0.7%); lake, river, rain, and others (0.1%); and
bottled water (0.1%).
Similarly, the community water system was used mainly by 80.7 percent of the total households
in the municipality for cooking. The majority of these households were using shared faucet (55.9%
of the total households). The other 24.8% were using their own faucet. For the rest of the
households, the main source of water for cooking were as follows: shared, tubed/piped deep well
(6.6%); protected spring (6.3%); tubed/piped shallow well (2.5%); own use, tubed/piped deep well
(2.1%); unprotected spring (1.0%); and dug well (0.7%); and lake, river, rain, and others (0.1%).
For laundry/bathing, 74.9% of total households reported the community water system as their
source of water. The rest of the households reported protected spring (6.1%); dug well (5.5%);
lake, river, rain, and others (5.0%); shared tubed/piped deep well (4.8%); tubed/piped shallow
well (1.5%); own use tubed/piped deep well (1.4%); and unprotected spring (0.9%).
Water supply census results for Libjo municipality in 2010 are summarized in Table 29 below.
Figures were based on 20 percent sample households (3,775 total number of households in Libjo
in 2010).
6
National Statistics Office. (2014). 2010 Census of Population and Housing, Report No. 2B - Population and
Household Characteristics (Sample Variables), Dinagat Islands.
165 | P a g e
Table 29 – Main Source of Water Supply for Drinking, Cooking, and Laundry/Bathing of
Households: Libjo, Dinagat Islands, 2010
Main Source of Water Supply % Households
Drinking Cooking Laundry/
Bathing
Own use faucet community water system 24.7 24.8 20.8
Shared faucet community water system 56.0 55.9 54.0
Own use tubed/piped deep well 2.1 2.1 1.4
Shared tubed/piped deep well 6.6 6.6 4.8
Tubed/piped shallow well 2.5 2.5 1.5
Dug well 0.7 0.7 5.5
Protected spring 6.1 6.3 6.1
Unprotected spring 1.0 1.0 0.9
Lake, river, rain, and others 0.1 0.1 5.0
Peddler 0.0 0.0 0.0
Bottled water 0.1 0.0 0.0
Others 0.0 0.0 0.0
TOTAL 100 100 100
Source: (National Statistics Office, 2014)
2.2.3.2 Irrigation
There are two (2) irrigation projects by the National Irrigation Administration in the Municipality
of Libjo – the General Aguinaldo Communal Irrigation Project (CIP) located in Brgy. General
Aguinaldo, and the Garcia-Kudkuran Communal Irrigation Project located in Brgy. Garcia which is
one of the host barangays of the proposed Stagno Libjo Mining Project.
The Garcia-Kudkuran CIP, which was turned over by the NIA in 2020, is projected to benefit over
25 hectares of palay farms in Barangay Garcia, Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands. The Kudkuran
River, a San Jose River tributary, serves as the water source of the said irrigation facility.
2.2.4 Impacts and Mitigation Measures – Hydrology & Hydrogeology
Project activities or undertakings related to mining operations are projected to have significant
impacts to the environment. The impacts of the exploration activities to be conducted in Parcel
1 can be considered to have no significant impacts to the environment as mining exploration
activities are not covered by the Philippine Environmental Impacts Statement System (PEISS) as
long as these activities will not involve significant earth moving activities or may not pose
166 | P a g e
significant ecological/vegetative disturbance (EMB MC 2014-005). Mining exploration activities

will involve establishment of drillholes and test pits that are not projected to have significant
environmental impacts. Therefore, the assessment of project impacts discussed in this section
focuses on the mining component of the project particularly in Parcel 2 area.
2.2.4.1 Change in Drainage Morphology
The construction phase of the Project will involve establishment of haul and access roads, land
preparation for the construction/installation of mine and environmental facilities, and initial
overburden stripping. Land preparation will generally involve clearing and grubbing of vegetation,
excavation/leveling, and drainage installation. For mining operations, the company will use
contour mining method. Activities during the operations phase that may have significant impacts
on drainage morphology are stripping/overburden removal, ore extraction, stockpiling and
construction of silt traps and settling ponds.
The abovementioned activities will inevitably cause permanent changes in drainage morphology
particularly the number of stream segments, slope, land profile, stream length, drainage density,
and basin relief which are important indices of surface processes affecting flood characteristics
and sediment yield of a given watershed area. Resulting impacts include changes in peak
discharges, accelerated erosion of exposed areas, and eventually siltation of surface water bodies
downstream particularly Gaas Inlet and its tributaries within the mine area.
To minimize the changes in the landscape and drainage morphology, the project will take into
consideration the natural topography (existing terrain and contour, existing gullies) in the design
of the drainage system, mine haul roads, and the mine development. Mine haul roads will be
initially developed on natural topographic surface. Occurrence of natural hazards and
minimization of surface and groundwater alterations will be considered in setting up of all
facilities. Natural drainage channels that will be affected by the mining activities will be replaced
by the drainage system to be constructed for the project to mitigate significant impacts on
drainage morphology. The project will adapt a progressive rehabilitation scheme which includes
re-vegetation, slope stabilization, reinforcements, reforestation, landscaping, and other
environment enhancement measures.
2.2.4.2 Increased Overland Flow
One of the significant impacts of the project is the increase in overland flow in the form of sheet
flow or concentrated (turbulent) flow in rills and gullies. The project will involve clearing and
grubbing, stripping of overburden, ore extraction using contour mining method and construction
167 | P a g e
of support facilities with impervious surfaces. The loss of vegetation and the exposure of the
poorly permeable subsoil/bedrock will significantly reduce soil infiltration thereby increasing
surface runoff. This increase will result to accelerated erosion of exposed areas leading to siltation
of existing water bodies draining the area.
To mitigate erosion and siltation of streams, a network of drainage channels within the mine site
(haul roads, mine contours, etc.) shall be constructed. The drainage system shall have a series of
silt traps and settling ponds strategically placed within the mine site considering various factors
such as the amount of water runoff, terrain, and concentration of mining ores. Progressive
rehabilitation of mined-out areas shall be implemented.
2.2.4.3 Reduction in Stream Volumetric Flow
As previously mentioned, the various mining activities to be conducted will result to decreased
infiltration rates therefore less water would percolate to replenish the groundwater.
Groundwater is important in sustaining flow in streams during the dry season through the base
flow. A decrease in groundwater recharge may cause reduction in stream volumetric flow.
To prevent significant reduction of stream volumetric flows, mining shall be done in phases and
progressive rehabilitation shall be implemented to minimize the extent of disturbed areas at any
given time.
2.2.4.4 Depletion of Water Resources / Competition in Water Use
Project water requirement is mainly for dust suppression through water sprinkling, nursery
maintenance and domestic use. Impounded water in the settling ponds shall be tapped / reused.
The project is not expected to cause depletion of water resources or water use competition since
it is projected that the existing water resources in the area is more than enough to provide the
water requirements of the project. The company will not tap the water sources used by the
community for its operations as it will establish its own water source facility. In addition, the
mining area is far from the settlement areas.
2.2.4.5 Climate Change Projections – Impact on Hydrology/Hydrogeology
Dinagat Island belongs to a Type II climate based on the modified Coronas classification. This
climate type is characterized by the absence of a dry season but with a very pronounced rain
period from November to January.
168 | P a g e
Based on the PAGASA projections under medium-range scenario, Surigao del Norte Province will
experience an increasing trend in temperature with changes ranging from 0.9-1.3 °C in 2020 and
1.7-2.6 °C in 2050 (Figure 60). In terms of the amount of rainfall, the province is projected to
experience an increasing trend during the relatively wetter months SON & DJF while the amount
of rainfall is projected to decrease during the months MAM & JJA (Figure 61). Likewise, there is a
projected sharp increase in extreme events such as number of days greater than 35 °C, number
of dry days, and number of days with rainfall greater than 150 mm (Figure 62).
The climate change projections for the province of Surigao del Norte will inevitably affect the
water resources in the province as well as in the project area. Water stress may be experienced
during the dry season because of the projected decrease in rainfall during the drier months which
means lesser groundwater recharge. Increase in temperature also means higher evaporation and
evapotranspiration rates. This may lead to scarcity in water supply especially that the Dinagat
Island is located in difficult areas in terms of groundwater availability. The project rehabilitation
efforts could be more challenging especially during the dry season as it will be difficult for plants
to survive under hot conditions along with limited water supply. On the other hand, flooding
events may be more frequent during the wet season which may greatly affect Parcel 1 which is
located in an area classified as moderately to highly susceptible to flooding. There may also be an
increased risk to landslide hazards during the wet season with the projected increase in rainfall
during the wet season and projected increase in the number days with extreme rainfall. Parcel 2
may be exposed to a higher risk to soil erosion and landslides while Gaas Inlet and its tributaries
would be more prone to siltation.
Climate change adaptation and disaster risk reduction programs shall be an integral part of the
project operations. Adaptation measures include the use of drought resistant plant species for
rehabilitation, installation of additional settling ponds or construction of settling ponds with larger
capacities to accommodate the projected increase in rainfall/runoff during the wet season, and
monitoring of project water use and implementation of water conservation measures. Risk to
hazards brought about climate change shall be reduced through engineering and bioengineering
measures such as slope and channel stabilization and formulation of an emergency response plan
in coordination with the host barangays and local government unit. The company may also form
an emergency response team and include emergency response training program for the host
communities as part of its SDMP. The company may also help the host barangays to form their
own emergency response teams.
169 | P a g e
Seasonal Temperature Increases (in °C) in 2020 and 2050

under medium -range scenario , Surigao del Norte
Province
32
31
Temperature, °C
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
DJF MAM JJA SON
Quarter
Baseline (1971-2000) 2020 (2006-2035) 2050 (2036-2065)
DJF MAM JJA SON

OBSERVED BASELINE (1971-2000) 26.3 27.6 28.2 27.7
CHANGE IN 2020 (2006-2035) 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.1
Projected Value 27.2 28.7 29.5 28.8
CHANGE IN 2050 (2036-2065) 1.7 2.2 2.6 2
Projected Value 28 29.8 30.8 29.7
Figure 60 – Graph of seasonal Temperature Increases (in °C) in 2020 and 2050 under medium -
range scenario, Surigao del Norte Province
170 | P a g e
Seasonal Rainfall Change (in %) in 2020 and 2050

under medium-range scenario, Surigao del Norte
Province
2,000.0
1,500.0
Rainfall, mm
1,000.0
500.0
-
DJF MAM JJA SON
Quarter
Baseline (1971-2000) 2020 (2006-2035) 2050 (2036-2065)
Figure 61 – Graph of seasonal Rainfall Change (in %) in 2020 and 2050 under medium-range
scenario, Surigao del Norte Province
171 | P a g e
Number of days with maximum temperatures > 35 °C, Projected number of dry days in 2020 and 2050 Projected extreme rainfall in Surigao del Norte Province
Surigao del Norte Province under mid-range scenario, Surigao del Norte Province in 2020 and 2050 under mid-range scenario
1400 1333 6200 40 38
6054
5975 35
1200 6000
30
1000 5800
25
No. of Days
No. of Days
22
No. of Days
800 5600
20
600 5400
5286 15
400 5200 9
10
225
200 5000 5
86
0 4800 0
OBSERVED BASELINE 2020 2050 OBSERVED BASELINE 2020 2050 OBSERVED BASELINE 2020 2050
(1971-2000) (1971-2000) (1971-2000)
Period Period Period
No. of Days w/ Tmax > 35 °C No. of Dry Days No. of Days w/ Rainfall >200 mm
Figure 62 – Graph of frequency of extreme events in 2020 and 2050 under medium-range scenario, Surigao del Norte Province
172 | P a g e
2.2.5 Oceanography
2.2.5.1 Tides
Secondary data from NAMRIA and Coast Guard were used to analyse and understand the tidal
cycle of the ocean in Dinagat Island. The data from the tide primary observation station located
in Surigao City are used being the nearest point to the project site.
The bench mark elevation of Surigao City primary tide station datum plane is 2.34 meters while
the mean sea level is 0.49. From 1987 to 2005, the mean high water (MHW) is 0.93 meters and
the mean low water (MLW) is 0.08 meters. The mean higher high water (MHHW) recorded is 1.04
meters. In general the tidal variation in Surigao City station is mixed. It is not semi-diurnal. There
are considerable inequalities observed both in high and low waters. The tides in Surigao become
diurnal around the times of the moon’s maximum declination. In predicting tidal variations,
NAMRIA used the time meridian 120 degrees east. The tidal amplitude in Surigao station is
approximately 0.59 meters. Figure 63 shows the 24-hour tidal variation of the area using seven
(7) days data from NAMRIA tide and currents tables.
0.8
0.6
Tidal Height (m)
0.4
0.2
-0.2
1 25 49 73 97 121 145
Time (h)
Figure 63 - 24-hour Tidal Variation in Surigao City
173 | P a g e
2.2.6 Water Quality
This section presents the results of water quality baseline study for the proposed Stagno Libjo
Mining Project. Water quality sampling was conducted on October 17-18, 2021.
2.2.6.1 Methodology
The locations of water sampling stations were initially identified using the map of the project area
overlain on a NAMRIA topographic map. Sampling stations were finalized after conducting a
reconnaissance survey of the area to determine the accessibility of the initially identified sampling
stations. The primary factor considered in determining the most strategic location of water quality
sampling stations was the location of the project components relative to the receiving water
bodies using the watershed approach. Sampling stations were placed in both Parcel 1 and Parcel
2 with emphasis on Parcel 2 where the mining operations will take place. Four (4) surface water
quality sampling stations and one (1) groundwater sampling station were established for Parcel 2
while two (2) surface water quality sampling stations were established for Parcel 1 totaling to six
(6) surface water quality stations and one (1) water quality sampling station for this
environmental baseline study.
Grab sampling method and in-situ water testing were conducted to test the primary and the
relevant secondary parameters (Nickel and other associated minerals) listed in DENR
Administrative Order 2016-08 (DAO 2016-08). Grab samples were collected using the sample
containers provided by the laboratory where the samples were sent for analysis. Standard
practices for the proper handling and transport of water samples were followed.
The guidelines and standards stipulated in DENR Administrative Order 08 of 2016 (DAO 2016-08)
– Water Quality Guidelines and General Effluent Standards of 2016 were used in the assessment
of the current status of the quality of water resources in the study area. The entire project area
(Parcel 1, Parcel 2, and SLUP area) is drained by the Gaas Inlet and its tributaries. Gaas Inlet has
been classified by the DENR as Class SC water body (DENR EMB Caraga Region)7. It should be
noted that Gaas Inlet was initially classified as Class A water body by the DENR in 2009. However,
based on the State of the Brown Environment Report (SOBER) by the EMB Caraga in 2018, Gaas
Inlet of the now Dinagat Province is classified as Class SC water body. The results of water quality
testing were therefore compared to Class SC guideline values for water samples collected from
7
Environmental Management Bureau Caraga Region - Department of Environment and Natural Resources .
(2018). State of the Brown Environment (SOBER).
174 | P a g e
Gaas Inlet and Class C for samples collected from its tributaries. For the groundwater sample,
Class A WQG was used to assess the quality of the groundwater sample collected (source of
potable water and other domestic use).
The parameters tested are listed in Table 30. Description and locations of the water quality
sampling stations are presented in Table 31 and Figure 64.
Table 30 – List of relevant water quality parameters tested in the collected water samples
Parameters Surface Groundwater Testing

Water Method
Primary
5-day Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5) ✓ - Laboratory
Chloride (Cl) ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Color ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Dissolved Oxygen (DO) ✓ - In-situ
Fecal Coliform ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Nitrate-N (NO3-N) ✓ ✓ Laboratory
pH* ✓ ✓ In-situ
Phosphate ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Temperature ✓ ✓ In-situ
Total Suspended Solids (TSS)* ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Secondary
Arsenic (As)* ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Cadmium (Cd)* ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Hexavalent Chromium (Cr ) 6+ ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Lead (Pb)* ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Manganese (Mn)* ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Mercury (Mn) ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Nickel (Ni)* ✓ ✓ Laboratory
Oil and Grease (O&G) ✓ ✓ Laboratory
* Significant effluent quality parameters for nickel ore mining sector as per DAO 2016-08
175 | P a g e
Table 31 - Description of Baseline Water Quality Sampling Stations

Station ID Geographic coordinates Altitude, m Description Photo Documentation
SURFACE WATER
SW1 10°10’57.944”N, 125°38’0.129”E 0 Gaas Inlet, Marine Water,
downstream of Parcel 1


SW4 10°11’17.205”N, 125°37’10.711”E 93 Gaas Inlet Tributary,

Freshwater, drains northern
portion of Parcel 1

drains southern portion of
Parcel 1
176 | P a g e
Station ID Geographic coordinates Altitude, m Description Photo Documentation

SW6 10°11’29.050”N, 125°33’28.230”E 92 San Jose River tributary,
Freshwater, within Parcel 2
SW7 10°10’34.913”N, 125°33’33.259”E 75 San Jose River tributary,

Freshwater, within Parcel 2
GROUNDWATER
GW1 10°11’40.040”N, 125°37’41.415”E 184 Water source (spring) near
Parcel 2
177 | P a g e
Figure 64 - Map of Stagno baseline water quality sampling stations
178 | P a g e
2.2.6.2 Results and Discussion
Results show water quality of samples collected were within the DAO 2016-08 guideline values
except for parameters temperature (SW5), Fecal Coliform (SW6, SW7 & GW1), dissolved oxygen
(SW6) and oil and grease (GW1). Water temperature at SW5, a station located at the boundary of
Parcel 2 slightly went above the upper limit of Class SC at 31.6 °C. High levels of Fecal Coliform
were observed at stations SW6 and SW7 within Parcel 1 with values 16,000 MPN/100ml and
24,000 MPN/100ml, respectively, exceeding the 200 MPN/100ml Class C guideline value for
freshwaters. Low dissolved oxygen concentration was also observed in Station SW6 at 3.18 mg/l
which is below the minimum DO level for Class C. It should be noted that during the time of water
assessment, stations SW6 has very low flow to almost stagnant water which probably resulted to
low DO level recorded. The community water source nearest to the proposed mining area (Parcel
2) identified during the baseline study was the spring at GW1 (headwaters located within
Subwatershed 1 where Parcel 2 is also part of). Parameters tested at GW1 were found to be within
Class A WQG except for the Fecal Coliform which was found to be at 8.0 MPN/100ml. Oil and
grease concentration found in the water sample from GW1 was 1.6 mg/l exceeding the Class A
WQG of 1 mg/l.
The rest of the parameters tested were within their respective WQG in all stations. Biochemical
oxygen demand levels in recorded freshwater samples were < 1 mg/l for SW4 & SW6 and 1 mg/l
for SW7. Chloride concentrations in freshwater samples ranged from 4.5 mg/l to 5.9 mg/l way
below the 350 mg/l Class C and 250 mg/l Class A WQG. Water samples collected from Stations
SW6 and SW7 exhibited 15 TCU while the rest of the stations had Color ranging from 3 TCU to 5
TCU. High DO levels were observed in all stations except in SW6. DO levels ranged from 6.27 mg/l
(SW5) to 8.84 mg/l (SW4). Fecal Coliform levels observed in stations draining Parcel 2 (SW1 –
SW5) ranged from 21 MPN/100ml to 170 MPN/100ml all within the 200 MPN/100ml Class SC and
Class C WQG. Values of pH observed ranged from 7.14 to 8.29. Nitrate levels in stations SW2, SW3
and SW5 were below method detection limit (MDL) while the rest of the water samples had
nitrate levels ranging from 0.02 to 1.3 mg/l. Traces of phosphate were found in SW7 (0.04 mg/l)
but still below the 0.5 mg/l WQG limit. The remaining water samples had phosphate levels below
MDL (< 0.0064 mg/l). Total suspended solids in surface water samples ranged from 5 mg/l (SW6)
to 22 mg/l (SW3) while TSS in GW1 was below MDL.
Results for the secondary parameters were all within their respective WQG. Parameters arsenic,
cadmium, hexavalent chromium, lead and mercury were not detected in the water samples.
Traces of nickel ranging from 0.004 mg/l to 0.02 mg/l were found in samples collected in all
stations except SW1 with Ni concentration below MDL. Trace amounts of Mn (0.004 mg/l – 0.2
mg/l) were found in all samples except in SW4 (< 0.003 mg/l). Oil and grease levels in all surface
179 | P a g e
water samples were within Class SC and Class C WQG for marine water and freshwater,
respectively.
180 | P a g e
Table 32 - Results of surface water quality baseline study
Surface Water - Marine Surface Water - Freshwater Spring

DAO 2016-08 DAO 2016-08 DAO 2016-08
Parameter SW1 SW2 SW3 SW5 SW4 SW6 SW7 GW1
Class SC WQG Class C WQG Class A WQG
Parcel 2 Parcel 2 Parcel 2 Parcel 2 Parcel 2 Parcel 1 Parcel 1 Outside
PRIMARY
BOD5 , mg/l <1 <1 <1 2 n/a <1 <1 1 7 1 n/a
Chloride (Cl), mg/l 18,100 17,600 17,300 13,500 n/a 4.5 4.5 5.9 350 4.5 250
Color, TCU 3 3 3 5 75 5 15 15 75 5 50
Dissolved Oxygen (DO), mg/l 7.99 8.35 7.21 6.27 5 8.84 3.18 8.03 5 8.03 n/a
Fecal Coliform, MPN/100ml 40 49 21 79 200 170 16,000 24,000 200 8.0 <1.1
Nitrate-N (NO3-N), mg/l 0.02 < 0.017 < 0.017 < 0.017 10 0.08 0.1 0.06 7 1.3 7
pH 8.13 7.14 8.05 7.97 6.5-8.5 8.09 7.72 7.93 6.5-9.0 8.29 6.5-8.5
Phosphate, mg/l < 0.0064 < 0.0064 < 0.0064 < 0.0064 0.5 < 0.0064 < 0.0064 0.04 0.5 < 0.0064 0.5
Temperature, °C 30 30 30 31.6 25-31 26.5 27.9 27.8 25-31 25.6 26-30
Total Suspended Solids (TSS), mg/l 15 9.5 22 8 80 10 5 6 80 <2.38 50
SECONDARY
Arsenic (As), mg/l < 0. 005 < 0. 005 < 0. 005 < 0. 005 0.02 < 0. 005 < 0. 005 < 0. 005 0.02 < 0. 005 0.01
Cadmium (Cd), mg/l < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 0.005 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 0.005 < 0.001 0.003
6+
Hexavalent Chromium (Cr ), mg/l < 0.004 < 0.004 < 0.004 < 0.004 0.05 < 0.004 < 0.004 < 0.004 0.01 < 0.004 0.01
Chromium, mg/l < 0.005 < 0.005 0.005 0.007 -- 0.01 < 0.005 < 0.005 -- 0.009 --
Lead (Pb), mg/l < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.005 0.05 < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.005 0.05 < 0.005 0.01
Manganese (Mn), mg/l 0.004 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.4 < 0.003 0.2 0.03 0.2 0.007 0.2
Mercury (Mn), mg/l < 0.0002 < 0.0002 < 0.0002 < 0.0002 0.002 < 0.0002 < 0.0002 < 0.0002 0.002 < 0.0002 0.001
Nickel (Ni), mg/l < 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.02 0.06 0.02 0.01 0.009 0.2 0.009 0.02
Oil and Grease (O&G), mg/l 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.5 3 1.4 1.7 1.8 2 1.6 1
181 | P a g e
2.2.6.3 Impacts and Mitigation Measures – Water Quality
2.2.6.3.1 Erosion and Sedimentation
The company will be using contour mining method in the extraction of nickel ores and associated
minerals. Prior to this, vegetation/forest cover and overburden will be removed to expose the ore
deposits. The ore deposits will then be mined in benches using excavators. These activities will
result to increased direct surface runoff due to the following reasons: loss of vegetation that
intercepts runoff; and decreased infiltration rates due to the exposure of a less permeable surface
(bedrock). The disturbed areas such as haul roads and mining areas devoid of vegetation are
highly erodible therefore are more prone to erosion. Paired with the increase in surface runoff,
eroded soil will eventually reach the receiving water bodies particularly the Gaas Inlet and its
tributaries draining the mine area if left without any mitigation measures. Silt and sediments that
are transported from the mine area and eventually deposited to the surface water bodies will
cause impairment of the water quality these water bodies (i.e. Gaas Inlet and its tributaries)
through an increase in total suspended solids and contamination of metals adsorbed to the
sediments that may be dissolved in the water depending on the water conditions.
To mitigate the abovementioned impacts to water quality, the company shall construct drainage
facilities and settling ponds/dams at the start of the construction phase wherein removal of
vegetation followed by earthmoving activities like stripping of topsoil and overburden removal
will start to take place. The settling ponds shall be placed within the mine site in strategic locations
depending on the amount of runoff, terrain and concentration of mining ores. Settling ponds shall
be designed such that silt transported by surface runoff is effectively contained before discharging
water from the mine site to the receiving water bodies. All drainage canals shall be connected to
a settling pond with sufficient capacity. The settling ponds shall be regularly maintained through
desilting. Mined out areas shall be immediately be rehabilitated to mitigate erosion. The
effectiveness of the drainage facilities and pollution control structures such as settling ponds shall
be regularly assessed to ensure that water discharged from the settling ponds comply with DENR
General Effluent Standards. All settling ponds that will discharge water to the receiving water
bodies shall have the necessary discharge permits from DENR. Ore stockpiles and overburden
piles shall have stable slopes to minimize erosion. Water quality monitoring shall be done on a
monthly basis.
2.2.6.3.2 Other Contaminants
The project will construct support facilities such as field office, employees’ quarters, motorpool,
laboratory, power house, fuel storage facility and ore stockpile area that can be point sources of
182 | P a g e
water pollutants. These facilities will be located in a SLUP area adjacent to Parcel 2 and to the
Causeway (FLA area) and Gaas Inlet. Contamination of surface and groundwater shall be mitigated
through the construction of drainage facilities and settling ponds with oil and grease separators.
The field office and employees’ quarters shall have proper sewage facilities. The motorpool and
fuel storage facility shall have emergency provisions in case of spills. All final discharge outlets
shall have the necessary discharge permit and shall be monitored on a monthly basis.
2.2.7 Freshwater Ecology
2.2.7.1 Introduction
Rivers are vital natural systems because they are home to a diverse range of species. These
organisms are sensitive to water changes within the system which makes them good indicators
of water quality. (Benetti & Garrido, 2010; Utah State University, 2017). Thus, they are essential
in assessments of water’s quality of many freshwater ecosystems (Agouridis et al., 2015; Byrne et
al., 2012). Monitoring rivers and other aquatic bodies is an important task for mining
corporations. The regular assessment of these ecosystems provides an understanding of their
status through certain bioindicator species, allowing proper management and regulation of
mining activities in the area. Long-term monitoring is required to create plans as these water
bodies are vulnerable to disturbances and pollution.
The Mine Site of Stagno Mining Corporation was located in the Municipality of Libjo, Province of
Dinagat Islands (Figure 65). There were no previous records or monitoring done about the said
site. Survey and constant monitoring of the surrounding freshwater bodies would help
understand the river's health. Hence, this initial survey aimed to understand the dynamics of the
different aquatic habitats surrounding the abandoned mining site to determine the health of each
site. The results of these investigations could be used for the management of the sites. Hence,
this paper reported the result of the 2021 baseline survey of the rivers around Stagno Mining
Corporation showing the composition and assemblages of aquatic macroinvertebrates, plankton,
and inventory of fishes in the three river systems that border the project sites: (1) Suba sa Birhen
(FW1-3), (2) Anas (FW4-6), and (3) San Jose Gamay (FW7-9) (Figure 71). Each river system had
Upstream, Midstream, and Downstream stations. The goal now is to present the data on the
conducted survey to monitor the water stations.
183 | P a g e
Figure 65 - Map of the established water stations along the different rivers that are within the project sites of Stagno Mining Corporation
184 | P a g e
2.2.7.2 Materials and Methods
The sampling activity was done last November 30 – December 4, 2021, in the three identified
rivers around Stagno Mining Corporation: (1) Suba sa Birhen, (2) Anas, and (3) San Jose Gamay.
Three sub-stations (upstream, midstream, and downstream) were established per station, where
a 30m-transect line in each substation was laid out along the riverbank. The assemblage of
macroinvertebrates, plankton, and fishes was determined in each substation.
2.2.7.2.1 Freshwater Fish Survey
Using an improvised beach seine, fishes were collected from the river using a manual method.
The observed fish catches were documented and photographed and were matched based on the
IUCN list. The preservation of the collected ichthyofauna was also done.
2.2.7.2.2 Plankton Collection
Data gathering was done during the day using a conical plankton net (50 µm mesh size) towed on
varying lengths from the riverbank, depending on the water's depth. 250mL samples collected
were transferred to a pre-labeled sample bottle. The samples were fixed on-site using a fixative
composed of Lugol’s solution. After making 1% solution using the fixative, the bottles were
wrapped in an aluminum foil to prevent photodegradation and were then ready for transport to
the laboratory for further processing. The samples were allowed to settle for 24 hours in the
laboratory. After 24 hours, the sample solution was decanted until 20 mL for each sample was
left. Three drops per sample were examined and identified under the microscope to its lowest
taxonomic rank possible. A separate drop of each sample was dropped on a Sedgwick-Rafter
counter and viewed through the microscope in counting each species' abundance. The abundance
of each plankton group was expressed in cells/ml and individuals/ml, respectively.
𝑁 × 1000𝑚𝑚3
𝐶𝑒𝑙𝑙𝑠/𝑚𝐿 =
(𝐺 × 𝐶𝐹)
Where: N = average number of cells/individuals

G = number of grid squares counted
CF = concentration factor
185 | P a g e
2.2.7.2.3 Collection of Macroinvertebrates
The collection of Macroinvertebrates samples was adopted from the procedure of Ode et al.
(2007) with modifications. A modified sampling kick net with a<1mm mesh was used to collect
sample replicates from the sub-points. The kicknet was placed perpendicular to the flow of the
water. Gathering samples included at least ten jabs or kicks in the water over the length of every
replicate. Samples obtained from the kicknet were placed in a pre-labeled container and
preserved with a 10% formalin solution.
Following preservation, samples were washed with tap water to remove silt, sediments, and other
debris. Macroinvertebrates that were visible were taken and transferred to another container
with the same label and preserved using a 10% formalin solution. With the stereomicroscope, the
samples were analyzed and identified morphologically. The samples were photographed,
specifically, their body parts, and compared with available field guides and dichotomous keys.
They were then assigned with their corresponding taxa depending on their tolerance to water
pollution.
2.2.7.3 Analysis of Data
Species richness, abundance, diversity, and evenness were solved separately for plankton and
macroinvertebrates. Species richness referred to the number of species and abundance referred
to the number of individuals a species had relative to the total number of individuals. The diversity
of each group was determined using Shannon’s Index of Diversity while Pielou’s Evenness Index
was used for the distribution. Shannon Index values range from 1.0-6.0 (from low to high), but in
real-world ecological data, they fall between 1.5-3.5 (Stiling, 1996; Rain, 2021). The Evenness
Index takes values between 0 to 1, where the lower the value, the more heterogeneous (uneven)
the distribution of species is across the sampling station(s)
186 | P a g e
a.
c.
Figure 66 - Suba sa Birhen River System. a. Upstream b. Midstream
c. Downstream
Figure 67 - Anas River System. a. Upstream b. Midstream
c. Downstream
b.
187 | P a g e
2.2.7.4.1 Freshwater Fish Assemblage
The present monitoring documented two fish species. The specimen, Poecilia reticulata,
commonly known as guppy is a species native to South America, it has been widely introduced
throughout temperate and tropical regions originally for mosquito control (Kottelat & Whitten,
1996). Guppies were reported as indicators of waters in poor conditions (Lacorte et al., 2015).
Another specimen collected was a Periopthalmus sp. or commonly known as mudskippers.
Table 33 - Ichthyofaunal assemblage from all sampling Stations of Stagno Mining Corporation
Scientific name Common name Counts
Anas Suba sa Birhen San Jose Gamay
Poecilia Guppy 3 - -
reticulata
Periopthalmus Mudskipper 7 - -
sp.
Figure 68 - Ichthyofaunal assemblage in Stagno Mining Corporation. a. Poecilia

reticulata b. Periopthalmus sp.
2.2.7.4.2 Plankton Assemblage
Thirteen species of phytoplankton under three (3) groups were identified. Achnanthidium sp.,
Diatoma sp., Gomphonema sp., Melosira virans, Navicula sp., Nitzschia sp., Pinnularia sp.,
Pleurosigma normanii, and Surirella sp. were under Group Bacillariophyta (Figure 73).
Ankistrodesmus sp., Closterium sp., and Euglena sp. were under Chlorophyta (Figure 74). Also,
only species of Cryptomonas sp. was under Cryptophyta.
The Anas River system had the highest number of plankton species recorded with a total of
thirteen phytoplankton identified. The area was dominated by Achnanthidium sp. with 260
188 | P a g e
cells/mL and Diatoma sp. with 190 cells/mL. Suba sa Birhen River system had only three species
of Bacillariophyta and one species of Euglana sp. under Chlorophyta. The most dominant species
was Navicula sp. (89 cells/mL). Lastly, San Jose Gamay only had Navicula sp. as the identified
species, which had a total of 20 cells/mL abundance.
Table 34 - Phytoplankton abundance (cells/mL) in the three River Systems

Phylum/Station Species Abundance (cells/mL) Total
Upstream Midstream Downstream
Anas
Bacillariophyta Achnanthidium sp. 260 0 0 260
Diatoma sp. 26 144 20 190
Gomphonema sp. 20 40 0 60
Melosira virans 70 0 0 70
Navicula sp. 20 20 56 96
Nitzschia sp. 26 0 0 26
Pinunularia sp. 20 20 0 40
Pleurosigma sp. 20 0 0 20
Surirella sp. 20 0 0 20
Chlorophyta Ankistrodesmus sp. 56 0 0 56

Closterium sp. 55 55 0 110
Euglena sp. 30 0 0 30
Cryptophyta Cryptomonas sp. 20 0 0 20

Birhen
Bacillariophyta Diatoma sp. 35 0 10 45
Navicula sp. 54 35 0 89
Pinunularia sp. 20 0 20 40
Chlorophyta Euglena sp. 30 20 0 50
San Jose
Bacillariophyta Navicula sp. 20 0 0 20
The presence of the prevalent phytoplankton group, Bacillariophyta (also known as diatoms), was
a common incidence among river systems since this group existed in almost all aquatic bodies.
189 | P a g e
Diatoms were extremely sensitive to concentration of nutrients, organic pollutants, and changes
in the productivity of the water. These made them excellent bioindicators of water status,
especially for bioassay purposes. Indices of diatoms provided accurate estimates of river
eutrophication (Srivasta et al., 2016). Additionally, diatoms have a significant impact on carbon
cycling in benthic sedimentary ecosystems. Due to diatoms' vital involvement in the global carbon
cycle, they are significant participants and sentinels of environmental disturbances in the context
of global change scenarios (Raven, 2017). The moderate density of Bacillariophyta in the waters
indicate that the water was in good condition.
Table 35 - Diversity indices of Phytoplankton species in the three River Systems

Diversity indices Anas Suba sa Birhen San Jose Gamay
Taxa (S) 13 4 1
Individuals 998 224 20
Shannon Diversity (H') 2.216 1.332 0
Evenness (J') 0.7054 0.9467 1
In terms of biodiversity, Anas River had the highest diversity (H’=2.22) relative to the other rivers.
The existence of only one species in San Jose Gamay indicate no biodiversity for phytoplankton,
but this did not necessarily mean that the river was a biodiversity dead zone. It could be attributed
to the sampling effort, the weather, the time and the physicochemical parameters that were
active during the time of sampling. The values were inconclusive for San Jose Gamay. Additionally,
the species were almost evenly distributed for Anas and Suba sa Birhen River Systems (J=>0.8).
Figure 69 - Phytoplankton species under Bacillariophyta.

Left to right (top): Achnanthidium sp., Diatoma sp., Gomphonema sp., Melosira virans,
Left to right (bottom): Navicula sp., Nitzschia sp., Pinnularia sp., and Suriella sp .
190 | P a g e
Figure 70 - Phytoplankton species under Chlorophyta

Left to right: Ankistrodesmus sp., Closterium sp., and Euglena sp.
Figure 71 - Cryptomonas sp. under Cryptophyta
2.2.7.4.3 Macroinvertebrate Assemblage
Ten species of macroinvertebrates were collected from the water sampling stations. Among
these, five were insects (Insecta: Hemiptera), one was an unidentified water spider species
(Arachnida), two were crustaceans (Decapoda: crab & shrimp), and two were gastropods (snails)
(Mollusca).
Table 36 - Checklist of macroinvertebrates in the river systems around Stagno Mining

Corporation
Counts
Order Family Species Anas Birhen San Jose
US MS DS US MS DS US MS DS
Limnogonus
Hemiptera Gerridae sp. 2 3
Tenagogonus
Hemiptera Gerridae sp. 2
191 | P a g e
Counts
Order Family Species Anas Birhen San Jose
US MS DS US MS DS US MS DS
Rhagovelia
Hemiptera Veliidae sp. 2
Unidentified
1 4
water spider
Decapoda Penaeidae Penaeus sp. 1 2 3 2
Decapoda Varunidae Varuna sp. 5
Cycloneritida Neritidae Vittina sp. 2
Littorinimorpha Littorinidae Littoraria sp. 3
Anisoptera 1 2
Zygoptera 2
*US-Upstream, MS-Midstream, DS-Downstream
Penaeus sp. (freshwater shrimps) was common to the stations of Suba sa Birhen and Anas Rivers
and was the dominating macroinvertebrate species (8 individuals). This was followed
by Varuna sp. (paddler crabs) (5 individuals), Limnogonus sp. (long-legged water striders) (5
individuals), and an unidentified water spider species (5 individuals) which was thought to
be Dolomedes sp. Hemiptera (true bugs) was the prevailing macroinvertebrate family, and all of
the species were surface-dwellers (water striders) that were important ecological links between
trophic levels. Vittina and Littoraria species, which were also important snail species, were
considered to be good indicators of river health since they cannot exist in waters polluted with
heavy metals. Littoraria sp., particularly, was a marine species and was only found in the brackish
water of the midstream station of San Jose Gamay. Of the three river systems, it was noted that
Suba sa Birhen had the highest number of collected specimens (19 specimens), followed by Anas
(14 specimens).
Table 37 - Diversity indices of freshwater macroinvertebrate species across all stations

Diversity indices Anas Birhen San Jose
Taxa (S) 5 6 2
Individuals 23 19 5
Shannon Diversity (H') 2.115 2.112 0.673
Evenness (J') 0.8286 0.918 0.9801
192 | P a g e
a. b. c.
d e. f.
g. h.
Figure 72 - Macroinvertebrate assemblage in the established stations along the river systems
of Stagno Mining Corporation. a. Limnogonus sp. b. Tenagogonus sp. c. Rhagovelia sp. d.
Penaeus sp. e. unidentified water spider f. Anisopteran nymph g. Varuna sp. h. Nerita sp. i.
Littoraria sp. j. Zygopteran nymph
193 | P a g e
Most of the species were tolerant of slight pollution, based on the tolerance score system for
biotic index by Mustow (2002). The absence of the insect families Ephemeroptera, Plecoptera,
and Trichoptera meant that the water was slightly polluted. This was still a good indication, which
meant that the water quality can still be improved following a good strategy of succession
projects. However, the seemingly low counts were quite alarming, since the observed riparian
areas were well-shaded and had many riffles and rock crevices which would have provided a niche
for many macroinvertebrate species. This could be attributed to the sampling effort done by the
team. Furthermore, the Shannon Diversity Index (Table 37) used to determine the diversity of the
area revealed relatively high diversity values for both Suba sa Birhen (H’=2.12) and Anas (H’=2.11)
rivers. San Jose Gamay had the lowest at H’=0.67. This was expected with the low count of
specimens in the area. Given the diversity, the species were also evenly distributed in each of the
stations (J’=>0.7 for all stations).
2.2.7.5 Summary, Conclusion, and Recommendation
An initial survey of river systems is an important task for mining companies to manage their
operations to these systems effectively. This paper reported the findings of macroinvertebrate
and plankton assessment of water stations within the mine site of Stagno Mining Corporation
located in the Municipalities of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands as part of the survey for 2021.
Fishes collected during the survey were only from the Anas River Systems, species. There were
two species of fish collected: Poecilia reticulata (guppy), a species native to South America that
has been widely introduced throughout temperate and tropical regions for mosquito control, and
Periopthalmus sp., a species of mudskipper.
For phytoplankton, a report of thirteen species from three water stations. Among the stations,
Anas had the highest taxa (13), and also had the highest plankton density (802 cells/ml) of the
three stations. Shannon Diversity Index was used to determine the diversity of the area. Based on
the results, station Anas had 2.216, Birhen had 1.332, and 0 in station San Jose, which implies that
the three stations had low species diversity (H’=<2.5), although the species were evenly
distributed in the area (J’=>0.70).
For macroinvertebrates, there were ten species from 7 identified families in this report. Among
these, five were insects, one was an unidentified water spider, while the two were crustaceans
(crab & shrimp), and two were gastropods (sea snails). Three stations had low species diversity
(H’=<2.5), however, station Anas had the highest among the others (2.12), Birhen had 2.11, and
0.67 in station San Jose; species were evenly distributed in the area (J’=>0.70).
194 | P a g e
In conclusion, the sampling stations representing the health of the three water bodies
surrounding Stagno Mining Corporation showed relatively stable conditions, but all were still
subject to improvement given that the low count of specimens was noticeable. The areas assessed
were generally disturbed by constant anthropogenic activities, but the vegetative cover was still
intact. Nonetheless, these areas could still be improved. Based on these findings, the overall
health of the river ecosystems was good, but with slight pollution. With these, the team
recommends the following:
1. Improvement of the riparian zone by implementing the appropriate reforestation practices.

By reforesting the area, it will allow the stability of the soil, reduce erosion and substrate
deposition in the river bed, and improve water quality. Plant suitable tree and shrub species
along the riparian zone at the riverbank following the prescribed distances. For example, the
observable shallowing of Upstream San Jose Gamay and the consequent “muddy” appearance
of the midstream river can be lessened by planting native trees such as Ficus sp. Following a
successful ecological succession, an increase in the ecosystem's biodiversity and stability
yields better ecological services.
2. The reduction of disturbances along the riparian zone of all the river systems. The clearing of
active anthropogenic activities in these areas promotes a proper succession process. It is
important to note that the riparian zone is a buffer zone for terrestrial and aquatic systems.
A riparian zone can positively affect both the land and the river by reducing causes of constant
erosion (mere walking along the bank destabilizes the exposed land and hence causes
unwanted erosion) and, therefore, reduces the riverbed's constant sedimentation.
3. Inclusion of physico-chemical parameters in data collection. Including data on temperature,

pH, dissolved oxygen, etc. would give better analysis and understanding of the present status
of the systems since they can be correlated with the existing biotic factors. Cluster component
analysis and other analytical methods can be generated, which can explain better why
specimen count was low.
2.2.8 Marine Ecology
2.2.8.1 Background
One of the most potential and beneficial coastal ecosystems is the coral reef. A coral reef is one
of the important habitats that have high biodiversity and gives significant benefits to people in
many tropical areas (McCord et al., 2021). Therefore, the assessment of the coastal and marine
resources of the Stagno Libjo Mining Corporation impact areas can provide critical data on
195 | P a g e
determining the possible impacts of their operation. Also, it can help coastal residents and coastal
and marine managing authorities understand the health of the reefs, their dependence on their
health and well-being, and the economic and social consequences of reef decline.
The Stagno Libjo Mining Corporation Project is located in the Municipality of Libjo, Province of
Dinagat Islands which has a total area of 1,149.8301 hectares. The river serves as their channel to
the coastal zone of the project site as their catchment basin and leads its water discharge to San
Jose Cove.
The activity included the baseline assessment of two main components: the benthic biota
component based on coral cover and the reef fish component based on the total biomass of
fishes. This activity diverged from the established monitoring stations in terms of deepness and
replicates.
The standard assessment methodology is based on the DENR-Biodiversity Management Bureau

(BMB) Technical Bulletin No. 2019-04, which is on coral reefs and fisheries.
Findings of this assessment can provide baseline information on the marine and coastal resource
management and conservation efforts as part of the environmental responsibility of the
company. Furthermore, ecologically important species can be used as biodiversity indicators for
the periodic monitoring of the said area.
This report presents the scope of the assessment methods, findings, and conclusions of the
conducted survey monitoring.
2.2.8.1.1 Objectives of the Monitoring
This assessment determined the condition of coral reef coverage and the biomass of reef fishes
in the adjacent coastal areas of Stagno Libjo Mining Corporation. This will be also used for
compliance regulatory requirements. Specifically, this activity aimed to determine the current:
1. Composition and relative cover of hard corals and other benthic features;
2. Species composition, abundance and biomass of reef fish communities.
Figure 73 presents the Project location particularly the impact areas of Parcel 1, Table 38 presents
the relative locations (geocoordinates of the stations) while Table 39 provides the scope and
methodologies of the assessment.
196 | P a g e
2.2.8.2 Scope and Methodology
Table 38 - Geographical Location of the Sampling Stations.

STATION
LOCATION COORDINATES
DESCRIPTION
SHALLOW STATION SSCRF1 10° 11' 19.830" N 125° 39' 27.035" E
SSCRF2 10° 11' 18.157" N 125° 39' 26.659" E
SSCRF3 10° 11' 16.614" N 125° 39' 26.289" E
SSCRF4 10° 11' 14.793" N 125° 39' 25.713" E
DEEP STATION SDCRF1 10° 11' 19.593" N 125° 39' 28.912" E
SDCRF2 10° 11' 18.090" N 125° 39' 28.591" E
SDCRF3 10° 11' 16.039" N 125° 39' 28.174" E
SDCRF4 10° 11' 14.379" N 125° 39' 27.484" E
197 | P a g e
Figure 73 -Sampling Map of the assessment station
198 | P a g e
Table 39 - Scope and Methodology

Scope Methodology
Coastal Zone
Coastal Reefs Initial assessment was made to determine the

location of the resources for inventory. Position
Corals reefs are large underwater structures and coordinates of the area were marked
composed of the skeletons of colonial marine through the use of Global Positioning System
invertebrates called coral. The coral species (GPS
that build reefs are known as hermatypic of
“hard” corals because they extract calcium The assessment was only limited to coral reefs
carbonate from seawater to create a hard, and reef fishes.
durable exoskeleton that protects their soft,
sac-like bodies. Other species of coral that are The assessment area was divided into two
not involved in reef building are known as “soft”
corals. These types of corals are flexible stations (shallow and deep stations). Each
organisms often resembling plants and trees station was laid with four (4)- 50 meter transect
and include species such as sea fans and sea for coral reefs and reef fishes.
whips.
Coral Reef Assessment – Photo Quadrant
Photographs were taken every meter of the

transect, then analyzed using the software
program Coral Point Count with Excel of the
National Coral with Excel of the Institute, Nova
Southern University, Florida (Kohler and Grill,
2006). A specified number of spatially random
points were distributed on each transect image
taken. The benthic forms are then identified and
classified based on these groups; live coral, dead
corals (dead/bleached coral, dead corals
covered with algae, algae, coral rubbles), fire
coral, octocoral (soft corals, gorgonians),
invertebrates (anemones, mollusks, sponges,
etc), alage, seagrass and abiotic (rocks, sand,
silt). Coverage statistics are then calculated and
results sent to Excel spreadsheets automatically.
Coral reef composition and relative cover per

category were computed using the following
formula:
%Cover category = Total Sampled Points x

100%
199 | P a g e
Scope Methodology
Total Points per Transect
Coral reef status was then categorized based on

the metrics of Licuanan et. al (2017).
Poor (0-22% Hard Coral)

Fair (˃22-33% Hard coral)
Good (˃33%-44% Hard coral)
Excellent (˃44%).
Corals assessed were classified in major and sub-

category.
BENTHIC CATEGORY
MAJOR CATEGORY SUB-CATEGORY
Dead Corals (DC) “DCA”, “Dead coral
algae”, “DC” “R”,
Rubble”, “DC”
Coral or Live Corals “ACT”, Acropora”,
(C) “CB”, “Coral
branching”, “CE”,
“Coral encrusting”,
“CF”, “Coral follose”,
“CM”, “Coral
mushroom”, “CSM”,
“Coral submassive”
Other Corals (OT) “CME”, “Fire coral”,
“OC”
Octocorals or “GORG”,
Softcorals (OCT) “Gorgonian”, “OCT”,
“SC”, “Soft coral”,
“OCT”
Invertebrates (NIV) “ANE”, Anemones”,
”INV”
“ASC”, “Ascidians”,
“NV”
“CLAM”, Bivalve
mollusk”, “INV”
“HYD”, “Hydroid”,
”INV”
“TUBE”, “Tube
worms”, “INV”
“ZO”, “Zoanthids”,
“INV”
200 | P a g e
Scope Methodology
“OT”, “Unidentifiable
lifeform”, “INV”
Algae (AL) “AA”, “Algal
Assemblage”, “AL”
“CA”, “Coraline
algae”, “AL”
“HA”, Halimeda”,
“AL”
“MA”, “Macroalgae”,
“AL”
“SAR”, “Sargassum”,
“AL”
“TA”, Turf algae”,
“AL”
Seagrass (SG) “SG”, “Seagrass”,
“SG”
Abiotic (Ab) “RCK”, “Rock
noncoral”, “AB”
“SA”, “Sand”, “AB”
“NAO”, “Non Aquatic
Object”, “AB”
Tape, Wand, Shadow “Tape”, “Tape”,
(TWS) “TWS”
“Wand”, “Wand”,
“TWS”
“Shad”, “Shadow”, “
REEF FISHES
Fish communities are a major resource of coral Fish Visual Census (FVC) using a fifty (50) meter
reefs. They play an important role in the transect line laid and determine the abundance
ecosystem- the grazers control algal growth and fisheries encountered within 5-meter
which competes with corals; while grazing, they imaginary horizontal distance. To
provide areas of clean substratum for coral comprehensively cover the study area, 2-50
recruitment and as agents of bioerosion, they meter line transect were laid in each stations.
remove dead coral and expose hard, reef matrix
for coral recruitment (Green and Bellwood, Species composition, structure and biomass of
2009). They are also commercially important reef fish communities will be the expected
for fisheries and tourism. output on this survey. Biomass is the mass of
living biological organism in a given ecosystem at
Seagrasses; a given time. In this case, species biomass is
These are flowering plants adapted to grow n considered, which the mass of one or more
loose sand and mud substrate and withstand species is. It is measured as the total wet weight
wave action. They harbor a diverse community in a given area.
of marine organisms and serve as bursary
201 | P a g e
Scope Methodology
grounds and shelter for many fish species. They Fish structure will be expressed in terms of its
trap debris and small particles and produce size, length and diversity indices. Diversity index
dissolved organic matter which are vital will be described according to coral health
nutrients to the ecosystem. They stabilize and indicator (CHI), Non-target (NT) and Target (T)
hold bottom sediment Armada and Bacalso, species.
2010)
2.2.8.3 Study Team and Date of Surveys
The team is composed of marine biologist in the conduct of coastal resource assessment and
monitoring of marine habitats. The team members are listed below.
John Duane L. Hitalia MS ERM Team and Study Leader

Edzel Laureo Marine Biologist, Fish Observer
Earl Francis Bergundo Marine Biologist, Coral Reefs Assessor
Earl Angelo Tahad Diver Research Assistant
Dominic Jimeno Diver Research Assistant
The schedules of the conduct of assessment activity are presented below.
202 | P a g e
Table 40 - Fieldwork Schedule

DATE AREA
November 25 – 28, 2021 STATIONS 1, 2, 3 & 4
2.2.8.4.1 Marine and Coastal Biota Overall Assessment
The benthic biota components were

dominated by Algae (AL), Dead Corals
(DC), Live Hard Corals (LHC), Abiotic
(AB), and Invertebrates (INV).
Percentage of live hard coral cover

varied between each sta tion, ranging
from 7.97 % to 16.27 %, while dead
coral cover ranges from 16.96 % to
26.85%. The result of this assessment
describes the coral reefs coverages in
coastal waters of the project site. As
shown in Table 41, the percentage
mean cover, in general, of the live hard
corals is 13.30%. This is within the Figure 74 - Beds of Sargassum Algae dominated the Benthic
category range of poor condition as this Component
has a value of <=22% cover based on
Zammani and Madduppa (2011).
Table 41 - Percentage Cover of Major Benthic Categories per Station

Major Benthic Categories
Station Live Hard Other
ID Corals Dead Corals Octocorals Invertebrates Algae Abiotic
(LHC) Corals (DC) (OC) (OCT) (INV) (AL) (AB)
Station 1 7.97 21.77 0.00 0.00 0.10 59.89 10.28
Station 2 13.75 16.96 0.00 0.00 0.98 58.62 9.70
Station 3 16.27 26.85 0.00 0.00 1.18 48.45 7.27
Station 4 15.23 25.68 0.00 0.00 2.74 50.08 6.28
MEAN 13.30 22.81 0.00 0.00 1.25 54.26 8.38
203 | P a g e
The other substrate lifeforms, such as Algae, were found to be in high numbers in all sampling
stations, as these have a mean percentage cover of 54.26%. Station 1 has the highest index for Algae
cover with 59.89%. Invertebrates recorded are composed of Ascidians and Sponges with a total mean
percentage of 1.25% cover. Station 4 has the highest percentage at 2.74%, while other stations range
from 0.10 - 1.18%.
Figure 75 - Mean estimated percent cover of Corals (C), Dead Corals (DC), Octocorals (OCT), Other
Corals (OC), Invertebrates (INV), Algae (AL), and Abiotic (AB)
There was no coverage of other corals and Octocorals in the area, while Dead Corals have a mean
cover of 22.81%. Station 3 has the highest index recorded with a 26.85% cover while Station 4 was
recorded with a 25.68% cover. Stations 1 and 2 have 5% mean cover difference. Furthermore, abiotic
component was recorded with a mean percentage of 8.38%. Station 1 has the highest recorded
percentage cover with 10.28%, while Stations 2 and 3 have 7%-9% cover. The lowest is at Station 4
with 6.28%.
The assessment revealed that the algae are the major benthic component with a 54.26% mean cover.
The assessment concentrated on the area between the shallow reef and the fringing reef. Sand is
204 | P a g e
either eroded due to strong waves and current. The percent cover of other stations covers 48-55%.
Corals have an amazing ability to regenerate new tissues over small areas of tissue loss, but if the
extent or severity of mortality is too much, then the dead skeleton areas become overgrown by algae
or other bio eroding organisms.
2.2.8.4.1.1 Live Hard Corals
There are seven sub-categories under the

live hard corals: Acropora (ACT), Coral
Branching (CB), Coral Folliose (CF), Coral
Massive (CM), Coral Sub-massive (CSM),
Coral Encrusting (CE), and Coral
Mushroom (CM). The condition of coral
reefs in the waters can be determined
based on the percentage of live coral,
which consists of Acropora and non-
Acropora lifeforms. The average
percentage of the lifeform of coral and
substrate in study sites is presented in
Figure 75. Among the sub-categories,
coral massive (CM) was recorded with the
highest percentage cover at 23.43%,
followed by coral encrusting at 18.35%.
However, there was no cover of coral Figure 76 - Massive corals under family Poritidae
mushroom in all stations.
The result showed that percentage of Acropora cover was varied between stations, from 0.30 % to
1.37 % (Figure 77). The highest percentage was in Station 3 with 1.37 % and the lowest was in Station
4 with 0.30%. These results concluded that the condition of the coral reef ecosystem in all stations
was in poor condition. This was also indicated by the observation of many dead corals in all stations.
Acropora is one of the coral groups most vulnerable to disturbance or pressure both natural and
anthropogenic (Bachtiar, 2001). Vulnerability of different morphological forms on coral ecosystem
will cause a shift in species domination (Russ et al., 2020).
The live coral coverage in Station 1 was classified as in the poor condition category with 7.94% cover,
where coral massive at 9.86% and coral encrusting at 2.75% dominate the area. The coral reefs in
Stations 2 and 4 were also classified as in poor condition although it was 6 - 8% higher than Station
1, while Station 3 has the highest percent coverage but it still is in the poor condition category at
16.27%.
205 | P a g e
10.00
8.82
9.00
Acropora (ACT)
8.00
6.96
7.00 Coral Branching
(CB)
6.00 5.78 5.61
Coral Folliose (CF)
5.00
4.31 4.22
Coral Massive (CM)
4.00
3.34
3.00 2.75 Coral Sub-massive
2.16 (CSM)
1.86 1.79
2.00
1.37 1.18 Coral Encrusting
0.69 (CE)
1.00 0.59 0.59 0.59
0.30 0.30
0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Coral Mushroom
0.00 (CMR)
Station 1 Station 2 Station 3 Station 4
Stations
Figure 77 - Graphical presentation of mean percentage coverage per coral sub-categories per
station.
As observed, coral massive was widely distributed throughout the stations and had the highest
percent cover among all other sub-categories.
Massive corals are very slow-growing, but tend to be very resilient and are seldom damaged by strong
wave action unless they are dislodged from their holdfasts (Russ et al., 2020). This is followed by Coral
encrusting with percentage cover of 18.35%. These corals are said to be very effective at out-
competing existing living substrates such sponge, invertebrates and other corals (Panga et al., 2021).
Furthermore, Coral branching has a percent cover of 4.33%. This is also an important indication of
the condition of the area as it provides more space for other organisms, thereby increasing the
diversity of coral reef substrate forms. This is also one of the fastest growing forms of live hard corals,
as all of the polyps on a branch contribute to skeletal growth in a single direction. In general, this type
of coral grows fast when conditions are good, but are easily susceptible to mortality due to
temperature increase, algae overgrowth and other factors (Reimer et al., 2012; Licuanan et al., 2017).
Coral submassive has a percentage cover of 0.30% and can only be found in Station 1. They are dense,
also slow-growing corals and one of the strengths of the reef against impacts and disturbances. In
contrast, coral foliose covers all three stations (1, 2 and 3) and does not cover Station 4, with a total
percentage cover of 3.92%. These corals tend to grow in areas with high levels of sunlight and often
resemble a foliage.
206 | P a g e
Although growth rates differ between different coral growth forms and species, hard corals generally
grow very slowly. Hard coral growth is highly dependent on sunlight, warm temperature and water
quality (clear, low nutrient water is ideal); therefore, varies greatly from location to location and is
limited to shallow tropical and subtropical waters (Panga et al., 2021).
Live hard corals provide habitat and shelter for the vast diversity of other species that make coral
reefs such productive and beautiful systems (Zamani & Madduppa, 2011). The highest fish abundance
is very related to the condition of the coverage of live coral (Walker et al., 2008). The assessment
shows low percentage of coral cover in general. This condition is probably due to the sediment
particles from the terrestrial land which could disturb coral growth. These stations were adjacent to
a river mouth that flowed from the main land of the area. Burke and group (2002) stated that large
amounts of sediment could weaken and kill corals and other benthic organisms, while in low amount
will reduce the ability of zooxanthellae (algae) for photosynthesis, thereby disrupting coral growth. If
this will happen for a long time, decrease of coral cover will eventually occur.
2.2.8.4.1.1.1 Coral Composition
There are a total of twelve (12) genera under eight (8) families recorded. Of these, majority of the
species fall under the families of Poritidae, Lobophyllidae and Euphyllidae and belong to massive
corals, such as Favites sp., Goniastrea sp., Symphyllia sp., Favites sp., and Porites sp.
Table 42 - List of Coral Species

FAMILY GENUS
Acroporidae Acropora sp.
Montipora sp
Agariciidae Pavona sp.
Diploasteridae Dimploastrea sp.
Euphyllidae Galaxea sp.
Favites sp.
Faviidae Goniastrea sp.
Pectinia sp
Lobophylliidae Symphyllia sp.
Pocilloporidae Pocillopora sp.
Poritidae Seriatophora sp.
Porites sp.
207 | P a g e
2.2.8.4.1.2 Dead Coral
This component is composed of three (3)

sub-categories: the dead coral with algae
(DCA), the recent dead coral (RDC), and
rubbles (R). Figure 79 shows that Station
3 has the highest percent cover among all
sub-categories with 26.85%, followed by
Station 4 at 25.68%, while Station 2 has
the lowest with a 16.66% cover.
Furthermore, dead coral with algae was
recorded to have the highest percent
coverage at 47.75%. In accordance with
the current result, the dead coral with
algae lifeform was discovered in large
amounts in Station 3 (at 16.47%). This
circumstance could describe that high
pressure and high interference upon the
coral reefs were caused by one of the
factors such as environmental impacts
(Kulbicki et al., 2005; Razak et al., 2016). Figure 78 - Dead corals covered with Algae
18.00
16.47
16.00
14.00 12.74
12.00 11.00 11.27
10.80
10.00
8.13
7.55 7.35
8.00
6.00
4.00
2.26
1.77 1.67
2.00
0.00
0.00
Stations
Dead corals w/ algae (DCA) Recently Dead Coral (RDC) Rubble (R)
Figure 79 - Graphical presentation of dead corals percentage coverage per station.
208 | P a g e
Conversely, rubble was also prominent

in all stations with 37.55%. Although it
has a high percent coverage, it is still
10% lower than the dea]d corals with
algae. Rubble always moves
dynamically due to the influence of
water dynamics, for instance, current,
that caused the attached coral reefs to
die due to upside down or buried
(Razak, 2006). The high cover of rubble
will lower the potential for coral reef
ecosystem recovery, because coral
fragments are very difficult to be able
Figure 80 - Coral rubbles prominent in all stations
for attaching coral’s larvae, that’s why
coral fragments are not the good
substrate for coral larvae to grow and
develop (Giyanto et al., 2017).
No significant coverage was noted in the recently dead coral category with only 5.69%. There was no
cover in Station 1, while Stations 2, 3 and 4 had a percent mean cover of 1.67% - 2.26%. In general,
the lowest percent cover was in Station 2, but not quite far from the other remaining stations.
2.2.8.4.1.3 Invertebrates
Out of eight sub-categories under the

invertebrates, there are only four (4) sub-
categories present in the area. These are
the Ascidians (ASC) , Hydroid (HYD),
Zoanthid (ZO), and Sponge (SP). Among
these four (4) sub-categories, sponge
(SP) was recorded with the highest
percentage cover at 3.23%, followed by
Zoanthid at 1.08%, Hydroid with 0.98%,
and Ascidians with 0.20%. It can be
observed that other invertebrates
throughout the stations have no cover at
all. Figure 81 - Zoanthds are widely distributed in the
shallow station.
209 | P a g e
Although sponge has a high percent cover, it is still not pervasive throughout the stations, while
Ascidians had a very low percentage cover with 0.20% and was found only in Station 4. It can also be
noted that among the stations, Station 4 has in general the highest percentage cover at 2.74%, while
the lowest is Station 1 with 0.10%.
Figure 82 - Graphical presentation of percentage coverage of invertebrates’ components.
Sponges comprise significantly more than half the biomass of a reef (Russ et al., 2020). This may
cause the sponges to have a high percentage cover. On the other hand, zoanthids were noted in
the shallow area of Stations 1, 2 and 3. Some of this species are common in a portion of the shallow
intertidal zone. They are also a common component of a coral reef system.
2.2.8.4.1.4 Algae
There are three (3) categories of algae:

Algal Assemblage (AA), Halimeda (HA),
and Sargassum (SAR). Based on the
percentage cover, St ation 1 has the
highest with 59.89%, while the lowest is
Station 3 with 48.45%. Among these
categories, Hallimeda has the most
percent cover with 91.08%, whereas
Sargassum has 80.96% and Algal
Figure 83 - Algal assemblage found among coral
Assemblage has the lowest with 44.99%.
rubbles and massive corals
210 | P a g e
All of these categories were noted in all stations.
Halimeda is a calcareous form of green macroalgae. The joints between the calcareous growths are
flexible, which allow the plant to cope with water currents and disturbances from large fish or
invertebrates and can coexist with both sessile invertebrates and corals, as they grow upwards
towards the light and do not invade on nearby neighbors (Razak et al., 2006). They also grow on a
sandy substrate, in which sand/slit has high percentage cover of abiotic components.
30.00 27.44
24.80
25.00
21.57 21.86
20.22
19.21 18.72
20.00 18.23
15.00 13.53
11.96
9.51 10.00
10.00
5.00
0.00
Stations
Algal Assemblage (AA) Halimeda (HA) Sargassum (SAR)
Figure 84 - Graphical presentation of percentage coverage of algae components.
Fleshy Seaweed is a term used for the algal macro community that is seen directly, such as Sargassum
and other macro algae (Giyanto et al., 2017). High fleshy seaweed cover will result in a low level of
resilience or potential for coral reef ecosystem recovery. Because fleshy seaweed has a very fast
growth rate compared to corals, so it will be coral at space competition. The result showed that the
percentage of fleshy seaweed was varied at each stations (Figure 84). The highest percentage of cover
was in Station 1 with 24.80 % and other stations have coverage not quite far from one another with
18-19&.
211 | P a g e
2.2.8.4.1.5 Abiotic
The distribution and abundance of reef

fish in coral reef areas could not only be
determined through the condition of the
live corals, but also through abiotic
factors (Bawole et al. 2014). In this
component, there are only two (2)
abiotic categories recorded in all
stations: rock non-coral (RCK) and
Sand/Slit (SA). Majority of the abiotic
composition recorded was sand with a
percentage coverage of 18.94%,
whereas Rock non-coral was at Figure 85 - sandy substrate is the major abiotic component.
14.59%. In general, Station 1 has
the highest percentage cover with 10.28%, followed by the three stations with percentage coverage
which ranges from 6 - 9%.
8.00 7.45
7.00
6.00 5.51
5.00
4.20
3.94
4.00 3.63
3.33
2.83 2.65
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.00
Stations
Rock Non-coral (RCK) Sand/Silt (SA)
Figure 86 - Graphical presentation of percentage coverage of abiotic components.
As for the percentage cover per station, it can be noticed that the cover of sand/slit was highest in
Station 1 with 7.45%. Furthermore, Station 2 was also high with 9.7% cover and Station 3 has a 7.27%
cover, while Station 4 has the least percentage cover of sand with 6.28%.
212 | P a g e
Rock non-coral was recorded with the highest index in Station 2 with 4.20% cover, while Stations 1
and 4 have an estimated of 4% cover per site. However, the highest station in sand category was also
the lowest percentage coverage of rock as Station 1 has only 2.83%.
2.2.8.4.2 Reef Fishes
2.2.8.4.2.1 Species Richness
The study recorded eighteen (18) species of reef fishes that belong to fifteen (15) genera under ten
families (10) in all sampling sites in different stations (Table 43).
Majority (22%) of the species is largely under the family Labridae and is dominated by different
genera, with Pomacentridae (16%) being the second most numerous, followed by Blennidae,
Chaetodontidae and Acanthuridae with 11%. The dominance of the Pomacentridae family could be
due to their territorial aggression behavior (Hata & Kato, 2006). This, in turn, may be the cause of
their high number of species in all stations. According to Mahmudin and group (2020), the species of
reef fish from the family of Acanthuridae was the most commonly seen and living group of fish on a
coral reef. Comprising the minority, in terms of species composition, were Cirrhitidae, Holocentridae,
Tetraodontidae and Nemipteridae.
Table 43 - List of Reef Fishes and their Categories.

No. Family Species Category
1 Acanthuridae Acanthurus nigricans Non-Target
2 Acanthuridae Acanthurus olivaceus Non-Target
3 Balistidae Balistoides conspicillum Non-Target
4 Blennidae Aspidontus taeniatus Non-Target
5 Blennidae Salarias fasciatus Non-Target
6 Chaetodontidae Heniochus acuminatus CHI
7 Chaetodontidae Heniochus varius CHI
8 Cirrhitidae Cirrhitichthys falco Non-Target
9 Holocentridae Myripristis sp. Non-Target
10 Labridae Anampses meleagrides Non-Target
11 Labridae Coris gaimard Non-Target
12 Labridae Gomphosus varius Non-Target
13 Labridae Labroides dimidiatus Non-Target
14 Nemipteridae Scolopsis lineatus Non-Target
15 Pomacentridae Amblyglyphidodon curacao Non-Target
213 | P a g e
No. Family Species Category

16 Pomacentridae Pomacentrus lepidogenys Non-Target
17 Pomacentridae Pomacentrus mollucensis Non-Target
18 Tetraodontidae Canthigaster valentini Non-Target
The identified fish species were categorized as Target, Non-Target and Coral Health Indicator (CHI).
However, the result showed only two categories, non-target and coral health indicator fish species.
Coral reefs condition could also be related to

the abundance of reef fish. Coral fish habitually
responds to the habitat changes, mainly in
coral reef coverages (McClanahan et al., 2016).
One of the fishes that could be an indicator of
coral reef damages was the butterflyfish or in
the Chaetodontidae fish family.
There were only two (2) coral health indicator

species recorded and there were found to be
under the genus of Heniochus. The
characteristics of each Chaetodontidae fish
species could determine their existence on
coral reefs. For instance, Heniochus
acuminatus was the most dominant during
surveys in Stations 1 and 3 with 9 individuals in Figure 87 - Damsel fishes are among the most
total. This could be due to this species being abundant fishes that inhabits coral reefs
included in planktivores – aquatic organisms
that feed on planktons (Attayde & Menezes 2008) and are usually discovered in groups with a large
number of individuals (Walker et al., 2008). Heniochus varius was also noted with 3 individuals in all
stations and can only be found in Station 4. This is because the group of Heniochus species, which
includes a type of fish that likes to stay in reef slope areas (Kulbicki et al. 2005), and this circumstance
was appropriate to coral reefs in the study sites; hence, the presence of this species was quite high.
These species are also very sensitive to the changes and damage of coral reefs because these highly
rely on coral reefs as food sources and shelters; thus, a good indicator of coral reef damage (Wilson
et al., 2007).
In terms of non-target species, there are sixteen (16) species classified. These species are said to have
a low commercial value and sometimes captured while fishing for a target fishes. Out of the total
number of species, this category is the highest. These are fishes belonging to the family Acanthuridae
214 | P a g e
(surgeon fishes), Blennidae (blennies), Cirrhitidae (Hawk fishes), Labridae (wrasse fishes), Balistidae
(trigger fishes), Holocentridae (squirrelfish), Nemipteridae (false snappers) and Tetraodontidae
(puffer fishes). The family Pomacentridae (damsel fishes), which has the highest number of species
and individuals, is categorized as non-target species.
Figure 88 - Number of species per station
As shown in Figure 88, 12 species were noted in Station 4, while 10, 10 and 8 species in Stations 2, 3
and 1, respectively. Station 4 has the highest number of species noted in the area. Furthermore,
Amblyglyphidodon curacao and Acanthurus olivaceus have the greatest number of individuals, while
Coris gaimard has the lowest number of individuals present in the area and was only found in Station
2. It can be observed that the Labridae family has the most number of species, yet few individuals
were recorded. One of the factors that could decrease the abundance of reef fishes is the reduction
of physiological condition and reproduction activities of corals reefs for a long period of time (Hata &
Kato, 2006; Wilson et al., 2007). This could cause the decrease in abundance and lowering of diversity
of the fish.
2.2.8.4.2.2 Estimated Fish Abundance
An overall total of 130 individuals of fishes were counted in all stations. In contrast to species richness,
Figure 89 shows that the number of individuals of fish species per station is highest in Station 3 with
38 individuals, followed by Station 4 with 36 individuals. It has been found that the Pomecentridae
family dominated the area as has the greatest number of individuals and species (Table 44), and this
makes Station 3 to have the highest number of individuals. The Pomacentridae species known as
damselfishes are said to be a major component of the global coral reef and temperate rocky reef
215 | P a g e
ichthyofauna (Frédérich & Parmentier, 2016; McCord et al., 2021). They occupy marine habitats from
shallow coastal waters down to estimated 200 m depths. They are widely distributed in marine coral
and rocky reef habitats with a variety of temperate species occurring. Some of the characteristics of
these species are intriguing behaviors such as strong territorial aggression and complex faming (Hata
& Kato 2006). These, in turn, may cause their high number in all stations. On the other hand, Stations
1 and 2, which have the third and fourth in the number of species, have still in their spot in terms of
abundance.
Table 44 - Fish Composition and Category per station.

Station Station Station Station Grand
No. Family Species Category 1 2 3 4 Total
Acanthurus Non-
1 Acanthuridae nigricans Target 0 3 0 2 5
Acanthurus Non-
2 Acanthuridae olivaceus Target 4 2 4 2 12
Balistoides Non-
3 Balistidae conspicillum Target 0 2 0 4 6
Aspidontus Non-
4 Blennidae taeniatus Target 2 0 4 0 6
Salarias Non-
5 Blennidae fasciatus Target 0 4 0 4 8
Heniochus
6 Chaetodontidae acuminatus CHI 3 0 6 0 9
Heniochus
7 Chaetodontidae varius CHI 0 0 0 3 3
Cirrhitichthys Non-
8 Cirrhitidae falco Target 4 2 0 0 6
Non-
9 Holocentridae Myripristis sp. Target 0 0 4 4 8
Anampses Non-
10 Labridae meleagrides Target 2 0 0 5 7
Non-
11 Labridae Coris gaimard Target 0 2 0 0 2
Gomphosus Non-
12 Labridae varius Target 0 3 4 2 9
216 | P a g e
Station Station Station Station Grand

No. Family Species Category 1 2 3 4 Total
Labroides Non-
13 Labridae dimidiatus Target 0 0 0 0 0
Scolopsis Non-
14 Nemipteridae lineatus Target 0 4 2 1 7
Amblyglyphid Non-
15 Pomacentridae odon curacao Target 7 0 3 2 12
Pomacentrus Non-
16 Pomacentridae lepidogenys Target 0 3 5 0 8
Pomacentrus Non-
17 Pomacentridae mollucensis Target 2 0 4 5 11
Canthigaster Non-
18 Tetraodontidae valentini Target 3 4 2 2 11
One factor contributing to the variation in species composition was the location of the sampling sites.
Other environmental factors might also significantly influence the composition of the marine and
coastal community.
Figure 89 - Species richness and the number of individuals.
217 | P a g e
The diversity partitioning analysis revealed that the observed total species richness across the study
stations was largely attributed to variations in species composition.
The species richness and abundance of taxa characterize the diversity of an ecosystem. The diversity
of reef fishes depends on their preferred habitats, conditions for their reproduction, and source of
energy based on species-host relationship. The species richness of other organism controlling their
abundance in an ecosystem such as their competitors and predation is also another factor why
species abundance was more or less in numbers (Attayde & Menezes, 2008; McCord et al., 2021).
2.2.8.4.2.3 Fish Biomass
In terms of fish biomass, Station 3 has the highest record at 1.4 MT/KM 2, while Station 4 has 1.16
MT/KM2, Station 1 at 0.95 MT/KM2, and Station 2 at 0.90 MT/KM2 (Figure 90). The abundance of fish
species in Station 3 influences the high fish biomass. Coral fish habitually responds to habitat changes,
mainly in coral reef coverage. Fish biomass is a primary driver of coral reef ecosystem services and
has high sensitivity to human disturbances, particularly fishing. Estimates of fish biomass, their spatial
distribution, and recovery potential are important for evaluating reef status and crucial for setting
management targets (McClanahan et al., 2016; Panga et al., 2021).
Figure 90 - Fish Biomass per station
As for the classification, non-target species have the highest total biomass, which can be readily
observed in terms of the number of species and abundance. These are followed by coral health
indicator species. The low biomass of fish in Station 1 and 2 was presumably due to the form of coral
growth dominated by dead corals causing minimal space for reef fish to live.
218 | P a g e
Figure 91 - Fish Biomass per classification of fish species.
Eighty percent (80%) of the fish species is composed mainly of non-target species. It can also be noted
that this category has the greatest number of species and individuals. The high value of fish
abundance was also thought to be due to the high cover of dead coral overgrown with algae which
was the main food of these fish species. Meanwhile, the analysis results for the coral health indicator
fish category showed no significant difference at all stations. This can be interpreted that the
abundance of species of indicator fish at all stations is the same.
2.2.8.5 Mangroves Assessment
2.2.8.5.1 Location of the Assessment Area
The mangrove assessment was conducted within the MPSA area of Stagno Mining Corporation in
Parcel 1 in Brgy. Garcia, Libjo, Dinagat Islands and in the vicinity of Parcel 2 along the Gaas inlet in
Catmonon, Brgy. Bayanihan, Libjo, Dinagat Islands. The team established four (4) transect lines to
represent all the coastal areas within and in the vicinity of the proposed project area. Table 45 shows
the geographical coordinates of the transect lines.
Table 45 - Geographical Location of Transect Lines

Transect Position Latitude Longitude
Start 10° 10' 54.515" N 125° 37' 32.164" E
1
End 10° 10' 56.589" N 125° 37' 38.456" E
219 | P a g e
Transect Position Latitude Longitude

Start 10° 10' 21.348" N 125° 37' 02.493" E
2
End 10° 10' 23.511" N 125° 37' 08.714" E
Start 10° 09' 52.924" N 125° 34' 17.005" E
3
End 10° 09' 59.381" N 125° 34' 16.076" E
Start 10° 10' 16.823" N 125° 34' 10.708" E
4
End 10° 10' 23.309" N 125° 34' 11.147" E
The location of the four (4) assessment sites was shown in the sampling assessment map in Figure
56. The aerial drone photos of the established individual transect lines was also shown in the Photo
28 to Photo 31 for better appreciation of the study area.
220 | P a g e
Figure 92-Coastal Sampling Assessment Map
221 | P a g e
Photo 28 -Transect line 1 for coastal assessment located at Parcel 2, Brgy. Bayanihan. Libjo.
Photo 29 -Transect line 2 for coastal assessment located at Parcel 2, Brgy. Bayanihan. Libjo.
222 | P a g e
Photo 30 -Transect line 3 for coastal assessment located at Parcel 1, Brgy. Garcia. Libjo.
Photo 31 -Transect line 4 for coastal assessment located at Parcel 1, Brgy. Garcia. Libjo.
223 | P a g e
Coastal resource assessment is an important tool to know the indices of a particular resource such
as coral reefs, seagrass, mangroves and other benthic life forms. It is also known as resource
analysis or appraisal to determine the overall condition such as biodiversity and abundance. It
involves gathering and analyzing environmental, ecological, social and economic information of a
particular area.
The mining and processing industry are perceived to have an effect in the ecological stability of
coastal resources more particularly within the primary impact areas, thus necessitates
establishing monitor of coastal resources to determine the trend of impacts.
The Assessment data shall be used also as a tool in the conduct of enhanced environmental
mitigating measures on the part of the company and guide decision and policy makers in crafting
management strategies and or conservation efforts to ensure that resource productivity is
sustained, protected and conserved.
2.2.8.5.2.1 Coastal Vegetation Inventory (Mangroves and other associates)-Transect Quadrat
There are different methods of vegetation inventory. One of which being used for mangrove
inventory is the transect method to capture the trend of change in vegetation with zonation from
the seaward to the landward. Diameter breast height (DBH) ratio will be recorded also
224 | P a g e
Photo 32 - Picture taken during the establishment of line transect for mangrove
assessment
2.2.8.5.3 Species Composition
A total of four (4) species of mangroves

were identified under 2 families within
the mangrove areas in Gaas Inlet
Mangrove Rehabilitation Site in
Municipality of Libjo, Dinagat Island. The
family with the most species was
Rhizophoraceae with three species,
followed by Acanthaceae with one
species (Table 46). In the study of
Canizares and Seronay (2016) also
reported Rhizophoraceae as the leading
Family of mangroves in Barangay Imelda,
Dinagat Island, with five species
identified. This suggest that species
under Rhizophoraceae family are more abundantly spread throughout the archipelago and that
is the species most adapted to the Philippines coastal environment (Goloran et al., 2020).
225 | P a g e
Table 46 - List of Mangrove Species

Conservation Status
Family Common Name Scientific Name (IUCN Redlist)
Acanthaceae Api-api Avicennia officinalis L. Least Concern
Bruguiera gymnorrhiza (L.)
Busain Lam. Least Concern
Rhizophoraceae Rhizophora apiculata
Bakhaw-Lalake Blume. Least Concern
Bakhaw-Babae Rhizophora mucronata Lam. Least Concern
For conservation status, all of the recorded species were recorded to be Least Concern (LC) based
in International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN) red list. These species were considered
widespread throughout the countries and other continents outside the Philippines (Primavera &
Esteban, 2008).
7000.00
Stand Basal Area (m2/ha)
6000.00
6062.50
5000.00
4000.00
3000.00
2000.00
2250.00
1000.00 1500.00
212.500.00 0.00 187.5 0 0 250 0 0
0.00
Bruguiera Rhizophora Avicennia Rhizophora
gymnorrhiza apiculata officinalis mucronata
Tree Density 212.50 6062.50 187.5 250
Sapling Density 0.00 2250.00 0 0
Seedling Density 0.00 1500.00 0 0
Mangrove Species
Figure 93 - Stand Basal Area of identified Mangrove Species
226 | P a g e
The structure of the mangrove forest is

dominated by small sizes with an average DBH
of 7.32 cm and uniform Height of 6 m, crown
diameter. Mangrove area was dominated by
trees with a DBH ranges <10 to 15 cm (~70%)
and 30% for more than 25 cm and a total
average stand basal area of 30.13 m2 /ha.
Further, the tree stand basal area has a total
area of 30.04 m2 /ha with an average tree
density of 1687.13 which comprise largely of
Rhizophora apiculata with 6062.52, followed by
Rhizophora mucronata (250), Bruguiera
gymnorrhiza (212.50), and Avicennia officinalis (187.50). The forest floor of the identified
mangrove forest is also dominated by the saplings and seedlings of the species of Rhizophora
apiculata with 2250 and 1500, respectively. However, there was no density cover of sapling and
seedling for the other three species.
2.2.8.5.4 Mangrove Tree Density
Among species, Rhizopora apiculata dominated in terms of population and density in all sampling
stations with 6062.52 (Figure 93). Planted seedlings by the personnel were not included and only
natural seedlings/saplings are recorded below the mangrove tree species.
7000.00
6000.00
6062.50
Density (counts/ha)
5000.00
4000.00
3000.00
2000.00
1000.00
212.50 187.5 250
0.00
Bruguiera Rhizophora apiculata Avicennia officinalis Rhizophora
gymnorrhiza mucronata
Mangrove Species
Figure 94 - Tree Density of identified Mangrove Species
227 | P a g e
Figure 94 shows the density cover of all mangrove species identified in all sampling stations.
Among the species, Rhizophora apiculata, obtained the highest value in terms of individuals and
density with 6062.50 indicating that this species has the highest count per unit area. This is
followed by Rhizophora mucronata (250), Bruiguiera gymnorhiza (212.50) and Avicennia
officinalis (187.5). For an ecosystem that provide to the society, having dominant species exert a
deterrent force on the functioning of the ecosystem (Pototan et al., 2017; Jumawan & Magcale,
2021).
2.2.8.5.5 Ecological Measurements
The mangroves community structure was evaluated using the values of population density,
relative density, frequency, relative frequency, dominance and relative dominance. The
summations of these values were added to attain the species importance value (SIV) in the entire
sampling stations Table 47.
Table 47- Ecological Measurements of the mangrove species in the study area
Mangrove Bruguiera Rhizophora Rhizophora Rhizophora Tota
species gymnorrhiza apiculata stylosa mucronata l
Relative
Dominance 21.25 73.59 2.02 3.14 100
Relative Density 2.03 93.79 1.79 2.39 100
Relative
Frequency 3.17 90.32 2.79 3.72 100
IV (Importance
Value) 26.45 257.69 6.61 9.25 300
The results for the mangrove

structure analysis are shown in
Figure 94. Among the samples
recorded, the species with the
highest relative density was
Rhizophora apiculata with
93.79%, the inference is that it is
the species with the greatest
number of individuals per unit of
area. It's also the species with the
highest relative dominance
(73.59 percent), implying that it
accounts for the majority of
mangrove biomass across all
sample sites. This also implies that a small number of species may be contributing to the uneven
228 | P a g e
distribution, but that they aren't totally dominant. This is followed by Bruguiera gymnorrhiza with
21.25% value of relative dominance which is quite far from the percentage value of Rhizophora
mucronata with only 3.14%, however it can be observed that Rhizophora mucronata (2.39%) has
0.36% higher for relative density than Bruguiera gymnorrhiza with 2.03%.
For relative frequency, still Rhizophora apiculata had the highest percentage with 90.32%. It can
be inferred that the distribution of individuals in the sampling area is unequal, implying that some
species dominate the area in terms of number of individuals. This indicates that it is the species
which appears the most out of all sampling stations. All these translate to the species importance
values where Rhizophora apiculata and Bruguiera gymnorrhiza both had the largest value of
257.69% and 26.45% respectively, which is away from the largest value. Therefore, they are both
the most important and dominant species in the mangrove in the area. This also implies that they
are the most acclimated to their place.
300.00
250.00
257.69
Importance Value
200.00
150.00
100.00
50.00
26.45 6.61 9.25
0.00
Bruguiera Rhizophora Avicennia officinalis Rhizophora
gymnorrhiza apiculata mucronata
Mangrove Species
Figure 95 -Species Importance Value of the identified Mangrove Species
In the study of Pacyao and Llameg (2018), Rhizophoraceae species prefers places with clay loam
soil type on which was part of the soil for each sampling plots. These species are fast growing tree
which suggests that faster growth pattern and higher copping ability contributes a lot to the
importance of a species in its community (Abantao et al., 2015; Canizares & Seronay, 2016).
Bruguiera gymnorrhiza and Rhizophora apiculata are one of the widespread and most important
species. It is most common in the middle and upper intertidal zones, rather than in the lower
intertidal zone or along the seaward edge of mangrove stands. This species can also tolerate a
range of flooding and other soil types (Allen & Duke, 2006).
229 | P a g e
The species under the Rhizophoracea Family such as the two with highest importance value are
more abundantly spread throughout the archipelago and that it is the species most adapted to
the Philippine coastal environment. This also shows in the studies conducted in Dinagat Island
(Canizares & Seronay, 2018; Lillo & Fernando, 2017).
2.3 Air
2.3.1 Meteorology
Presented below are the requirements on meteorology in the Scoping and Screening Form for the
project.
a) Change in local climate
Identify and assess project impact in terms of change in the local micro-climate change. Also
discuss effects of climate change using PAGASA’s medium to long term projections.
Discuss impact of Typhoon Odette in the area.
b) Contribution in terms of greenhouse gas emissions
Estimate projected greenhouse gases (GHG) (i.e., cargon dioxide, nitrous oxde) using IPCC
guidelines. Include mitigation and/or sequestration for both construciton and operation phases.
Conduct GHG estimates (area, point, line, volume sources, etc) for all combustion process (vehicle
motors, genset, etc). and other flue gas emission activities)
2.3.1.1 Change in Local Climate
Long-term data of at least 30-years is necessary to determine the impact of the project to the
local climate. There is, however, no on-site meteorological data to determine the baseline
microclimate, particularly air temperature. Thus, discussions in this section focused on
macroclimate level in which meteorological data were based on a PAGASA synoptic station.
In the absence of on-site meteorological data as baseline, subjective or qualitative descriptions

on the impact of the project to local climate are presented. These included the change in
230 | P a g e
meteorological condition arising from opening or clearing of opened areas with existing
vegetation, and release of heat greater than the ambient air temperature emanating from heavy
equipment and other vehicles.
Meteorological data that were used to describe the normals and extremes at the project site were
based on the nearest surface synoptic station of the Philippine Atmospheric Geophysical
Astronomical Services Administration (PAGASA) located in Surigao City, Surigao del Norte (herein
referred to as Surigao PAGASA Station). Surigao PAGASA Station is about 42.96 km south to south-
southwest of the project site (Figure 96). Plots of observed normal and extreme values of rainfall
and temperature were shown to determine monthly variations.
As there are no project climate changes specific for the Province of Dinagat Islands, the projected
changes in climate and extremes for the Province of Surigao del Norte, which were published by
the DOST-PAGASA (2018) and the DOST-PAGASA, Manila Observatory and the Ateneo de Manila
University (ADMU) (2020), respectively. Dinagat Islands was previously part of Surigao del Norte.
The projected climate changes included the baseline years (1971 to 2010) and the for years 2036
to 2065 at moderate and high emission scenarios, for the following periods.
• December-Jan-Feb
• March, April, and May
• June, July and August, and
• September, October, and November
231 | P a g e
Figure 96 - Distance of the proposed project site to the nearest synoptic station of the PAGASA namely Surigao PAGASA Station
232 | P a g e
In addition, the projected extreme values of rainfall and temperature, were presented as referred
from the baseline years (1986 to 2005) and for the following future periods.
• Early-future – 2020 to 2039,

• Mid-future – 2046 to 2065, and
• Late-future – 2080 to 2099.
Wind data were also derived from the climatological normal and extremes of the PAGASA. The
latest extreme values on wind speeds from the PAGASA were in 2020 and historical typhoon
tracks were from 1948 to 2020.
Data on Typhoon Odette were based on Tropical Cyclone Bulletins of the DOST-PAGASA,
specifically Bulletin Nos. 1, 16, and 21.
2.3.1.2 Climatological Normals and Extremes
The project site belongs to an area zoned as Type IV Climate (Figure 97). Rainfall in this type of
climate (Type IV) is evenly distributed throughout the year. Type IV climate appears like Type II
because both climate types have no dry season.
233 | P a g e
Figure 97 - The proposed project site as indicate in the Climate map of Philippines (1951 to 2010)
234 | P a g e
2.3.1.2.1 Observed Normal and Extreme Rainfall
a) Normal Rainfall
Figure 98 shows direct relationship between the monthly average rainfall and the average
number of rainy days in a month. A rainy day is defined by PAGASA as “a period of 24 hours
beginning at 8 A.M. to 8 A.M. of the next day during which at least 1 mm of rain is recorded.”
Figure 98 - Monthly average rainfall and number of rainy days for Surigao PAGASA Station
January is the rainiest month with 661.5 mm of rainfall and the greatest number of rainy days is
24 days. The months of November, January and February also have relatively higher rainfall as
compared to other areas in the Philippines, such as in Metro Manila and most areas in Luzon.
May to September are the months with relatively lower rainfall with May as the least rainy month
of 120 mm. Most of these months (July, August and September) fall within the southwest
monsoon season in which high rainfall are expected in most areas in the Philippines, such as in
Metro Manila and most areas in Luzon and Visayas.
a) Extreme Recorded Rainfall
Based on rainfall data at the Surigao PAGASA Station from 1902 to 2020, the greatest recorded
daily rainfall at the station was 566.4 mm, which occurred on December 18, 2003 (Figure 99). This
rainfall topped the 100- year record for the City of Surigao, which resulted to flood levels as high
as three (3) meters (CLUP 2011-2020 for Surigao City, Volume 3).
235 | P a g e
Figure 99 - Highest recorded rainfall (daily) in each month at the Surigao PAGASA Station
2.3.1.2.2 Observed Normal and Extreme Air Temperature
2.3.1.2.2.1 Normal Air Temperature
The annual average mean temperature is 27.8 °C with monthly minimum of 24.1 °C and maximum
of 31.6 °C.
May is the hottest month with mean of 29 °C followed by June (28.7 °C) and July (28.5 °C). The
coldest month is January with mean of 26.4 °C.
As relative humidity is inversely proportional to air temperature, the months with low relatively
humidity (May, June and July) are also the months with high mean air temperature.
236 | P a g e
Figure 100 - Minimum, maximum and mean monthly air temperatures *
2.3.1.2.3 Extreme Recorded Air Temperatures
The highest recorded air temperature at Surigao PAGASA Station from 1903 to 2020 was 37.5 ºC
on May 22, 1987 followed by 36.2 ºC on June 15, 1987.
Also recorded in 1987 are the highest recorded air temperatures in April and September, which
were 35.2 ºC on April 19, 1987 and 37.2 ºC on September 16, 1987.
The lowest recorded air temperature was 18.2 ºC on February 24, 1905.
Figure 101 - Lowest and highest recorded air temperatures at the Surigao PAGASA Station
237 | P a g e
2.3.1.2.4 Normal and Extreme Winds
a) Prevailing Winds
Based on the climatological normal at Surigao PAGASA Station, the following are the prevailing
monthly wind directions.
• December to February – Northeast

• March to May – East
• June to September – Southwest
• October – West
• November – East
The annual average wind speed is 2 m/s with mean monthly average of 2 to 3 m/s
b) Tropical Cyclones
As of May 1, 2015, the PAGASA has classified tropical cyclones into five (5) categories depending
on its sustained winds (Table 48). . The new classification included Super Typhoon (STY) with
maximum sustained winds of more than 220 km/h.
Table 48 - Categories of Tropical Cyclones (Source: PAGASA)

Type Maximum Sustained Winds (km/h)
Tropical Depression (TD) <=61
Tropical Storm (TS) 62 to 88
Severe Tropical Storm (STS) 89 to 117
Typhoon (TY) 118 to 220
Super Typhoon (STY) >220
There are on an average about 19 to 20 tropical cyclones (TC) that entered the Philippine Area of
Responsibility (PAR) every year. About 8 to 9 of the TCs that entered the PAR made landfall
(PAGASA 2017).
In the Province of Dinagat Islands from 1948 to 2020, there were 28 TCs that crossed the province
(Figure 102). Fourteen (14) (or 50%) of these TCs were Tropical Storm (TS), seven (7) (or 25%)
were Tropical Depression (TD) and seven (7) (or 25 %) were Typhoon (TY) (Figure 103 and Figure
104). There was no Severe Tropical Storm (STS) or a Super Typhoon (STY) that entered the
Province of Dinagat Islands from 1948 to 2020.
238 | P a g e
November has the highest monthly TC occurrences while there was no TC that entered the
Province of Dinagat Island in August and September from 1948 to 2020.
Typhoon Odette
On December 14, 2021, Severe Tropical Storm “Rai” entered the PAR and was named “Odette”
and moved west northwestward at 15 km/h. It then intensified into a Typhoon within several
days after it entered the PAR (Source: PAGASA’s TC Bulletin No. 1).
At about 1:30 P.M. on December 16, 2021, the center of the eye of Typhoon Odette was in the
vicinity of Siargao Island (or center was at 9.9 °N and 126.1 °E) with maximum sustained winds of
195 km/h near the center and gustiness of up to 240 km/h (Source: PAGASA’s TC Bulletin No. 11).
Typhoon Odette was moving west northwestward at 30 km/h, and made landfall at about 3:00
P.M. in Dinagat Island. Typhoon Odette exited the PAR on December 18, 2021 (PAGASA TC
Bulletin No.21).
Based on the Tropical Cyclone Bulletins of the DOST-PAGASA, tropical cyclone Odette was
classified only as a Typhoon because its maximum sustained wind was less than 220 km/h.
239 | P a g e
Figure 102 - Tracks of tropical cyclone which crossed the Province of Dinagat Islands from 1948 to 2020
240 | P a g e
Figure 103 - Intensities of tropical cyclone which crossed the Province of Dinagat Islands from
1948 to 2020 (Source: PAGASA)
Figure 104 - Monthly distribution of tropical cyclone which crossed the Province of Dinagat
Islands from 1948 to 2020 (Source: PAGASA)
241 | P a g e
2.3.1.3 Projected Changes in Climate
2.3.1.3.1 Rainfall
2.3.1.3.1.1 Projected Changes in Normal Rainfall
The DOST-PAGASA (2018) published the observed climate trends from 1971 to 2010 and the
projected climate changes from 2036 to 2065 at moderate and high emission scenarios in four (4)
periods of the year, namely: Dec-Jan-Feb, Mar-Apr-May, June-Jul-Aug, and Sep-Oct-Nov.
As there is no projected climated changes specific for the Province of Dinagat Islands, the
projected climated changes for the Province of Surigao del Norte were utilized. As shown in
Figure 105, rainfall appears to increase in all periods of the year at upper bounds under moderate
and high emission scenarios, but the opposite at lower bounds.
There is no persistent trend or changes, however, on rainfall as median levels in all periods under
moderate and high emission scenarios.
Figure 105 - Projected change of rainfall under moderate (top) and high emission scenario
(bottom) for the Province of Dinagat Islands (Data source: DOST-PAGASA 2018)
242 | P a g e
2.3.1.3.1.2 Projected Extremes of Rainfall
The DOST-PAGASA, Manila Observatory (MO) and Ateneo de Manila University (ADMU) published
in 2020 the Philippine Climate Extreme Report. This report presents the projected extremes of air
temperature and rainfall for Early-future (2020 to 2039), mid-future (2046 to 2065), and late-
future (2080 to 2099)
Table 49 presents the projected extremes of rainfall as referred from the baseline years. The
plots of projected extremes of rainfall are shown in Figure 106 to Figure 111.
243 | P a g e
Table 49 - Projected extremes of rainfall as referred from the baseline years

Code Description Unit Definition Trend on projected extreme as referred from the Reference
baseline years Figure
Moderate Emission High Emission Scenario
Scenario
Total amount of rainfall received
Total wet-day Decrease in all future Decrease in all future
PRCPTOT mm during wet days with at least 1 mm of Figure 106
rainfall scenarios scenarios
daily rainfall recorded in a year
Average daily Indicates typical amount of rainfall
SDII mm/day Slightly decease Slightly decrease Figure 107
rainfall intensity during wet days.
Minimum 1-day Maximum amount of rain that can falls Slightly increase (early and
Rx1day mm Slightly increase Figure 107
rainfall total in 1 day mid) and decrease (late)
Maximum amount of rainfall that falls Decrease in early future;
Maximum 5-day Decrease in all future
RX5day mm over a period of five (5) consecutive increase in mid and late Figure 107
rainfall total scenarios
days futures
Threshold for “very wet” days. 95th
Rainfall on very Decrease in all future Decrease in all future
P95 mm percentile of the baseline daily rainfall Figure 108
wet days scenarios periods
during wet days
Rainfall on Amount of rainfall on “extremely wet”
Decrease in all future Decrease in all future
P99 extreme wet mm days or those exceeding 99th Figure 108
scenarios scenarios
days percentile threshold
Total rainfall Decrease in early and mid
Total amount of rain that falls on “very Decrease in all future
R95p from very wet mm futures, and increase in late Figure 109
wet days” or when daily rainfall scenarios
days future
244 | P a g e
Code Description Unit Definition Trend on projected extreme as referred from the Reference
baseline years Figure
Moderate Emission High Emission Scenario
Scenario
exceeds 95th percentile threshold of
the base period
Total rainfall Total amount of rain that falls on
Decrease in all future Decrease in all future
R99p from extremely mm “extremely wet” days when rainfall Figure 109
th
scenarios scenarios
wet days exceeds 99 percentile
Number of wet days when the daily
Number of very Decrease in all future Decrease in all future
P95d days rainfall is greater than 95th percentile Figure 110
wet days scenarios scenarios
of the baseline daily rainfall
Number of Decrease in early and
Counts the number of days when Decrease in all future
P99d extremely wet days mid future, but remain Figure 110
rainfall exceeds P99. scenarios
days the same in late future
Number of consecutive wet days,
when daily rainfall is at least 1 mm. Decrease in all future Decrease in all future
CWD Longest wet spell days Figure 111
Denotes the longest stretch of wet scenarios scenarios
days in the year
Number of consecutive dry days, when
Increase in early period,
daily rainfall is less than 1 mm, Increase in all future
CDD Longest dry spell days and decrease in mid-and Figure 111
denoting the longest stretch of dry scenarios
late period
days within the year.
245 | P a g e
Figure 106 - Projected total wet day rainfall (PRCPTOT) under moderate emission (top) and high
emission scenarios (bottom)
Figure 107 - Projected average daily rainfall intensity (SDII), maximum 1-day rainfall total
(Rx1day), and maximum 5-day rainfall total (Rx5day) under moderate emission (top) and high
246 | P a g e
Figure 108 - Projected rainfall on very wet days (P95) and rainfall on extremely wet days (P99)
under moderate emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom)
Figure 109 - Projected total rainfall from very wet days (R95p) and total rainfall from extremely
wet days (R99p) under moderate emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom)
247 | P a g e
Figure 110 - Projected number of very wet days (P95d) and number of extremely wet days
(P99d) under moderate emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom)
Figure 111 - Projected longest wet spell (CWD) and longest dry spell (CDD) under moderate
emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom)
248 | P a g e
2.3.1.3.2 Temperature
2.3.1.3.2.1 Projected Change in Normal Temperature
Air temperature is projected to increase in the Province of Dinagat Islands in the future in all
periods of the year under moderate and high emission scenarios (Figure 112). The ranges of
increase in air temperatures are 1.6 to 1.8 °C. and 2.0 to 2.2 °C under moderate and high emission
scenarios, respectively.
Figure 112 - Projected change of air temperature under moderate (top) and high emission
scenario for the Province of Dinagat Islands(bottom) (Data source: DOST-PAGASA 2018)
2.3.1.3.2.2 Air Temperature Extremes
Figure 113 to Figure 116 show the plots of the projected extreme values of temperature, as
derived from the DOST-PAGASA, MO, and ADMU (2020). The results of the projections are
summarized in Table 50.
249 | P a g e
In summary, there will be increased in extreme air temperatures and that warm spell duration
(WSDI) will significantly increase from baseline of 2.6 days to 36.8 days in the early future (2020
to 2039) and appears to significantly increase in the mid and late futures. Further, fraction of cold
nights and cool days will also decrease.
250 | P a g e
Table 50 - Projected extremes of air temperature as referred from the baseline years
Code Description Unit Definition* Moderate Emission High Emission Scenario Reference
Scenario Figure
Coldest night Indicates the temperature that may be
Increase in all future Increase in all future
TNn time °C expected on the coldest night of the Figure 113
scenarios scenarios
temperature year
Average night
Average night time temperature within Increase in all future Increase in all future
TNm time °C Figure 113
the year scenarios scenarios
temperature
Warmest night
Warmest night time temperature of the Increase in all future Increase in all future
TNx time °C Figure 113
year scenarios scenarios
temperature
Coldest day time Lowest daytime temperature for each Increase in all future Increase in all future
TXn °C Figure 114
temperature year scenarios scenarios
Average day time Increase in all future Increase in all future
TXm °C Average daytime temperature Figure 114
temperature scenarios scenarios
Warmest day
Temperature on the hottest day of the Increase in all future Increase in all future
TXx time °C Figure 114
year scenarios scenarios
temperature
Decrease in early
Daily Difference between the annual mean
future, and no
DTR temperature °C and the daily maximum and minimum No change Figure 115
change in mid and
range temperature
late futures
251 | P a g e
Code Description Unit Definition* Moderate Emission High Emission Scenario Reference
Scenario Figure
Number of cold nights within the year.
Night is considered cold when the
Fraction of cold Decrease in all future Decrease in all future
TN10p % minimum temperature falls below the Figure 116
nights scenarios scenarios
10th percentile threshold of the
baseline
Frequency of occurrence of warm
Fraction of warm Increase in all future Increase in all future
TN90p % nights when the minimum temperature Figure 116
nights scenarios scenarios
exceeds the 90th percentile threshold
Keeps track of the number of cool days,
Fraction of cool when the maximum temperature goes Decrease in all future Decrease in all future
TX10p % Figure 116
days below the 10th percentile threshold of scenarios scenarios
the baseline
Tracks the number of hots days, when
Fraction of hot Increase in all future Increase in all future
TX90p % the maximum temperature exceeds the Figure 116
days th
scenarios scenarios
90 percentile threshold
Indicates the number of days
contributing to war periods. A warm
Warm Spell spell occurs when the daily maximum Increase in all future Increase in all future
WSDI days Figure 117
Duration Index temperature for six or more scenarios scenairos
consecutive days exceeds the 90th
percentile threshold of the baseline.
*As defined by DOST-PAGASA, MO, and ADMU (2020)
252 | P a g e
Figure 113 - Projected coldest night time temperature (TNm), average night time temperature
(TNm) and warmest night time temperature (TNx) under moderate emission (top) and high
Figure 114 - Projected coldest day time (TXn), average day time (TXm), and warmest day time
(TXx) temperature under moderate emission (top) and high emission scenarios (bottom)
253 | P a g e
Figure 115 - Projected daily temperature range (DTR) under moderate emission (top) and high
Figure 116 - Projected fraction of cold nights (TN10p), fraction of warm nights (TN90p),
fraction of cool days (TX10p), and fraction of hot days (TX90p) under moderate emission (top)
and high emission scenarios (bottom)
254 | P a g e
Table 51 - Type and number of equipment and the estimated annual fuel consumption during
operations phase
Annual Fuel
Engine Average Fuel
No. of Consumption
Location/Usage Power Load Consumption
Units (liters per
(kW) Factor (liter/hr/unit)
year)
Mining Equipment
Hydraulic Excavator 22 203.6 0.50 26.35 4,182,344.0
Dump truck 36 187.2 0.35 16.96 4,404,622.5
Bull dozer 1 226.0 0.50 29.25 211,046.8
Service Vehicle 4 129.8 0.35 11.75 277,582.1
Service Bus 2 134.2 0.35 12.16 111,671.0
Fuel Truck 2 134.2 0.35 12.16 143,577.0
Environmental Equipment
Compactor/roller 1 120.8 0.50 15.63 92,299.5
Water Lorry 2 220.7 0.35 20.00 236,104.4
Bull dozer 1 226.0 0.50 29.25 211,046.8
Grader 1 164.8 0.50 21.33 153,895.8
Excavator 1 203.6 0.50 26.35 190,106.5
Service Vehicle 2 129.8 0.35 11.75 138,791.1
Notes:a) Two long shift – 22 hours per day at 7 days operation from April to October, b)
Assumed 328 days of operation per year
The total fuel consumption (in Gg) was then inputted in the GHG Inventory Software of the
.Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC Inventory Software), which then calculated
then GHGs (Figure 117).
Figure 117 - Screenshot of the annual emissions of CO2, CH4 and N20
255 | P a g e
Table 52 shows that the estimated total annual CO2e emissions is 1,163,794.1 MT. Bulk of the
CO2 emissions are from the operations of the hydraulic excavator (22 units) and dump trucks (36
units), which accounted to 40.4 and 42.54% of the fuel consumption (or CO2 emissions),
respectively. Reduction of fuel consumption, and consequently reduction measures on CO 2
emissions shall focus on the above-mentioned two (2) equipment/vehicle.
Table 52 - Annual CO2e emissions during operations phase

GHG CO2 Emission (Gg) Global Warming Potential (GWP) CO2e Emission (Gg) CO2e Emission (MT)
CO2 378.4 1 378.4 378,400.000
CH4 28.039 28 785.092 785,092.000
N20 0.00114 265 0.3021 302.100
Total 1163.7941 1,163,794.100
2.3.1.4 Measures to Reduce GHG Emissions
The following are the recommended measures to reduce emissions of GHG. Reduction of fuel
consumption, and consequently reduction of CO2 emissions shall focus on the above-mentioned
two (2) equipment/vehicle.
1) Use of use heavy equipment and trucks that are fuel efficient,
2) Minimize idling time by shutting off heavy equipment or vehicles when not in use or
reducing the time of idling to not more than 3 minutes.
3) Optimize haul truck scheduling and routing by determining shorter and timesaving routes
that will lessen consumption of fuel,
4) Compaction of haul roads to reduce rolling resistance
5) Design of pit access ramps to reduce power exerted of loaded trucks when ascending
from the pit;
6) Maintain all construction equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specification, and
7) Offset emissions of GHG through reforestation.
256 | P a g e
2.3.2 Air Quality
2.3.2.1 Degradation of Air Quality
2.3.2.1.1 Scope
Presented below are the scope on air quality as indicated in the approved scoping and screening
form for the project.
a) Baseline Data Parameter Requirements
• Characterization of ambient air quality for TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2 and trace metals – mercury
(Hg), lead (Pb), cadmium (Cd), arsenic (As) and chromium (Cr),
• Sampling site map,
• Use 24-hours amibent air quality monitoring based on upwind and downwind wind
characteristics and compare with the NAAQG and the NAAQS under DAO 2000-81, and
b) Required Assessment Methodology/Approach
a) Use DENR standard methods and procedures for sampling and analysis. Relate selection
of sampling locations using data collected in 3.1.1
b) Identification and assessment of impact of the project to the identified parameters
including VOCs and odor through air dispersion modeling for mining projects with
processing (e.g., recovery/refining of gold, nickel or cobalt recovery, copper processing
etc.),
Note: Th proposed project will not involve recovery or processing of nickel and related
materials at the project site, thus only qualitative impact assessment is presented in this report.
c) Show in a map, sampling sites for monitoring purposes based on the above assessment;
and
d) Compare changes in air quality over time using statistical tools, e.g., across sampling sites
over time, and test for significant changes
Note: Assessment on changes of air quality over time can be determined through air dispersion
modelling or when considerable number of air samples taken at a regular period, i.e., monthly
or quarterly, over longer time.
257 | P a g e
2.3.2.1.2.1 Characterization of Ambient Air Quality
Ambient air monitoring was conducted by Ostrea Mineral Laboratories, Inc. (Ostrea) at eight (8)
locations on January 12 to 20, 2022. The air monitoring started less than a month after Typhoon
Odette crossed Province of Dinagat Islands on December 16, 2022.
The air sampling stations were assigned at receptors (residences and commercial areas) in
vicinities of the project site (Figure 118). The photographs of the equipment during air sampling
are shown in Figure 119 to Figure 122. Noted in the photographs are the devastated or damaged
buildings, structures, and vegetation in vicinities of the monitoring stations due to Typhoon
Odette.
Pollutants monitored were total suspended particulates (TSP), particulate matter less than or
equal to 10 micron (or PM10), sulfur dioxide (SO2), nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and metals in ambient
air (As, Cd, Cr, Pb and Hg) (Table 53). The sampling time at each station was 24 hours.
258 | P a g e
Figure 118 - Locations of air sampling stations
259 | P a g e
Figure 119 - Photographs of the equipment during sampling at Station A1 (above) and Station A2 (below)
260 | P a g e
261 | P a g e
Figure 121 -Photographs of the equipment during sampling at Station A5 (above) and Station A6 (below)
262 | P a g e
263 | P a g e
Table 53 - Locations and coordinates of air sampling stations

Station Location Geographical Date/ Time of Parameters
ID Coordinates Sampling
(WGS84)
A1 Sitio Catmonan 10°11'0.80"N 12-13 Jan 2022/ TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2,
125°37'40.80" 07:12 A.M. – 7:12 As,Cd, Cr, Pb, Hg
E A.M.
A2 Sitio Cagais 10°10'46.50"N 13-14 Jan 2022/ TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2,
125°37'54.80" 08:15 A.M. – 8:15 As,Cd, Cr, Pb, Hg
E A.M
A3 Barangay Legaspi 10°10'8.00"N 14-15 Jan 2022/ TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2,
125°37'15.30" 09:19 A.M. – 9:19 As,Cd, Cr, Pb, Hg
E A.M
A4 Barangay 10° 9'41.20"N 12-13 Jan 2022/ TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2,
Bayanihan 125°36'25.60" 10:03 A.M. – 10:03 As,Cd, Cr, Pb, Hg
E A.M
A5 Purok 5-RME 10°10'29.60"N 16-17 Jan 2022/ TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2,
Barangay San Jose 125°34'22.50" 12:37 P.M. – 12:37 As,Cd, Cr, Pb, Hg
E P.M
A6 Sitio Malingin, San 10°10'32.50"N 17-18 Jan 2022/ TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2,
Jose Libjo 125°33'58.80" 01:32 P.M. – 2:32 As,Cd, Cr, Pb, Hg
E P.M
A7 Barangay Garcia, 10°10'31.80"N 18-19 Jan 2022/ TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2,
Libjo / 01:50 P.M. – 1:50 As,Cd, Cr, Pb, Hg
10°10'31.80"N P.M
A8 Bolod bolod 10°12'7.30"N 19-20 Jan 2022/ TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2,
Central 10°12'7.30"N 2:34 P.M. – 2:34 As,Cd, Cr, Pb, Hg
Elementary School P.M
Table 54 shows the methods of air sampling and analysis, as provided by Ostrea (2022). The
following briefly describes the methods of sampling for TSP, PM10, SO2 and NO2.
Table 54 - Methods of Ambient Air Sampling and Analysis

Pollutant Sampling and Analysis Procedures
Total Suspended High Volume/Gravimetric; US Environmental Protection Agency. (2011).

Particulates Reference method for the determination of suspended particulate matter as
(TSP) PM10 in the atmosphere
264 | P a g e
Pollutant Sampling and Analysis Procedures
Particulate High Volume/Gravimetric; US Environmental Protection Agency. (2011).

Matter (PM10) Reference method for the determination of suspended particulate matter as
PM10 in the atmosphere
Sulfur Dioxide Gas Bubbler/Pararosaniline; US Environmental Protection Agency. (2010).
(SO2) Reference method for the determination of sulfur dioxide in the
atmosphere (Pararosaniline method)
Nitrogen Dioxide Gas Bubbler/Griess – Saltzman; Lodge, J.P. (Ed.). (1988). Methods of Air
(NO2) Sampling and Analysis (3rd ed., pp. 389-393). New York: CRC Press
Arsenic (As) Hydride Generation AAS; USEPA Compendium/Method IO-3.1
Cadmium (Cd) Flame AAS; USEPA Compendium/Method IO-3.1
Chromium (Cr) Flame AAS
Lead (Pb) Flame AAS; USEPA CFR 40, Part 50, Appendix G
Mercury (Hg) Cold Vapor AAS; USEPA Compendium/Method IO-3.1
a) TSP
Ambient air was drawn through a glass fiber filter over one-hour for TSP. The weights of the filter
papers containing the particulates less the initial weights of the filter papers prior to sampling
over that of the standard volume of air sampled give the concentrations of TSP.
b) PM10
Ambient air, with particle size less than 10µm was entered in an air sampler inlet by means of
vacuum system. The air passes through a venturi type casing resulting to a flow rate of
approximately 40 cubic feet per minute. The particles were collected in a glass fiber filter and
determined by measuring gravimetrically. The filter paper containing the sample was weighed
hence the final weight of the sample over that of the standard volume of air sampled gave the
concentration of PM10.
c) SO2 and NO2
A known volume of air was sampled with a wet-chemical system where a constant volume of air
sample passes through a suitable reagent (absorbing reagent) that was reactive to the specific
pollutant desired. As the air sample passes through the bubbler rack, the air diffuses forming air
bubbles and slowly reacts to the chemical reagent forming a complex ion. The samples were then
analyzed using prescribed and approved methods
265 | P a g e
All samples collected (filter papers and chemical reagents) were brought to Ostrea laboratory in
Cagayan de Oro City for analysis.
2.3.2.1.3 Background Air Quality
Table 55 shows the results of the ambient air sampling at eight (8) locations on January 12 to 20,
2022. The air sampling started less than a month after Typhoon Odette crossed Province of
Dinagat Islands on December 16, 2022.
Levels of TSP ranged from 13 to 50 µg/Nm3 with mean of 28.6 µg/Nm3 while PM10 ranged from 9
to 45 µg/Nm3. These concentrations were within the ambient guideline value set for TSP at 230
µg/Nm3 and 150 µg/Nm3 for PM10.
Sources of particulates at the time of sampling were burning of firewood, garbage or trashes,
smoke belching, and dust emissions at open areas (Table 56). The area was generally damaged
or devastated during the passage of Typhoon Odette on December 16, 2022.
Measured gaseous air pollutants (SO2 and NO2) were relatively low and within the NAAQG of 180
and 160 µg/Nm3, respectively. Highest measured SO2 was 6 µg/Nm3 while for NO2 was 2.3 µg/Nm3
Metals in ambient air (As, Cd, Cr, Pb and Hg) were all not detected (or below detection limit) at
the time of sampling in January 2022.
Observed ambient air temperatures at the sampling stations from 25 to 28 °C and relative
humidity from 64.8 to 86.7%.
Wind directions (or directions from which the winds were coming from) at the time of sampling
were as follows:
• Stations A1 to A4 – Southeast
• Station A5 and A8 – Northeast
• Station A6 – Southwest, and
• Station A7 – Northwest
Annex A presents the full report of the Ostrea (2020), including the calibration certificates of the
monitoring equipment and certificate of laboratory analysis.
266 | P a g e
Table 55 - Measured concentrations of TSP, PM10, SO2, NO2, and metals in ambient air
Station Date/ Time of Concentration (µg/Nm3)
Location
ID Sampling TSP PM10 SO2 NO2 As Cd Cr Pb Hg
12-13 Jan 2022/
A1 Sitio Catmonan 07:12 A.M. – 7:12 22 19 4 1.3 <0.0001 <0.0004 <0.003 <0.008 0.00035
A.M.
13-14 Jan 2022/
A2 Sitio Cagais 08:15 A.M. – 8:15 13 9 4 0.7 <0.0001 <0.0004 <0.003 <0.008 0.00035
A.M
14-15 Jan 2022/
A3 Barangay Legaspi 09:19 A.M. – 9:19 50 45 4 1.3 <0.0001 <0.0004 <0.003 <0.008 0.00035
A.M
12-13 Jan 2022/
Barangay
A4 10:03 A.M. – 10:03 14 11 <4 1.1 <0.0001 <0.0004 <0.003 <0.008 0.00035
Bayanihan
A.M
16-17 Jan 2022/
Purok 5-RME
A5 12:37 P.M. – 12:37 33 28 4 2 <0.0001 <0.0004 <0.003 <0.008 0.00035
Barangay San Jose
P.M
17-18 Jan 2022/
Sitio Malingin, San
A6 01:32 P.M. – 2:32 21 14 5 2.3 <0.0001 <0.0004 <0.003 <0.008 0.00035
Jose Libjo
P.M
Barangay Garcia,
A7 18-19 Jan 2022/ 40 28 5 1.5 <0.0001 <0.0004 <0.003 <0.008 0.00035
Libjo
267 | P a g e
Station Date/ Time of Concentration (µg/Nm3)

Location
ID Sampling TSP PM10 SO2 NO2 As Cd Cr Pb Hg
01:50 P.M. – 1:50
P.M
Bolod bolod 19-20 Jan 2022/
A8 Central 2:34 P.M. – 2:34 36 31 6 1.6 <0.0001 <0.0004 <0.003 <0.008 0.00035
Elementary School P.M
NAAQG 230 150 180 160 20* 10* - 20* -
*As NAAQS
268 | P a g e
Table 56 - Observations during air sampling on January 12-20, 2022

Sampling Location and Observations During
Station ID Location
Air Sampling
Near a residential area, seashore, and
A1 Sitio Catmonan mountain. Smoke from burning of firewood for
cooking and garbage was observed.
Near the national highway and residential area.
The area was dusty. There were few smoke
A2 Sitio Cagais
belching vehicles that passed the area at the
time of sampling.
Near a barangay road and beside the seashore.
A3 Barangay Legaspi There were few smoke belching vehicles that
passed the area during sampling
Near a barangay road and beside the sea shore.
A4 Barangay Bayanihan There were few smoke belching vehicles that
passed the area during sampling
Near highland area and a basketball court.
Purok 5-RME Barangay San
A5 There were few smoke belching vehicles that
Jose
passed the area during sampling.
Near a residential area, high school campus.
Sitio Malingin, San Jose
A6 Smoke from burning of firewood for cooking
Libjo
was observed
Inside the campus of Garcia Elementary School.
There were few smoke belching vehicles that
A7 Barangay Garcia, Libjo
passed the area during sampling. Smoke from
burning of firewood for cooking was observed
Inside Bolodbolod Elementary School.
Approximately 100 meters from national
Bolod bolod Central highway. There were few smoke belching
A8
Elementary School vehicles that passed the area during sampling.
Smoke from burning of firewood for cooking
was observed
269 | P a g e
2.3.2.1.4 Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures
2.3.2.1.4.1 Impact Assessment
The construction phase of the project will involve activities that are expected to generate
significant amount of dust emissions in the area. These include the construction of a) new and
existing access and haul roads, b) mine facilities (stockyards for the nickel and iron, causeway
improvement, maintenance shop, administration office, assay laboratory and additional staff
houses), c) environmental facilities (settling ponds/dams, dumpsites, drainage, and nursery), and
d) initial overburden stripping.
The expected air emissions during operation are the extraction of the ore, loading and transport
of ore to the stockpile, stockpiling, transport and loading of ore to barge/LCT, and transport of
ore to the mother vessel.
The abandonment phase includes the rehabilitation phase in which expected air emissions are
the rehabilitation of the last mining parcel, removal of structures, equipment and waste, and
cleaning and stabilization of working areas.
The above-mentioned project phases will involve the following activities, which generate fugitive
emissions.
• Clearing, grading, and compacting of areas for construction,

• Transport of haul trucks and other vehicles within the mining site, haul roads and to the
barge/LCT,
• Loading and unloading of ores and other materials or materials handling at the mining
site, stockpile and barge/LCT
• Wind erosion of exposed areas, such as the stockpile, haul and access roads, and other
opened areas,
• Tailpipe emissions from heavy equipment and other vehicles,
• Demolitions of buildings and other structures, which include loading, unloading, and
transport of debris,
• Emissions from point sources, such as generator sets and laboratory exhausts, and
• Other emission sources
270 | P a g e
2.3.2.1.4.2 Mitigation Measures
Section 13 (Prohibited Acts) in Rule XXV (Stationary Sources) of the implementing rules of
Philippine Clean Air Act (or DAO 2000-81) prohibit emissions of particulate matter (or fugitive
particulates) from any other source without taking reasonable precautions to prevent such
emission. These sources include vehicular movement, transportation of materials, construction,
demolition or wrecking or industry related activities such as loading, storing or “handling”. Thus,
sources of fugitive emissions or particulates from the proposed project (mine operations) are
subject to this provision.
DAO 2000-81 also specifies that reasonable measures shall be implemented to limit particulate
emissions (or fugitive emissions). These mitigation measures including, among others, the
following (Source: Section 13(a), Rule XXV of DAO 2000-81):
1) Use, where possible, of water or chemicals for control of dust from construction and
mining or clearing of lands;
2) Application of water or suitable chemicals on roads, materials of stockpiles and other
surface which create airborne dust problem; and
3) Installation and use of hood fans and fabric filters or any other suitable control devices to
enclose and vent the handling of dusty materials. Adequate containment methods shall
be employed during sandblasting or other similar operations.
Specifically, the following dust generating activities and corresponding mitigation measures are
recommended for the project.
a) Clearing, grading, and compacting of areas for construction
Wet suppression or water spraying and installation of temporary wind barriers, if necessary,
especially during dry days and when winds are light to moderate. To minimize cumulative dusts
emissions from hauling activities and grading/maintenance activities of haul roads during dry and
windy conditions, road grading to be done separately at other roadways, when necessary.
b) Loading and unloading of materials (materials handling)-
Provision of dust suppression system (water spraying) prior to and during unloading, and regular
removal of spillage.
271 | P a g e
c) Transport of haul trucks and other vehicles
Wet suppression or water spraying, strict implementation of speed limits, provision of covers for
trucks hauling spoils and other materials (if materials will be transferred off-site), and regular
maintenance of trucks to reduce or maintain tailpipe emissions.
d) Wind erosion of exposed areas
Water spraying over exposed areas and installation of temporary barriers to reduce wind speed
and avoid opening or clearing of new areas during early stage of construction, if such area is not
immediately needed
e) Emissions from point sources, such as generator sets and laboratory exhausts
Regular maintenance of generator sets, i.e., change oil and filters, and use of fuel with low sulfur
content. For laboratory exhausts, scrubbers, filters, or other pollution control devices should
be used to lessen exhaust emissions to within emissions standards
f) Other emission sources
Mitigation measures as provided in Section 13 (Prohibited Acts) in Rule XXV (Stationary Sources)
of the implementing rules of PCAA.
2.3.2.1.5 Environmental Compliance Monitoring
During construction and operation of the project, monitoring shall focus on compliance of the
following provisions in DAO 2000-81, NPCC (1978), NPCC (1980), and nuisance provisions in the
Civil Code of the Philippines, as follows:
• Section 13-Prohibited Acts, in Rule XXV-Stationary Sources - prohibits emissions of particulate

matter (or fugitive particulates) from any other source without taking reasonable precautions
to prevent such emissions. These sources include vehicular movement, transportation of
materials, construction, demolition or wrecking or industry related activities such as loading,
storing or “handling”, and
• Section 1 (NAAQS), Rule XXVI of DAO 2000-81 (IRR of the PCAA) - requres that air sampling
shall be done at the locations of highest expected concentration downwind of the emissions
source and other locations based on DENR’s approved techniques (Air Quality Monitoring
Manual); and
272 | P a g e
• If diesel generator sets will be used during construction and/or operation, stack emissions
monitoring is also required, depending on the capacity of the diesel generating units. As
required in Section 1 (NAAQS) Rule XXVI of DAO 2000-81, the locations of the air sampling
stations shall depend on the prevailing wind flows during sampling and the locations of
emission sources, i.e., location of access roads, mine sites and stockpiles. It would be
appropriate, therefore, to establish or identify air stations during actual sampling, though
another option is to establish air sampling stations at households/residences nearest the
emission sources.
As results of ambient air monitoring using manual methods, i.e., high volume-gravimetric, will
take time (takes few weeks to determine the results after sampling), establishing EQPLs and its
corresponding action plan (alert and action) may not be appropriate in this case. Thus, it is highly
recommended to conduct regular visual inspection of possible fugitive emissions at the project
sites during construction and operation. This is to ensure that excessive dust will be limited within
the project boundaries and mine sites.
2.3.3 Noise
2.3.3.1 Increase in Ambient Noise Level
2.3.3.1.1 Scope
Presented below are the scope on air quality as indicated in the approved scoping and screening
form for the project.
a) Baseline Data Parameter Requirements
• Characterization of ambient noise level

• Sampling site map
b) Required Assessment Methodology/Approach
a) Use DENR standard methods and procedures for sampling and measurements
b) Identification and assessment of impact to ambient noise level using noise attenuation
modelling and comparing it with relevant standards (applicable if estimated total noise
level will exceed noise standard)
273 | P a g e
Note: Assessment on impact on ambient noise level is on the expected attenuation or increase
of noise levels emanating from the type of equipment to be used during construction and
operation
a) Characterization of Ambient Noise Quality
Ambient air monitoring was conducted by Ostrea Mineral Laboratories, Inc. (Ostrea) at eight (8)
locations on January 12 to 20, 2022, the monitoring of which started less than a month after
Typhoon Odette crossed Province of Dinagat Islands on December 16, 2022.
The locations of the noise sampling stations were the same as those of the air sampling stations
(Figure 123). Sound level monitoring was performed using an Extech Instrument Model 407740.
274 | P a g e
Figure 123 - Locations of noise sampling stations
275 | P a g e
2.3.3.1.3 Background Air Quality
Table 57 shows the measured noise levels at eight (8) locations on January 12 to 20, 2022. The
statistics of noise levels per monitoring period (morning, daytime, evening, and nighttime) are
shown in Figure 124.
Table 57 - Results of ambient noise monitoring

Night
Morning Evening
Daytime time
Date/ Time of (05:00 (6:00 pm-
Station ID Location (9:00 am- (10:00
Sampling am-9:00 10:00
6:00 pm) am-5:00
am) pm)
am)
12-13 Jan 2022/
Sitio
A1 07:12 A.M. – 7:12 53 65 58 55
Catmonan
A.M.
13-14 Jan 2022/
A2 Sitio Cagais 08:15 A.M. – 8:15 55 60 56 52
A.M
14-15 Jan 2022/
Barangay
A3 09:19 A.M. – 9:19 54 60 56 53
Legaspi
A.M
12-13 Jan 2022/
Barangay
A4 10:03 A.M. – 10:03 55 59 56 54
Bayanihan
A.M
Purok 5-
16-17 Jan 2022/
RME
A5 12:37 P.M. – 12:37 57 62 60 55
Barangay
P.M
San Jose
Sitio
17-18 Jan 2022/
Malingin,
A6 01:32 P.M. – 2:32 57 59 57 54
San Jose
P.M
Libjo
Barangay 18-19 Jan 2022/
A7 Garcia, 01:50 P.M. – 1:50 57 54 58 54
Libjo P.M
Bolod
A8 19-20 Jan 2022/ 57 62 59 54
bolod
276 | P a g e
Night
Morning Evening
Daytime time
Date/ Time of (05:00 (6:00 pm-
Station ID Location (9:00 am- (10:00
Sampling am-9:00 10:00
6:00 pm) am-5:00
am) pm)
am)
Central 2:34 P.M. – 2:34
Elementary P.M
School
As expected, measured noise levels during the day with equivalent noise level (Leq) of 61 dBA were
higher than other periods. Leq at nighttime was 54 dBA while the Leq for morning and evening
were 55.9 and 57.7 dBA, respectively.
Peaks of noise levels (L10) were also higher during daytime (62.9 dBA) than those in the morning
(57 dBA), evening (59.3 dBA), and nighttime (55 dBA).
L90 levels or sometimes referred to as “background noise levels” also follow the same trend as L10
levels, that is, high L90 levels at daytime with 57.5 Dba and lower that other periods of the day.
Standard deviations of noise levels in the morning, evening, and nighttime were less than 2 dBA,
indicating low deviations or fluctuations of sound levels. At daytime, the standard deviation was
3.2 dBA indicating apparent fluctuations of noise levels due to increasing activities in daytime.
Background noise levels at the noise sampling stations appear higher than the ambient noise
standards set for residential areas, as follows:
• Morning = 50 dBA - observed noise levels ranged from 53 to 57 dBA

• Daytime = 55 dBA – observed noise levels ranged from 54 to 65 dBA
• Evening = 50 dBA – observed noise levels ranged from 56 to 60 dBA, and
• Nighttime = 45 dBA – observed noise levels ranged from 52 to 55 dBA
Sources of noise at the time of monitoring were generally from the community rebuilding or
repairing their houses due to damages caused by Typhoon Odette, vehicles passing at the area,
operation of chainsaw and radio.
277 | P a g e
Figure 124 - Statistics of noise levels
278 | P a g e
2.3.3.1.4 Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures
The impact of the project on the increase in ambient noise levels in the area are expected during
construction, operation, abandonment phases. The utilization of heavy equipment and other
vehicle, including generator sets, if any, will increase noise levels in viciniteis of these sources.
The U.S. Federal Highway Administration (U.S.FHA) in 2006 published the attenuated noise levels
of typical construction equipment (Table 58). Households or residences near the noise emitting
equipment may expect high noise levels depending on the distance between the source and the
former.
Table 58 - Attenuated noise levels at 50 ft (15.24 m) from selected heavy equipment and
vehicles
Specification
Equipment Description
Lmax at 50 ft
Backhoe 80
Dump truck 84
Dozer 85
Generator 82
Grader 85
Pick-up truck 55
Roller 85
Concrete mixer truck 85
Source: U.S. FHWA Final Report, 2006
The increase or perceived impact of noise levels emanating from operation of the equipment and
vehicles could be moderate to severe when increase in background noise levels are 5 to 10 and
greater than 10 dBA, respectively (Table 59). Increase in noise levels can cause nuisance at
residences residing near the access roads, particularly during nighttime.
Table 59 - Noise level increases and corresponding impact categories (Source: Wilson, 1986)
Category Increase (dBA) Effect
I <5 None to Minor
II 5 to 10 Moderate
III > 10 Significant to Severe
279 | P a g e
Mitigation measures to reduce noise levels during construction are necessary to avoid nuisance
at nearby households. The following are proposed noise mitigation measures.
1) Require all heavy equipment and other equipment using internal combustion engines
(e.g., generator sets to install effective mufflers. Significant noise is emitted at the exhaust
of internal combustion engines, which could be effectively reduce using mufflers;
2) Impose speed limits at the mine site, haul roads, and access roads near residential areas;
3) Limit use of equipment at nighttime, especially equipment that emits high noise levels,
when such activity could cause nuisance at nearby households;
4) Provide total or partial enclosure of high noise emitting sources (e.g., crusher), if
necessary, depending on noise attenuation during testing and commissioning as
measured by a sound level meter; and
2.3.3.1.5 Environmental Compliance Monitoring
It is recommended to conduct ambient noise monitoring at households nearest the project site
or at the project boundary in accordance with NPCC (1978). Noise monitoring should be
conducted at four (4) time periods as specified in NPCC (1978) and NPCC (1980).
At least fifty (50) sound levels at an interval of ten (10) seconds should be recorded per sampling
station per monitoring period. The median of the seven (7) highest noise readings shall be the
noise level comparable with the ambient noise standard.
2.4 People
The proposed project is located in Barangay Bayanihan, San Jose, Garcia, San Antonio and General
Aguinaldo in the Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Island. The five (5) barangays are
considered as direct impacts barangays.
Libjo is located in the central part of Dinagat. It is bounded on the north by the Municipality of
Tubajon, on the south by the Municipality of Basilisa, and on its southeast by the Municipality of
Cagdianao. Its northwestern side faces Surigao Strait, where the greatest naval battle was once
fought buy the American Liberation Forces against the Japanese Occupation Forces during WWII
while on its east lies the Dinagat Sound which leads to the abysmal canyon of the Philippine Deep.
280 | P a g e
2.4.1 Demographic Baseline Information of Impact Areas
2.4.1.1 Methodology
In gathering information to situate the actual demographic and socio-economic conditions of the
primary impact areas, various methods were used. These methods include review of secondary
information sources, conduct of perception surveys and focus group discussions.
Secondary information and data were sources from the published survey and census reports of
the Philippine Statistics Authority (PSA).
• 2020 Census of Population, PSA

• 2010 Census of Population and Housing, PSA;
• Comprehensive Land Use Plan, Municipality of Libjo
• Compact Socio-Economic Profile, Municipality of Libjo; and
• 2015 Census of Population, PSA.
2.4.1.2.1 Population Size and Growth Rate
Based on the 2020 Census of the Philippine Statistics Authority, the population of Barangay
Bayanihan is 911. The population is 5.05% of the total population of the Municipality of Libjo.
Compared to its 916 population in 2015, the total number of population decreases, and has a
growth rate of -0.12% it is expected to double in 583 years. The population growth rate is lower
than the population growth of the municipality (0.34%) and is beyond lower in compared to the
national population growth rate of 1.63 (2015-2020). Barangay San Jose has a population of 1,736
or 9.62% of the total population of the municipality. In 2015 it has a population of 1,639 and has
a growth rate of 1.22% and is expected to double in 57 years. In Barangay San Antonio the
population is 2,789 or 15.45% of the total population of the municipality, in 2015 it has a
population of 2,751 and has a growth rate of 0.29%, it is expected to double in 241 years. The
population growth rate of Barangay San Jose is higher compared to the growth rate of the
municipality while the population growth rate of Barangay San Antonio is relatively lower to the
population growth rate of the municipality. Both Barangay San Jose and San Antonio has a
population growth rate lower than the national population growth rate (1.63). Barangay Garcia
has a population of 1,656 or 9.17% of the total population of the municipality, it has a population
of 1,497 in 2015, and has a population growth rate of 2.15%, it is expected to double in 32 years.
Barangay General Aguinaldo has a population of 2,128 or 11.79% of the total population of the
281 | P a g e
municipality, in 2015 it has a population of 1,868, it has a population growth rate of 2.78%, and is
expected to double in 25 years. The average population growth rate of Barangay Garcia and
General Aguinaldo is almost 7 times higher than the population growth of the municipality and
comparatively higher than the national population growth rate.
Table 60 - Population and Growth Rate of Impact Area, 2015 and 2020
Population
Doubling
Area 2015 Population 2020 Population Growth Rate
Time
(%)
Municipality of Libjo 17,760 18,051 0.34 206
Barangay Bayanihan 916 911 -0.12 583
Barangay San Jose 1,639 1,736 1.22 57
Barangay Garcia 1,497 1,656 2.15 32
Barangay San Antonio 2,751 2,789 0.29 241
Barangay General Aguinaldo 1,868 2,128 2.78 25
Source: 2020 Census of Population, Philippine Statistics Authority
2015 Census of Population, Philippine Statistics Authority
2.4.1.2.2 Population Composition
As of the household population by age group, it shows that in Barangay Bayanihan (Table 61) the
age group of 5 – 9 years old has the highest percentage, with a total number of 114 or 12.45% of
the household population of barangay, it is then followed by the age group belonging to 1-4 years
old with 102 or 11.14%, and age group of 15-19 years old with 100 or 10.92% of the total
household population.
Table 61 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay Bayanihan, 2015
Age Group Population (2015) Age Composition (%)
Under 1 26 2.84
1-4 102 11.14
5-9 114 12.45
10 - 14 92 10.04
15 - 19 100 10.92
20 - 24 99 10.81
25 - 29 71 7.75
30 - 34 56 6.11
35 - 39 50 5.46
282 | P a g e
40 - 44 42 4.59
45 - 49 53 5.79
50 - 54 32 3.49
55 - 59 30 3.28
60 - 64 22 2.40
65 - 69 7 0.76
70 - 74 6 0.66
75 - 79 9 0.98
80 years and over 5 0.55
TOTAL 916 100
In Barangay San Jose (Table 62), the age group with the highest percentage belongs to the age
group of 10 – 14 years old (11.71%), followed by the age group of 5 – 9 years old (11.17%) and
age group of 1 – 4 years old (9.46%).
Table 62 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay San Jose, 2015
Under 1 27 1.65
1-4 155 9.46
5-9 183 11.17
10 - 14 192 11.71
15 - 19 135 8.24
20 - 24 116 7.08
25 - 29 125 7.63
30 - 34 102 6.22
35 - 39 95 5.80
40 - 44 83 5.06
45 - 49 87 5.31
50 - 54 85 5.19
55 - 59 77 4.70
60 - 64 59 3.60
65 - 69 41 2.50
70 - 74 35 2.14
75 - 79 21 1.28
283 | P a g e
TOTAL 1,639 100
In Barangay Garcia (Table 63), the age group of 10 – 14 years old has the highest percentage
(13.16%), followed by the age group of 5 – 9 years old (11.96%) and age group of 1 – 4 years old
(9.82%).
Table 63 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay Garcia, 2015
Under 1 33 2.20
1-4 147 9.82
5-9 179 11.96
10 - 14 197 13.16
15 - 19 142 9.49
20 - 24 97 6.48
25 - 29 98 6.55
30 - 34 93 6.21
35 - 39 86 5.74
40 - 44 92 6.15
45 - 49 61 4.07
50 - 54 80 5.34
55 - 59 43 2.87
60 - 64 38 2.54
65 - 69 36 2.40
70 - 74 40 2.67
75 - 79 23 1.54
TOTAL 1,497 100
In Barangay San Antonio (Table 64), the age group of 5 – 9 years old has the highest percentage
(13.16%), followed by the age group of 10 – 14 years old (11.89%) and age group of 1 – 4 years
old (10.03%).
284 | P a g e
Table 64 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay San Antonio, 2015
Under 1 62 2.25
1-4 276 10.03
5-9 362 13.16
10 - 14 327 11.89
15 - 19 245 8.91
20 - 24 181 6.58
25 - 29 226 8.22
30 - 34 204 7.42
35 - 39 167 6.07
40 - 44 148 5.38
45 - 49 148 5.38
50 - 54 107 3.89
55 - 59 95 3.45
60 - 64 51 1.85
65 - 69 66 2.40
70 - 74 47 1.71
75 - 79 21 0.76
TOTAL 2,751 100
In Barangay General Aguinaldo (Table 65), the age group with the highest percentage belongs to
the age group of 5 – 9 years old (13.06%), followed by the age group of 10 – 14 years old
(12.74%) and age group of 1 – 4 years old (10.49%).
Table 65 - Household Population by Age Group: Barangay General Aguinaldo: 2015
Under 1 59 3.16
1-4 196 10.49
5-9 244 13.06
10 - 14 238 12.74
15 - 19 168 8.99
20 - 24 118 6.32
25 - 29 150 8.03
30 - 34 117 6.26
285 | P a g e
35 - 39 112 6.00
40 - 44 89 4.76
45 - 49 83 4.44
50 - 54 82 4.39
55 - 59 65 3.48
60 - 64 60 3.21
65 - 69 34 1.82
70 - 74 24 1.28
75 - 79 15 0.80
TOTAL 1,868 100
Based on the household population by age group of the Municipality of Libjo (Table 66), the data
shows that the age group belonging to 5 – 9 years old has the highest percentage (12.40%), it is
similar to Barangay Bayanihan, San Antonio and General Aguinaldo. It is then followed by the age
group of 10 – 14 years old (11.92%), and age group of 1 – 4 years old (9.50%).
Table 66 - Household Population by Age Group and Sex, and Age Composition and Sex Ratio:
Municipality of Libjo, 2015
Age Composition
Age Group Both Sexes Male Female Sex Ratio
(%)
Under 1 404 235 169 2.28% 1.39:1
1-4 1,681 848 833 9.50% 1.02:1
5-9 2,194 1,132 1,062 12.40% 1.07:1
10 - 14 2,109 1,086 1,023 11.92% 1.06:1
15 - 19 1,577 832 745 8.91% 1.12:1
20 - 24 1,206 648 558 6.81% 1.16:1
25 - 29 1,255 641 614 7.09% 1.04:1
30 - 34 1,098 580 518 6.20% 1.12:1
35 - 39 1,005 529 476 5.68% 1.11:1
40 - 44 993 512 481 5.61% 1.06:1
45 - 49 944 509 435 5.33% 1.17:1
50 - 54 843 428 415 4.76% 1.03:1
55 - 59 652 331 321 3.68% 1:03:1
60 - 64 520 270 250 2.94% 1.08:1
286 | P a g e
Age Composition
Age Group Both Sexes Male Female Sex Ratio
(%)
65 - 69 461 216 245 2.60% 0.88:1
70 - 74 349 166 183 1.97% 0.91:1
75 - 79 236 119 117 1.33% 1.02:1
80 years and over 170 83 87 0.96% 0.95:1
TOTAL 17,697 9,165 8,532 100 1.07:1
The shape of the population pyramid of the Municipality of Libjo illustrates the population
distribution in the city and municipality and the pattern of fertility, mortality and migration trends
in the past. It also tells the past, present and future stories of the area. It also clearly reflects
workforce migration with the increase in the productive population and with a large portion of
economically active population.
Population Pyramid of Municipality of Libjo, 2015

80 years and over
75 - 79 years
70 - 74 years
65 - 69 years
60 - 64 years
55 - 59 years
50 - 54 years
45 - 49 years
40 - 44 years Age group of Females
35 - 39 years
30 - 34 years Age Group of Males
25 - 29 years
20 - 24 years
15 - 19 years
10 - 14 years
5 - 9 years
1 - 4 years
Under 1 year old
15 10 5 0 5 10 15
Figure 125 - Population Pyramid of Municipality of Libjo
2.4.1.2.3 Gender Ratio
In the Municipality there are 107 males per 100 females, it shows a balanced male to female sex
ratio.
287 | P a g e
2.4.1.2.4 Dependency Ratios
The populations belonging to the age group of 15-64 are economically productive and comprise
most of the work force in the area. While those belonging to the age groups of below 1 to age 15,
and the age groups of more than 65 years old are considered dependents. Dependency ratio is
the ratio of both age groups and is measure if there are sufficient numbers of people who can
support the dependent population.
In Barangay Bayanihan, 555 or 61% of the population belongs to the productive age group, age
group that have the capacity or ability to earned income, while 361 or 39% of the population are
dependents. Barangay San Jose has a population of 964 or 59% that have the capacity to earned
income, while 675 or 41% belongs to the dependent age group. (Table 67 ). 830 or 55% of the
population of Barangay Garcia have the capacity to earned income, while 667 or 45% are
dependents (Table 68). Barangay San Antonio has a population of 1,572 or 57% that belongs to
the age group that have the capacity to earned income, while 1,179 or 43% belong to the
dependent age group. Barangay General Aguinaldo has a population of 1,044 or 56% that have
the capacity to earned income, while 824 or 44% are dependents. Comparing to the Municipality
of Libjo, 10,093 or 57% of the population belong to productive age group while 6,388 or 43% are
dependents.
Table 67 - Dependency Ratio Barangay Bayanihan, Barangay San Jose and Municipality of
Libjo
Municipality of Libjo Barangay Bayanihan Barangay San Jose
Age Group Dependency Dependenc Dependency
No. No. No.
Ratio y Ratio Ratio
Working Age
10,093 555 964
(15 – 64 )
Dependent
7,604 75:100 361 65:100 675 70:100
Population
Young (0 – 14) 6,388 63:100 334 60:100 557 58:100
Old (65 and above) 1,216 12:100 27 5:100 118 12:100
288 | P a g e
Table 68 - Dependency Ratio Barangay Garcia, San Antonio and General Aguinaldo
Barangay General
Barangay Garcia Barangay San Antonio
Aguinaldo
Age Group
Dependency Dependenc Dependency
No. No. No.
Ratio y Ratio Ratio
Working Age
830 1,572 1,044
(15 – 64 )
Dependent
667 80:100 1,179 75:100 824 79:100
Population
Young (0 – 14) 556 67:100 1,027 65:100 737 71:100
Old (65 and above) 111 13:100 152 10:100 87 8:100
2.4.1.2.5 Reproductive Age
Women of reproductive age refer to all women in the group of 15 – 49 years old and are capable
of child bearing. In the Municipality, there are 3,827 or 45% of the total number of female
populations that can become pregnant. Given the high fertility rates of Filipino Women (3.5 births
per women), the age group of under 1 are apt to increase in the coming years.
2.4.1.2.6 Population Distribution and Density
Population density is a measurement of population living in a unit of area (square kilometers). It

is an indication if an area is overcrowded, and if the area has suitable capacity to provide for its
people. The average number of persons living in a square kilometer of land and in the Philippines
in 2020 is 363.
The total population density of Barangay Bayanihan is 43 persons per square kilometer of land,
given that there are 911 inhabitants in an area measuring 20.750 square kilometers, in Barangay
San Jose there is 81 persons per square kilometers for a land area of 21.180 square kilometers, in
Barangay San Antonio the number of persons per square kilometer is 141 for a land area of 14.525
square kilometers, in Barangay General Aguinaldo there is 120 persons per square kilometers, for
a land area of 17.667 square kilometers, while in the Municipality of Libjo, there is 99 persons per
square kilometers with a population of 18,051 and land area of 180.57 square kilometers.
Barangay Bayanihan is the least populated barangay compared to the rest of the barangays,
followed by Barangay San Jose, Garcia, San Antonio and General Aguinaldo. The population of the
impact barangays and the municipality is less than the national average.
289 | P a g e
Table 69 - Population Density of Impact Barangays and Municipality of Libjo, 2020

Population Density (No.
Land Area (square
Area 2020 Population of Persons per square
kilometers)
kilometers)
Barangay Bayanihan 911 20.750 43
Barangay San Jose 1,736 21.180 81
Barangay Garcia 1,656 14.525 114
Barangay San Antonio 2,789 19.702 141
Barangay General
2,128 17.667 120
Aguinaldo
Municipality of Libjo 18,051 180.57 99
2008 Comprehensive Land Use Plan, Municipality of Libjo
2.4.1.2.7 Average Household Size
The average household size is the number of persons residing within a household in a particular
area.
In Table 70, it shows the average household size of the Municipality. The Municipality averaged
to 1 household member. This is lower compared to the national average of 4.4 per household.
Table 70 - Number of Households and Average Household Size of Municipality of Libjo, 2015
2015 No. of
Average Household
Area 2015 Population Household
Member
Population
Municipality of Libjo 17,760 17,697 1.0
2.4.1.2.8 Other Demographic Information
2.4.1.2.8.1 Ethnicity
There are more than 10 ethnicities in Dinagat Island, majority of them are Bisaya/Binasaya
(54.41%), followed by Cebuano (21.35%), Surigaonon (7.75%) Boholano (7.32%), and Waray
(3.53%). Ethnicity reflects the migratory characteristics of the population of Dinagat. For the five
(5) barangays there is no detailed ethnic information.
290 | P a g e
Table 71 - Ethnicity in Dinagat Island, 2010

Dinagat Island
Ethnicity
No. %
Total 126,699
Bisaya/Binasaya 68,941 54.41
Cebuano 27,056 21.35
Surigaonon 9,818 7.75
Boholano 9,270 7.32
Waray 4,469 3.53
Hilagaynon, Ilonggo 1,913 1.51
Davaweño 924 0.73
Masbateño/Masbatenon 721 0.57
Tagalog 687 0.54
Zambageño-Chavacano 502 0.40
Bikol/Bicol 460 0.36
Ilocano 259 0.20
Subanen/Subanon/Subanun 169 0.13
Other Foreign Language/Ethnicity 23 0.02
Others 1,487 1.17
Source: 2010 Census of Population and Housing, National Statistics Office
2.4.1.2.8.2 Marital Status
Marital Status describes the individual’s stage of being married, single, widowed, divorced or live
in.The marital status of the Municipality (Table 72) shows that there are more number of males
that haven’t married. Of the household population of 10 and above, 38% were single, while 45%
are married, 11% are common law arranged, 4% are widowed and 1.20% are divorced or
separated. Among those never married 42% were males and 34% are females. There were 1.25%
of males that are divorced/separated and 1.14% of females. For the remaining categories, the
females outnumbered the males.
Table 72 - Household Population 10 Years Old and Over by Marital Status and Sex:
Both Sexes Male Female
Marital Status
No. % No. % No. %
Single 5,161 38 2,942 42 2,219 34
Married 6,037 45 3,007 43 3,030 47
291 | P a g e

Marital Status
No. % No. % No. %
Widowed 592 4 189 3 403 6
Divorced/Separated 161 1.20 87 1.25 74 1.14
Common-law/Live in 1,466 11 725 10 741 11
Unknown 1 0.01 - - 1 0.02
Total 13,418 100 6,950 52 6,468 48
2.4.1.2.8.3 Highest Educational Attainment
Educational attainment is a good indicator of well-being of a population and it also shows the
future trend for economic development. Young adults who have higher levels of education are
more likely to achieve economic success compared to those that have not. In addition to this,
completing more years of education protects against unemployment, leads to higher wages,
qualifies to a broader range of jobs and is also connected to higher levels of socio-economic as
well as socio-emotional well-being. It is also a good indicator of the gap between gender issues
for women.
In the Municipality (Table 73), for the population aged five years above, 47% had finished
elementary, 35% completed high school, 5% are college undergraduate, and 5% are academic
degree holder. The data also shows that most males had finished elementary (51%) comparing to
females (44%), there were also higher number of males in post – secondary (0.66%) in comparison
to 0.58% females. The females have outnumbered the males in other categories, except for post
baccalaureate, both males and females have the same number in terms of pursuing post
baccalaureate (0.05%).
Table 73 - Household Population 5 Years Old and Over by Highest Educational Attainment and
Sex: Municipality of Libjo, 2015
Highest Educational Both Sexes Male Female
Attainment No. % No. % No. %
No Grade
468 3 258 3 210 3
Completed
Pre-school 531 3 262 3 269 4
Special Education - - - - - -
Elementary 7,428 47 4,127 51 3,301 44
High School 5,552 35 2,728 34 2,824 37
292 | P a g e
Highest Educational Both Sexes Male Female

Attainment No. % No. % No. %
Post – Secondary 98 0.63 54 0.66 44 0.58
College
747 5 345 4 402 5
Undergraduate
Academic Degree
835 5 347 4 488 6
Holder
Post Baccalaureate 8 0.05 4 0.05 4 0.05
Not Stated 7 0.04 4 0.05 3 0.04
Total 15,674 100 8,129 52 7,545 48
2.4.1.2.8.4 Housing
The tenure status and type of housing reveals in part the economic status of households and the
quality of the people’s lives in general. Based on the data in the Municipality of Libjo (Table 74),
72% of the household owns or pay amortization, 23% are rent-free with the consent of owner,
2% rents their houses and, 1.35% are rent-free without the owner’s consent. Furthermore, 1,894
or 52% of the houses are made up of wood while 2,394 or 65% houses have galvanized
iron/aluminum roofs. (Table 75)
Table 74 - Number of Households by Tenure Status of the Lot: Municipality of Libjo, 2010
Number of Housing
Tenure Status of Lot %
Units
Owned/being amortized/owner-like 2,721 72
Rented 65 2
Rent-free with consent of owner 882 23
Rent-free without consent of owner 51 1.35
Not Applicable 56 1.48
Not Reported - -
Total 3,775 100
Table 75 - Occupied Housing Units by Construction Materials of the Roof and Outer Walls:
Construction Materials of the Outer Walls Total Occupied Housing Units
Concrete/Brick/Stone 655
Wood 1,894
293 | P a g e
Construction Materials of the Outer Walls Total Occupied Housing Units

Half Concrete/Brick/Stone/and Half Wood 487
Galvanized Iron/Aluminum 5
Bamboo/Sawali/Cogon/Nipa 576
Asbestos -
Glass -
Makeshift/Salvaged/Improvised Materials 32
Others 9
No walls 1
Not Reported 2
Total 3,661
Construction Materials of the Roof Total Occupied Housing Units
Galvanized Iron/Aluminum 2,394
Tile Concrete/Clay Tile 5
Half Galvanized Iron and Half Concrete 42
Wood 91
Cogon/Nipa/Anahaw 1,111
Asbestos -
Makeshift/Salvaged/Improvised Materials 18
Others -
Not Reported -
Total 3,661
2.4.1.2.9 Migration Pattern
2.4.1.2.9.1 In Migration
Migration patterns are directly associated with higher annual income as well as expenditures. In
migration pertains to the movement of people across a specific boundary for the purpose of
establishing permanent residence within the country.
Based on the data from the National Statistics Office in 2010, among 113,573 population of 5
years old and over, 97% were non-movers, they were those whose city/municipality of residence
in 2010 was the same as of 2005, 0.2% are short distance movers, 2% are long distance movers
while 0.06% migrated from other country.
294 | P a g e
Table 76 - Population 5 years and over by place of residence in 2005 by province of resident in
2010
Place of residence in 2005
Different Different
city but province
Same
Household population 5 same from
city/municipality Foreign
years and over province 2010 Unknown
2010 (non- Country
(short (long
movers)
distance distance
movers) movers)
Dinagat Island 113,573 110,377 296 2,828 72 -
Municipality
15,502 15,012 76 408 6 -
of Libjo
2.4.1.2.9.2 Out – Migration
Overseas Filipino workers comprise a portion of out-migrants in the Province of Dinagat Islands.
Based on the 2015, Census of Population, there are 952 OFW’s in the Province. The age range of
25 – 29 and 30 – 34 have both 22% of the total number. The females (56%) exceeded the number
of males (44%).
Table 77 - Overseas Workers 15 Years Old and Over by Age Group and Sex: Province of
Dinagat Islands, 2015
Age Group
No. % No. % No. %
Below 20 13 1 5 1 8 2
20 – 24 68 7 28 7 40 8
25 – 29 212 22 87 21 125 24
30 – 34 214 22 90 21 124 23
35 – 39 183 19 78 19 105 20
40 – 44 93 10 37 9 56 11
45 and
169 18 96 23 73 14
over
Total 952 100 421 44 531 56
295 | P a g e
2.4.1.2.10 Availability of Public Services
2.4.1.2.10.1 Health
In the Municipality of Libjo, there are 20 health facilities, it is composed of thirteen (13) health
centers, six (6) birthing centers and, one (1) District Hospital.
In 2021, there were 160 health workers in the municipality, consisting of one (1) doctor, seven (7)
nurses, one (1) medical technician, nine (9) midwives, one hundred twenty-five (125) Barangay
Health Workers (BHWs), and seventeen (17) Barangay Nutrition Scholars (BNS).
Morbidity refers to all illness or diseases of people. In 2021, upper respiratory tract infection had
the most number of cases, followed by hypertension, skin diseases and dental abscess.
Table 78 - Ten Leading Causes of Morbidity, 2021

Disease Number
Upper Respiratory Tract Infection 664
Hypertension 196
Skin Diseases 120
Dental Abscess 102
Acute Watery Diarrhea 76
Allergic Rhinitis 73
Urinary Tract Infection 64
Wound (All Types) 62
Fever of Unknown Origin 29
Acute Respiratory Infection 29
Gouty Arthritis 22
TOTAL 1,437
Source: 2021, Vital Health Statistics of Municipality of Libjo
Mortality refers to the incidence of death or the number of deaths in a population. As of the 2021
Vital Statistics of the municipality, acute myocardial infarction, cerebrovascular accident, multi –
organ failure, cardiorespiratory arrest/respiratory failure and chronic renal failure are the top five
leading causes in the municipality.
296 | P a g e
Table 79 - Leading Causes of Mortality, 2021

Disease Number
Acute Myocardial Infarction 30
Cerebrovascular Accident 20
Multi-organ Failure 17
Cardiorespiratory Arrest / Respiratory Failure 15
Chronic Renal Failure 11
Cancer (Breast, lungs, liver) 9
Congestive Heart Failure 4
Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease 3
Drowning (Sea Water) 3
Sepsis 3
Far Advanced Pulmonary Tuberculosis 2
Aplastic Anemia 1
Severe Head Injury Secondary to Motor
1
Vehicular Accident
Acute Gastroenteritis with Severe
1
Dehydration
Diabetes Mellitus Type 2 1
Acute Pancreatitis 1
Severe Malnutrition 1
Bleeding Peptic Ulcer Disease 1
Severe Pneumonia (Covid-19 Positive) 1
TOTAL 125
Source: 2021, Vital Health Statistics of Municipality of Libjo
2.4.1.2.10.2 Sanitation
Based on the 2021 data from the Municipality, there were 3,810 households with sanitary toilet
and 721 households without sanitary toilet.
2.4.1.2.10.3 Education
Table 80 shows the household population of the municipality who are currently attending school
in 2015. The total household population for age 5 – 24 is 7,086 individuals. This is 40% of the
total household population of the municipality. Out of the total number only 5,289 or 75% of
the age group are currently attending school.
297 | P a g e
Table 80 - Household Population 5 to 24 Years Old Who Were Currently Attending School by
Age Group and Sex: Municipality of Libjo, 2015
Household Population 5 to 24 Years
Household Population 5 to 24 Years
Old Who Were Currently Attending
Age Group Old
School
Both Sexes Male Female Both Sexes Male Female
5–9 2,194 1,132 1,062 2,115 1,084 1,031
10 – 14 2,109 1,086 1,023 2,061 1,058 1,003
15 – 19 1,577 832 745 986 528 458
20 – 24 1,206 648 558 127 58 69
Total 7,086 3,698 3,388 5,289 2,728 2,561
Based on the Compact Socio-economic Profile of the Municipality there are twenty-four (24)
schools, in which seventeen (17) are elementary schools, and seven (7) are high schools.
There are currently 29 existing day care centers in the municipality, in which, there are also 29
attending day care teachers.
2.4.1.2.10.4 Peace and Order
The law and order of the municipality is maintained by the Philippine National Police. There is
one (1) police station in the municipality. And there were barangay tanods assigned in their
designated barangay.
2.4.1.2.11 Public Utilities and Infrastructures
2.4.1.2.11.1 Water Supply Services
The water supply from the municipality is sourced by groundwater. There were also several
water refilling stations.
2.4.1.2.11.2 Power Supply Services
The power supply of the municipality and some of its barangays are supplied by Dinagat Island
Electric Cooperative (DIELCO) while others are supplied by solar energy as installed by the Solar
Community Island Tourism and Livelihood Energizer Platform (SMILE) project.
298 | P a g e
2.4.1.2.11.3 Communication Facilities
In 2008, based on Community-Based Monitoring System of Libjo, there were currently two (2)
cell sites and 1 TV/Cable Stations. There were also 24 households that have the convenience of
the telephone.
2.4.1.2.11.4 Transport Facilities
In 2015, there is a total of 1,829,753 newly registered vehicles, and 6,581,470 registered vehicles
for renewal recorded in the Philippines. In Region 13, there is 503 new registered vehicles and
4,488 vehicles for renewal. For the utility vehicle there is s 1,374 that is newly registered and
28,751 for renewal.
Table 81 - Number of Registered Vehicles by Region, 2015

Cars Utility Vehicles
New Renewal New Renewal
Region 13 503 4,488 1,374 28,751
Source: 2015, Land Transportation Office
2.4.1.2.11.5 Port Facilities
The port in San Jose Dinagat, is the main port in the Province, this caters the residents of the
Province of Dinagat Islands to Surigao and vice-versa. In the Municipality of Libjo there is one
(1) port facility, located in Barangay Albor, the travel time from Surigao to Albor will take 3 hours.
As of the 2018 data from the Philippine Port Authority, there are 10 private port facilities in
Surigao.
The project proposes to construct a causeway for ore shipment purposes. The construction and
operation of the said component will not affect seatraffic situation since only 1 barge per
shipment will be utilized.
2.4.1.2.11.6 Road Network System
The roads in Dinagat Islands are classified as secondary and tertiary, based on the data from the
Road and Bridge Information Application database, the total length of concrete road in the
island is 100.06 km, and the road with gravel pavement have a length of 2.15 km.
299 | P a g e
Table 82 - Total Length of road by Type of Pavement, Dinagat Islands; 2021

Category Length (km) %
Asphalt - -
Gravel 2.15 2.10
Concrete 100.06 97.90
Unpaved - -
Total 102.21 100
Source: 2021, Road and Bridge Information Application, DPWH-Region XIII
2.4.1.2.11.7 Bridge
There were 40 permanent bridges in Dinagat Islands, with a total length of 749 linear meters.
There were 35 bridges that were made of concrete with a length of 617 linear meters, and 5
bridges made of steel with a length of 132 linear meters.
Table 83 - Total Length and Number of National bridges by Type of Pavement, Dinagat Islands
2021
Category Number Length (lm)
Concrete 35 617
Steel 5 132
Total 40 749
Source: 2021, Road and Bridge Information Application, DPWH-Region XIII
Based on the 2008 Comprehensive Land Use Plan of Libjo, there is a total of 117 bridges in the
municipality with a total length of 136.383 km, in which 3 of them are national bridges, 2 are
provincial bridges, 11 are municipal bridges and 101 are barangay bridges.
Table 84 - Bridges by Type of Administration, Municipality of Libjo; 2008

Type of Administration Number Length (km)
National 3 33.800
Provincial 2 7.000
Municipal 11 8.011
Barangay 101 87.572
Total 117 136.383
Source: MPDO, Municipal Engineering Office
300 | P a g e
2.4.1.2.11.8 Airport
The province of Dinagat does not have its own airport facilities, it utilizes the facilities of Surigao
Airport and Bancasi Airport in Butuan City.
2.4.1.2.12 Socio-Economic Information
2.4.1.2.12.1 Employment Profile
The total number of employed or gainful workers in the municipality in 2015 is 6,614 individuals
(Table 85). Out of all the occupations, skilled agricultural forestry and fishery workers and
elementary occupations have the most number of employed workers, 4,206 or 64% of all
employed workers 15 years old and above. The remaining 36% performs tasks or employed in
different areas such as managers, professionals, technicians and associate professionals, clerical
support workers, service and sales workers, craft and related trades workers, plant and machine
operators and assemblers, armed forces occupation and others.
The data also shows that males have more opportunities than females. In 2015, 4,947 males are
employed in comparison to 1,667 females. 75% of all major occupations go to the males. Skilled
agricultural forestry and fishery workers, grow and harvest field or tree and shrub crops, gather
wild fruits and plants, breed, tend or hunt animals, produce a variety of animals husbandry
products, cultivate and exploit forests, breed or catch fish and cultivate or gather other forms
of aquatic life in order to provide the needs of their households. The tasks performed by the
skilled agricultural and fishery workers usually includes preparing the soil, sowing, planting,
spraying, fertilizing and harvesting field crops, this was just some of the many tasks performed
by the skilled agricultural and fishery workers. They number about 2,639 or 40% of the total
number of gainful workers. Elementary occupations consist of simple routine tasks that require
the use of hand-held tools and often some physical effort. The tasks include, selling goods in
streets and public places or door to door, providing street services such as cleaning, washing,
pressing, caretakers of apartments, cleaners of hotel, offices and other buildings, delivering
messages and simple farming, fishing and hunting among others. In the city, they have a number
of 1,544 or 23% of the total number of gainful workers 15 years old and above.
301 | P a g e
Table 85 - Gainful Workers 15 Years Old and Above by Major Occupation Group and Sex:
Total Gainful Workers
Major Occupation Group
15 Years Old and Over
6,614 4,947 1,667
Managers 384 129 255
Professionals 243 75 168
Technicians and Associate Professionals 188 103 85
Clerical Support Workers 134 70 64
Service and Sales Workers 549 243 306
Skilled Agricultural Forestry and Fishery
2,662 2,369 293
Workers
Craft and Related Trades Workers 440 417 23
Plant and Machine Operators and
458 448 10
Assemblers
Elementary Occupation 1,544 1,087 457
Armed Forces Occupations 4 3 1
Other Occupation Not Elsewhere
- - -
Classified
Not Reported 8 3 5
2.4.1.2.12.2 Poverty Incidence
The annual monthly per capita poverty threshold is the measure o the minimum income for an
individual to meet his/her basic needs. These include food, clothing, housing, transportation,
health and education expenses. In the Province of Dinagat, the minimum income is pegged at
P2,200 monthly or P26,409 yearly in 2018 (Table 86). This shows that an individual in the
Province of Dinagat must earn P2,200 or higher to meet the basic needs of their family.
Table 86 - Annual Monthly Per Capita Poverty Threshold, Province of Dinagat Islands
All areas
Year
Annual (Pesos) Monthly (Pesos)
2015 24,257 2,021
2018 26,409 2,200
302 | P a g e
Poverty incidence is the proportion of families with income less than or below the poverty
threshold Table 87 shows that in the Province of Dinagat Islands there is a threshold of 26.6
which means for every 100 families in the province, 26 are considered poor and doesn’t meet
the basic needs of the family.
Table 87 - Poverty Incidence, 2015 and 2018

2015 2018
Province of Dinagat Islands 34.6 26.6
Source: 2018, Updated Official Poverty Statistics of the Philippines, Philippine Statistics Authority
2.4.2 Perception Survey
2.4.2.1 Methodology
In compliance with the provisions of DENR Administrative Order No. 2017-05 or the “Guidelines
on Public Participation under the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) System”, an
Initial Perception Survey was conducted in October to November, 2021.
The Barangays covered in this study are those considered as direct impact areas when the
proposed project ensues its operation. These include Barangay Bayanihan, San Jose, Garcia, San
Antonio and General Aguinaldo in the Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands. The Initial
Perception Survey was focused on the said five Barangays. A total of 294 respondents in the five
barangays were surveyed representing the households and the institutional leaders and industrial
entities in the barangay.
A total of two hundred ninety-four (294) individuals participated in the Perception Survey from
the selected purok of the 5 Barangays. Purposive sampling was used in identifying the survey
respondents. Community leaders, representatives from institutional and industrial entities,
homeowners and purok leaders, as well as random residents, were selected.
Using Slovin’s Formula8, based on 916 number of households from Barangay Bayanihan, Barangay
San Jose (1,639 households), Barangay Garcia (1,497 households), Barangay San Antonio (2,751
households), and Barangay General Aguinaldo (1,868 households), a total of 68 is the suggested
target sample size for the perception survey. This means 68 or more measurements/surveys are
needed to have a confidence level of 90% that the real value is within ±10% of the
measured/surveyed value.
8
https://www.hotjar.com/poll-survey-sample-size-calculator
303 | P a g e
The survey questionnaire was divided into seven (7) major components: (1) Personal Information;
(2) Household Information; (3) Housing Condition; (4) Health Information; (5) Perceived
Community Problems and Proposed Solutions; and (6) Awareness and Acceptability on the
Proposed Project of Stagno Mining Corporation (SMC). The survey form used is attached as
Annex.
2.4.2.2 Perception Survey Result
2.4.2.2.1 Profile of Survey Respondents
2.4.2.2.1.1 Gender
The table below (Table 88) shows the gender of the survey respondents. The majority of the
respondents are female with 175 of 294 or 59.52% of the total respondents. Male comprise 119
or 40.48% of the total respondents.
Table 88 - Gender of the Survey Respondents

Gen.
Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
GENDER Aguinaldo
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Male 95 53.37% 20 71.43% 15 46.88% 25 86.21% 20 74.07% 175 59.52%
Female 83 46.63% 8 28.57% 17 53.13% 4 13.79% 7 25.93% 119 40.48%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
GENDER
40.48% Female
59.52%
Male
Figure 126 - Distribution of Respondents based on Gender
304 | P a g e
2.4.2.2.1.2 Birthplace
The majority of the total respondents were born within the Barangays of Bayanihan, Garcia, Gen.
Aguinaldo, San Antonio and San Jose with 41.50% of the total respondents. There were 24.83%
and 22.45% of the respondents who were born from other provinces and from other barangay,
respectively. Lastly, the 11.22% of the respondents were from other City/Municipality.
Table 89 - Birthplace of Survey Respondents

Gen.
BIRTHPLACE Aguinaldo
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Within Barangay 70 39.33% 12 42.86% 11 34.38% 14 48.28% 15 55.56% 122 41.50%
Other Barangay 51 28.65% 4 14.29% 3 9.38% 5 17.24% 3 11.11% 66 22.45%
Other
22 12.36% 1 3.57% 6 18.75% 2 6.90% 2 7.41% 33 11.22%
City/Municipality
Other Province 35 19.66% 11 39.29% 12 37.50% 8 27.59% 7 25.93% 73 24.83%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
BIRTHPLACE
22.45%
41.50% Other Barangay
11.22% Other City/Municipality
Other Province
24.83%
Within Barangay
Figure 127 - Distribution of Respondents based on Place of Birth
2.4.2.2.1.3 Age
Table 90 shows the age distribution of the respondents. Most number of respondents are in their
productive age, meaning, they are still able to work for paid employment optimally, with 23.81%
under the age group of 31-40 years of age. This was followed by age bracket of 41-50 (21.09%),
age group 21-30 (19.39%) and age group 51-60 (15.99%). There were 8.84% from 61-70 years old
305 | P a g e
and 3.74% from the age bracket of 71 and above. Lastly, younger age group of 15-20 were 2.04%,
while 5.10% of the respondents refused to give an answer.
Table 90 - Age of Survey Respondents

Gen.
AGE Aguinaldo
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
15-20 3 1.69% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 2 6.90% 1 3.70% 6 2.04%
21-30 43 24.16% 1 3.57% 6 18.75% 4 13.79% 3 11.11% 57 19.39%
31-40 37 20.79% 6 21.43% 15 46.88% 5 17.24% 7 25.93% 70 23.81%
41-50 36 20.22% 9 32.14% 5 15.63% 2 6.90% 10 37.04% 62 21.09%
51-60 27 15.17% 6 21.43% 2 6.25% 10 34.48% 2 7.41% 47 15.99%
61-70 18 10.11% 3 10.71% 2 6.25% 1 3.45% 2 7.41% 26 8.84%
71
above 6 3.37% 1 3.57% 1 3.13% 2 6.90% 1 3.70% 11 3.74%
No
Answer 8 4.49% 2 7.14% 1 3.13% 3 10.34% 1 3.70% 15 5.10%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
AGE
5.10%
2.04% 15-20
3.74%
21-30
8.84% 19.39% 31-40
41-50
15.99%
51-60
23.81%
61-70
21.09% 71 above
No Answer
Figure 128 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Age
2.4.2.2.1.4 Civil Status
Table 91 shows the civil status of the respondents. About 75.85% of the respondents confirmed
that they are Married, while 9.52% of the respondents were widowed. There were 7.48% of the
306 | P a g e
respondents who were single and 3.40% respondents were separated. This only shows that the
community holds marriage as an important social institution.
Table 91 - Civil Status of Survey Respondents

Gen.
CIVIL Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
STATUS
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Single 9 5.06% 3 10.71% 3 9.38% 1 3.45% 6 22.22% 22 7.48%
Married 139 78.09% 21 75.00% 28 87.50% 22 75.86% 13 48.15% 223 75.85%
Widow 19 10.67% 2 7.14% 0 0.00% 3 10.34% 4 14.81% 28 9.52%
Separated 7 3.93% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.45% 2 7.41% 10 3.40%
No
Answer 4 2.25% 2 7.14% 1 3.13% 2 6.90% 2 7.41% 11 3.74%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
CIVIL STATUS
7.48%
9.52%
3.40% Married
3.74% No Answer
Separated
75.85% Single
Widow
Figure 129 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Civil Status
2.4.2.2.1.5 Religion
The religion of the majority respondents (61.56%) were Catholic. Members of other denomination
were 16.67%, followed by Born Again with 9.86% of the respondents. Iglesia ni Cristo and
Protestant have the same percentage of 0.68, as well as the Islam/Muslim, Filipinista and 7 th Day
Adventist with the percentage of 0.34. The remaining percentage (6.46%) of the respondents
refused to divulge its religious affiliation.
307 | P a g e
Table 92 - Religion of Survey Respondents

Gen.
RELIGION Aguinaldo
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Aglipayan 7 3.93% 0 0.00% 2 6.25% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 9 3.06%
Born
25 14.04% 1 3.57% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 3 11.11% 29 9.86%
Again
Iglesia ni
0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.45% 1 3.70% 2 0.68%
Cristo
Islam/
0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.70% 1 0.34%
Muslim
Catholic 115 64.61% 17 60.71% 13 40.63% 17 58.62% 19 70.37% 181 61.56%
Protestant 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.45% 1 3.70% 2 0.68%
Filipinista 1 0.56% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 0.34%
7th day
1 0.56% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 0.34%
Adventist
Others 17 9.55% 6 21.43% 16 50.00% 9 31.03% 1 3.70% 49 16.67%
No
12 6.74% 4 14.29% 1 3.13% 1 3.45% 1 3.70% 19 6.46%
Answer
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
RELIGION
0.34%
3.06% 7th Day Adventist
0.68%
Aglipayan
6.46% 9.86%
16.67% Born Again
0.34%
Catholic
0.68% Filipinista
0.34% Iglesia ni Cristo
Islam/ Muslim
61.56%
No Answer
Others
Protestant
Figure 130 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Religion
308 | P a g e
2.4.2.2.1.6 Educational Attainment
Most of respondents had formal education they acquired from community schools, and majority
of them, 35.37%, attended Elementary education. This is higher than those who have attained
High School (20.75%). About 17.01% and 14.97% of the respondents graduated in Elementary and
High School, respectively. The 5.10% were those have reached College, while 4.08% of the
respondents have graduated in College. Some of the respondents were able to attend Vocational
courses (0.34%), however, 0.68% said they were unable to attend school. Nevertheless, this only
shows that most of the respondents are literate and were able to acquire basic education.
Table 93 - Educational Attainment of Survey Respondents

Gen.
EDUCATIONAL Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
ATTAINMENT
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Elementary 81 45.51% 8 28.57% 9 28.13% 1 3.45% 5 18.52% 104 35.37%
Elementary
32 17.98% 2 7.14% 4 12.50% 5 17.24% 7 25.93% 50 17.01%
Graduate
High School 26 14.61% 7 25.00% 11 34.38% 8 27.59% 9 33.33% 61 20.75%
High School
24 13.48% 7 25.00% 4 12.50% 7 24.14% 2 7.41% 44 14.97%
Graduate
College 4 2.25% 0 0.00% 2 6.25% 7 24.14% 2 7.41% 15 5.10%
College
6 3.37% 3 10.71% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 2 7.41% 12 4.08%
Graduate
Vocational 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 0.34%
Unschooled 2 1.12% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 2 0.68%
Others 2 1.12% 1 3.57% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 3 1.02%
No Answer 1 0.56% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.45% 0 0.00% 2 0.68%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
309 | P a g e
EDUCATIONAL ATTAINMENT
0.34%
0.68% College
1.02% 5.10%
College Graduate
0.68% 4.08% Elementary
14.97%
Elementary Graduate
High School
20.75% 35.37%
High School Graduate
No Answer
Others
17.01%
Unschooled
Vocational
Figure 131 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Educational Attainment
2.4.2.2.1.7 Income Sources and Employment
More than half or 57.14% of the respondents were employed or have income sources, while
31.63% have no source of income. The 21.26% of the respondents are Farmers, followed by
Fisherman with 19.38 of the total respondents. Barangay Official / Government with 7.81% of the
total respondents. The 2.50% are Self Employed or Entrepreneurs and have different income
sources. Comprising 4.70% of the total respondents, some were employed in private companies,
works in construction and factory and service workers.
Table 94- Income Source of Survey Respondents

Gen.
SOURCE OF Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
INCOME
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Farmer 26 13.54% 13 41.94% 13 37.14% 9 28.13% 8 26.67% 69 21.56%
Fisherman 58 30.21% 1 3.23% 2 5.71% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 62 19.38%
Barangay
Official /
12 6.25% 4 12.90% 2 5.71% 6 18.75% 1 3.33% 25 7.81%
Gov’t
Employee
Private
2 1.04% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.33% 3 0.94%
Employee
Self-Employed/
4 2.08% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 3 10.00% 8 2.50%
Entrepreneur
310 | P a g e
Gen.
SOURCE OF Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
INCOME
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Works in
Construction 3 1.56% 0 0.00% 2 5.71% 0 0.00% 1 3.33% 6 1.88%
and Factory
Service Worker 2 1.04% 0 0.00% 2 5.71% 1 3.13% 1 3.33% 6 1.88%
Others 3 1.56% 1 3.23% 1 2.86% 0 0.00% 3 10.00% 8 2.50%
No Answer 82 42.71% 12 38.71% 13 37.14% 14 43.75% 12 40.00% 133 41.56%
Total 192 100.00% 31 100.00% 35 100.00% 32 100.00% 30 100.00% 320 100.00%
Note: Multiple answers – some respondents have two source of income
SOURCE OF INCOME
1.88% 2.50%
1.88% 7.81%
21.56%
2.50%
0.94%
19.38%
41.56%
Farmer Fisherman
No Answer Private Employee
Self-Employed/ Entrepreneur Service Worker
Works in Construction and Factory Barangay Official /Gov’t Employee
Others
Figure 132 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Source of Income
2.4.2.2.1.8 Monthly Income
The table below (Table 95) shows that the majority (32.99%) of the respondents were earning
between Php 1,000 and 5,000, while there were 22.11% that earns less than Php 1,000. There
were 13.95% of the respondents that has an income of Php 5,001 to 10,000 and about 2.38%
earns between Php 10,001 and 15,000. About 1.70% have an income of Php 15,001 to 20,000,
while only 1.02% of the total respondents earns over Php 20,001. The large discrepancy in the
monthly family income affects the people’s prevalent purchasing power and would have some
implications to the socio-economic status, either they would try to find a good paying job or
maybe engage in an enterprise.
311 | P a g e
Table 95 - Estimated Monthly Income of Survey Respondents

Gen.
MOTHLY Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
INCOME
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Less than
42 23.60% 11 39.29% 3 9.38% 5 17.24% 4 14.81% 65 22.11%
1,000
1,000-
54 30.34% 2 7.14% 18 56.25% 16 55.17% 7 25.93% 97 32.99%
5,000
5,001-
27 15.17% 6 21.43% 3 9.38% 2 6.90% 3 11.11% 41 13.95%
10,000
10,001-
3 1.69% 1 3.57% 1 3.13% 2 6.90% 0 0.00% 7 2.38%
15,000
15,001-
2 1.12% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 2 7.41% 5 1.70%
20,000
20,001
3 1.69% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 3 1.02%
above
No
47 26.40% 8 28.57% 6 18.75% 4 13.79% 11 40.74% 76 25.85%
Answer
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
MONTHY INCOME
1,000 – 5,000
25.85% 32.99% 10,001 – 15,000
15,001 – 20,000
20,001 above
22.11%
5,001 – 10,000
13.95% 2.38% Less than 1,000
1.70% No Answer
1.02%
Figure 133 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Monthly Income
2.4.2.2.1.9 Membership to Organization
Majority of the respondents do not belong to an Organization in their community with 46.60% of
the total respondents. On the other hand, majority of the active members belong to Bayanihan
312 | P a g e
Farmers Association, Farmers, Dinagat Island Coconut Farmers’, Bolod-bolod Farmers

Association, Cooperative and Bayanihan Fisherfolks Organization (BANFA). Below are the
identified organizations (Table 97).
Table 96 - Organization of Survey Respondents

MEMBERSHIP Gen.
TO Aguinaldo
ORGANIZATION No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Organization
79 44.38% 16 57.14% 12 37.50% 15 51.72% 7 25.93% 129 43.88%
Member
Not an
Organization 92 51.69% 7 25.00% 14 43.75% 8 27.59% 16 59.26% 137 46.60%
Member
No Answer 7 3.93% 5 17.86% 6 18.75% 6 20.69% 4 14.81% 28 9.52%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
MEMBERSHIP TO ORGANIZATION
9.52%
43.88%
No Answer
Not an Organization Member
46.60% Organization Member
Figure 134 - Distribution of Respondents based on Organization
Table 97 - Identified Organizations

Community Organization Number of Respondents
B.P.T.S 1
Bayanihan Fisherfolks Organization (BANFA) 15
BFA- BAYANIHAN FARMERS ASSOCIATION /
34
FARMERS / DINAGAT ISLAND COCONUT
313 | P a g e
Community Organization Number of Respondents

FARMERS COOPERATIVE / BOLOD BOLOD
FARMERS ASSOCIATION / DINAGAT ISLAND
COCONUT FARMERS COOPERATIVE
BHW 1
BMMMA 9
BWA-BAYANIHAN WOMEN ASSOCIATION 3
COOPERATIVE 4
DISFARBA 1
ES SCB WOMEN 1
GAIFA LABOR ASSOCIATION 1
GARCIA CASAWA PLANTERS 1
GARCIA EVEQATIVS 1
IA 2
KUDCURAN GARCIA IRRIGATION
ASSOCIATION 3
LIBJO DRIVER OPERATOR MOTORIST
ASSOCIATION 1
LIVELIHOOD 1
MALAY 1
Maytubig Women's Association (MAWA)/
Food Processing 3
SENIOR CITIZEN 4
SLP 2
SLYO 1
WOMENS ASSOCIATION / COOPERATIVE /
SARI-SARI STORE / WOMENS FISHERFOLKS / 46
SAN ANTONIO WOMENS ASSOC
2.4.2.2.2 Household Information
2.4.2.2.2.1 Household Size
Most of the respondents (39.46%) belong to 3 to 4 household size, followed by those who had 5
to 6 household size (27.21%). Almost fifteen percent (14.635) of the respondents belong a
relatively small household size of 1 to 2 and 11.22% belong to 7 to 8 household size. Finally, 4.08%
314 | P a g e
have 9 to 10 household size and only two (2) or 0.68% of the respondents belong to more than
10 members per household.
Table 98 - Household Size of Survey Respondents

Gen.
HOUSEHOLD Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
SIZE
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
1–2 30 16.85% 2 7.14% 2 6.25% 6 20.69% 3 11.11% 43 14.63%
3–4 79 44.38% 10 35.71% 9 28.13% 8 27.59% 10 37.04% 116 39.46%
5–6 48 26.97% 8 28.57% 8 25.00% 7 24.14% 9 33.33% 80 27.21%
7–8 16 8.99% 4 14.29% 5 15.63% 6 20.69% 2 7.41% 33 11.22%
9 – 10 3 1.69% 1 3.57% 6 18.75% 1 3.45% 1 3.70% 12 4.08%
10 above 1 0.56% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 2 0.68%
No Answer 1 0.56% 3 10.71% 1 3.13% 1 3.45% 2 7.41% 8 2.72%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
Household Size of Respondents

2.72%
4.08%
0.68% 1–2
11.22% 14.63%
10 above
3–4
5–6
27.21%
39.46% 7–8
9 – 10
No Answer
Figure 135 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Household Size
2.4.2.2.2.2 Morbidity
Table 99 shows the number of household members that got sick in the last year. One hundred
thirty-five or 45.92% of the respondents claimed that one of their family members experienced
illness and twenty four (24) or 8.16% of them replied that two of their family members also got
sick last year. There were 3.40% answered that three (3) members of their family got ill, followed
by 1.70% of the total respondents who said that four (4) members of their family got sick. About
1.36% claimed that five (5) members of their family experienced illness last year, while only three
(3) or 1.02% of the respondents have more than six (6) members of the family that got sick.
315 | P a g e
Table 99 - Household Member of the Survey Respondents who Experienced Illness

Gen.
MORBIDITY Aguinaldo
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
1 92 51.69% 8 28.57% 10 31.25% 17 58.62% 8 29.63% 135 45.92%
2 12 6.74% 6 21.43% 3 9.38% 1 3.45% 2 7.41% 24 8.16%
3 6 3.37% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 3 11.11% 10 3.40%
4 4 2.25% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 5 1.70%
5 2 1.12% 1 3.57% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 4 1.36%
More than
6 1 0.56% 2 7.14% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 3 1.02%
No Answer 61 34.27% 11 39.29% 16 50.00% 11 37.93% 14 51.85% 113 38.44%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
MORBIDITY
1
38.44% 2
45.92%
3
5
8.16% More than 6
1.02%
No Answer
1.36%
1.70% 3.40%
Figure 136. Number of Household Members of the Respondents that got sick
2.4.2.2.2.3 Common Diseases
Table 100 shows the common community diseases in the Barangays of Bayanihan, Garcia, Gen.
Aguinaldo, San Antonio and San Jose. Fever tops as the leading cause of morbidity with 70 cases
(43.21%) and followed by the Upper Respiratory with 36 cases (22.22%). The rest of the common
diseases are listed below.
316 | P a g e
Table 100 - Common Diseases of the Respondents in the Community

Gen.
ILLNESS Aguinaldo
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Diarrhea 12 14.29% 1 6.25% 1 3.85% 1 5.56% 1 5.56% 16 9.88%
Fever 35 41.67% 8 50.00% 14 53.85% 4 22.22% 9 50.00% 70 43.21%
Upper
17 20.24% 1 6.25% 9 34.62% 6 33.33% 3 16.67% 36 22.22%
Respiratory
Other 16 19.05% 6 37.50% 2 7.69% 7 38.89% 4 22.22% 35 21.60%
Asthma 1 1.19% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 0.62%
Colds 1 1.19% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 5.56% 2 1.23%
Ulcer 1 1.19% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 0.62%
UTI 1 1.19% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 0.62%
Total 84 100.00% 16 100.00% 26 100.00% 18 100.00% 18 100.00% 162 100.00%
*Note: Multiple answers allowed
COMMON ILLNESS
0.62%
1.23%
Cold
9.88% Diarrhea
22.22%
Fever
0.62%
Highblood
21.60% 43.21% Other

Ulcer
Upper Respiratory
UTI
0.62%
Figure 137 - Distribution of Respondents based on Experienced Illness
2.4.2.2.2.4 Health Seeking Behavior
Table 101 shows the health seeking behavior of the respondents. Most of the respondents
(47.96%) availed of Barangay Health Center for treatment. Fifty or 22.62% of the respondents
prefer to be treated at their homes, while 24 respondents or 10.86% opted to be treated in the
Public Hospital, and bout 7.69% prefer to be treated by the Traditional Healer. Comprising 10.4%
of the total respondents, some prefer to be treated by the Private Clinic and Hospital.
317 | P a g e
Table 101 - Health Facilities and Providers accessed by the Survey Respondents
Gen.
HEALTH Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
FACILITY
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
House /
Self 29 20.71% 9 45.00% 5 25.00% 5 20.83% 2 11.76% 50 22.62%
Medication
Health
75 53.57% 6 30.00% 8 40.00% 10 41.67% 7 41.18% 106 47.96%
Center
Public
11 7.86% 4 20.00% 5 25.00% 1 4.17% 3 17.65% 24 10.86%
Hospital
Private
4 2.86% 1 5.00% 0 0.00% 5 20.83% 0 0.00% 10 4.52%
Hospital
Private
13 9.29% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 13 5.88%
Clinic
Herbalist 8 5.71% 0 0.00% 2 10.00% 3 12.50% 4 23.53% 17 7.69%
Others 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 5.88% 1 0.45%
Total 140 100.00% 20 100.00% 20 100.00% 24 100.00% 17 100.00% 221 100.00%
HEALTH FACILITY
4.52%
5.88% 10.86% Health Center

0.45% Herbalist
47.96% House / Self Medication
Others
22.62% Private Clinic
Private Hospital
7.69%
Public Hospital
Figure 138 - Distribution of Respondents based on the Health Facilities and Providers
318 | P a g e
2.4.2.2.2.5 Waste Disposal
Data presented in Table 102 shows the type of waste disposal of the survey respondents. Majority
or 47.28% disposes their garbage through their own garbage pits. There were 45.24% of them
said they disposes their garbage through collection of the Local Government and some of the
respondents (2.72%) uses different types of disposals.
Table 102 - Waste Disposal of Survey Respondents

Gen.
WASTE Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
DISPOSAL
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Garbage
Pit 131 73.60% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 2 6.90% 6 35.29% 139 47.28%
Garbage
Collection 32 17.98% 27 96.43% 28 87.50% 25 86.21% 21 123.53% 133 45.24%
Others 5 2.81% 1 3.57% 1 3.13% 1 3.45% 0 0.00% 8 2.72%
No
Answer 10 5.62% 0 0.00% 3 9.38% 1 3.45% 0 0.00% 14 4.76%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 158.82% 294 100.00%
2.72%
WASTE DISPOSAL
4.76%
Garbage Collection
45.24%
Garbage Pit
No Answer
47.28%
Others
Figure 139 - Distribution of Respondents based on Waste Disposal
2.4.2.2.2.6 Sources of Drinking Water
Table 103 shows the sources of potable drinking water of the household surveyed. 42.52% of the
respondents sourced their drinking water from the Spring, while 35.37% of households’ primary
319 | P a g e
source of clean drinking water is through the Local Water District. About 10.88% of the
respondents use water from other sources, 2.38% said that the source of their drinking water is
through Refilling Station and lastly 2.04% of the respondents sourced their water from deep wells.
Table 103 - Sources of Drinking Water of Survey Respondents

SOURCE Gen.
OF Aguinaldo
DRINKING
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
WATER
Spring 106 59.55% 9 32.14% 0 0.00% 3 10.34% 7 41.18% 125 42.52%
Deep Well 4 2.25% 0 0.00% 2 6.25% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 6 2.04%
Local
Water 22 12.36% 14 50.00% 30 93.75% 20 68.97% 18 105.88% 104 35.37%
District
Bottled
Water /
3 1.69% 1 3.57% 0 0.00% 3 10.34% 0 0.00% 7 2.38%
Refilling
Station
Others 32 17.98% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 32 10.88%
No
11 6.18% 4 14.29% 1 3.13% 3 10.34% 2 11.76% 21 7.14%
Answer
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 158.82% 294 100.00%
SOURCES OF DRINKING WATER

2.37% 2.03%
Bottled Water/ Refilling
Station
Deep well
42.37%
35.25% Local Water District
No Answer
Others
7.12%
10.85%
Spring
Figure 140 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Sources of Drinking Water
320 | P a g e
2.4.2.2.2.7 Toilets
Table 104 shows the sanitation and hygiene practices of the respondents. Most of the
respondents (79.59%) have their own Water-Sealed Toilet, however, there 13.27% of the
respondents answered that they do not have their own toilet. About 2.72% of the respondents
have toilet facility with flush mechanism and there are 6 or 2.04% of the respondents who dispose
their human waste through hole on the ground. Furthermore, only 0.68% of the respondents who
said that they have other means to dispose their human waste. It is important to note that
unsanitary practices can eventually contaminate land and water sources thus increasing the risk
infection and disease in the community.
Table 104 - Sanitation and Toilet of the Survey Respondents

SANITATION Gen.
AND Aguinaldo
TOILETS No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
None 28 15.73% 4 14.29% 3 9.38% 1 3.45% 3 17.65% 39 13.27%
Flush 6 3.37% 1 3.57% 0 0.00% 1 3.45% 0 0.00% 8 2.72%
Water
137 76.97% 19 67.86% 29 90.63% 26 89.66% 23 135.29% 234 79.59%
Sealed
House with
hole on the 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00%
ground
Hole on the
4 2.25% 2 7.14% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 6 2.04%
ground
Others 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 1 3.45% 0 0.00% 2 0.68%
No Answer 3 1.69% 2 7.14% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 5.88% 6 2.04%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 158.82% 294 100.00%
321 | P a g e
SANITATION AND TOILET

2.03%
Flush
2.71% 2.03%
0.68% Hole on the ground

13.22%
House with hold on the
ground
No answer
79.32%
None
Others
Figure 141 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Type of Toilets
2.4.2.2.3 Housing Condition
2.4.2.2.3.1 House Ownership
The majority of the respondents (80.95%) own the house where they are staying, while only
13.95% do not own the house that they occupy. 5.10% of the total respondents did not specify
their answers.
Table 105 - House Ownership of Survey Respondents
Gen.
HOUSE Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
OWNERSHIP
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Owns the
152 85.39% 18 64.29% 23 71.88% 22 75.86% 23 135.29% 238 80.95%
House
Does not
Own the 20 11.24% 7 25.00% 7 21.88% 4 13.79% 3 17.65% 41 13.95%
House
No Answer 6 3.37% 3 10.71% 2 6.25% 3 10.34% 1 5.88% 15 5.10%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 158.82% 294 100.00%
322 | P a g e
HOUSE OWNERSHIP
13.95%
5.10%
Does not Own the House

No Answer
Owns the House
80.95%
Figure 142 - Distribution of Respondents Based on House Ownership
2.4.2.2.3.2 Land Ownership
Majority of the respondents (53.06%) does not own the land where their houses were built, while
40.14% owns the land where their houses stood. Twenty (20) or 6.80% of the respondents refused
to give an answer.
Table 106 - Land Ownership of Survey Respondents

Gen.
LAND Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
OWNERSHIP
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Owns the
57 32.02% 17 60.71% 10 31.25% 14 48.28% 20 117.65% 118 40.14%
Land
Does not
Own the 115 64.61% 7 25.00% 19 59.38% 10 34.48% 5 29.41% 156 53.06%
Land
No Answer 6 3.37% 4 14.29% 3 9.38% 5 17.24% 2 11.76% 20 6.80%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 158.82% 294 100.00%
323 | P a g e
LAND OWNERSHIP
40.14%
Does not Own the land
53.06%
No Answer
6.80% Owns the land
Figure 143 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Land Ownership
2.4.2.2.3.3 Housing Material
The most common roofing material used by the respondents (247 or 69.77%) was G.I. Sheets.
There were respondents that also used Wood (13.28%) and twenty-four (24) or 6.78% of the total
respondents used some other materials for the roof of their houses. Lastly, comprising thirty-six
(36) respondents used Nipa Cogon (21 or 5.93%), Concrete (14 or 3.95%) and Bamboo (1 or 0.28%)
as roofing material for their houses.
Table 107 - Roof Material of the Respondent's Houses

CONSTRUCTION Gen.
MATERIALS OF Aguinaldo
THE ROOF No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Wood 42 19.35% 5 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 47 13.28%
Concrete 4 1.84% 6 0.00% 0 0.00% 2 6.45% 2 5.56% 14 3.95%
Nipa/Cogon 10 4.61% 0 0.00% 1 3.03% 2 6.45% 8 22.22% 21 5.93%
Bamboo 0 0.00% 1 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 0.28%
Yero/GI Sheets 161 74.19% 20 0.00% 23 69.70% 17 54.84% 26 72.22% 247 69.77%
Others 0 0.00% 5 0.00% 9 27.27% 10 32.26% 0 0.00% 24 6.78%
Total 217 100.00% 37 0.00% 33 100.00% 31 100.00% 36 100.00% 354 100.00%
324 | P a g e
ROOFING MATERIALS
0.28% 3.95%
5.93%
6.78% Bamboo
Concrete
13.28% Nipa/Cogon
Others
69.77% Wood
Yero/GI Sheets
Figure 144 - Distribution of Respondents based on Roofing Material of their Houses
On the other hand, one hundred sixty-six (166) or 48.68% of the respondents used wood as an
outer wall material of their houses. One hundred forty-two (142) or 41.64% used concrete and
3.52% of the total respondents used other materials for the outer wall of their houses. Finally,
comprising twenty-one (21) respondents used bamboo (9 or 2.64%), nipa/cogon and GI sheets (6
or 1.76%) as an outer wall materials for their houses.
Table 108 - Outer Wall Material of the Respondent's Houses

CONSTRUCTION Gen.
MATERIALS OF Aguinaldo
THE OUTER
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
WALLS
Wood 113 54.33% 17 50.00% 14 40.00% 7 23.33% 15 44.12% 166 48.68%
Concrete 82 39.42% 13 38.24% 17 48.57% 15 50.00% 15 44.12% 142 41.64%
Nipa/Cogon 4 1.92% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 2 6.67% 0 0.00% 6 1.76%
Bamboo 2 0.96% 1 2.94% 1 2.86% 1 3.33% 4 11.76% 9 2.64%
Yero/GI Sheets 2 0.96% 3 8.82% 1 2.86% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 6 1.76%
Others 5 2.40% 0 0.00% 2 5.71% 5 16.67% 0 0.00% 12 3.52%
Total 208 100.00% 34 100.00% 35 100.00% 30 100.00% 34 100.00% 341 100.00%
325 | P a g e
OUTER WALL MATERIAL

1.76% 2.64%
Bamboo
Concrete
41.64%
Nipa/Cogon
48.68%
Others
Wood
Yero/GI Sheets
3.52% 1.76%
Figure 145 - Distribution of Respondents based on Outer Wall Material of their Houses
2.4.2.2.4 Community Problems and Concerns
The matrix below (Table 109) presents the perceive problems of the respondents in the Barangays
of Bayanihan, Garcia, Gen. Aguinaldo, San Antonio and San Jose. Most of the respondents
identified Unemployment (14.66%) and Poverty (13.49%) as the major problems and concerns in
their Barangay. Problems on Lack of Facilities for Transportation/Road/Bridges (10.19%),
Educational Assistance (10.01%), Lack of Livelihood support (9.48%) and Lack of Medical
equipment (8.72%) were strongly identified by the respondents. Concern were also raised about
the Lack of School equipment (7.95%), Malnutrition (7.36%) and Limited teachers (6.42%) in
respective schools and day care centers were also identified as the community problems. Aside
from this, Limited Assistance to Develop Farming (2.89%), Lack of capital for small business
(2.06%), Lack of water for irrigation (1.65%), Lack of recreational facilities (1.59%) and Availability
of potable water (1.53%) were also point of concerns raised by the respondents. Lastly, the Lack
of support in Training People’s Organization, Lack of orientation and training on Solid Waste
Management and some other community problems were also raised by the respondents with the
percentage of 1.30%, 0.55% and 0.18%, respectively.
Table 109 - Common Community Problem and Concerns of the Respondents

COMMUNITY Gen.
PROBLEMS/ Aguinaldo
CONCERNS No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Unemployment 157 13.17% 19 16.52% 26 17.93% 19 19.19% 28 19.05% 249 14.66%
Poverty 143 12.00% 20 17.39% 23 15.86% 16 16.16% 27 18.37% 229 13.49%
326 | P a g e
COMMUNITY Gen.
PROBLEMS/ Aguinaldo
Availability
19 1.59% 5 4.35% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 2 1.36% 26 1.53%
potable water
Lack of water
7 0.59% 4 3.48% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 17 11.56% 28 1.65%
for irrigation
Lack of school
107 8.98% 9 7.83% 13 8.97% 4 4.04% 2 1.36% 135 7.95%
equipment
Malnutrition 111 9.31% 6 5.22% 2 1.38% 2 2.02% 4 2.72% 125 7.36%
Educational
125 10.49% 12 10.43% 12 8.28% 7 7.07% 14 9.52% 170 10.01%
assistance
Limited
107 8.98% 1 0.87% 0 0.00% 1 1.01% 0 0.00% 109 6.42%
teachers
Lack of medical
126 10.57% 1 0.87% 6 4.14% 6 6.06% 9 6.12% 148 8.72%
equipment
Lack of
facilities for
122 10.23% 3 2.61% 22 15.17% 11 11.11% 15 10.20% 173 10.19%
transportation/
roads/ bridges
Lack of
Livelihood 104 8.72% 18 15.65% 15 10.34% 9 9.09% 15 10.20% 161 9.48%
support
Lack of
recreational 10 0.84% 2 1.74% 8 5.52% 6 6.06% 1 0.68% 27 1.59%
facilities
Lack of capital
for small 18 1.51% 3 2.61% 7 4.83% 7 7.07% 0 0.00% 35 2.06%
business
Limited
assistance to
12 1.01% 10 8.70% 8 5.52% 6 6.06% 13 8.84% 49 2.89%
develop
farming
Lack of support
in training
13 1.09% 2 1.74% 3 2.07% 4 4.04% 0 0.00% 22 1.30%
People’s
Organization
327 | P a g e
COMMUNITY Gen.
PROBLEMS/ Aguinaldo
Lack of
orientation and
training on 8 0.67% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 1.01% 0 0.00% 9 0.53%
Solid Waste
Management
Others 3 0.25% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 3 0.18%
Total 1192 100.00% 115 100.00% 145 100.00% 99 100.00% 147 100.00% 1698 100.00%
*Multiple answers allowed
COMMON COMMUNITY PROBLEMS AND CONCERNS

Availability potable water
1.53% Educational assistance
Lack of capital for small business

2.06%
14.66% 10.01% Lack of facilities for transportation/ roads/
bridges
Lack of Livelihood support
Lack of medical equipment

10.19%
13.49% Lack of orientation and training on Solid
Waste Management
Lack of recreational facilities
9.48% Lack of school equipment
7.36% Lack of support in training People’s

Organization
Lack of water for irrigation
8.72%
6.42% Limited assistance to develop farming
0.18%
Limited teachers
7.95%
Malnutrition
0.53%
2.89% Others
1.59%
1.65%
1.30% Poverty
Unemployment
Figure 146 - Distribution of Respondents on their Common Community Problems and

Concerns
The respondents provided possible solutions to the identified community problems. Notably, the
generation of Employment (17.42%) and Scholarship Program (13.80%) were among the top
328 | P a g e
proposed solutions of the respondents. Other top proposal include Educational Assistance Project
(13.73%), Livelihood Training and Assistance to Women (13.18%), Livelihood Projects (12.70%)
and Medical/Dental Mission (10.38%). Various proposals were provided by the respondents,
summarized in the matrix below (Table 110).
329 | P a g e
Table 110 - Proposed Solution from the Identified Concerns/Problems

Gen.
PROPOSED SOLUTIONS Aguinaldo RANK
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Employment 162 18.26% 19 14.84% 32 17.58% 20 15.75% 22 15.71% 255 17.42% 1st
Livelihood Projects 113 12.74% 17 13.28% 21 11.54% 14 11.02% 21 15.00% 186 12.70% 5th
Livelihood Training and Assistance
117 13.19% 13 10.16% 28 15.38% 14 11.02% 21 15.00% 193 13.18% 4th
to Women
Education Assistance Project 130 14.66% 12 9.38% 26 14.29% 15 11.81% 18 12.86% 201 13.73% 3rd
Scholarship Program 123 13.87% 15 11.72% 28 15.38% 17 13.39% 19 13.57% 202 13.80% 2nd
Potable water supply 21 2.37% 6 4.69% 3 1.65% 5 3.94% 3 2.14% 38 2.60% 9th
Medical/Dental Mission Assistance 97 10.94% 10 7.81% 16 8.79% 16 12.60% 13 9.29% 152 10.38% 6th
Designate Materials Recovery
Facility in areas within the 34 3.83% 6 4.69% 0 0.00% 2 1.57% 2 1.43% 44 3.01% 8th
Barangay
Assistance from government
27 3.04% 6 4.69% 0 0.00% 1 0.79% 2 1.43% 36 2.46% 10th
offices
Conduct orientation on proper
14 1.58% 4 3.13% 3 1.65% 5 3.94% 1 0.71% 27 1.84% 13th
waste disposal
Assistance from private companies
and full implementation of CSR 13 1.47% 6 4.69% 14 7.69% 6 4.72% 10 7.14% 49 3.35% 7th
Program
330 | P a g e
Gen.
PROPOSED SOLUTIONS Aguinaldo RANK
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Conduct community consultations
at the grassroots level, plan 6 0.68% 4 3.13% 4 2.20% 8 6.30% 6 4.29% 28 1.91% 12th
intervention and implement
Values formation/ orientation to
8 0.90% 3 2.34% 1 0.55% 1 0.79% 0 0.00% 13 0.89% 14th
all concerned
Additional budget (for the
20 2.25% 5 3.91% 6 3.30% 3 2.36% 1 0.71% 35 2.39% 11th
barangay)
Others 2 0.23% 2 1.56% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 0.71% 5 0.34% 15th
Total 887 100.00% 128 100.00% 182 100.00% 127 100.00% 140 100.00% 1464 100.00%
331 | P a g e
PROPOSED SOLUTION FROM THE IDENTIFIED

COMMUNITY PROBLEMS
Additional budget (for the barangay)
Assistance from government offices
2.39% Assistance from private companies and

full implementation of CSR Program
2.46%
0.89% Conduct community consultations at the
1.91% grassroots level, plan intervention and
implement
1.84% Conduct orientation on proper waste
0.34% 13.80% disposal
3.35%
Designate Materials Recovery Facility in
3.01%
areas within the Barangay
2.60%
Education Assistance Project
13.73%
10.38%
Employment
Livelihood Projects
13.18% Livelihood Training and Assistance to

17.42% Women
Medical/Dental Mission Assistance
12.70%
Others
Potable water supply
Scholarship Program
Values formation/ orientation to all

concerned
Figure 147 - Distribution of Respondents based on the Proposed Solution from the Identified
Community Problems
332 | P a g e
2.4.2.2.5 Awareness and Acceptability on the Proposed Project of Stagno Mining Corporation
Table 111 shows the awareness of the respondents on the proposed project of Stagno Mining
Corporation (SMC). Majority of the respondents or 69.39% expressed awareness on the proposed
project of SMC, while 25.17% of the respondents were unaware of the proposed project.
Table 111 - Awareness of the Respondents on the Proposed Project

AWARENESS Gen.
ON THE Aguinaldo
CURRENT
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
OPERATION
Aware 145 81.46% 14 50.00% 17 53.13% 16 55.17% 12 44.44% 204 69.39%
Not Aware 31 17.42% 9 32.14% 14 43.75% 9 31.03% 11 40.74% 74 25.17%
No Answer 2 1.12% 5 17.86% 1 3.13% 4 13.79% 4 14.81% 16 5.44%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 100.00% 294 100.00%
AWARENESS ON THE PROPOSED PROJECT
25.17%
Aware
No Answer
5.44%
Not Aware
69.39%
Figure 148 - Distribution of Respondents Based on Awareness on the Proposed Project
For those who were aware of the proposed project, most of the information sources were from
the Government / Barangay Officials (35.53%). The proposed project was also known to the
respondents through the Official / Employee of SMC (33.16%), through the Survey (24.47%) and
through the Relatives/Friends/Neighbors (5.00%). Respondents also got the information from the
Barangay Meetings/Consultation with 1.05%. Other sources mentioned with 0.79% of the total
respondents through
333 | P a g e
Table 112 - Sources of Information about the Proposed Project of Stagno Mining Corporation
Gen.
SOURCES OF Bayanihan Garcia San Antonio San Jose Total
Aguinaldo
INFORMATION
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Government /
Barangay 105 40.23% 4 13.33% 12 37.50% 8 26.67% 6 22.22% 135 35.53%
Officials
Relatives /
Friends / 6 2.30% 3 10.00% 3 9.38% 3 10.00% 4 14.81% 19 5.00%
Neighbors
Official /
Employee of 65 24.90% 16 53.33% 16 50.00% 15 50.00% 14 51.85% 126 33.16%
SMC
Radio / TV /
Local 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00%
Newspaper
Barangay
Meetings / 3 1.15% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 4 1.05%
Consultations
Survey 81 31.03% 7 23.33% 0 0.00% 2 6.67% 3 11.11% 93 24.47%
Others 1 0.38% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 2 6.67% 0 0.00% 3 0.79%
Total 261 100.00% 30 100.00% 32 100.00% 30 100.00% 27 100.00% 380 100.00%
334 | P a g e
SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Barangay Meetings /
1.05% Consultations
Government / Barangay
24.47% Officials
35.53%
Official / Employee of SMC
5.00% Others
Radio / TV / Local Newspaper

0.79%
33.16%
Relatives / Friends / Neighbors
Survey
Figure 149 - Distribution of Respondents based on Sources of Information about the Proposed
Project
The respondents were asked on their perceived positive and negative effects on the proposed
project by Stagno Mining Corporation (SMC). Looking into details, Table 113 presents
specific answer of respondents on the possible positive and negative effects of the project to the
community. There were 272 or 37.78% from the respondents that perceived Additional Job
Opportunities with the proposed project. About 17.50% of the total respondents perceived
Additional income to the Municipal and Barangay and 17.36% said that Medical Assistance would
be another positive effects of the proposed project. Livelihood opportunities was also perceived
comprising 16.94% or 122 respondents. 6.53% perceived the provision of Sports Facilities and
1.94% perceived that the Negative Issues or Problems will be addressed to the community. About
1.11% or 8 respondents perceived that the proposed project would lessen the Environmental
Threats. Lastly, 0.56% of the respondents said other positive effect of the proposed project and
only 2 or 0.28% of the total respondents perceived that Traffic will be lessened.
On the other hand, for those who think that the proposed project will produce negative impacts
to their community, the matrix below also shows the specific list of the possible negative impacts.
One hundred twenty-four (124) or 28.77% of the respondents believed that the proposed project
will result to an increase of Air Pollution/Dust and 23.20% of the respondents perceived Siltation
as one of the negative impacts of the project. Some of the respondents (20.88%) perceived that
the project will result to Health and Environmental Hazard and an increase of Noise (14.85%) in
their community. Generation of Wastes/Improper Waste Disposal (6.96%) also considered by
the respondents as negative effect of the proposed projects, however, fourteen (14) or 3.25% of
the total respondents perceived that project will not bring negative effect to the community.
335 | P a g e
About 0.93% or 4 respondents perceived other negative impact and 0.70% of the total
respondents saw that the proposed project will worsen the peace and order situation in their
community. Finally, an Increase in Vehicular Traffic generated a percentage of 0.46.
336 | P a g e
Table 113 - Perceived Positive and Negative Effects of the Proposed Project
Gen.
EFFECTS DETAILS Aguinaldo
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Additional Job Opportunities 169 36.66% 25 53.19% 32 40.51% 24 37.50% 22 31.88% 272 37.78%
Traffic will be lessened 1 0.22% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 1.56% 0 0.00% 2 0.28%
Less Environmental Threats 3 0.65% 1 2.13% 0 0.00% 4 6.25% 0 0.00% 8 1.11%
Negative issues will be addressed 6 1.30% 1 2.13% 1 1.27% 3 4.69% 3 4.35% 14 1.94%
Additional income to the Municipal and
89 19.31% 8 17.02% 13 16.46% 10 15.63% 6 8.70% 126 17.50%
Barangay
Positive Livelihood opportunities will improve
73 15.84% 8 17.02% 19 24.05% 5 7.81% 17 24.64% 122 16.94%
economic condition of the barangay
Provision of Sports Facilities for youth 36 7.81% 2 4.26% 1 1.27% 5 7.81% 3 4.35% 47 6.53%
Medical Assistance 80 17.35% 2 4.26% 13 16.46% 12 18.75% 18 26.09% 125 17.36%
Others 4 0.87% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 4 0.56%
No Positive Effects 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00%
TOTAL RESPONSES 461 100.00% 47 100.00% 79 100.00% 64 100.00% 69 100.00% 720 100.00%
Air Pollution / more dust 83 28.42% 8 22.86% 13 34.21% 10 31.25% 10 14.49% 124 28.77%
More Noise 39 13.36% 3 8.57% 9 23.68% 5 15.63% 8 11.59% 64 14.85%
Siltation 70 23.97% 8 22.86% 8 21.05% 8 25.00% 6 8.70% 100 23.20%
Generation of Wastes/ Improper Waste
21 7.19% 4 11.43% 1 2.63% 2 6.25% 2 2.90% 30 6.96%
Disposal
Negative
Increase in Traffic 1 0.34% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 2 0.46%
Health and Environmental Hazard 70 23.97% 5 14.29% 5 13.16% 3 9.38% 7 10.14% 90 20.88%
337 | P a g e
Gen.
EFFECTS DETAILS Aguinaldo
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
Worsening Peace and Order 1 0.34% 1 2.86% 0 0.00% 1 3.13% 0 0.00% 3 0.70%
Others 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 2 5.26% 2 6.25% 0 0.00% 4 0.93%
No Negative Effects 7 2.40% 6 17.14% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 1.45% 14 3.25%
TOTAL RESPONSES 292 100.00% 35 100.00% 38 100.00% 32 100.00% 34 49.28% 431 100.00%
*Multiple answers allowed
338 | P a g e
Recommendations on the possible actions to be undertaken to prevent or mitigate the perceived

negative impacts were also gathered from the respondents. There were many suggestions that
will help resolve the perceived negative effects and somehow prevent or mitigate the possible
adverse impacts.
Table 114 - Proposed Solutions to the Negative Impact

Perceived Negative Effects
Proposed Solutions on the Perceived Negative Effects
of the Proposed Project
Increased Develop a community plan that set outs objective and policies
Environmental and Health for dealing with air and water quality issues
Impacts: Health Monitoring; Medical Mission
• More dust Find ways to minimize/eliminate dust and noise
• More Noise Make a settling pond
• Generation of wastes/ Water sprinkler truck
Improper waste Implement controls/measures
disposal
• Heath and
Proper waste disposal
Environmental Hazard
• Siltation
Disturbance to the Secure the safety of the community
Community:
• Increase in Traffic Fix the bridge
• Peace and Order
Meet and comply to the DENR standards and requirements
Other Response:
Abide the laws
Responsible Mining
• No perceived negative
Unity of the community and the proponent to solve the
impact
negative issues
• More information
Cooperation and Coordination with the Barangay Officials,
should be given to the
Community and Company
community
Sense of urgency
Proper implementation of procedures
Educate the community regarding the operation
The acceptability of the respondents on the proposed project was expressed. The majority of the
respondents (82.65%) or two hundred forty-three (243) respondents expressed their support to
the proposed project, while only 0.34% expressed their reservation and for them the project is
339 | P a g e
not acceptable. There were 3.06% or 9 respondents who were uncertain if they will agree or not
and conditional on the proposed project. About 13.95% or 41 respondents refused to give an
answer.
Table 115 - Acceptability of the Survey Respondents on the Proposed Project of Stagno Mining
Corporation
ACCEPTABILITY Gen.
OF THE Aguinaldo
PROPOSED
No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. %
PROJECT
Agree 165 92.70% 9 32.14% 28 87.50% 16 55.17% 25 36.23% 243 82.65%
Do Not Agree 1 0.56% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 0 0.00% 1 0.34%
Undecided 6 3.37% 2 7.14% 0 0.00% 1 3.45% 0 0.00% 9 3.06%
No Answer 6 3.37% 17 60.71% 4 12.50% 12 41.38% 2 2.90% 41 13.95%
Total 178 100.00% 28 100.00% 32 100.00% 29 100.00% 27 39.13% 294 100.00%
ACCEPTABILITY OF THE PROPOSED PROJECT

3.06%
0.34% Agree
13.95%
Do Not Agree
No Answer
Undecided
82.65%
Figure 150 - Acceptability of the Proposed Project
Those who expressed in agreement or disagree with the implementation of the proposed project
stated their reason for their positive response or negative responses. It can be observed that even
though some posted negative response for the proposed project, most of their reasons are
conditional with the implementation of mitigating measure which means they would support the
project as long as measures are ensured and taken. The details are presented below.
340 | P a g e
Table 116 - Reasons for Positive and Negative Responses

Reasons for Positive Response Reasons for Negative Response
The community will be benefited on the
Agricultural Lands may be affected by the
programs that will be implemented by Stagno
operation
Mining Corporation
Employment; Job opportunities Health Hazard
Livelihood for Barangay The project will cause Air Pollution
The project will help the community Contaminated water
Economic growth and for the progress of the
Destruction to the Environment
Barangay
Educational Assistance Unsure on the safety of the community
Assistance to Senior Citizens
2.4.3 Focus Group Discussion
Focus Group Discussion (FGD) was conducted in the impact vicinity of the proposed operation,
on October 17, 2021 for the impacts barangays.
The FGD aimed to gather perception and views of stakeholders through their representatives and
the people in general about the issues perceived as well as the benefits seen in the proposed
project of Stagno Mining Corporation. The participants were asked in a focused and interactive
setting and were encouraged to discuss thoughts freely with the facilitator as well as with other
participants. The process of open and free discussion aims to generate ideas and information on
the concerns and opinions of the people.
The Table below stipulates the discussion based on the questions queried on the stakeholders’
representatives.
Table 117 - Highlights of the Focus Group Discussion

Questions Response
Mario Manlunas (Purok Chairman of Jojo Parreno (Axceltechs) - Safety of water
Catmonan) – If the company started to source is part of the study that will be
operate here in our area it might affect our conducted by Axceltechs. As per law, the
domestic water source? company shall have a 20-meter buffer from
both sides of the rivers. It will not be touch
during the operation so your water source will
be safe.
341 | P a g e
Questions Response
The company can help in improving the water

system of the community.
Quilben Mantilla - Residents of Sitio Jojo Parreno (Axceltechs) – I think no houses
Catmonan has a concern. If Stagno will will be affected. Based on the map, no
operate what will happen to the houses residential areas will be affected by the
affected? Is there a relocation program? operation
Mario Manlunas (Purok Chairman of Jojo Parreno (Axceltechs) – In case that there
Catmonan) – What about the land that we are are farm lots inside the MPSA the company
tilling? I have farmlot that is inside the area of will talk to the owners to have an
Stagno. If this will be affected by the arrangement.
operation, is the company going to pay the
crops planted?
Junmar Gumaod (Purok Chairman Boloc- Jojo Parreno (Axceltechs) – As of now we
boloc) – Where is the exact location of the cannot tell the exact location. The exploration
mining area? is still on-going.
Junmar Gumaod (Purok Chairman Boloc- Jojo Parreno (Axceltechs) – When Stagno
boloc) – Our neighboring barangay Malinaw commenced their operation, a Multi-partite
was left by SINO mining company without Monitoring Team will be formed. The team
rehabilitating the area. Planted crops were will visit the mine site on a quarterly basis to
affected and fruit bearing trees were cut. monitor the operation and the
They thought the company will continue their implementation of SDMP. Representative
operation. from barangay and municipal LGUs will be part
of the MMT. I think the MMT specially your
barangay representative will not allow the
company to disregard their obligations to the
barangay
Eng. Nilo Ramilla (MENRO) – I am also a
member of MMT, together with barangay
captain, he is a member because he belongs
to the host barangay. We are monitoring the
development of activities in their mining
company. Stagno is now on its 1st stage, they
were still drilling, they will do 300 drill holes.
342 | P a g e
Questions Response
Maybe it will take 2 years. It is still uncertain if
the project will push through or not. It
depends on the result of their drilling.
As member of MMT, we monitor quarterly if

they were following the right process of
mining. We will not let anything happen to
you, I am also from Libjo. I don’t ever want the
mining to just destroy our place.
Benjie Dacutanan (Resident) – If Stagno will I am really not from Stagno, I am from
push through the mining operation, how Axceltechs, consultant of Stagno to prepare
much is the rate/salary they will give? Is it the the EIS. In my opinion, I think Stagno will
same as CMC? follow the minimum wage in the area coz if
they don’t follow the miminum wage they will
be reported to DOLE, right? The skilled
workers have positions, their rate is different
and it depends upon their agreement with the
company.
Baltazar Taberos (Resident) – If the mining One of the assistance that the company can
operation will push through, how it may help provide is the medicine maintenance and
the senior citizens in the community? others that can be included in SDMP
programs.
Baltazar Taberos (Resident) – The fishermen Avoid using illegal fishing like nets or dynamite
here, before they will spent 2 litres of gasoline or others.
when fishing, now they are using 8 – 10
gallons. We cannot control the ship here
because they were paying to the government
of Dinagat.
People’s Org. representative – You should The company is still in the exploration stage.
start the mining operation for us to have jobs, But I think, there is a big possibility that the
coz we are unemployed. project will commence, especially you are
accepting this project.
343 | P a g e
Questions Response
Action: the project is accepted by the majority,
that’s why there is a big possibility that it will
operate and the good thing is you are the host
barangay.
Julius Rino (irrigators president) – What about We will include it in our study. We all know
the watershed area? I assume the company is that the mining companies now is not the
a responsible company right? same as before that there is no program
especially for rehabilitation. Gina Lopez is
realty anti-mining before but now our
government is really strict. Actually the mining
companies now, is afraid to commit violations,
for the reasons that their permit will be taken
from them or they will be suspended. They will
loss a lot once their permit will be gone.
Action: Compliance of Certificate so that the

company will have no violations. MMT will
always monitor the company. The MMT will
monitor the company quarterly to see if they
violate or not.
Boladong Billiones – How about our land? When your area is inside the MPSA area, im
sure that the company will talk to you. On
what do you want or will have an agreement.
The company will not immediately destroy the
land.
Julius Lino – About employment, you should The community is always the priority when it
prioritize the community. comes to employment, except for the skilled
workers if there is no one here, they will hire
outside or from other place.
Senior Citizens representative – What about Maybe, and one of the possibility is the
the senior citizens? Will you give something medicines or maintenance. It depends upon
when the mining starts? the assistance needed. It will be included in
the SDMP.
344 | P a g e
Majority of the FGD participants were aware of the proposed project of the proponent. Most
participants based their responses and inquiries from their experiences in nearby mining company
in the area.
The acceptability of the project in the barangays is very high and they are hoping that the
company will operate soon for them to have a source of income through employment and they
are very much aware that the implementation of SDMP will help the socio-economic condition of
the barangay.
The following were the predominant benefits and negative effects discussed.
Benefits
• Employment opportunity. By which most of the participants were eager to be benefited,
since many residents residing in the impact area are not gainfully employed.
• Various social development programs attached to the proponent’s Social Development
and Management Program (SDMP) such as: Assistance to Infrastructural Development,
Enterprise Development and Networking (Livelihood Programs), Assistance to Health
Services, and Assistance to Education.
Negative Effects
• Dust Pollution. As the most apparent result of mining operation in the community and
environment.
• Health Problems such as: coughing, asthma and other respiratory illnesses brought about
by pervasive effect of dust pollution.
• Contamination of source of water. As the residents rely in ground water as their source of
water supply.
2.4.4 Potential Socio-Economic Impacts of the Project
The proposed project and its planned operations have a potential socio-economic impact on the
people and environment. The impact which is more likely of that presently experience by the
community with the proponent’s current operations. The extent of impact may depend on the
scale and progress of its operation.
Outlined below are the identified potential socio-economic impacts of the proposed project in
every phase of the project:
345 | P a g e
• Development Phase
o Employment opportunities
o Dust and noise pollution
o Health consequences
o Increase in business opportunities
o Increase in traffic and road safety hazards
o Generation of additional revenue for the Local Government
• Operation Phase
o Dust and noise pollution
o Health and safety impacts
o Employment opportunities
o Increase in business opportunities
o Increase in traffic and road safety hazards
o Improved services and community development potential
o Generation of additional revenue for the Local Government
• Decommissioning and Closure Phase

o Temporary increase in employment opportunities followed by a decrease
o Decline in economic activities
o Gradual decline of dust and noise pollution
o Change in socio/community development benefits
o Change in the revenue of the Local Governmen
346 | P a g e
Stagno Mining Corporation Environmental Management Plan
3.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
This section presents the Impacts Management Plan (IMP) formulated to minimize the potential
adverse impacts of the project and enhance the beneficial effects of implementing the project.
This plan shall be used to systematically manage the implementation of the recommended
mitigating measures that are intended to address the identified possible environmental
impacts of implementing the project.
3.1 Land Resources
Perceived impacts on land include: changes in natural topography/slope; inducement of

subsidence; vegetation removal (removal of ecologically and economically important species);
loss of topsoil; soil compaction and erosion.
Mining shall be done in stages to minimize the footprint of worked areas. Progressive
rehabilitation shall be adopted wherein a staged treatment of disturbed areas during the mining
operations will be implemented rather than undertaking large scale rehabilitation works at
the conclusion of the mining activities. Effects of alteration of topography and potential
mine subsidence shall be mitigated through geotechnical site investigation and through the
implementation of appropriate and site-specific engineering measures. Surface mining shall
follow the contour mining method which shall be designed such that the (critical) slopes
are stabilized. Rehabilitation works shall include revegetation or reforestation of disturbed
areas and may include deep ripping of severely compacted soil. Accelerated erosion shall be
mitigated through diverting surface runoff away from areas with highly erodible soil.
3.2 Water Resource
The impacts of the Project on water resources focus on alteration of water quality,
siltation and changes in drainage morphology. All these potential impacts are common to mining
projects. These can be mitigated and controlled with proper planning and sound engineering
practices like provision of proper drainage, silt traps, settling ponds, etc.
3.3 Air Quality
Air pollution due to mining and related activities can be minimized by planning the activities
in a manner that the generation of the pollutants is at minimum. In addition, provisions may
be made for arresting the dust by making suitable green belts or buffer zones, regular water
347 | P a g e
sprinkling, covering the trucks with tarpaulin or canvass during transport and proper
maintenance of heavy equipment.
Noise generation from the project is expected. The noise generated from mining and
associated activities poses potential health hazards to workers and heavy equipment
operators who may be exposed to excessive noise and vibration during mine production.
Although the project is far from residential areas (there are no nearby communities that may
be directly affected), disturbance of wildlife in the vicinity is likely. The workers/operators of
heavy equipment that will be exposed to excessive noise will be provided with the proper
personal protective equipment (PPEs).
3.4 People
Significant social impacts include formation of negative attitude towards the project,
employment and generation of revenues, loss of livelihood/income and dislocation of
communities directly affected by roads and port construction, health and safety, influx of
migrant workers and resource competition. The perceived social impacts will be mitigated
through the implementation different programs such as Information, Education and
Communication (IEC) program, Social Development and Management Program (SDMP),
health and safety program, Environmental Protection and Enhancement Program (EPEP),
integrated solid wastes management and livelihood programs. Also, a barangay/MLGU-
coordinated scheme and protocol for hiring mine workers will be developed and carried
out.
348 | P a g e
Table 118 - Matrix of Major Impacts, Mitigation/Enhancement Measures and Environmental Management Plan
Environmental
Guarantee /
Project Phase / Component Options for Prevention or Mitigation* or Responsible
Potential Impact Cost Financial
Environmental Aspect Likely to be Enhancement Entity
Arrangements
Affected
I. PRE-CONSTRUCTION
People - Fear of loss of land (displacement) - Implement IEC program to improve the SMC Community 20,000 Included in EPEP,
and livelihood negative mindset of impact communities Relations Officer SDMP, ECC
- Fear of non-employment of locally toward the project (CRO); Barangay; Condition
qualified people due to the possible - Consider negative views of project- MLGU
engagement of the company to impact barangays/communities in the
non-local contractors/laborers; design and formulation of project
- Fear of flooding and landslide components and programs to avoid
- Fear of loss or decrease of water staunch opposition to the project
supply for domestic use due to - Develop a scheme and protocol of hiring
potential watershed degradation in coordination with the barangay and
- Concern for their health and safety MLGU
- Conduct a skills and inventory
assessment of the local labor force
- Implement a livelihood program for
residents that will not be employed
especially women and out-of-school-
youth
- Expression of positive views - Implement IEC program to enhance the
regarding the project such as positive views of impact communities
generation of employment and toward the project
additional tax, improvement of local
government services and of
community infrastructures
II. CONSTRUCTIONi
- Site preparation Terrestrial - Loss of vegetation due to site - Prioritizing ecologically and economically SMC; MMT 500,000 Included in EPEP,
(clearing, grubbing, Ecology clearing important species in conservation ECC condition
349 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
stripping of topsoil and - Removal of economically and - Use of indigenous species in the nursery
overburden removal) ecologically important species - Limit clearing to the proposed footprint
- Construction of mine - Destruction of wildlife habitat of facilities to avoid unnecessary
facilities - Disturbance/displacement vegetation and habitat removal
- Difficulty in plant establishment due - Strictly prohibiting poaching of wildlife
to loss in soil productivity - Establishment of buffer zones along
- Change in microclimate creeks
- Internal habitat fragmentation - Include flora and fauna protection
- Improved accessibility of the area programs in SDMP (wildlife protection
may attract illegal hunters and and conservation campaign
poachers - Seeding of topsoil to maintain/improve
soil quality
- Progressive rehabilitation of disturbed
areas
- Routine monitoring of terrestrial flora
and fauna
- Strict compliance with conditions stated
in the Tree Cutting Permit
Land - Change in land use - Constructing permanent facilities to be SMC Part of Included in EPEP,
- Loss of topsoil and decrease in soil aesthetically acceptable EPEP cost ECC condition
quality - Restoration of temporarily disturbed
- Soil erosion areas to pre-mine conditions as close as
possible
- Progressive rehabilitation of disturbed
areas
- Proper management of topsoil from
stripping to stockpiling; addition of soil
amelioration and seeding of stockpiled
topsoil
350 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
- Encroachment and disturbance of - Prioritizing ecologically and economically Part of Included in EPEP,
ECAs important species in conservation EPEP cost ECC condition
o Wildlife habitat - Use of indigenous species in the nursery
o Frequently visited/hit by - Strictly prohibiting poaching of wildlife
natural calamities - Inclusion of natural hazards in the design
o Critical slopes (>50%) of mining method and mine facilities
- Observance of safe working slope
gradient and implementation of proper
engineering measures in
susceptible/critical areas
- Generation of unwanted materials - Materials recovered from vegetation SMC 100,000 Included in EPEP,
(solid waste/biomass/debris) removal can be used as: ECC condition
o trash lines on steep slopes to
mitigate soil erosion
o compost material/surface
mulch for immediate soil cover
and for improving SOM content
of soils
o chipping of cut trees and using
chipped material as a growing
medium for rehabilitation
- Proper disposal of construction debris
and solid wastes; Implementation of an
Integrated Solid Waste Management
Plan; Reduce, reuse, recycle
Water quality - Sedimentation of fresh and marine - Erosion control structures such as a well- SMC 3,000,000 Included in EPEP,
waters (increase in water turbidity designed drainage system, with sediment ECC condition
and total suspended solids) ponds and silt fences/traps
351 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
- Potential contamination of surface, - Minimized ground clearings and
marine and groundwater due to disturbances to lessen erosion and
accidental oil/fuel spills sedimentation
- Contamination of surface and - Proper scheduling of construction
groundwater by sewage from the activities
construction camp and other solid - Implement re-use of recovered topsoil
wastes for rehabilitation
- Spill kits shall be made available at all
times
- Provision of sewerage system
- Implementation of an integrated solid
waste management plan
- Generation of domestic waste - Provision of septic vaults for the workers SMC 50,000 Included in EPEP,
- Disposal/collection of waste shall be ECC condition
within the existing guidelines
Water: Surface - Increase in surface runoff and peak - Monitoring of streamflow SMC; MMT 100,000 per Included in EPEP,
hydrology and discharge of rivers - Construction of a drainage system within year ECC condition
drainage the project area
morphology
Air quality/ - Noise disturbance - Strictly implement covering of hauling SMC; MMT 200,000 per Included in EPEP,
Ambient Noise - Fugitive dust generation trucks and water spraying at least twice a year ECC condition
- Vehicle/equipment emissions day or as the need arises;
- Preventive maintenance of vehicles and
equipment
- Enclosure of equipment emitting high
level of noise (when applicable)
- Imposition of speed limits (30kph)
- Provision of dust and noise PPEs to
employees
352 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
Economic - Employment of skilled and non- - Implementation of a hiring policy giving - SMC CRO Part of Included in EPEP,
skilled workers preferential to locally-qualified - Barangay SDMP cost SDMP, ECC
- Diversification of local industries individuals of project-impact barangay - MLGU condition
- Not everybody will be employed - Development of a hiring policy that is
gender sensitive and giving equal
opportunities to both sexes
- Implementation of the Social
Development and Management Program
(SDMP) to provide opportunities for
those who will not be hired
- Incorporate a scheme and protocol of
hiring in the agreement; coordinate the
scheme and protocol with the barangay
and MLGU
- IEC on nature and qualification of jobs
the proponent requires; Consultation on
job requirements and qualification
- Skills training to upgrade local skills of
residents that can be hired
Health and Safety - Unauthorized entry of outsiders - Implementation of a health and safety - MHO Part of SHP
and establishments which might program and EPEP - Barangay LGU and SDMP
cause problems in peace and order - Establish a grievance mechanism to - Barangay Tanod cost
- Entry of migrant workers with manage issues and concerns arising from - Barangay Health
families, which might cause health the project Workers
problems due to diseases, overuse - Implementation of an IEC program that - SMC CRO
of public utilities /services, will explain the nature and operation of
competition of resources, social the project
conflicts, peace and order, increase - Implement an integrated solid waste
in pollution due to solid and liquid management plan in coordination with
wastes. the barangay and MLGU
353 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
- Increase in traffic flow causing air - Coordination with the Barangay LGU to
(dust) and noise pollution; ensure authorized establishments and
traffic/road safety control of unauthorized entry of
- Environmental degradation outsiders
- Impact of climate change such as La - Buffer zones should be established
Niña and El Niño phenomenon and around the perimeter of the mines
possible consequential disasters - Proponent to provide Health clinic with
a Doctor, Nurse and Health workers
- Health certificate for workers prior to
hiring into the project
- Partner with the LGU the
implementation of the Social
Development and Management Program
- Maintenance of hauling trucks to avoid
smoke belching; Sprinkling of roads
during dry seasons
- DENR Special Order 2007-653,adaptation
measures include protection of water
aquifer, conduct of massive information
and education campaign, establishment
of protection measures for coastal areas,
determination of areas most vulnerable
to natural hazards “to forewarn people,”
and strengthening the protection of
ecosystems
Social - Entry of migrant workers with - Implementation of a hiring policy giving SMC Part of
families, which might cause preferential to locally-qualified SDMP cost
problems of congestion, peace and individuals of project-impact barangay
order and security, breaches.
354 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
- Influx of migrant workers may put - Regulation by the barangay and MLGU to
pressures on public utilities and manage entry of migrant workers and
services their families
- Social conflicts leading to disruption - Coordination with the Barangay LGU to
of community cohesion ensure authorized establishments and
- Emergence of opposition groups control of unauthorized entry of
- Loss of income due to suspension of outsiders
the mine - Implementation of community-related
regulation by the barangay and MLGU to
mitigate social conflicts, control leisure
related activities, such as drinking
- Implementation of SDMP
- Establish a grievance mechanism to
manage issues and concerns arising from
the project
- Implementation of a communication
program that promotes public
involvement and dialogue/consultation
III. OPERATION PHASE
Contour mining Land - Removal of topsoil and Vegetation - Mining ore in blocks; SMC 3,000,000
operations cover - Establishment of stable and impermeable
- land clearing (removal of - Threat to existence of important settling ponds adjacent to active blocks;
vegetation), stripping of local floral species - Progressive revegetation of mined-out
overburden or waste - Loss of habitat, disturbance or blocks;
rock (applicable to displacement of faunal species - Establishment of nursery with endemic /
contour mining); indigenous species
- contour mining of - Depletion of chromite and laterite - Unavoidable; apply best mine practice to SMC ECC; EPEP
secondary chromite and ores recover maximum resources
laterite deposits; - Consider pre-existing natural contour in
mine rehabilitation works
355 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
- stockpiling of chromite - Alteration of topography; lowering - Progressive rehabilitation of mine-out
or nickeliferous laterite of landform (contour mining) areas
ores; elevation - Disturbed soils will be replaced and
- transport and shipment - Erosion and subsequent siltation of enhanced by adding organic amendments
of produced ores; waterbodies; increase surface runoff - Erosion control structures
progressive rehabilitation - Disturbance of soil profile
of mined-out areas Geology - Inducement of subsidence/collapse - Implement a suitable and appropriate SMC; MMT ECC; EPEP;
- Generation of open areas with slope / ground failure monitoring plan to Environmental
greater potential for runoff, erosion detect instability at an early and non- Occupational
and landslides critical stage so that safety measures Health Plan
could be initiated to prevent or minimize
impacts
- Familiarize / orient / train mining
personnel, staff and workers on
recognition of the various slope / ground
failure modes, hazard warning signs and
standard operating procedures to be
observed in the case of ground failure
events or impending event;
- Identification, early recognition and
monitoring of warning signs of potential
and impending slope stability problems.
- Implement appropriate and safe
engineering and geotechnical design;
- Formulation and implementation of
subsidence control measures including
subsidence prediction;
- Sewage and wastewater generation - Provision of septic tanks/sewerage SMC; MMT 50,000 per SMC Solid Waste
- Solid waste generation system, toilets/sanitary facilities year Management Plan;
356 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
- Proper disposal of waste; recycle, reuse,
reduce;
Water - Increase TSS and turbidity of surface - Erosion control structures such as SMC; MMT 2,000,000
and marine waters appropriate drainage, catch basins and
sedimentation ponds; mining to be done
in stages
- Progressive rehabilitation
Marine Ecology - Siltation of coral reefs and seagrass - Erosion control structures such as SMC; MMT 250,000 per ECC; EPEP;
beds appropriate drainage, catch basins and year Environmental
- Mortality/Hampered growth of sedimentation ponds; mining to be done Occupational
marine organisms in stages Health Plan
- Progressive rehabilitation
Air - Local increase in TSP and noise levels - Proper and regular maintenance of SMC; MMT 200,000 ECC; EPEP;
- Air pollution due construction equipment per year Environmental
equipment - Water spraying; mining activities to be Occupational
confined during daytime as much as Health Plan
possible
- IEC on proper scheduling of hauler trucks
to avoid busy and late hours
Terrestrial - Vegetation is cleared during mining - Retain existing vegetation in areas of low SMC - Included in ECC; EPEP;
and smothered by stockpiling mineral content the EPEP Environmental
- Loss of soil due to erosion would - Rehabilitation of open areas and budget Occupational
reduce survivability of plants having enrichment planting and reforestation in Health Plan
no substrate to anchor themselves buffer zones and mined out areas
to and obtain nutrients - Fire protection by setting up of fire lines
- Loss of habitat to birds and small - Establishing check dams in gullies
animals such as lizards & - Establish vegetative bands at least 20 m
amphibians width along creeks and ravines which
357 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
would serve as habitats of endangered
species of plants & animals
- Conduct ‘progressive rehabilitation’ of
mined out parcels
- Implementation of ANR particularly in
riparian areas
- Earth-balling of rare, endemic,
threatened species diversity in the
project site
Economic - Local government generation of - Benefit from development programs - LGU ECC; SDMP
revenues from taxes, permits and through SDMP equivalent to 1.5% of - SMC CRO
LGU share in the mining of Nickel operating cost
- Royalties and taxes paid locally and - Total taxes paid to the national
shared by municipal and barangay government will exceed Excise Tax: 60%
goes to national government; 40%, to the
local government --
- 20% for host Provinces
- 45% for host Municipalities
- 35% for host Barangays
- Real Property Tax to province and
municipalities
- Development of small and medium
enterprises like transport, construction
and utility services
- Alternative farm land to respond in
increase demand for agricultural
products to sustain the operation of the
mine
- These businesses will create more jobs
358 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
- Generation of employment - IEC on nature of jobs the proponents - Barangay LGU Part of ECC; SDMP
require and qualification. - SMC CRO SDMP
- Employment during construction - TESDA
- Multiplier Effect:
- Consultation on job requirements and
qualification
- Local hiring priority for qualified
Barangay residents
- Skills training to upgrade local skills of
residents that can be hired by the
project
- Cause problems of congestion, - Generation of livelihood opportunities - Barangay LGU & ECC; SDMP
peace and order, and security and other services near the affected Tanods
breaches communities - SMC CRO IEC
- Coordination with the Barangay LGU to - Security Force
ensure authorized establishments and
control of unauthorized entry of
outsiders as well as the management of
waste.
- Buffer zones should be established
around the perimeter of the mines
Health and safety - Entry of migrant workers with - Management of entry of migrant - Barangay LGU ECC; SDMP and SHP
families which might cause health workers. - Barangay Tanod
problems due to diseases, overuse - Increase and train Barangay tanods to be - MHO
of public utilities /services, deployed in areas where migrant - SMC CRO
competition of resources, social workers reside.
conflicts, peace and order, increase - Proponent provide Health clinic with a
in pollution due to solid and liquid Doctor, Nurse and Health workers
wastes. - Health certificate for workers prior to
hiring into the project
359 | P a g e
Environmental
Guarantee /
Arrangements
Affected
- Partner with the LGU the
implementation of the Social
Development Program
IV. ABANDONMENT PHASE
- Rehabilitation of mined- A. Physical - Replacement of waste rock in - Newly restored areas to be equipped SMC CRO Part of Abandonment and
out areas underground workings with proper drainage and soil erosion MLGU FMRDP rehabilitation plan;
- Dismantling of structures - Erosion of newly replaced soils control structures Barangay Cost (PhP social development
B. Biological - Establishing vegetative cover in the - Use indigenous species that were once SMC CRO 29,976,000) plan
area thriving in the area (refer to list of MLGU
- Return of the avifauna and increase species) Barangay
in population of small animals due - Restore the habitat of the fauna by
to presence of habitat increasing vegetative cover
C. Socio-Economic - Reduction and eventual termination - Promote alternative livelihood at early SMC CRO
of employment stage of project cycle MLGU
- Termination of revenues from taxes, - Conduct intensive IEC for Barangay
permits and share of barangay and decommissioning
MLGU when mining operations
cease
360 | P a g e
Stagno Mining Corporation Environmental Risk Assessment
4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL RISK ASSESSMENT (ERA) AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE POLICY AND
GUIDELINES
4.1 Objective
The objective of this environmental risk assessment (ERA) is to analyze the hazards and
characterize the risks and associated with the proposed Stagno Libjo Mining Project for Stagno
Mining Corporation. It also aims to come up with recommendations on risk mitigation and
management based on the results of the risk assessment.
4.1.1 Scope and Limitations of the ERA
Risk characterization focused on safety as well as physical hazards. Safety hazards refer to fire,
explosion and release of toxic substances. Physical hazards, on the other hand, refer to possible
failure of structures that could pose threat to life, property and/or the environment. Potential
accident consequences were described in terms of loss of human lives or injuries and damage to
the environment. The guideline in Annex 2-7e, Revised Procedural Manual for DAO 2003-30
indicated that the required ERA is qualitative and descriptive in nature.
Risk screening using the guidelines in Annex 2-7e, Procedural Manual for DAO 2003-30 showed
that the Total Indicative Sum (TIS) of hazardous substances, with respect to their threshold
inventories, did not exceed unity (1).
4.1.2 ERA Framework
The Procedural Manual for DAO 2003-30 (Annex 2-7e) defines environmental risk assessment as
“the use of universally accepted and scientific methods to assess the risks associated with a
project. Risk is defined as a measure of potential human injury, death, economic loss, or
environmental damage. It is determined based on the probability (likelihood) of the loss, injury/
death or damage occurring and the severity (magnitude) of the loss, injury/death or damage if it
occurs. In simple terms, risk involves two measurable parameters: severity and probability. The
general ERA process is illustrated in Figure 151. The various elements/steps in the risk assessment
procedure are elaborated in the succeeding sections.
361 | P a g e
Figure 151 - The Risk Assessment Procedure
4.1.3 Hazard Identification
The various hazardous processes, activities and substances associated with the proposed Project
were identified at this stage. Hazardous activities and processes with potential to cause onsite
and offsite injuries and fatalities to people were determined. The potential of substances to be
explosive, flammable, and/or toxic was analyzed. The most likely initiating events and causes of
failures leading to the occurrence of hazardous incidents were analyzed vis-à-vis the operation of
the proposed project.
362 | P a g e
4.1.4 Consequence Analysis
Consequence analysis involved the estimation of unwanted consequences, effects, impacts or

outcomes of projected major hazard incidents involving specific activities and substances in the
facility. Major hazard incidents mean accidents involving hazardous activities or substances that
have an impact in terms of death, injury or evacuation of people, damage to property or lasting
harm to the environment.
The consequence analysis focused on accident scenarios that involve the release of flammable
substance.
4.1.5 Frequency Analysis
Frequency analysis is not necessary in worst-case accident scenario analysis, as the objective in
such study is primarily to define the worst-case hazard zones.
4.1.6 Risk Characterization
Due to the qualitative nature of this ERA, risk characterization focused on description of the risks
associated with the various hazards inherent to activities, substances and conditions at the mining
site. This included natural hazards arising from extreme climate events such as tropical cyclones,
flooding, landslides and storm surges; as well as from earthquakes.
4.2 Hazard Identification
4.2.1 Nickel-Chromite Mining
Hazards associated with the nickel -chromite mining component include mass movement of soil
and rocks, release of contaminated sediments from settling ponds, occupational safety hazards,
toxicity from laboratory assay chemicals, and fire due to storage/utilization of flammable
substances, particularly liquid fuel. Exposure to heavy metals and minerals from mining activities
and wastes may likewise exert toxicity impacts to people, animals and plants in the affected area.
Fire hazard is chiefly attributable to storage of diesel and lube oil. Occupational safety hazards
may occur at the various project phases and processes from ground clearing to shipment.
Outcomes from occupational safety hazards include deaths and injuries resulting from
ground/structure failure, fall from heights, being struck or crushed by equipment parts or falling
rocks/debris, vehicular/equipment accidents, and others. Mass movement of
soil/rocks/sediments may result from breach of containing walls of impoundment and berms,
363 | P a g e
overburden storage facilities and settling ponds. It may also arise as a direct result of ore
extraction activities. Such incidents may be triggered by natural events such as inclement weather
conditions (heavy and sustained rains, typhoons, storm surges, etc.), earthquakes and
subsidence; faulty engineering design; inadequate maintenance of structures; and sabotage.
Water contamination could result from the release of heavy metal-laden sediments and run offs,
mining overburden and wastes to water bodies, particularly the streams and coastline. The water
bodies could also become heavily silted with sediments.
4.2.2 Hazard Analysis Matrix
The hazards and risks associated with the various mining activities, processes and conditions are
listed in the Hazard Analysis Matrix (Table 119).
Table 119 - Hazard Analysis Matrix

Hazard Major Hazards Initiating/ Contributing At Risk Sector
Classification/ Unit Factors
Operation
‘A. Mining
1. Storage of Liquid Fire and explosion Presence of ignition -Persons,
fuel (Diesel) following major sources; breach of equipment and
releases/ spills containment; structures
mechanical impacts; within the
exposure to fires and hazard area.
high heat; corrosion;
defective or substandard
tank materials; breach of
bund walls; vandalism
2. Waste and - Land and rock slides Heavy rains, typhoons, -Surrounding
overburden dumps - Siltation of surface earthquakes, defective communities,
and stock yards water bodies; engineering design. personnel and
-Runoffs from workers
overburden may
contain toxic heavy -Ecological
metals and minerals entities
which may
contaminate surface
water bodies
364 | P a g e

Operation
3. Settling Ponds -Breach of Natural disasters -Surface waters
containment of ponds (earthquakes, extreme -Aquatic
and drainage system weather); ecological
could cause flooding of engineering problems; entities
low-lying areas; release sabotage -Surrounding
of heavy-metal communities
contaminated
sediments; siltation;
and contamination of
surface water bodies
and possibly ground
water with toxic heavy
metals and substances.
4. Occupational Safety Hazards
a. Site Preparation
(1) Surveying -Fall from heights Inherent geological -Surveying
-Vehicular accidents formations; adverse team
weather conditions;
human error; vehicular
failure
(2) Clearing and -being struck by felling human error; equipment -clearing team
Grubbing trees, debris and failure; adverse weather
equipment part conditions
-vibration and noise
from power saws and
other equipment
-vehicular and
equipment accidents
(overturning, fall from
heights, etc.)
(3) Laying Out -fall from heights; human error, -workers,
being struck by vehicles equipment/ vehicular drivers and
and earth moving failure operators at
equipment breach of protocols site
365 | P a g e

Operation
-vehicular and earth
moving equipment
accidents
-electrocution
b. Contour Open Pit
Contour mining
Processes
(1) Drilling and -fall from the edge of a Human error -Drilling
Excavation bench breach of protocols operators and
-being struck by falling equipment failure assistants
rocks/debris at the foot face instability
of a face
-inhalation of and
contact with dusts
which predisposes to
respiratory and skin
diseases and possibly
cancer,
-Harmful noise levels
-Being struck by a
moving part of the
drilling equipment
(2) Nickel Ore -inhalation of and lack of or inappropriate -Mining pit
Extraction contact with dusts, protective equipment operators and
nickel and other toxic workers,
heavy metals which neighboring
could predispose to communities
respiratory and skin
diseases and heavy
metal-induced
diseases.
(3) Ore Loading -Being struck by falling breach of protocols -driver,
rocks from loading arm human error operator,
assistants,
trespassers
366 | P a g e

Operation
-falls while gaining failure of hydraulic
access to operator’s system and other
cabin equipment
-vehicular accidents uneven ground
(4) Hauling and -Vehicular accidents incompetent driving -driver,
Transport of Ores and (fall from edge of heavy rains and flooding pedestrians,
Overburden bench, collision with trespassing driver of
other vehicles or breach of protocols smaller
structures, brake failure vehicles,
overturning, etc.)
-inhalation of and/or
contact with dusts
-high level noise
(5) Ore Stockpiling -Inhalation of and airborne dusts especially - workers,
contact with dusts and with strong winds nearby
heavy metals could communities
predispose to
respiratory/skin/eye
diseases and heavy
metal-induced
diseases.
c. LCT and ore ship -Inhalation of and airborne dusts during -dump truck
loading/ unloading contact with dusts and loading/unloading operators,
heavy metals operations stockyard and
-vehicular (dump insufficient causeway
trucks) accidents vehicular/equipment workers, LCT
-LCT accidents maintenance and ore ship
-high level noise driver error crew
breach of protocols
inclement weather
conditions
4. High impact noise Hearing impairment Inadequate equipment Workers at the
maintenance; Plant
Inadequate hearing PPE
367 | P a g e

Operation
E. Natural calamities due to extreme climate events
1. Increased - flooding of low lying -poor engineering design -personnel and
frequency and areas; rock and land and zoning, poor workers of the
intensity of tropical slides; storm surges maintenance of project;
cyclones and tidal flooding structures, defective contractors,
warning systems; nearby
infrastructures along communities
coastlines, riverbanks esp. along
and flood plains coastlines and
in river banks
2. Increased intensity -flooding of low lying -same as above -same as above
and frequency of rains areas; rock/ land slides; -farmers
during rainy season increased soil erosion
and loss of fertility;
storm surge in
causeway
3. Sea level rise -submersion and -location of -same as above
damage of coastal infrastructures near
infrastructures like coastlines
loading/unloading
piers and facilities
4. Drier dry seasons -fire incidents; -presence of ignition -personnel,
and increased increased airborne sources, especially near workers,
ambient dusts; drying of water storage of fuel and contractors,
temperatures reservoirs and sources chemicals; nearby
indiscriminate disposal communities
of live cigarette butts
-inadequate dust
suppression system;
forest/ vegetation
denudation
F. Natural Calamities -collapse of -poor engineering design -same as above
due to Earthquakes infrastructues and and zoning; poor
buildings; spillage of maintenance of
fuel and chemicals structures and
368 | P a g e

Operation
predisposing to fires equipment; location of
and toxic events; land buildings and other
slides; tsunami infrastructures along
coastlines
4.2.3 Risk Screening of Hazardous Substances at the Facility
A risk screening procedure was undertaken to determine the type of environmental risk
assessment to be undertaken and to prioritize the environmental risks presented by the various
hazardous substances and activities. The criteria and process used in risk screening was primarily
based on Annex 2-7e (Guidelines for the Conduct of Environmental Risk Assessment) of the Revised
Procedural Manual of DAO 2003-30. The screening criteria for hazardous substances are (1)
inherent hazardous characteristics of the substance and (2) maximum quantity involved. After
classifying the substances according to defined categories (i.e. flammable, oxidizing, toxic, etc.),
their respective maximum inventories were compared to DENR’s threshold inventory levels
(Levels 1 and 2), which are defined in the Revised DAO 2003-30 guideline. A facility that will
manufacture, process or store any hazardous substance in excess of DENR's Threshold Inventory
Level 2 is required to undertake a quantitative risk assessment. Those with any hazardous
substance exceeding Level 1 threshold inventory but below Level 2 threshold inventory is required
to undertake Hazard Analysis Study, and Emergency/Contingency Plan based on the study and
worst-case scenario. For substances with maximum inventory below Level 1, a risk screening and
emergency plan based on hazard analysis is required.
As far as hazardous substance is concerned, the proposed project will only store and use diesel,
substances that are considered as flammables. Diesel will be used as fuel for vehicles, generator
sets and equipment at the mine site. Given these data, the ERA Coverage was determined as Level
1. That is, an Emergency/Contingency Plan is required based on Worst-case scenario analysis.
4.2.4 Hazardous Characteristics of Diesel
Diesel is a moderately flammable liquid fuel. The National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) of the
U.S.A. assigns to diesel a Flammability Rating 2 (ignites when moderately heated). Distillation
temperature of diesel at 90% point is between 282-338oC. Its minimum flash point temperature
is 52oC. Its other physic-chemical and toxicological properties are listed in Table 120. Fuel oil is
less flammable than diesel.
369 | P a g e
Table 120 - Physico-chemical and toxicological properties of diesel.

Property Value/ Description
CAS RN No(s). 68334-30-5; 68476-30-2;
68476-31-3
UN Number 1993
Maximum Inventory at the Site 50 m3
Flammability Designation/Code Moderately Flammable
o
Flash Point, C 52
Lower flammability limits in air (%) 1.3
Upper flammability limits in Air (%) 6
Autoignition Temperature, oC 254-285
o
Boiling/Condensation point ( C) at 1 atm 282-338
Specific gravity (liquid) 0.841 at 16oC
Vapor pressure 0.0028 bar at 21oC
Sources: CAMEO Chemical Inventory; NREL Liquid Fuels Database, 2007.
4.2.4.1 Fire and Explosion Hazards of Diesel
Vapor cloud explosions and vapor cloud fires are not significant hazards to this particular
substance and activity due to the low vapour pressure of the liquid (0.042 psia at 21oC). The more
probable accident scenario for this type of substance is a pool or tank-top fire.
Hazards from fires are associated with their direct heating effect, by convection within the fire
itself, and thermal radiation from the fire. In case of fire engulfment, the effects of fire on humans
are usually on the skin and on the lungs. Smoke rather than the fire itself is the most common
cause of death indoors. Fires emit radiation, which can produce considerable impact on nearby
equipment and may cause harm to people. Thermal radiation levels and their damaging effects
on equipment and people are described in Table 121 (CCPS-AIChE, 1994).
Table 121 - Effects of radiation from fire.

Incident Flux Type of Damage Caused
(KW/m2) Equipment People
37.5 Damage to process equipment 100% fatality in 1 min.; 1% fatality
(steel structure, piping, vessels, in 10 sec.
etc,) after several minutes of
exposure.
25.0 Minimum energy level to ignite 100% fatality in 1 min.; Significant
wood at indefinitely long exposure injury in 10 sec.
without flame
12.5 Minimum energy to ignite wood 30% fatality in 1 min.; 1st degree
with a flame; melts or degrades burns in 10 sec.
plastic materials
10.0 People will feel pain after 5
seconds and receive second-
370 | P a g e
Incident Flux Type of Damage Caused

(KW/m2) Equipment People
degree burns after 14 seconds.
Usually used to define the fatality
zone, as this level is expected to
quickly cause third degree burns
leading to potential fatalities
5.0 People will feel pain after 13
seconds and receive second-
degree burns after 40 seconds.
Usually used to define the injury
zone.
Sources: Taylor, 1994; USEPA, et al., 1990; World Bank Technical Paper No. 55.
4.2.4.2 Health Hazards of Diesel
The NFPA Health Hazard Rating of Diesel is 1 (slightly hazardous). This slight health hazard is
mainly attributable to its volatile organic compound components (VOCs) which comprise about
1.5% of its total weight. These VOCs are benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene, xylene and other
alkylbenzenes. The acute effects of exposure to high level concentration of various solvents are
generally very similar. High level exposure usually results to disorientation, euphoria, giddiness
and confusion, progressing to unconsciousness, paralysis, convulsion, and death from respiratory
or cardiovascular arrest. Chronic exposure to levels above the threshold level values may result
to specific organ toxicity. The hazardous VOC components of diesel, which may exert deleterious
health impacts, are benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene and xylene.
Benzene is a proven human carcinogen. It is classified as a very hazardous substance. Toxicity to

benzene frequently results from inhalation of its vapors with some undefined contribution from
skin absorption. Acute exposure to high levels of benzene vapors may result to depression of the
central nervous system, leading to unconsciousness and death, or death through cardiac
arrythmias. The major toxic effect of benzene, however, is its hematopoietic toxicity resulting
from chronic exposure to benzene vapors. Among the simple aromatic hydrocarbons,
hematopoietic toxicity is unique to benzene. Chronic exposure to benzene leads to bone marrow
damage, which may show initially as anemia, leukopenia, or thrombocytopenia. Continued
exposure may result in pancytopenia which may eventually lead to bone marrow aplasia, a usually
fatal condition. Bone marrow depression induced by benzene appears to be dose- and time-
dependent. Leukemia induced by exposure to benzene has been noted in humans. In mice and
rats, chronic benzene exposure through inhalation and per oral has been shown to produce solid
tumors in nonhematopoietic organs.
371 | P a g e
Alkylbenzenes. Alkylbenzenes like toluene, ethylbenzene, isoprppylbenzene, trimethylbenzene

and xylene are relatively non-toxic except during acute exposure to high concentrations. This
could be because their major metabolic pathway is toward metabolites that have low toxicity and
are readily excreted. Unlike benzene, they have not been demonstrated to be carcinogenic. Acute
exposure to very high levels of these substances could result to acute toxicity manifested by
central nervous system (CNS) depression, symptoms typical of acute solvent toxicity. Long term
exposure could lead to CNS function impairment (Cragg et. al. 1989; Bardodej and Cirek 1988).
4.2.5 Mass Movement of Rocks and Soil from Overburden and Waste Dump Sites
Waste rocks and soil materials generated from mining and beneficiation/ sizing activities to be
disposed into a series of waste dump stockpiles or used as backfill. Major hazards associated with
mine waste dumps are mass movement of rocks and soil (eg. landslides and rockslides), soil
erosion and runoffs. Such events could be initiated by natural hazards such as earthquakes, heavy
rains and typhoons, and breaching of berms. Rock slides and landslides can result to loss of lives
and injuries, siltation and contamination surface waters, and damage to terrestrial and aquatic
environments. The waste dumps may contain high concentration of heavy metals such as nickel
(Ni), chromite (Cr), cobalt (Co), cadmium (Cd), iron (Fe), lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), arsenic (As) and
copper (Cu). Many of these metals have the potential to exert toxic impacts on people, flora and
fauna. The disturbed condition of soil and rocks at mine sites also predisposes to mass movement
of rocks and soil at the site, especially during inclement weather conditions and earthquakes. Such
events could put to risk the workers at the site, as well as the mining equipment.
4.2.6 Flooding and Mass Release of Sediments from Settling Ponds
The proposed project will be equipped with drainage systems that will drain into settling ponds
to mitigate the impacts of surface runoffs that could lead to soil erosion, siltation and pollution of
water bodies. Breaching of settling ponds could lead to flooding and mass release of sediments
that may be heavily tainted with heavy metals and minerals. Factors that may contribute to such
accidents are natural hazards like strong earthquakes, long duration heavy rains, strong typhoons,
faulty engineering design, and sabotage.
Mass release of sediments and flooding can result to injuries, heavy siltation of affected surface
water systems, and destruction and contamination (with heavy metals and minerals) of affected
terrestrial and aquatic environments.
372 | P a g e
4.2.7 Occupational Safety Hazards
Occupational safety issues involving the project are listed in the Hazard Analysis Matrix (Table
3.1). Occupational safety issues associated with nickel-chromite mining activities include fall from
heights; rock falls and soil movement accidents; vehicular/equipment accidents; being struck by
equipment parts, debris, etc.; respiratory, eye and skin ailments; and hearing impairment due to
high intensity noise.
4.2.8 Exposure to Toxic Heavy Metals and Minerals
Mining activities are expected to increase the loads of heavy metals and other toxic substances in
the vicinity and at the site. Mining wastes are expected to contain toxic heavy metals and minerals
such as nickel, chromium, cadmium, cobalt, iron, manganese, mercury, lead, copper, zinc,
aluminum, selenium and arsenic. Heavy metals may be washed off from the ores and mining
wastes as a result of runoff. Workers who are involved in the extraction of Chromite and Nickel
ores are likely to get exposed to these toxic substances, especially to nickel and chromite, through
skin contact and inhalation of dusts. The toxicological hazards of these substances are
summarized in Table 122. The toxicological character of the identified heavy metals and minerals
are subsequently discussed.
Table 122 - Heavy metals and other hazardous substances in nickel mining.
Substance Effects and Significance
Nickel Carcinogenic; may induce contact dermatitis; may affect male and
female reproductive capacity
Iron Essential nutrient; damages fixtures by staining; partly responsible
for acid mine drainage
Chromium Essential as Cr(III), toxic as Cr(VI)
Cobalt Toxic effects on vascular system and male and female reproductive
organs
Arsenic Toxic, possibly carcinogenic
Copper Essential trace element; toxic to humans, plants and algae at higher
levels
Lead Toxic, harmful to humans and animals, carcinogenic
Manganese Toxic to plants, damages fixtures by staining
Mercury Toxic, mobilized as methyl mercury compounds by anaerobic
bacteria
Zinc Essential element, toxic to plants at higher levels
4.2.8.1 Nickel (Ni)
Nickel may be an essential trace metal in mammals, as it is involved in glucose metabolism. Excess
nickel, however is toxic to life forms. Nickel is a respiratory tract carcinogen, the incidence of
373 | P a g e
which is significantly higher among workers in the nickel refining industry. Nickel may also induce
contact dermatitis (Goyer, 1996). Severe acute and sometimes fatal toxicity may follow exposure
to nickel carbonyl, a highly toxic intermediate by-product of nickel smelting. Workers may
become exposed to highly toxic nickel carbonyl through fugitive fumes which may escape a
defective or substandard nickel ore smelting reactor.
Nickel is slightly absorbed through the gastrointestinal tract. It is transported in the plasma bound
to serum albumin and a host of other small organic ligands, amino acids or polypeptides.
Excretion in the urine is complete in 4 to 5 days. Environmental nickel or nickel concentration in
ambient air influences serum nickel concentration. A study of people living near a large nickel
mine in Ontario revealed serum nickel levels of 4.6±1.4 ug/L, with range of 2.0 to 7.3 mg/L, and
urinary concentrations of 7.9 ± 3.7 ug/day (range 2.3 to 15.7 ug/day). Fecal nickel is generally 100
times the concentration in urine (Goyer, 1996).
Occupational exposure to nickel predisposes humans to lung and nasal cancer. There are also
evidence of increased risks from laryngeal cancer in nickel refinery workers in Norway and gastric
carcinoma and soft tissue sarcomas from the Soviet Union. Increased risks from renal cancer had
also been reported among nickel refinery workers in Norway and Canada. Increased risks from
respiratory tract cancer had also been detected among nickel refining workers. Studies indicate
that the increased risk of cancer among the nickel refining workers could be attributable to nickel
subsulfide (Ni3S2) and nickel sulphate (NiSO4), substances which are present in the nickel molten
ore (Goyer, 1996). Nickel carbonyl [Ni(CO)4], an extremely toxic intermediate product of nickel
refining, accounts for many cases of acute toxicity among nickel refining workers.
Nickel dermatitis is one of the most common forms of allergic contact dermatitis. Increased
ingestion of nickel-containing food increases the probability of external sensitization to nickel and
eventually the episodes of acute nickel dermatitis (Goyer, 1996). Nickel is also reported as
affecting male and female reproductive capacity (Thomas, 1996).
4.2.8.2 Iron (Fe)
Elemental and iron compounds are usual components of nickel ores and mining wastes. In fact,
limonite type of lateritic nickel is highly enriched in Fe. Iron is an essential element to human and
animal metabolism in trace amounts. In excess, it can exert toxic effects and environmental
impacts. The iron compound pyrite (FeS2) is partly to blame for acid mine drainage, one of the
most common and damaging problems in the aquatic environment. Acid mine water is a
consequence of the presence of sulfuric acid produced by the oxidation of pyrite, a process that
occurs very slowly at low pH conditions. Below pH 3.5, the iron oxidation is catalyzed by the iron
374 | P a g e
bacterium Thiobacillus ferrooxidans, and in the pH range 3.5-4.5 it may be catalyzed by a variety
of Metallogenium, a filamentous iron bacteria. The beds of streams afflicted with acid mine
drainage are usually covered with “yellowboy”, an unsightly deposit of amorphous,
semigelatinous Fe(OH)3. The product sulfuric acid is however the most damaging component of
acid mine water. It is directly toxic to organisms and plants (Manahan, 1994).
4.2.8.3 Chromium (Cr)
The process of nickel mining may facilitate the release of chromium to the environment.
Chromium is extracted from chromite ore, the molecular formula of which is [(Fe, Mg)O(Cr, Al,
Fe)2O3]. The largest deposits of chromite are located in the Philippines, South Africa, the former
USSR, southern Zimbabwe and Turkey (Losi et al., 1994). Chromium in trace amounts is an
essential element of human and animal nutrition. It is important in glucose and fat metabolism.
Trivalent Cr is the nutritionally useful form while the hexavalent form is toxic and mutagenic. The
biotoxicity of chromate is mostly a function of its ability to cross biological membranes and its
powerful oxidizing capabilities. Cr(VI) compounds can be absorbed by humans through inhalation,
dermal contact, and ingestion. Excessive Cr exposure can result to ulceration and perforation of
the nasal septum, respiratory cancer, skin ulceration, contact dermatitis, and in the event of
ingestion, kidney damage. It can also cause damage to various proteins and nucleic acids, which
can lead to mutation and carcinogenesis (Lewis and Bianchi, 1982).
4.2.8.4 Cobalt (Co)
Like the other heavy metals selenium, chromium, copper, zinc, cadmium, lead and mercury,
cobalt is known to exert toxic effect on the vascular system through blocking of the calcium
channels and through reactions with the sulfhydryl, carbonyl, or phosphate groups (Ramos et al.,
1996). It is also known to be toxic to the male and female reproductive capacity like the heavy
metals aluminium, boranes, boron, cadmium, lead, mercury and nickel. Excess of Cobalt has been
demonstrated to cause testicular toxicity through inhibition of DNA synthesis Thomas, 1996).
4.2.8.5 Mercury (Hg)
Mercury may also form part of the mining waste. Mercury is a naturally occurring element
present in rocks and ores. It is found as a trace component of many minerals, with continental
rocks containing an average of around 80 ppb. It often has significant correlation with carbon,
sulphur and zinc. Its concentration varies with location depending on the nature of the bedrock
and degree of mineralization. Up to as much as 1000 ug/g maybe contained in some ores. The
general terrestrial concentration of mercury appears to be in the order of 0.05 ug/g (Wren et al.,
375 | P a g e
1995). Mercury is well-known to bioaccumulate or bioconcentrte in aquatic food chains.

Bioaccumulation occurs because mercury when methylated, is very effectively absorbed by a
variety of aquatic organisms. Unlike in aquatic ecosystems, bioaccumulation of mercury in
terrestrial ecosystems is relatively low.
Inhalation of mercury vapour (elemental mercury) may produce acute, corrosive bronchitis and
interstitial pneumonitis. If not fatal, it may be associated with central nervous system effects such
as tremors or increased excitability. Exposure to inorganic mercuric ions increases risks of kidney
damage. Mercury vapour and organomercury are potent neurotoxicants. Methylmercury is well-
known as an extremely toxic substance in the environment. The sysmptoms of methylmercury
poisoning (Minimata disease) are mainly neurological in nature. It includes ataxia, constriction of
visual field, sensory disturbance, impairment of speech, impairment of hearing, tremors, metnal
disturbance, and many others (Chang and Cockerham, 1994).
4.2.8.6 Manganese (Mn)
Manganese may also constitute one of the heavy metal wastes of mining. This metal is neurotoxic
and could induce Parkinson-like syndromes and degeneration of the caudate nucleus, basal
ganglia, and substancia nigra (Chang and Cockerham, 1994).
4.2.9 Natural Hazards Due to Extreme Climate Events
The increasing frequency and intensity of extreme climate events are being attributed as direct
consequences of global climate change, which is primarily due to global warming. As stated by
the Manila Observatory (2010) in its paper Technical Primer on Climate Change in the Philippine,
“Climate change will increase the magnitude and frequency of weather hazards to an unknown
degree”. This phenomenon poses an increased risk of disasters in the Philippines, as risk is not
only proportional to the magnitude of events but on the number of people affected and their
capacity to recover from the impacts of an event.
Other direct impacts of climate change in the Philippines are significant increases in frequency of
high extreme ambient temperature (>35oC), which manifests as significant increase in the
frequency of hot days and warm nights; drier dry seasons; and wetter rainy seasons. Based on
climate modeling conducted by PAGASA for the various regions of the Philippines, annual mean
temperatures are expected to rise by 0.9 degrees Celsius to 1.1 degrees in 2020 and by 1.8
degrees to 2.1 degrees in 2050” (Hilario, et al., n.d.). PAGASA likewise predicted that “the drier
seasons of March-April-May will become drier still, while the wetter season of Sept- Oct. and
November will become wetter” (Hilario, et al., n.d.).
376 | P a g e
4.3 Risk Management
The risk assessment conducted showed that risks expected from the project are relatively low and
can be prevented and/or controlled with application of appropriate mitigation measures. Hazards
identified are mass movement of rocks and soil, flooding and mass release of sediments from
settling ponds, exposure to toxic heavy metals, occupational safety hazards, and natural
calamities for the nickel – chromite mining project component.
The control and prevention of project-associated risks is dependent on the Company’s resolve
and capability to pursue their risk management and emergency plans. It would be for the interest
of the Company and the surrounding communities that identified risks be appropriately mitigated
and/or prevented. Major considerations in risk reduction are appropriate project design;
compliance with standards in the design, construction and maintenance of the mining equipment
and facilities; well-maintained safety systems; well-trained and motivated workforce; and the
establishment of an appropriate emergency response and contingency systems.
To prevent and/or control the identified risks and hazards the company should implement the
Safety and Health Program and Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan.
4.3.1 Summary and Recommendations
Hazards associated with the nickel – chromite mining project component are mass movement of
soil/rocks from waste dumps and mine sites; mass release and/or leaching of heavy-metal
contaminated sediments from settling ponds; flooding; occupational safety hazards;
fire/explosion hazards from storage liquid fuel (diesel), exposure to dusts and toxic heavy metals;
siltation and contamination of surface water bodies with heavy metals; soil erosion and loss of
soil fertility; and natural calamities, especially during extreme climate events. Exposure to heavy
metals and minerals from mining activities and wastes may exert toxicity impacts to people,
animals and plants in the affected areas.
Occupational safety hazards may occur at the various operation units from mining project site
preparation to barge/ship loading. Outcome of occupational safety hazards include deaths and
injuries resulting from ground/structure failure, fall from heights, being struck or crushed by
equipment parts or falling rocks/debris, vehicular/equipment accidents, and others. Mass
movement of soil and rocks may occur at waste dumps, mine sites and in disturbed elevated
areas. Mass release of contaminated sediments and flooding may arise mainly due to breach of
containing walls of impoundment and dikes especially at settling ponds and overburden storage
facilities. Such incidents may be triggered by natural events such as extreme climate events
377 | P a g e
(torrential rains, strong typhoons, storm surges, etc.) earthquakes and subsidence; faulty
engineering design; inadequate maintenance of structures; and sabotage. Water contamination
could result from the release of heavy metals, minerals, and mining overburden and wastes to
water bodies. The surface water bodies could also become heavily silted and contaminated with
heavy metals.
Particular recommendations to mitigate and manage identified hazards are listed in Table 123.
Table 123 - Identified hazards and corresponding mitigating measures

Hazard Major Hazards Mitigating Measures
Classification/ Unit
Operation
A. Fire and Explosion
1. Liquid Fuel Storage Fire following -Remove/reduce ignition sources in the area.
(Diesel) major releases/ -Ensure regular inspection and maintenance
spills bund containments (bund capacity should at
least be 110% of the tank’s capacity).
-Ensure regular inspection and maintenance of
tanks, pipings, hoses, valves, gauges and other
accessories.
-Maintain a safety radius or buffer zone
around the facility.
-Ensure provision of fire control devices and
systems.
-Ensure strict adherence to Emergency
Preparedness and Response and Plan (EPRP)
-Ensure maintenance of properly functioning
fire trucks, fire extinguishers and other fire-
fighting equipment.
B. Flooding and Mass
Movement of Rocks
and Soil
1. Waste Overburden -Land and rock -Ensure regular inspections and proper
Dumps and Mine sites slides maintenance of containment berms.
-Siltation of -Batter off final waste dump slope to at most
surface water 20 degrees.
bodies; -Use wastes and overburden as backfill.
-Runoffs from -Ensure implementation of rehabilitation plan
overburden may on waste dumps.
contain toxic -Ensure proper siting of the overburden/waste
heavy metals and storage facility.
minerals which
may contaminate
surface water
bodies
2. Settling Ponds -Breach of -Ensure appropriate siting, design and
containment of construction of the facilities.
378 | P a g e

Operation
ponds and -Ensure regular, as well as emergency
drainage system inspections and monitoring of structures
could cause -Ensure proper and regular maintenance of
flooding of low- the facility.
lying areas; -Strictly implement security measures to
siltation and prevent sabotage of infrastructures.
contamination of
surface water
bodies and
possibly ground
water with toxic
heavy metals and
substances.
C. Occupational
Hazards
1. Site Preparation
a. Surveying -Fall from heights -Ensure that vehicles used are well maintained
-Vehicular and suitable for the terrain.
accidents -Strictly implement safety protocols.
b. Clearing and Waste -Being struck by -Adopt and implement the safest methods/
Stripping felling trees, technology.
debris and -Ensure that persons doing specialized tasks
equipment part (eg. Tree felling) are fully trained.
-Vibration and – Use of well-maintained equipment.
noise from power -Ensure use of personal protection gears
saws and other
equipment
-Vehicular and
equipment
accidents
(overturning, fall
from heights, etc.)
c. Laying Out -Fall from heights; -Use of well-maintained and suitable
being struck by equipment and vehicles.
vehicles and earth -Use of properly trained crew and operators,
moving equipment especially drivers of large equipment like
-vehicular and cranes and earth moving vehicles.
earth moving
equipment
accidents
-Electrocution
2. Open Pit Mining
Operation
a. Drilling and -Fall from the edge -Use of well-maintained and suitable
Excavation of a bench equipment and vehicles.
379 | P a g e

Operation
-Being struck by -Use of properly trained crew and operators,
falling especially drivers of large equipment like
rocks/debris at the cranes and earth moving vehicles.
foot of a face
-Inhalation of and
contact with dusts
which predisposes
to respiratory
diseases
-Harmful noise
levels
-Being struck by a
moving part of the
drilling equipment
b. Ore Extraction -Inhalation of and -Ensure use of appropriate personal
contact with dusts, protection equipment.
nickel and other -Use of appropriate equipment and vehicles
toxic heavy metals with protective operator cabin.
which could
predispose to
respiratory and
skin diseases and
heavy metal-
induced diseases.
c. Loading -Being struck by -Ensure that drivers are well-trained.
falling rocks from -Ensure use of appropriate and properly
loading arm maintained vehicles and equipment.
-Falls while gaining -Ensure implementation of safety protocols.
access to
operator’s cabin
-Vehicular
accidents
3. Transport of Ores Vehicular -Avoid operation during inclement weather.
and Overburden accidents (fall -Maintain proper security and cordon off
from edge of hazardous areas.
bench, collision -Ensure good maintenance and regular testing
with other vehicles vehicles, especially of brakes.
or structures, -Driver/operator cabs are protected from
overturning, etc.) dusts and heat.
-Inhalation of -Restrict access to vehicles
and/or contact
with dusts
-High level noise
4. Ore Stockpiling -Inhalation of and -Provide workers and operators with personal
contact with dusts protection equipment (e.g. masks, gloves,
and heavy metals googles).
380 | P a g e

Operation
could predispose
to
respiratory/skin/e
ye diseases and
heavy metal-
induced diseases.
D. Natural Calamities
Due to Extreme
Climate Events
1. Increased - Flooding of low -Ensure regular review of the Project’s ERPP to
frequency, intensity lying areas; rock ensure its adequacy and effectiveness to
and range of tropical and landslides; respond to changing situations.
cyclones storm surges and -Ensure strict implementation of and
tidal flooding compliance with the safety and health
program, especially the EPRP.
- Ensure regular and timely inspections and
monitoring of containment dikes, retaining
walls, and other retaining structures.
-Ensure that all personnel, workers and
contractors are properly oriented of the EPRP
and ensure the regular conduct of emergency
drills for situations such as fires, tsunami,
flooding and earthquakes.
-Conduct seminars, workshops, and other
education/ information campaigns on climate
change, its impacts and appropriate responses
to mitigate impacts (tailored to the specific
condition in the area).
2. Increased intensity -Flooding of low -Ensure regular review of the Project’s ERPP to
and frequency of rains lying areas; rock/ ensure its adequacy and effectiveness to
during wet season landslides; tidal respond to changing situations.
flooding; -Ensure strict implementation of and
increased soil compliance with the safety and health
erosion and loss of program, especially the EPRP.
soil fertility - Ensure regular and timely inspections and
3. Drier dry seasons -Fire incidents; monitoring of containment dikes, retaining
and increased increased airborne walls, and other retaining structures.
ambient dusts; drying of -Ensure that all personnel, workers and
temperatures water reservoirs contractors are properly oriented of the EPRP
and sources; and ensure the regular conduct of emergency
increased diseases drills for situations such as fires, tsunami,
(i.e. respiratory, flooding and earthquakes.
skin diseases, heat -Conduct seminars, workshops, and other
strokes, dizzy education/ information campaigns on climate
spells other change, its impacts and appropriate responses
diseases linked
381 | P a g e

Operation
with hot,dry to mitigate impacts (tailored to the specific
seasons) condition in the area).
-Ensure the implementation of the
rehabilitation and reforestation program of
mined-out areas and other denuded areas.
-Strictly implement fire prevention and control
measures and protocols.
-Ensure strict implementation of dust
suppression measures.
-provide personnel protective equipment to
workers, especially dust masks, eye goggles.
E. Earthquakes and -Collapse of -Formulate and implement an earthquake and
Tsunamis infrastructures tsunami emergency response plan that
and buildings; includes the following: monitoring and
spillage of fuel and warning system; system of communication
chemicals within and outside the mine site; SOPs for all
predisposing to personnel, workers and contractors; and
fires and toxic evacuation plan.
events; landslides; -Conduct regular and timely orientation and
tsunami drills of all personnel, workers, contractors, as
well as nearby communities, on the
earthquake/tsunami emergency response
plan and procedures.
-Ensure regular and timely inspections and
monitoring of all buildings and infrastructures
within the mine site.
-Ensure proper zoning and location, as well as
good engineering, of buildings and other
infrastructures.
382 | P a g e
Stagno Mining Corporation Environmental Compliance Monitoring
5.0 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE MONITORING
5.1 Self-Monitoring Plan
This section presents the proposed framework for compliance monitoring of the project, which
includes, among others, the environmental parameters necessary to monitor the identified key
environmental impacts of the proposed project expansion.
As required by DENR Memorandum Circular No. 2010-14 and RPM for DAO 2003-30, and as a pro-
active tool in minimizing/eliminating adverse project consequences to the environment, an
“Environmental Quality Performance Level” (EQPL) has been identified for each critical parameter
associated with identified significant project impacts. The limit level shall be the regulated
threshold of pollutant (standard that must not be exceeded) while the action level is set lower
than the limit level wherein management measures must be implemented so as not to reach the
regulated threshold.
The following mechanisms and monitoring schemes are also discussed:

▪ Environmental Monitoring Plan;
▪ Multi-sectoral Monitoring Framework; and
▪ Environmental Guarantee and Monitoring Fund Commitment.
383 | P a g e
Table 124 - Environmental Monitoring Plan

Key Potential Parameters Sampling and Measurement Plan Lead Annual EQPL Management Scheme
Environmental Impacts per to be Freque Person/ Estimated EQPL Range Management Measure
Method Location
Aspects Envt’l Sector monitored ncy Office Cost (PhP) Alert Action Limit Alert Action Limit
Pre-Construction/Development Phase
Site Clearing Vegetation Diversity and Quadrat Annual Areas SMC/ Part of Low survival Low survival Low survival Continue Replanting and Implementation
and removal Species sampling adjacent to MEPEO/ EPEP cost rate (75%) rate (70%) rate (65%) monitoring and research of of research and
Overburden Richness for flora the project PCO assessment of other suitable continuous
Removal Threat to and site (since floral survival species in the replanting
Construction existence and transect flora and area
of access road, loss of monitoring fauna
admin, port ecologically for fauna monitoring
and support and were within
facilities economically the project
important site was
species conducted
prior
clearing)
Soil erosion Occurrence Record Semi- Within the SMC/ Part of 1 to 2 times per 3 to 4 times 5 to 6 times Continues Implement a Limit operation in
of soil keeping of annual mine site MEPEO/ EPEP cost quarter per quarter per quarter monitoring of suitable and high slopes areas
erosion per amount of PCO high slope area appropriate while
quarter topsoil slope / ground implementing the
removed failure suitable
monitoring plan measures to
to detect alleviate erosion
instability at an recurrence.
early and non-
critical stage so
that safety
measures could
be initiated to
prevent or
minimize
impacts
Generation of Solid and Record Monthl Within SMC/ Part of Accumulation Accumulated Wastes Proper Regular audits Immediate
solid and hazardous keeping of y constructio MEPEO/ EPEP cost of domestic waste become become segregation and hauling and
generated n site PCO wastes, scraps hazard to both toxic or maintenance of disposal of
384 | P a g e
Method Location
hazardous waste solid and etc. within the vehicle and serve as Appropriate waste accumulated
wastes generated hazardous DENR- project site employees breeding labeling of management wastes
waste, accredite ground for waste system For hazardous
mode of d pests, which containers wastes, hauling
disposal HazWaste can be a Implementation and treatment via
and volume Transport vector for of good DENR accredited
disposed or er infectious housekeeping transporter/
recycled disease treater
Daily 80% of the limit 90% of the Extraction
monitor value limit value rate limit set
ing by the Check any
Quarter Pollution NWRB in the additional water
Water Check any
Groundwater ly Control water uses,
Sources additional water
and Volume of reportin Officer / Part of permit Check any Check the water
Flow Spring uses,
Surface water water g operating Total additional water system for any
meters Rivers/Cree Check the water
contaminatio extracted through Mining cost available uses leakages,
ks system for any
n the Operatio water supply Consider other
Deep well/s leakages,
SMR ns alternative
and sources of water
NWRB
reports
Effluent TSS Parcel 1 & 2 Class C Class C Class C Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the
pH In-situ Monthl Settling Pollution Part of TSS=80-89 mg/l TSS=90-99 TSS=100 source and source to source to identify
Class C Mn measureme y Ponds Control operating pH: 6.4-6.8 or mg/l mg/l identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
(Tributaries of As nt using monitor Officer cost 9.0-9.2 pH: 6.1-6.3 or pH: 6.0 (min) pollutant pollutant sources
Gaas Inlet) Cd hand-held ing Mn: 1.5-1.7 9.3-9.4 or 9.5 (max) sources sources
Cr (VI) water mg/l Mn: 1.8-1.9 Mn = 2 mg/l Provide
Pb quality As: 0.032-0.035 mg/l As = 0.04 Conduct If the problem is additional
Hg tester (pH, mg/l As: 0.036- mg/l corrective within the mitigation
Ni Temp.) Cd: 0.008- 0.039 mg/l Cd = 0.01 actions if construction/ measures or
Nitrate 0.0089 mg/l Cd: 0.009- mg/l needed operation area, pollution control
Grab Cr: 0.016-017 0.0099 mg/l Cr = 0.02 conduct facilities
sampling mg/l Cr: 0.018- mg/l adjustments/
and Pb: 0.08-0.089 0.019 mg/l Pb = 0.1 appropriate Review current
mg/l mg/l corrective action design of
385 | P a g e
Method Location
laboratory Hg: 0.0032- Pb: 0.09-0.099 Hg = 0.004 at identified pollution control
analysis 0.0035 mg/l mg/l mg/l pollutant facility. Revise/
Ni: 0.800-0.899 Hg: 0.0036- Ni = 1 mg/l source. improve/ make
NO3-N: 11.2- 0.0039 mg/l NO3-N = 14 adjustments if
12.5 mg/l Ni: 0.900- mg/l necessary
0.999 mg/l
NO3-N: 12.6-
13.9 mg/l
Effluent TSS Class SC Class SC Class SC Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the
pH In-situ Monthl SLUP Area Pollution Part of TSS=80-89 mg/l TSS=90-99 TSS=100 source and source to source to identify
Class SC Gaas Oil & Grease measureme y Settling Control operating pH: 6.4-6.8 or mg/l mg/l identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
Inlet Color nt using monitor Ponds Officer cost 8.8-8.85 pH: 6.1-6.3 or pH: 6.0 (min) pollutant pollutant sources
Ammonia hand-held ing Oil and O&G: 8 - 8.9 8.86-8.9 or 9 (max) sources sources
(NH3) water Water mg/l O&G: 9 – 9.9 O&G = 10 Provide
Nitrate quality Separator/s Color: 120-134 mg/l mg/l Conduct If the problem is additional
(NO3-N) tester (pH, Motorpool TCU Color: 135-149 Color=150 corrective within the mitigation
Ni Temp.) Area NH3: 0.40-0.44 TCU TCU actions if construction/ measures or
Cd mg/l NH3: 0.45- NH3 = 0.5 needed operation area, pollution control
Pb Grab NO3-N:16-17.9 0.49 mg/l mg/l conduct facilities
Hg sampling mg/l NO3-N: 18- NO3-N = 20 adjustments/
Benzo(a)pyr and Ni: 0.240-0.269 19.9 mg/l mg/l appropriate Review current
ene laboratory Cd: 0.008- Ni: 0.270- Ni = 0.3 mg/l corrective action design of
Surfactants analysis 0.0089 mg/l 0.299 mg/l Cd = 0.01 at identified pollution control
(MBAS) Pb: 0.08-0.089 Cd: 0.009- mg/l pollutant facility. Revise/
mg/l 0.0099 mg/l Pb = 0.1 source. improve/ make
Hg: 0.0032- Pb: 0.09-0.099 mg/l adjustments if
0.0035 mg/l mg/l Hg = 0.004 necessary
Benzo(a)pyrene Hg: 0.0036- mg/l
: 2.4-2.6 mg/l 0.0039 mg/l Benzo(a)pyr
MBAS: 12-13.4 Benzo(a)pyren ene = 3 mg/l
mg/l e: 2.7-2.9 mg/l MBAS = 15
MBAS: 13.5- mg/l
14.9 mg/l
386 | P a g e
Method Location
BOD Class C Class C Class C Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the
Cl In-situ Monthl All Pollution Part of BOD: 5.6-6.2 BOD: 6.3-6.9 BOD = 7 source and source to source to identify
Color measureme y freshwater Control operating mg/l mg/l mg/l identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
DO nt using quality Officer cost Cl:280-314 mg/l Cl: 315-349 Cl = 350 pollutant pollutant sources
Fecal hand-held stations Color: 60-66 mg/l mg/l sources sources
Coliform water TCU Color: 67-69 Color = 75 Provide
NO3-N quality SW4, SW6, DO: 5.6-6.0 TCU TCU Conduct If the problem is additional
Phosphate tester (pH, SW7 mg/l DO: 5.1-5.5 DO = 5 mg/l corrective within the mitigation
pH Temp., DO) F.Coli: 160-179 mg/l minimum actions if construction/op measures or
Temp. MPN/100ml F.Coli: 180-199 F.Coli = 200 needed eration area, pollution control
TSS Grab NO3-N: 5.6-6.2 MPN/100ml MPN/100ml conduct facilities
Freshwater / O&G sampling mg/l NO3-N: 6.3-6.9 NO3-N = 7 adjustments/
Surface Water As and Phosphate: 0.4- mg/l mg/l appropriate If source is not
contaminatio Cd laboratory 0.44 Phosphate: Phosphate = corrective action project
n Cr(VI) analysis pH: 7.1-7.4 or 0.45-0.49 mg/l 0.5 mg/l at identified construction,
(Ambient) Pb 8.8-8.85 pH: 6.6-7.0 or pH: 6.5 or pollutant inform MMT
Mn Temp: 26.2- 8.86-8.9 9.0 source. regarding
Class C Hg 27°C or 28.9- Temp: 25.1- Temp. 25-31 possible source
Tributaries of Ni 29.8 26.1 or 29.9- °C for the group’s
San Jose River TSS: 64-72 mg/l 30.9 °C TSS = 80 investigation and
& O&G: 1.5-1.7 TSS: 73-79 mg/l coordination with
Gaas Inlet mg/l mg/l O&G = 2 LGU
As:0.015-0.017 O&G: 1.8-1.9 mg/l
mg/l mg/l As = 0.02
Cd:0.004- As:0.018-0.019 mg/l
0.0044 mg/l mg/l Cd = 0.005
Cr: 0.008-0.009 Cd: 0.0045- mg/l
mg/l 0.0049 mg/l Cr = 0.01
Pb:0.04-0.044 Cr: 0.009-0.01 mg/l
mg/l mg/l Pb = 0.05
Mn: 0.16-0.17 Pb:0.045- mg/l
mg/l 0.049 mg/l Mn = 0.20
Hg:0.0006- Mn: 0.18-0.19 mg/l
0.0079 mg/l mg/l Hg = 0.001
mg/l
387 | P a g e
Method Location
Ni: 0.16-0.17 Hg:0.0008- Ni = 0.20
mg/l 0.0009 mg/l mg/l
Ni: 0.18-0.19
mg/l
BOD Class SC Class SC Class SC Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the
Cl In-situ Monthl All Pollution Part of Color: 60-66 Color: 67-69 Color = 75 source and source to source to identify
Color measureme y freshwater Control operating TCU TCU TCU identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
DO nt using quality Officer cost DO: 5.6-6.0 DO: 5.1-5.5 DO = 5 mg/l pollutant pollutant sources
Fecal hand-held stations mg/l mg/l minimum sources sources
Coliform water F.Coli: 160-179 F.Coli: 180-199 F.Coli = 200 Provide
NO3-N quality SW1, SW2, MPN/100ml MPN/100ml MPN/100ml Conduct If the problem is additional
Phosphate tester (pH, SW3, SW5 NO3-N: 8 - 8.9 NO3-N: 9 – 9.9 NO3-N = 10 corrective within the mitigation
pH Temp., DO) mg/l mg/l mg/l actions if construction/op measures or
Temp. Phosphate: 0.4- Phosphate: Phosphate = needed eration area, pollution control
Freshwater /
TSS Grab 0.44 0.45-0.49 mg/l 0.5 mg/l conduct facilities
Surface Water
O&G sampling pH: 7.1-7.4 or pH: 6.6-7.0 or pH: 6.5(min) adjustments/
contaminatio
As and 7.4-7.64 7.65-8.49 or 8.5(max) appropriate If source is not
n
Cd laboratory Temp: 26.2- Temp: 25.1- Temp. 25-31 corrective action project
(Ambient)
Cr(VI) analysis 27°C or 28.9- 26.1 or 29.9- °C at identified construction,
Pb 29.8 30.9 °C TSS = 80 pollutant inform MMT
Class SC
Mn TSS: 64-72 mg/l TSS: 73-79 mg/l source. regarding
Main
Hg O&G: 2.4-2.6 mg/l O&G = 3 possible source
Gaas Inlet
Ni mg/l O&G: 2.7-2.9 mg/l for the group’s
As:0.015-0.017 mg/l As = 0.02 investigation and
mg/l As:0.018-0.019 mg/l coordination with
Cd:0.004- mg/l Cd = 0.005 LGU
0.0044 mg/l Cd: 0.0045- mg/l
Cr: 0.04-0.044 0.0049 mg/l Cr = 0.05
mg/l Cr: 0.045- mg/l
Pb:0.04-0.044 0.049 mg/l Pb = 0.05
mg/l Pb:0.045- mg/l
Mn: 0.32-0.35 0.049 mg/l Mn = 0.40
mg/l Mn: 0.36-0.39 mg/l
mg/l
388 | P a g e
Method Location
Hg:0.0016- Hg:0.0018- Hg = 0.002
0.0017 mg/l 0.0019 mg/l mg/l
Ni: 0.048-0.053 Ni: 0.054- Ni = 0.06
Cl Class A Class A Class A Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the

Color In-situ Monthl GW1 Pollution Part of source and source to source to identify
Fecal measureme y Control operating Cl:200-224 mg/l Cl: 225-249 Cl = 250 identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
Coliform nt using Deep well Officer cost Color: 40-44 mg/l mg/l pollutant pollutant sources
NO3-N hand-held to be TCU Color: 45-49 Color = 50 sources sources
pH water constructed F.Coli <1.1 TCU TCU Provide
TSS quality if any MPN/100ml F.Coli <1.1 F.Coli <1.1 Conduct If the problem is additional
O&G tester (pH, NO3-N: 5.6-6.2 MPN/100ml MPN/100ml corrective within the mitigation
As Temp.) mg/l NO3-N: 6.3-6.9 NO3-N = 7 actions if construction/op measures or
Cd pH: 7.1-7.4 or mg/l mg/l needed eration area, pollution control
Cr(VI) Grab 7.4-7.64 pH: 6.6-7.0 or pH: 6.5(min) conduct facilities
Pb sampling TSS: 40-44 mg/l 7.65-8.49 or 8.5(max) adjustments/
Groundwater
Mn and O&G: 0.80-0.89 TSS: 45-49 TSS = 50 appropriate If source is not
contaminatio
Hg laboratory mg/l mg/l mg/l corrective action project
n
Ni analysis As:0.008-0.009 O&G: 0.90- O&G = 1 at identified construction,
mg/l 0.99 mg/l mg/l pollutant inform MMT
Class A
Cd:0.0024- As:0.009-0.01 As = 0.01 source. regarding
0.0026 mg/l mg/l mg/l possible source
Cr: 0.008-0.009 Cd: 0.0027- Cd = 0.003 for the group’s
mg/l 0.0029 mg/l mg/l investigation and
Pb:0.008-0.009 Cr: 0.009-0.01 Cr = 0.01 coordination with
mg/l mg/l mg/l LGU
Mn: 0.16-0.17 Pb:0.009-0.01 Pb = 0.01
mg/l mg/l mg/l
Hg:0.0006- Mn: 0.18-0.19 Mn = 0.20
0.0079 mg/l mg/l mg/l
Ni: 0.016-0.017 Hg:0.0008- Hg = 0.001
Ni: 0.018- Ni = 0.02
0.019 mg/l mg/l
389 | P a g e
Method Location
Increase in Ambient TSP and Quarter Project Project PhP 50,000 ≥75% of ≥ 90% of NAAQS (in Monitor levels Check for Suspend
ambient air TSP, PM10, PM10– ly or as boundary, proponen per month ambient ambient µg/Nm3) and determine complaints from construction
levels SO2, and High frequen nearest t/ standard. EQPL standard. NO2 = 260 prevailing wind residence related work that
NO2 volume/gra t when residences, contracto (Alert Mininum EQPL (Action TSP = 300 flows and other Implement causes
vimetric necessa and r in µg/Nm3) minimum in PM10 = 200 meteorological mitigation exceedance with
SO2 – ry downwind NO2 = 195 µg/Nm3) SO2=340 condition measures to ambient levels
Pararosalin of TSP = 225 NO2 = 234 Identify possible reduce fugitive (e.g., TSP) and
e prevailing PM10 = 150 TSP = 270 sources of high emissions during implement
NO2- Griess wind flows SO2 =255 PM10 = 180 ambient construction corrective
Saltzman SO2 =306 concentrations (e.g., water measure (e.g.,
Method spraying) water spraying)
Inform
management in
case the
proposed
project is the
possible source
of high ambient
levels based on
meteorological
condition
Increase in Ambient Sound level Quarter Nearby Project PhP 50,000 45 dBA 50dBA Ambient: Check Continue Implement noise
ambient noise noise level meter ly or as settlements proponen per month 55dBA background monitoring attenuation
levels frequen t./ HSE (daytime) noise levels noise levels measures, if
t when Inform necessary
necessa If community prior
ry construction to construction
is 24 hrs, activities that
Ambient: produce very
55dBA high noise levels
(daytime) (e.g., pile
driving)
390 | P a g e
Method Location
Morning/eve Conduct noise
ning-50 dBA assessment to
Nighttime – mitigate noise
45 dBA source that
contribute to
higher noise
levels
Creation of No. of HR Semi- Mine/ Proponen Manifestati 20% decrease 30% decrease 50% Verify and Conduct Creation of
employment workers Manpower Annual Impact t through ons/ decrease validate report investigation employment
opportunities employed Monitoring Communiti HR observation Implement Take action to opportunities
from the Report es Manager s during measures to address negative
impact FGDs/ KIIs/ and CRO monitoring mitigate impact
communities Community that negative impact
, including Consultatio minimal
employment ns labor force
from came from
contractors the local
communitie
s
Population Peace and Crime Semi- Mine/ Proponen Manifestati 20% increase 30% increase 50% Verify and Conduct Strict
influx order in the Incidence Annual Impact t through ons/ increase validate report investigation coordination and
resulting to local Report Communiti Security observation Implement Take action to partnership with
social community FGDs/ KIIs/ es Manager s during measures to address negative LGU and other
tensions Community and CRO monitoring mitigate impact government
Consultatio on possible negative impact offices involve
ns occurrence
of social
tensions
Health and Accidents Work Semi- Mine/ Proponen Manifestati 20% increase 30% increase 50% Verify and Conduct Firm
safety and related Annual Impact t through ons/ increase validate report investigation implementation
impacts morbidity accident Communiti Safety observation Implement Take action to of Safety and
cases related report and es Officer s during measures to address negative Health Program
to the review of and CRO monitoring mitigate impact
construction community that will negative impact
health result to
391 | P a g e
Method Location
condition negative
FGDs/ KIIs/ impact
Community
Consultatio
ns
Business No. of Ocular/File Semi- Impact Proponen Manifestati 20% decrease 30% decrease 50% Verify and Conduct Increase business
opportunities business d Annual Communiti t through ons/ decrease validate report investigation opportunities
established Observatio es CRO observation Implement Take action to
due to the ns Gather s during measures to address negative
construction secondary monitoring mitigate impact
data from that will negative impact
Barangay/ result to
Municipal negative
LGUs FGDs/ impact
KIIs/
Community
Consultatio
n
Increase in No. of road/ Gather data Semi- Impact Proponen Manifestati 20% increase 30% increase 50% Verify and Conduct Firm
traffic hazards traffic from Annual Communiti t through ons/ increase validate report investigation implementation
accidents Barangay/ es CRO observation Implement Take action to of Safety and
Municipal s during measures to address negative Health Program
LGUs FGDs/ monitoring mitigate impact
KIIs/ that will negative impact
Community result to
Consultatio negative
ns impact
Operations Phase
Daily mining Vegetation Diversity and Quadrat Annual Areas SMC/ Part of Low survival Low survival Low survival Continue Replanting and Implementation
operation removal Species sampling adjacent to MEPEO/ EPEP cost rate (75%) rate (70%) rate (65%) monitoring and research of of research and
Contour Richness for flora the project PCO assessment of other suitable continuous
mining Threat to and site (since floral survival species in the replanting
operations existence and transect flora and area
392 | P a g e
Method Location
Ore shipping loss of monitoring fauna
Land clearing ecologically for fauna monitoring
(removal of and were within
vegetation), economically the project
stripping of important site was
overburden or species conducted
waste rock prior
(applicable to clearning)
contour Soil erosion Occurrence Record Semi- Within the SMC/ Part of 1 to 2 times per 3 to 4 times 5 to 6 times Continues Implement a Limit operation in
mining); of soil keeping of annual Mine site MEPEO/ EPEP cost quarter per quarter per quarter monitoring of suitable and high slopes areas
Stockpiling erosion per amount of PCO high slope area appropriate while
Progressive quarter topsoil slope / ground implementing the
rehabilitation removed failure suitable
of mined-out monitoring plan measures to
areas to detect alleviate erosion
instability at an recurrence.
early and non-
critical stage so
that safety
measures could
be initiated to
prevent or
minimize
impacts
Generation of Solid and Record Monthl Within SMC/ Part of Accumulation Accumulated Wastes Proper Regular audits Immediate
solid and hazardous keeping of y constructio MEPEO/ EPEP cost of domestic waste become become segregation and hauling and
hazardous waste generated n site PCO wastes, scraps hazard to both toxic or Appropriate maintenance of diposal of
wastes generated solid and etc. within the vehicle and serve as labeling of waste accumulated
hazardous DENR- project site employees breeding waste management wastes
waste, accredite ground for containers system For hazardous
mode of d pests, which Implementation wastes, hauling
disposal HazWaste can be a of good and treatment via
and volume Transport vector for housekeeping DENR accredited
er
393 | P a g e
Method Location
disposed or infectious transporter/
recycled disease treater
Daily 80% of the limit 90% of the Extraction

monitor value limit value rate limit set
ing by the Check any
Degradation Quarter Pollution NWRB in the additional water
Water Check any
of water ly Control water uses,
Sources additional water
quality Volume of reportin Officer / Part of permit Check any Check the water
Flow Spring uses,
water g operating Total additional water system for any
meters Rivers/Cree Check the water
(Groundwater extracted through Mining cost available uses leakages,
ks system for any
Surface the Operatio water supply Consider other
Deep well/s leakages,
water) SMR ns alternative
and sources of water
NWRB
reports
TSS Parcel 1 & 2 Class C Class C Class C Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the
Degradation pH In-situ Monthl Settling Pollution Part of TSS=80-89 mg/l TSS=90-99 TSS=100 source and source to source to identify
of water Mn measureme y Ponds Control operating pH: 6.4-6.8 or mg/l mg/l identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
quality As nt using monitor Officer cost 9.0-9.2 pH: 6.1-6.3 or pH: 6.0 (min) pollutant pollutant sources
Cd hand-held ing Mn: 1.5-1.7 9.3-9.4 or 9.5 (max) sources sources
Cr (VI) water mg/l Mn: 1.8-1.9 Mn = 2 mg/l Provide
(Effluent Pb quality As: 0.032-0.035 mg/l As = 0.04 Conduct If the problem is additional
Hg tester (pH, mg/l As: 0.036- mg/l corrective within the mitigation
Class C Ni Temp.) Cd: 0.008- 0.039 mg/l Cd = 0.01 actions if construction/ measures or
(Tributaries of Nitrate 0.0089 mg/l Cd: 0.009- mg/l needed operation area, pollution control
Gaas Inlet)) Grab Cr: 0.016-017 0.0099 mg/l Cr = 0.02 conduct facilities
sampling mg/l Cr: 0.018- mg/l adjustments/
and Pb: 0.08-0.089 0.019 mg/l Pb = 0.1 appropriate Review current
laboratory mg/l Pb: 0.09-0.099 mg/l corrective action design of
analysis Hg: 0.0032- mg/l Hg = 0.004 at identified pollution control
0.0035 mg/l mg/l facility. Revise/
394 | P a g e
Method Location
Ni: 0.800-0.899 Hg: 0.0036- Ni = 1 mg/l pollutant improve/ make
NO3-N: 11.2- 0.0039 mg/l NO3-N = 14 source. adjustments if
12.5 mg/l Ni: 0.900- mg/l necessary
0.999 mg/l
NO3-N: 12.6-
13.9 mg/l
Degradation TSS Class SC Class SC Class SC Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the
of water pH In-situ Monthl SLUP Area Pollution Part of TSS=80-89 mg/l TSS=90-99 TSS=100 source and source to source to identify
quality Oil & Grease measureme y Settling Control operating pH: 6.4-6.8 or mg/l mg/l identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
Color nt using monitor Ponds Officer cost 8.8-8.85 pH: 6.1-6.3 or pH: 6.0 (min) pollutant pollutant sources
Ammonia hand-held ing Oil and O&G: 8 - 8.9 8.86-8.9 or 9 (max) sources sources
(Effluent (NH3) water Water mg/l O&G: 9 – 9.9 O&G = 10 Provide
Nitrate quality Separator/s Color: 120-134 mg/l mg/l Conduct If the problem is additional
Class SC Gaas (NO3-N) tester (pH, Motorpool TCU Color: 135-149 Color=150 corrective within the mitigation
Inlet) Ni Temp.) Area NH3: 0.40-0.44 TCU TCU actions if construction/ measures or
Cd mg/l NH3: 0.45- NH3 = 0.5 needed operation area, pollution control
Pb Grab NO3-N:16-17.9 0.49 mg/l mg/l conduct facilities
Hg sampling mg/l NO3-N: 18- NO3-N = 20 adjustments/
Benzo(a)pyr and Ni: 0.240-0.269 19.9 mg/l mg/l appropriate Review current
ene laboratory Cd: 0.008- Ni: 0.270- Ni = 0.3 mg/l corrective action design of
Surfactants analysis 0.0089 mg/l 0.299 mg/l Cd = 0.01 at identified pollution control
(MBAS) Pb: 0.08-0.089 Cd: 0.009- mg/l pollutant facility. Revise/
mg/l 0.0099 mg/l Pb = 0.1 source. improve/ make
Hg: 0.0032- Pb: 0.09-0.099 mg/l adjustments if
0.0035 mg/l mg/l Hg = 0.004 necessary
Benzo(a)pyrene Hg: 0.0036- mg/l
: 2.4-2.6 mg/l 0.0039 mg/l Benzo(a)pyr
MBAS: 12-13.4 Benzo(a)pyren ene = 3 mg/l
mg/l e: 2.7-2.9 mg/l MBAS = 15
MBAS: 13.5- mg/l
14.9 mg/l
395 | P a g e
Method Location
BOD Class C Class C Class C Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the
Cl In-situ Monthl All Pollution Part of BOD: 5.6-6.2 BOD: 6.3-6.9 BOD = 7 source and source to source to identify
Color measureme y freshwater Control operating mg/l mg/l mg/l identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
DO nt using quality Officer cost Cl:280-314 mg/l Cl: 315-349 Cl = 350 pollutant pollutant sources
Fecal hand-held stations Color: 60-66 mg/l mg/l sources sources
Coliform water TCU Color: 67-69 Color = 75 Provide
NO3-N quality SW4, SW6, DO: 5.6-6.0 TCU TCU Conduct If the problem is additional
Phosphate tester (pH, SW7 mg/l DO: 5.1-5.5 DO = 5 mg/l corrective within the mitigation
pH Temp., DO) F.Coli: 160-179 mg/l minimum actions if construction/op measures or
Temp. MPN/100ml F.Coli: 180-199 F.Coli = 200 needed eration area, pollution control
Degradation TSS Grab NO3-N: 5.6-6.2 MPN/100ml MPN/100ml conduct facilities
of water O&G sampling mg/l NO3-N: 6.3-6.9 NO3-N = 7 adjustments/
quality As and Phosphate: 0.4- mg/l mg/l appropriate If source is not
Cd laboratory 0.44 Phosphate: Phosphate = corrective action project
Freshwater / Cr(VI) analysis pH: 7.1-7.4 or 0.45-0.49 mg/l 0.5 mg/l at identified construction,
Surface Water Pb 8.8-8.85 pH: 6.6-7.0 or pH: 6.5 or pollutant inform MMT
(Ambient) Mn Temp: 26.2- 8.86-8.9 9.0 source. regarding
Hg 27°C or 28.9- Temp: 25.1- Temp. 25-31 possible source
Class C Ni 29.8 26.1 or 29.9- °C for the group’s
Tributaries of TSS: 64-72 mg/l 30.9 °C TSS = 80 investigation and
San Jose River O&G: 1.5-1.7 TSS: 73-79 mg/l coordination with
& mg/l mg/l O&G = 2 LGU
Gaas Inlet As:0.015-0.017 O&G: 1.8-1.9 mg/l
mg/l mg/l As = 0.02
Cd:0.004- As:0.018-0.019 mg/l
0.0044 mg/l mg/l Cd = 0.005
Cr: 0.008-0.009 Cd: 0.0045- mg/l
mg/l 0.0049 mg/l Cr = 0.01
Pb:0.04-0.044 Cr: 0.009-0.01 mg/l
mg/l mg/l Pb = 0.05
Mn: 0.16-0.17 Pb:0.045- mg/l
mg/l 0.049 mg/l Mn = 0.20
Hg:0.0006- Mn: 0.18-0.19 mg/l
0.0079 mg/l mg/l Hg = 0.001
mg/l
396 | P a g e
Method Location
Ni: 0.16-0.17 Hg:0.0008- Ni = 0.20
Ni: 0.18-0.19
mg/l
BOD Class SC Class SC Class SC Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the
Cl In-situ Monthl All Pollution Part of Color: 60-66 Color: 67-69 Color = 75 source and source to source to identify
Color measureme y freshwater Control operating TCU TCU TCU identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
DO nt using quality Officer cost DO: 5.6-6.0 DO: 5.1-5.5 DO = 5 mg/l pollutant pollutant sources
Fecal hand-held stations mg/l mg/l minimum sources sources
Coliform water F.Coli: 160-179 F.Coli: 180-199 F.Coli = 200 Provide
NO3-N quality SW1, SW2, MPN/100ml MPN/100ml MPN/100ml Conduct If the problem is additional
Phosphate tester (pH, SW3, SW5 NO3-N: 8 - 8.9 NO3-N: 9 – 9.9 NO3-N = 10 corrective within the mitigation
Degradation pH Temp., DO) mg/l mg/l mg/l actions if construction/op measures or
of water Temp. Phosphate: 0.4- Phosphate: Phosphate = needed eration area, pollution control
quality TSS Grab 0.44 0.45-0.49 mg/l 0.5 mg/l conduct facilities
O&G sampling pH: 7.1-7.4 or pH: 6.6-7.0 or pH: 6.5(min) adjustments/
Freshwater / As and 7.4-7.64 7.65-8.49 or 8.5(max) appropriate If source is not
Surface Water Cd laboratory Temp: 26.2- Temp: 25.1- Temp. 25-31 corrective action project
(Ambient) Cr(VI) analysis 27°C or 28.9- 26.1 or 29.9- °C at identified construction,
Pb 29.8 30.9 °C TSS = 80 pollutant inform MMT
Class SC Mn TSS: 64-72 mg/l TSS: 73-79 mg/l source. regarding
Main Hg O&G: 2.4-2.6 mg/l O&G = 3 possible source
Gaas Inlet Ni mg/l O&G: 2.7-2.9 mg/l for the group’s
As:0.015-0.017 mg/l As = 0.02 investigation and
mg/l As:0.018-0.019 mg/l coordination with
Cd:0.004- mg/l Cd = 0.005 LGU
0.0044 mg/l Cd: 0.0045- mg/l
Cr: 0.04-0.044 0.0049 mg/l Cr = 0.05
mg/l Cr: 0.045- mg/l
Pb:0.04-0.044 0.049 mg/l Pb = 0.05
mg/l Pb:0.045- mg/l
Mn: 0.32-0.35 0.049 mg/l Mn = 0.40
mg/l mg/l
397 | P a g e
Method Location
Hg:0.0016- Mn: 0.36-0.39 Hg = 0.002
Ni: 0.048-0.053 Hg:0.0018- Ni = 0.06
Ni: 0.054-
0.059 mg/l
Cl Class A Class A Class A Investigate the Investigate the Investigate the

Color In-situ Monthl GW1 Pollution Part of source and source to source to identify
Fecal measureme y Control operating Cl:200-224 mg/l Cl: 225-249 Cl = 250 identify possible identify possible possible pollutant
Coliform nt using Deep well Officer cost Color: 40-44 mg/l mg/l pollutant pollutant sources
NO3-N hand-held to be TCU Color: 45-49 Color = 50 sources sources
pH water constructed F.Coli <1.1 TCU TCU Provide
TSS quality if any MPN/100ml F.Coli <1.1 F.Coli <1.1 Conduct If the problem is additional
O&G tester (pH, NO3-N: 5.6-6.2 MPN/100ml MPN/100ml corrective within the mitigation
As Temp.) mg/l NO3-N: 6.3-6.9 NO3-N = 7 actions if construction/op measures or
Cd pH: 7.1-7.4 or mg/l mg/l needed eration area, pollution control
Degradation
Cr(VI) Grab 7.4-7.64 pH: 6.6-7.0 or pH: 6.5(min) conduct facilities
of water
Pb sampling TSS: 40-44 mg/l 7.65-8.49 or 8.5(max) adjustments/
quality
Mn and O&G: 0.80-0.89 TSS: 45-49 TSS = 50 appropriate If source is not
Hg laboratory mg/l mg/l mg/l corrective action project
Groundwater
Ni analysis As:0.008-0.009 O&G: 0.90- O&G = 1 at identified construction,
mg/l 0.99 mg/l mg/l pollutant inform MMT
Class A
Cd:0.0024- As:0.009-0.01 As = 0.01 source. regarding
0.0026 mg/l mg/l mg/l possible source
Cr: 0.008-0.009 Cd: 0.0027- Cd = 0.003 for the group’s
mg/l 0.0029 mg/l mg/l investigation and
Pb:0.008-0.009 Cr: 0.009-0.01 Cr = 0.01 coordination with
mg/l mg/l mg/l LGU
Mn: 0.16-0.17 Pb:0.009-0.01 Pb = 0.01
mg/l mg/l mg/l
Hg:0.0006- Mn: 0.18-0.19 Mn = 0.20
Ni: 0.016-0.017 Hg:0.0008- Hg = 0.001
398 | P a g e
Method Location
Ni: 0.018- Ni = 0.02
0.019 mg/l mg/l
Increase in Ambient TSP and Quarter Project Project PhP 50,000 ≥75% of ≥ 90% of NAAQS (in Monitor levels Check for Implement
ambient air TSP, PM10, PM10 – ly or as boundary, proponen per quarter ambient ambient µg/Nm3) and determine complaints from corrective
levels SO2, and High frequen nearest t/contract standard. EQPL standard. NO2 = 260 prevailing wind residence measures to
NO2 volume/gra t as residences, or (Alert Mininum EQPL (Action CO = 35 flows and other Inform reduce levels to
vimetric necessa and in µg/Nm3) minimum in TSP = 300 meteorological management in within NAAQS
SO2 – ry downwind NO2 = 195 µg/Nm3) PM10 = 200 condition case the
Pararosalin of CO = 26.3 NO2 = 234 SO2=340 Identify possible proposed
e prevailing TSP = 225 CO = 31.5 sources of high project is the
NO2- Griess wind flows PM10 = 150 TSP = 270 ambient possible source
Saltzman SO2 =255 PM10 = 180 concentrations of high ambient
Method SO2 =306 levels based on
meteorological
condition
necessa If operation community prior
ry is 24 hrs, to construction
50 dBA activities that
(evening/ produce very
morning) high noise levels
45 dBA (e.g., pile
(nighttime) driving)
Conduct noise
assessment to
mitigate noise
source that
contribute to
399 | P a g e
Method Location
higher noise
levels
Employment No. of HR Semi- Mine/ Proponen Manifestati 20% decrease 30% decrease 50% Verify and Conduct Creation of
opportunities workers Manpower Annual Impact t through ons/ decrease validate report investigation employment
employed Monitoring Communiti HR observation Implement Take action to opportunities
from the Report es Manager s during measures to address negative
impact FGDs/ KIIs/ and CRO monitoring mitigate impact
communities Community that negative impact
from came from
communitie
s
Business No. of Ocular/File Semi- Impact Proponen Manifestati 20% decrease 30% decrease 50% Verify and Conduct Increase business
opportunities business d Annual Communiti t through ons/ decrease validate report investigation opportunities
established Observatio es CRO observation Implement Take action to
due to the ns Gather s during measures to address negative
construction secondary monitoring mitigate impact
data from that will negative impact
Barangay/ result to
Municipal negative
LGUs FGDs/ impact
KIIs/
Community
Consultatio
n
Increase in No. of road/ Gather data Semi- Impact Proponen Manifestati 20% increase 30% increase 50% Verify and Conduct Firm
traffic hazards traffic from Annual Communiti t through ons/ increase validate report investigation implementation
accidents Barangay/ es CRO observation Implement of Safety and
Municipal s during measures to Health Program
400 | P a g e
Method Location
LGUs FGDs/ monitoring mitigate Take action to
KIIs/ that will negative impact address negative
Community result to impact
ns impact
Improved No. of Gather Annual Impact Proponen Manifestati 20% decrease 30% decrease 50% Verify and Conduct Improve services
services and Community secondary Communiti t through ons/ decrease validate report investigation and community
community Developmen data from es CRO observation Implement Take action to development
development t Programs/ Barangay/ s during measures to address negative potential by
potential Projects/ Municipal monitoring mitigate impact coordinating with
Activities LGUs and that will negative impact LGU and other
implemente beneficiarie result to concern
d and No. of s FGDs/ negative government
beneficiaries KIIs/ impact agency
Community
Consultatio
ns
Generation of LGU Income Gather data Semi- Impact Proponen Manifestati 20% decrease 30% decrease 50% Verify and Conduct Communicate
additional (taxes) aside from Annual Communiti t through ons/ decrease validate report investigation with LGU and
revenue for from IRA Barangay/ es CRO observation Implement Take action to discuss the
the Local Municipal s during mitigate measures to address negative possible reason
Government LGUs FGDs/ monitoring negative mitigate impact for the sudden
KIIs/ that will impact negative impact decrease in tax
Community result to payments.
ns impact
Final Rehabilitation/Decommissioning Phase
Decommissioni Generation of Volume of Record Monthl Within the SMC Minimal Accumulation Accumulated Wastes Proper Regular audits Immediate
ng of Crushing solid and solid and keeping of y project site through cost of domestic waste become become segregation and hauling and
Plant/ hazardous hazardous generated PCO/ wastes, scraps hazard to both toxic or Appropriate maintenance of diposal of
Equipment wastes waste solid and Contracto etc. within the vehicle and serve as labeling of waste accumulated
/Closure of generated hazardous r project site employees breeding waste management wastes
operation/ waste, ground for containers system For hazardous
Rehabilitation mode of pests, which wastes, hauling
401 | P a g e
Method Location
of remaining disposal can be a Implementation and treatment via
open areas and volume vector for of good DENR accredited
disposed or infectious housekeeping transporter/treat
recycled disease er
Increase in Ambient TSP and Quarter Project Project PhP 50,000 ≥75% of ≥ 90% of NAAQS (in Monitor levels Check for Implement
ambient air TSP, PM10, PM10 – ly or as boundary, proponen per quarter ambient ambient µg/Nm3) and determine complaints from corrective
levels SO2, and High frequen nearest t/contract standard. EQPL standard. NO2 = 260 prevailing wind residence measures to
NO2 volume/gra t as residences, or (Alert Mininum EQPL (Action CO = 35 flows and other Inform reduce levels to
vimetric necessa and in µg/Nm3) minimum in TSP = 300 meteorological management in within NAAQS
SO2 – ry downwind NO2 = 195 µg/Nm3) PM10 = 200 condition case the
Pararosalin of CO = 26.3 NO2 = 234 SO2=340 Identify possible proposed
e prevailing TSP = 225 CO = 31.5 sources of high project is the
NO2- Griess wind flows PM10 = 150 TSP = 270 ambient possible source
Saltzman SO2 =255 PM10 = 180 concentrations of high ambient
Method SO2 =306 levels based on
meteorological
condition
necessa If operation community prior
ry is 24 hrs, to construction
50 dBA activities that
(evening/ produce very
morning) high noise levels
45 dBA (e.g., pile
(nighttime) driving)
Conduct noise
assessment to
mitigate noise
source that
contribute to
higher noise
levels
402 | P a g e
Method Location
Temporary No. of HR Annual Mine/ Proponen Manifestati 20% decrease 30% decrease 50% Verify and Conduct Creation of
increase in workers Manpower Impact t through ons/ decrease validate report investigation employment
employment employed Monitoring Communiti HR observation Implement Take action to opportunities
opportunities from the Report es Manager s during measures to address negative
followed by a impact FGDs/ KIIs/ and CRO monitoring mitigate impact
decrease communities Community that negative impact
from came from
communitie
s
Possible No. of Ocular/File Annual Impact Proponen Manifestati 20% decrease 30% decrease 50% Verify and Conduct Provision of
decline in business d Communiti t through ons/ decrease validate report investigation livelihood
economic affected due Observatio es CRO observation Implement Take action to programs prior to
activities to closure ns Gather s during measures to address negative closure
data from monitoring mitigate impact
Barangay/ that will negative impact
Municipal result to
LGUs FGDs/ negative
KIIs/ impact
Community
Consultatio
ns
Disturbance Volume of Ocular/File Annual Impact Proponen Manifestati Incident Report Complaint Implement Verify and Conduct Disturbance and
and generated d Communiti t through ons/ on negative received on measures to validate report investigation generation of
generation of waste Observatio es the observation impact the negative mitigate Implement Take action to solid waste due
solid waste properly ns Gather Environm s during impact negative measures to address negative to
due to disposed data from ent monitoring impact mitigate impact decommissioning
decommissio Barangay/ Officer that will negative impact activities
ning activities Municipal and CRO result to
LGUs FGDs/ negative
KIIs/ impact
Community
403 | P a g e
Method Location
Consultatio
ns
Change in No. of Gather Annual Impact Proponen Manifestati Incident Report Complaint Implement Verify and Conduct Change in
socio/commu implemente secondary Communiti t through ons/ on negative received on measures to validate report investigation socio/community
nity d data from es CRO observation impact the negative mitigate Implement Take action to development
development Community Barangay/ s during impact negative measures to address negative benefits
benefits Developmen Municipal monitoring impact mitigate impact
t Programs/ LGUs and that will negative impact
Projects/ Beneficiarie result to
Activities s FGDs/ negative
continuously KIIs/ impact
managed or Community
sustained by Consultatio
the ns
beneficiaries
Change in the Monitor Gather data Semi- Impact Proponen Manifestati Incident Report Complaint Implement Verify and Conduct Change in the
revenue decrease in from Annual Communiti t through ons/ on negative received on measures to validate report investigation revenue
collection of LGU Income Barangay/ es CRO observation impact the negative mitigate Implement Take action to collection of the
the Local Municipal s during impact negative measures to address negative Local
Government/ LGUs FGDs/ monitoring impact mitigate impact Government/
Possible KIIs/ that will negative impact Possible decrease
decrease in Community result to in Local
Local Consultatio negative Government
Government ns impact revenues
revenues
404 | P a g e
5.2 Multi-sectoral Monitoring Framework
Multi-sectoral monitoring for the project shall be based on the guidelines/requirements of the
Revised Procedural Manual for DENR Administrative Order 2003-30 (Implementing Rules and
Regulations of Presidential Decree No. 1586, Establishing the Philippine Environmental Impact
Statement System).
A Multi-partite Monitoring Team (MMT) will be established to assess and validate compliance
with the relevant environmental standards and shall be structured base on the new guidelines
stated in DAO 2017 - 15. The MMT will be composed by representatives of the following offices:
• Municipal Environment and and Natural Resources Officer (Chairman)

• Rural Health Unit
• Local Government Unit
• Non-Government Organization
• Locally recognized Community Leaders (maximum of two representatives)
The MMT shall have the following functions:
• Monitor, assess, and validate the project’s compliance as stated in the EIA Report, ECC,
and other relevant environmental standards
• Set-up project specific (location-based) environmental standards in accordance with
environmental standards identified above
• Prepare members of the MMT to handle monitoring activities through proper trainings
• Management and disposition of complaints formally filed against the project proponent
and its contractors
• Fiduciary management of funds allocated for the above purposes
As stated under the Philippine Environmental Impact Statement System (PEISS), MMTs are
organized to encourage public participation, to promote greater stakeholder vigilance and to
provide an appropriate check and balance mechanisms in the monitoring of project
implementation. The MMT is recommendatory to EMB. MMTs have the primary responsibility of
validation of Proponent’s environmental performance, with the following specific functions:
i. Validate project compliance with the conditions stipulated in the ECC and the EMP;
ii. Validate Proponent’s conduct of self-monitoring;
405 | P a g e
iii. Receive complaints, gather relevant information to facilitate determination of validity of

complaints or concerns about the project and timely transmit to the Proponent and EMB
recommended measures to address the complaint;
iv. Prepare, integrate and disseminate simplified validation reports to community
stakeholders;
v. Make regular and timely submission of MMT Reports based on the EMB-prescribed
format.
5.3 Contingent Liability and Rehabilitation
CLRF is an environmental guarantee fund mechanism to ensure just and timely compensation for
damages and progressive and sustainable rehabilitation for any adverse effect a mining operation
or activity may cause.
The CLRF shall be in the form of the Mine Rehabilitation Fund and the Mine Waste and Tailing
Fees as stipulated in the Mining Act and shall be administered by the CLRF Steering Committee.
5.3.1 Mine Rehabilitation Fund (MRF)
A Mine Rehabilitation Fund (MRF) shall be established and maintained by proponent as a

reasonable environmental deposit to ensure availability of funds for the satisfactory compliance
with the commitments and performance of the activities stipulated in the EPEP/AEPEP during
specific project phase.
The MRF shall be deposited as a Trust Fund in a Government depository bank and shall be used
for physical and social rehabilitation of areas and communities effected by mining activities and
for research on the social, technical and preventive aspects of rehabilitation.
The MRF shall be in two forms: Monitoring Trust Fund (MTF); and Rehabilitation Cash Fund (RCF).
5.3.2 Rehabilitation Cash Fund (RCF)
The Contractor/Permit Holder shall set up an RCF for a designated amount to ensure compliance
with the approved rehabilitation activities and schedules for specific mining project phase,
including research programs as defined in the EPEP/AEPEP. It shall be equivalent to ten percent
(10%) of the total amount needed to implement the EPEP or Five Million Pesos (P5,000,000.00),
whichever is lower. It shall be deposited as a Trust Fund in a mutually agreed Government
406 | P a g e
depository bank in four (4) equal quarterly deposits within fifteen (15) calendars days from the
beginning of each quarter of the first year following the approval of the EPEP.
In the event of withdrawals from RCF, the Contractor shall annually replenish the RCF so as to
maintain the minimum required amount.
5.4 Environmental Trust Fund (ETF)
ETF is guarantee instrument, which will be used to compensate aggrieved parties for any damages
to life or property, undertake community-based environmental programs and conduct
environmental research aimed at strengthening measures to prevent environmental damage and
to finance restoration and rehabilitation of environmental quality caused by the project. This
could be in the form of insurance, letters of credit, trust fund, other financial instruments and
other similar guarantee instruments.
407 | P a g e
Stagno Mining Corporation Social Development Plan and IEC Framework
6.0 SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT AND MANAGEMENT PLAN/FRAMEWORK (SDMP) AND IEC

FRAMEWORK
6.1 Indicative Social Development and Management Plan
The proposed project of Stagno Mining Corporation will provide social/community development
assistance to the identified communities which are Barangay Bayanihan, San Jose, Garcia, San
Antonio and General Aguinaldo. Some of the solutions to community problems identified by the
respondents such as employment, livelihood programs, capacity building, scholarship and
educational assistance, access to clean water, health programs, solid wastes management
program, values formation and other community needs shall be the core programs, projects and
activities of the company once it operates.
The proponent can replicate and enhance the community programs that are currently being
implemented by some mining companies operating in the area. The company shall ensure that
programs, projects and activities that will be identified shall not duplicate what other mining
companies are implementing or it shall be complementary, since majority of the project-impact
barangays are recipient of community development program of some mining companies.
The identified impact of the proposed project, will be addressed and compensated through the
implementation of social/community development projects through the Company’s CSR
Program. The results of the socio-economic assessment, perception survey, and focus group
discussion were considered in the development of social development framework. Table 125
presents the indicative social development framework to be implemented in relation to the
proposed project of Stagno Mining Company’s operation.
The participation of the impact communities, specifically the Barangay Councils, Sectoral
Organizations, Different Government Institutions, Businesses, and Industries is necessary for the
implementation of the indicative social development framework. Stagno Mining Corporation will
ensure partnership undertakings with the identified stakeholders.
408 | P a g e
Table 125 - Indicative Social Development Framework

Community Government Agency/
Community
Concerns Member Non-government Proponent Indicative Timeline Source of Fund
Beneficiary
Responsible Agency and Services
Livelihood and Employment
• Gender Responsive • Interested • Barangay • LGU Municipal • Community • Pre-construction • LGU-IRA/

Sustainable Livelihood Community officials Planning and Relations Officer Stagno
Program (Marginalized Residents – Development Office • Construction Mining
Sector: Women, Youth, Marginalized • Sectoral Corporation
Organizations • Impact Barangays • Operation
Fisherfolks, Farmers, Fisher Sector CSR Program
folks, Senior Citizens,
• Municipal Social
Physically Challenged
Worker Department
Persons or Persons with
(MSWD)
Disabilities)
• Municipal Public
• Employment Program: Job
Employment Services
Fairs
Office
• Skills training program: to
• TESDA
give local residents of impact
barangays the chance to • Cooperative
qualify and compete for Development
available employment Authority
opportunities during the
implementation of the • Local Department of
project or in other areas Labor and
Employment
Health Services
409 | P a g e

Community
Beneficiary
• Strengthening of
• Impact • Barangay• Municipal Health • Community • Pre-construction • LGU-
Community-Based Health
Barangays Officials Office (MHO) Relations Officer IRA/Stagno
Program • Construction Mining
• Capacity building of • Men, Women, • Municipal and • Barangay Health • Safety and Corporation
Children, Barangay Center Health Officer • Operation
Barangay Health Workers CSR Program
Youth, Senior Health Workers
• Disease awareness and Citizens, • Impact Barangays
prevention PWDs
• Regular medical check-up
• Provision of Medicines
• Medical and dental mission
• Support to the improvement
of health facilities
• Conduct of Free Medical
Check-up
Education Assistance
• Adopt-a-School Program: • Public Schools • Barangay • Department of • Community • Pre-construction • LGU-

within the Officials Education (DepEd) Relations Officer IRA/Stagno
• Includes development/ Impact (specifically the • Construction Mining
improvement of school Barangays Council • Public Schools Corporation
facilities • Operation
Member for CSR Program
• Students, Education)
• Brigada Eskwela Teachers
410 | P a g e

Community
Beneficiary
• Provision of scholarship to
• Teachers/PTA
qualified students
• Provision of supplies and
materials and assistance to
academic/school activities
Public Infrastructure, Environment, and Sanitation
• Impact • Barangay • Municipal • Community • Pre-construction • LGU-

• Implementation of Solid Barangays Officials Environment and Relations Officer IRA/Stagno
Waste Management in (specifically the Natural Resources • Construction Mining
compliance with Republic Act Council Office (ENRO) • Mine Corporation
Environmental • Operation
9003 Member for CSR Program
Environment) • Municipal Engineer’s Protection and
• Improvement of existing Office Enhancement
barangay road (farm to Officer /
market road) and drainage Pollution Control
system Officer
• Provide assistance to
barangay project that deals
with improvement of infra-
commercial establishment
for the community
Road Safety and Protective Services
411 | P a g e

Community
Beneficiary
• Barangay
• Support for the Peace and • Impact Officials • Municipal Police • Community • Pre-construction • LGU –IRA/
Order Program of the Barangays • Barangay Peace Relations Officer Barangay
Barangay and Municipal LGU and Security • Municipal Engineer’s • Construction Official
Officers Office • Mine
• Partnership in the Environmental • Operation • Environment
implementation of Traffic • Municipal Disaster Protection and al
Management Program Risk Reduction and Enhancement Management
Management Office Officer / Program
• Emergency Response/ Pollution Control
Calamity Assistance Officer • Safety and
Health
• Safety Officer Program
Socio-Cultural Activities
• Barangay
• Provision of • Impact Officials • Municipal Social • Community • Pre-construction • LGU-
support/assistance to LGUs Barangays • Sectoral Welfare Relations Officer IRA/Stagno
in the conduct of activities Organization Development Office • Construction Mining
that strengthens community Corporation
• Municipal Planning • Operation
cohesiveness CSR Program
and Development
Office
412 | P a g e
6.2 Information and Education Campaign
Implementation of an intensive and consistent IEC Plan is the key to build a positive rapport with
the host barangay and municipality/city. Previously implemented IEC activities were part of the
SDMP. With the discussed policy changes, the IEC activities to be implemented by Stagno Mining
Corporation will be part of the continuous community relations work of the project to strengthen
its relationship with the host community parallel to the implementation of the SDMP P/P/As.
Collected information from the community signifies the need to strengthen the IEC
implementation of Stagno Mining Corporation. A more regular, consistent, and accessible line of
communication will be established between Stagno Mining Corporation and the host barangays.
The approach will be two-way, that will ensure feedback mechanism in every communication
activity. An open line of communication will be institutionalized that ensures the accessibility of
bringing community concerns to the attention of the company. Stagno Mining Corporation, on
its part, will communicate all efforts and actions in addressing community concerns, intervention
to avoid or mitigate negative impacts of the operations.
As part of the EIA process, an intensive IEC was also conducted through the conduct of Public
Scoping, Perception Survey and Focus Group Discussion.
The detailed IEC Campaign is presented in Table 126.
413 | P a g e
Table 126 - Information and Education Campaigns

IEC Schemes/ Indicative
Target Sector Identified as Major Topics of Concern
Strategy/ Information Medium Timeline and Indicative Cost
Needing Project IEC in Relation to the Project
Methods Frequency
• Local Government Units • Approval of the ECC • Intensive • Reproduction and • Prior to project • Cost of printing the
• Households and Businesses Amendments and information Distribution of the operation IEC materials
surrounding Stagno stipulated conditions dissemination approved ECC and EIS to • Cost of holding
Mining Corporation • Project description (i.e. on the the concerned LGUs consultation
• Local Non-Government/ project components, approved ECC • Print materials: Brochure meetings
Community Organizations size/coverage and EIS about the approved
• Relevant National/ Regional • Environmental Impact • Consultation- project
Government Agencies Study Meetings • Audio-Visual Presentations
• Project affected • Concerns on the daily • Two-way verbal
communities operations of Stagno communication and
Mining Corporation action report
• Local Government Units • Presentation of project • Printed • Print Materials: Posters or • During project • Cost of printing the
• Households and Businesses activities in relation to information project bulletin operation IEC materials
surrounding Stagno the operation of the about the • Audio-Visual Presentations • Cost of holding
Mining Corporation proposed project project updates • Two-way verbal consultation
• Local Non-Government/ • Discussion on predicted and posting at communication and meetings
Community Organizations impact and mitigation impact action report
• Project affected plan barangays
communities • Gathering of community bulletin board
issues and concerns on or information
the ongoing operation of centers
Stagno Mining • Consultation-
Corporation meetings
• Reporting of results of
project and monitoring
414 | P a g e

Methods Frequency
• Local Government Units • Presentation of project • Printed • Print Materials: Posters/ • During • Cost of printing the
• Barangay Councils and activities in relation to information project bulletin/ operations IEC materials
Sangguniang Bayan the operations about the newsletter • Cost of holding
• Local Non-Government/ • Gathering of community project updates • Audio-Visual Presentations consultation
Community Organizations issues and concerns on and posting at • Two-way verbal meetings
the on-going operation impact communication and
of Stagno Mining barangays action report
Corporation bulletin board
• Dissemination of the or information
Corporate Social centers
Responsibility Programs, • Consultation-
possible partnership for meetings
the implementation and
reporting of
accomplishments
• Dissemination of program
implementation and
accomplishment on the
Environmental
Management Plan
• Dissemination of program
implementation and
accomplishment of
Occupational Safety and
Health
• Quarterly reporting of
results MMT monitoring
415 | P a g e

Methods Frequency
• Local Government Units • Presentation • Printed • Print Materials: Posters/ • During • Cost of printing the
• Households and Businesses decommissioning and information project bulletin/ Decommissioni IEC materials
surrounding Stagno closure plan about the newsletter ng and Closure • Cost of holding
Mining Corporation • Provision of updates on project updates • Audio-Visual Presentations Phase consultation
• Local Non-Government/ the decommissioning and posting at • Two-way verbal meetings
Community Organizations and closure activities impact communication and
• Relevant National/ Regional • Gathering of community barangays action report
Government Agencies issues and concerns on bulletin board
• Barangay Councils and the decommissioning or information
Sangguniang Bayans and closure activities centers
• Project affected • Reporting of updates on • Consultation-
communities the monitoring of meetings
decommissioning and
closure activities
416 | P a g e
Stagno Mining Corporation Decommissioning/Rehabilitation Policy
7.0 DECOMMISSIONING / ABANDONMENT / REHABILITATION POLICY
7.1 Final Mine Rehabilitation Plan
Consistent with the basic policy of the State to assure the availability, sustainability and equitable
distribution of the country's natural resources, the Philippine Government adopts the policy that
mining activities shall be managed in a technically, financially, socially, culturally and environmentally
responsible manner to promote the general welfare of the country. One of objectives of this policy
is the establishment of a functional post-disturbance land use capability.
Moreover, remediation and rehabilitation of abandoned mines shall be accorded top priority to
address the negative impacts of past mining activities. This is through protection and conservation
of environment by identification of appropriate rehabilitation and mitigating measures per project
component to inhibit and/or prevent any possible risks or adverse impacts that could endanger
human and its environment.
Listed below are the major objectives of Final Mine Rehabilitation Plan:
• Rehabilitate/re-vegetate all the disturbed areas within the areas affected by mining
operations by reshaping/re-contouring affected areas prior to re-vegetation;
• Progressively rehabilitate the area to a condition agreed/suggested by the community during
the stakeholder consultation;
• Minimize long term visual impacts due to the inactivity of the mine site by employing effective
mitigation and measures creating landforms with vegetation compatible with the surrounding
thus establishing a functional post-disturbance land use capability;
• Eliminate safety and health risks of the inactive mine site to the surrounding communities;
• Removal and disbandment of mill plant to avert possible collapse of the facility; and
• Provide the estimated cost that will be incurred from the implementation of the identified
rehabilitation and/or decommissioning strategies and the consequent final land use.
Table 127 - Remaining Areas for Final Mine Rehabilitation

Disturbed EPEP FMR/DP
Disturbed Areas
Area (Ha) Period Period
A. Mining Area 103.66 99.50 4.16
B. Support Facilities (17.50 ha)
417 | P a g e
Disturbed EPEP FMR/DP

Disturbed Areas
Area (Ha) Period Period
1. Admin Complex (Office, BQ, Staff House, Warehouses, Donate
0.50
etc.)
2. Access/Haul Roads 6.00 Donate
3. Pier Stockyard 4.00 2 2
4. Waste Dump 1.00 1
5. Causeway Area & Fuel Depo 2.00 Donate
6. Mine Stockyard 4.00 2 2
B. Environmental Facilities (7.50 Ha) Donate
1. Siltation Ponds 6.00 6
2. Topsoil Stockpile 1.00 1
3. Nursery 0.50 Donate
Total 128.66 103.50 25.16
7.1.1 Rehabilitation Strategy
The proposed final land uses for each project component will determine the rehabilitation needed
for the Project. The area disturbed area will be cleared and revegetated. Involvement of the host
community will be a prime strategy to ensure the success of rehabilitation.
The preparation of the area will be done using heavy equipment such as dump trucks, loaders,
bulldozers. The final land configuration will incorporate road network to make as many areas
accessible as possible with provisions for drainage system.
The parameters considered in the rehabilitation plan to control erosion and sedimentation prior to
revegetation are the following:
1. Stabilization of the mine slope areas.

2. Spreading of top soil on the affected areas.
3. Introduction of self-sustaining vegetation (forest and agro-forest trees).
4. Construction/maintenance of drainage system.
5. Maintenance of nursery to meet the rehabilitation requirements.
418 | P a g e
7.2 Decommissioning Plan
Decommissioning is the transitional stage period between cessation of operations and actual closure
that begins near, or at, the cessation of production and ends with the removal of all unwanted
infrastructures9.
7.2.1 List of Facility that requires decommissioning
At the end of the minelife, the following are the facilities that will require decommissioning:
Table 128 - List of Facilities to Decommissioned

Disturbed
Facilities
Area (Ha)
A. Support Facilities
1. Admin Complex (Office, BQ, Staff House, Warehouses, etc.) 0.50
2. Access/Haul Roads 6.00
3. Pier Stockyard 4.00
4. Waste Dump 1.00
5. Causeway Area & Fuel Depo 2.00
6. Mine Stockyard 4.00
B. Environmental Facilities 0
1. Siltation Ponds 6.00
2. Topsoil Stockpile 1.00
3. Nursery 0.50
Total 25.00
9
Mine Closure Guidelines for Minerals Operations in Western Australia. The Chamber of Mines of
Western Australia, Inc. October 2000
419 | P a g e
8.0 INSTITUTIONAL PLAN FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION
The Project is projected to create employment for 101 regular employees. Total number of jobs may
increase up to 500 to accommodate contractual as well as personnel employed by sub-contractors of
the Project during peak mining and loading operations. As part of the company's commitment to the
community, it will require the service contractors to prioritize the hiring of qualified local applicants
from the Municipality of Libjo, Province of Dinagat Islands and the surrounding municipalities and
provinces.
The Mine Environmental Protection and Enhancement Office (MEPEO) will be established by the
company. It will spearhead and continue to oversee the implementation of all environmental impact
control programs and activities stipulated in this plan/program. The unit shall also take over-all
responsibility in implementing a formal environmental management system during the Project’s
operations and shall likewise play an important role in the implementation of the Final Mine
Rehabilitation and Decommissioning Plan.
The MEPEO shall implement the following:
• Plan and manage the implementation of the approved EPEP/AEPEP;

• Monitor and police compliance of Contractors on their implementation of provisions of the
EPEP and AEPEP;
• Monitor and evaluate the effectiveness of the mitigating and enhancement measures;
• Plan, propose and implement modifications or additional measures deemed necessary to
effectively protect the environment;
• Coordinate with relevant oversight agencies and other entities including the local government
units to ensure their effective participation in the implementation of the EPEP and AEPEP;
• Initiate, plan and implement rehabilitation and abandonment programs;
• Liaise with the Community Relations Officer (CRO) and the Mine Safety Personnel in creating
a holistic Safety and Health, Environmental and community relations program for the Project;
• Ensure compliance to the various Philippine environmental laws;
• Ensure the timely submission of pertinent reportorial requirements;
• Ensure the conduct of the Research proposed in this document; and
• Ensure the proper implementation of the FMRDP
Currently, the company designated Ms. Nelma Joy Monteveros as the MEPEO.
420 | P a g e
Figure 152 - Stagno Mining Corporation Table of Organization
421 | P a g e
422 | P a g e

Eis Fo Stagno Mining Corporation

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eis Fo Stagno Mining Corporation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT STATEMENT

MPSA 022-94-X Amended I

STAGNO MINING CORPORATION

1.7.3 Project Size .................................................................................................................... 26

3.2 Water Resource ............................................................................................................. 347

6.2 Information and Education Campaign ............................................................................ 413

Table 1 – Coordinates of MPSA No. 022-94-x (SMR) Amended I ..................................................... 2

Table 52 - Annual CO2e emissions during operations phase ........................................................ 256

Table 81 - Number of Registered Vehicles by Region, 2015 ........................................................ 299

Figure 21 - Stratigraphy of Dinagat Islands ................................................................................... 49

Annex A - Mineral Production Sharing Agreement (MPSA)

I. PROJECT FACT SHEET

Project Name Stagno Libjo Mining Project

Project Area 1,149.8301 hectares (MPSA Area)

Project Proponent STAGNO MINING CORPORATION

Contact Person YI HUNG LAM

II. PROCESS DOCUMENTATION

EIS Team Member Field of Expertise/Module Registration

EIS Team Member Field of Expertise/Module Registration

EIA Study Schedule and Area

The EIA study schedule is presented below:

Aspect Direct Impact Area

Conduct of Public Scoping

The residents of the five (5) Barangays were represented as follows:

Sectoral Community Organizations Representatives

Below are the major issues raised during the activity:

Issues/Concerns How the issue is address in the EIS/Public

III. BASELINE CHARACTERIZATION

Module Summary of Baseline Condition

Module Summary of Baseline Condition

Parameters tested at GW1 were found to be within Class A WQG except

Module Summary of Baseline Condition

On Benthic Component. Averaging the data from the four stations

Module Summary of Baseline Condition

On Fish Biomass. In terms of fish abundance, a total of 130 fishes was

For phytoplankton, a report of thirteen species from three water stations.

For macroinvertebrates, there were ten species from 7 identified families

Module Summary of Baseline Condition

IV. EIA SUMMARY

B. Risk and Uncertainties

Module Risk and Uncertainties Mitigating Measures

C. Summary of Key Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Plan

Activity Impact Enhancement/ Mitigating Measure Efficiency of Measures

Activity Impact Enhancement/ Mitigating Measure Efficiency of Measures

Activity Impact Enhancement/ Mitigating Measure Efficiency of Measures

Erosion and subsequent siltation of water

Activity Impact Enhancement/ Mitigating Measure Efficiency of Measures

Activity Impact Enhancement/ Mitigating Measure Efficiency of Measures

Activity Impact Enhancement/ Mitigating Measure Efficiency of Measures

Activity Impact Enhancement/ Mitigating Measure Efficiency of Measures

Activity Impact Enhancement/ Mitigating Measure Efficiency of Measures

1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Tenement History

1.2 Project Location

Table 1 – Coordinates of MPSA No. 022-94-x (SMR) Amended I

Parcel 1 Technical Description

Parcel 2 Technical Description

Figure 1 - Location Map

Figure 2 - Tenement Map Stagno Mining Corporation

Figure 3 - Parcel 1 Drone Shot

Figure 4 - Parcel 2 Drone Shot

1.2.1 Project Accessibility

1.2.2 Impact Areas

Table 2 – Summary of Impacts to the Impact Area